Thucydides, book 3

eepmemes τυ ον
ites

ha fe Hadid}

-- ᾿ς ἡ» “ΟΡ

a 5. ἀρ τ»... aa

a : we ets eee —_

: ἐπ πο θυ OO es ra pert

| ae
ὃ

παν ----ος
\

/ passe, | A383 1909
ft Spee ee eos

f cALL NUMBER ae rap VOL Ρ

sae | |
ι ι a Δ 8 3. |

OVE
ἘΞ

τς

t

pO NOT RE M

TEIN ἔν».
= ef Ὁ
Bob Ὲ

=i de

aon Neen! ΕΞ
ὙΠ aN cine

Research Library

s BOOK CARD
a)

om

Te

University

Uy
υ
=i u
ῶ.

tea

Bee eta soir eke) A ae 24

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles :
This book is DUE on the last
date stamped below.

REC'D LD-[RL
αἵ!
ugg YUN 1972

ΟΝ 4 21972

mr APR1B 198]

\@ED LD-URL

meer 1983

MAR 24 1987

10m-7,'70 (N8464s8 )-Z-53

᾿
Pe re ᾿

si

νυ.
φ- Mi

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation

https://archive.org/details/thucydidesbook300thuciala

Classical Series.

THUCYDIDES
BOOK III

A

MACMILLAN AND CO., Limitrp
LONDON + BOMBAY + CALCUTTA - MADRAS
MELBOURNE

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK + BOSTON + CHICAGO
DALLAS + SAN FRANCISCO
THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Lp.
TORONTO

“ie
:
= é
Ὁ
ἮΝ bs
7
7
a ate Ge
ce:
. Seer ὦ

ὙΠΟ ᾿
ἌΝ

. ἊΣ

τα

δ": vw

; te

τ

a i

il

eats? tn RN =
| (=

&TOWN

p= ae Bi NS
= Ai
ae

Ds

mn ὺ Ss

77}
y=

: Ay ===
¥ = NY:
ἘΞ SCALE OF |
= ο % Ye
Stanfords ‘Geog! Estab* london

THUCYDIDES

BOOK ΙΝ

EDITED BY

E. C. MARCHANT, M.A.

SUB-RECTOR OF LINCOLN COLLEGE, OXFORD

MACMILLAN AND CO.,, LIMITED
ST. MARTIN’S STREET, LONDON
1918

94499

First Edition 1909
Reprinted 1918

.
ιν -
τς ἘΠ τ ae
© - c
<s ἜΤ Ἢ ‘
. Ε re
4 Booth get
ake
ae γε Ὁ
ᾧ ὃς ce ΓΞ
ε ἢ ,
“oY ὦ Sere

Pred

ἢ ΚΝ

PREFACE

TWENTY years ago I hoped to edit five books of
Thucydides. I am glad that I have been able
to do so; and now that I have finished, I
wish to acknowledge the unfailing courtesy and
patience of the publishers.

My chief purpose in this volume has been
to enable readers to follow the narrative of the
four great episodes contained in Book III.
without difficulty. To read the account of
them with the aid of a good map and the
necessary explanations is an interesting and
even exciting experience.

My obligations to the following books are
very great :—Busolt’s History, and for Lesbos,
R. Koldewey’s Die antiken Bauwerke der Insel L.
and W. Herbst’s Der <Abfall Mytilenes; for
Corcyra, B. Schmidt’s Korkyraeische Studien ; for
Plataea, H. Wagner’s Die Belagerung von Plataeae
and G. B. Grundy’s The Topography of the Battle

vii

vill PREFACE

of Plataea; for Acarnania and Aetolia, Ober-
hummer’s Akarnanien and Woodhouse’s Aetolia.

The list of readings at the end of the Intro-
duction will show the small extent to which I
have felt it necessary to differ from Mr. Stuart
Jones in textual matters. A few conjectures are
appended to the list.

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION—
I. Table of Principal Events
II. The Four Great Episodes :—

1. The revolt of Lesbos .
2. The escape from Plataea
3. The troubles in Corcyra

4. Demosthenes in Aetolia and Amphilochia .

III. Style and Diction
IV. The Speeches
V. Manuscripts and Text .
VI. Differences of Reading and Conjectures

TEXT
Notes

InDExX—Greek
English

ix

PAGE

xi

INTRODUCTION

I. TABLE OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS

428.

Spring.
June.

July.

August.

September.

October.
427.
Jan. or Feb.
May.

Sedition rife in Lesbos (c. 2).

Athenian Embassy sent to Lesbos.

Athenian fieet of 40 ships sent to Lesbos
(6, 3).

The Peloponnesians invade Attica (c. 1).

Lesbos revolts.

The Athenians establish two camps at
Lesbos (c. 6).

At the Olympic games the Lesbians
become allies of Sparta (c. 15).

The Peloponnesians prepare to invade
Attica again, but the plan is frustrated
by the dispatch of a fleet of 100 ships
from Athens (c. 16).

The Mytileneans attack Methymna and
other places (c. 18).

Paches sent from Athens to Lesbos with
1000 hoplites.

Circumvallation of Mytilene.

Escape of 212 besieged Plataeans (c. 20).
A Peloponnesian fleet of 42 ships under
Alcidas sent to Lesbos (c. 26).

xi b

xii

June.
July.

August.

September.

426.

June.

August.

Autumn.

425.
Winter.

Feb, or March.

INTRODUCTION

The Peloponnesians invade Attica (c. 27).

Fall of Mytilene.

Nicias seizes the island of Minoa (c. 51).

Fall of Plataea (c. 52).

Faction-fighting in Corcyra (cc. 70-81).

Embassy from Leontini to Athens (c. 86).

Laches sent to Sicily with a fleet of 20
ships.

Demosthenes sent round the Peloponnese
with a fleet of 30 ships (c. 91).

The Spartans establish the colony of
Heraclea.

Demosthenes invades Aetolia.

The Aetolians send to Sparta for assistance

Demosthenes defeated in Aetolia. The
fleet returns to Athens (c. 98).

Eurylochus with a Peloponnesian force
marches to the aid of the Aetolians
(c. 100).

Battle of Olpae, and slaughter of the
Ambraciots.

Demosthenes returns to Athens.

Purification of Delos (c. 104).

Embassy from the Siceliots to Athens
(ὃ. 115).

Eruption of Mt. Etna (c. 116).

II. Tor Four Great EPISODES

1. THE REVOLT OF LESBOS

AT the time of the outbreak of war between
Athens and Sparta, only two among the islands of
the Aegean retained the status that had originally
belonged to all the states which formed the Delian
confederacy in 476 B.c. Only Chios and Lesbos
were free and independent allies of Athens.

The chief city of Lesbos was Mytilene, on the
east coast. It was governed by an oligarchy, which,
until a few years before the war, had remained
outwardly loyal to the alliance with Athens. The
city was powerful and prosperous: it possessed at
~ least fifty ships of war: it had gained a commanding
position in the island, so much so that the towns
Antissa, Eresus, and Pyrrha were its dependencies ;
only Methymna, which also possessed ἃ fleet,
remained outside its influence. The oligarchs who
controlled its policy viewed with apprehension the
advance of Athenian power in the Aegean ; and they
were on the look-out for a favourable moment to
break with Athens and join Sparta. An attempt
to carry out this design had been made already
some two years before the war broke out, but the
appeal to Sparta had met with an unfavourable

response. The outbreak of the Peloponnesian war
; xiii

xiv INTRODUCTION

must have been a powerful incentive to the oligarchs
to renew their efforts. They strengthened their
walls, built ships, closed their harbours, sent to
Pontus to buy corn and hire archers. They even
tried to absorb the governments of the other Lesbian
cities, and to establish their supremacy over the
whole island.

These measures were encouraged not only by
Sparta, but by the Boeotians, who probably wanted
to prevent Athens from sending relief to Plataea.

The narrative of the siege of Mytilene is easy to
follow, once the leading features of the topography
of the city are understood.

1. λιμένες (cc. 2,2; 3,6; 6,1). The Acropolis
and a small part of the city lay on a little island or
rather peninsula on the east coast ; this peninsula was
divided from the mainland by a channel or Euripus
—which is now silted up, and apparently was not
navigable in 428 Β.0.1 The larger and newer part
of the city lay on the mainland. The channel formed
a connecting link between the two harbours. The
northern harbour was the principal one (cf. ¢. 4, 2)
and was included in the city by prolonging the ends
of the city walls where they ran down to the coast,
both on the acropolis and on the mainland side, far
out to sea (cf. c. 2, 2). The works were incomplete
when the siege began; and the southern harbour,
which is the one now in use, does not seem to have
been enclosed at all at that date. This southern
harbour, then, was outside the city.

1 Diodorus xiii. 79. 6, and Xen. Hell. i. 6. 22 show that the
Euripus was navigable in 406 B.c. From the narrative of the
siege, I should judge that this was not so in 428 B.c. ‘The canal,’
says Tozer, ‘was a natural one, but was afterwards artificially

improved.’ This improvement may lave been carried out soon
after the siege.

THE REVOLT OF LESBOS XV

2. τείχη (c. 3,6). The acropolis was fortified, but
at the time of the siege the city-walls were incom-
plete. They were to run right round the city, both
on the land and on the sea side, and to terminate in
the harbours, so as to enable them to be closed at
need,

3. Μαλόεις ᾿Απόλλων (c. 3, 3, 6), ἡ Μαλέα
(c. 4,5). Maloeis appears to have been the name
of the low coast-line after you leave the city, at
the north-west of the northern harbour. The temple
seems to have lain at the northern extremity of this
strip of coast, in a little valley. The position is so
low that city and harbour cannot be overlooked
from it (cf. c. 3, 3). Malea has been identified as “ἃ
low promontory on this strip of coast, a suitable
position from which to keep a watch towards the
city and the northern harbour.

4. χαράδρα (c. 25, 1). This torrent-bed by
which Salaethus contrived to get into Mytilene is to
be identified in the modern stream of Alissida, which
flows at the south of the city and approaches at one
place within 150 yards of the ancient wall. It would
have been much more difficult for Salaethus to get
in from the north, where the main Athenian station
was, and the lines of Paches cannot have crossed
any stream on that side. Paches may well have
supposed that the Alissida was sufficient protection,
and may have omitted to build securely across it.
The route from Pyrrha naturally brings one out at
the head of the Bay of Iero, and thence through
the narrow valley of the Alissida.

As regards the Athenian dispositions, the follow-
ing points are to be observed-:—

(1) The first station of the fleet was at Malea, and
this continued to serve as the naval base (c. 6, 2).

xvi INTRODUCTION

The στρατόπεδον (c. 5, 2) was, of course, on the coast,
close by. Presently a part of the fleet was sent
round (περιορμισάμενοι, c. 6, 1) the peninsula, to
keep a watch on the southern harbour. At the
same time the northern στρατόπεδον was fortified,
and a second fortified camp was established on the
mainland on the coast, south-west of the southern
harbour.

(2) Paches landed at Malea. When it is said
that he built a single wall round the city (c. 18, 4),
the meaning is that he built it across the mainland
on the western side of the city, from coast to coast,
presumably from the northern to the southern
στρατόπεδον.

2, THE ESCAPE FROM PLATAEA

The siege of Plataea was begun in June 429 B.c.:
the town capitulated in August 427 B.c. The
garrison consisted of 400 Plataeans and 80 Athenians.
We do not know what the population amounted to,
but it was certainly small. We are expressly told
that in 431 the least able-bodied part of the popu-
lation had been removed to Athens. No attempt
had been made by Athens to relieve the garrison,
in spite of a promise of help couched in the most
solemn language. Doubtless the revolt of Lesbos,
encouraged by Sparta and Boeotia for the very
purpose, had tied the hands of Athens; but, apart
from the claims of honour and obligation, it might
not unnaturally be thought that the position of
Plataea, near the roads from Attica and the Megarid
to Thebes, was sufficiently important to demand
imperatively an effort on the part of Athens. It
must be that Athens, always open to invasion from

THE ESCAPE FROM PLATAEA xvii

the south, realized the impossibility of controlling
the roads into Boeotia and of striking at Boeotia
from that side. Unfortunately for Plataea, it bore
no relation to Athenian plans for the war. The
siege bulks very big in the pages of Thucydides ;
but it may be doubted whether Athenian politicians
thought it worth while to run a serious risk for the
sake of saving the little town. If it were relieved,
it must then be garrisoned; and nothing could
prevent the Boeotians and Peloponnesians from
gathering again to besiege it.!

The town was razed to the ground; and as the
account of Thucydides is lacking in topographical
detail, we do not know for certain exactly where on
the plateau now occupied with the ruins the town of
that time lay. This uncertainty, however, does not
seriously affect the account of the escape of the two
hundred and twelve (ce. 20 f.).

1. TO τεῖχος τῶν Π͵Ἕελοποννηςίων (cc. 21, 1 ;
22, 1, etc.). The double battlemented wall, about
a mile, probably, in circumference, was apparently
about 100 yards from the wall of the town.” The
roof of the wall, with its battlements and towers,
formed a continuous gallery, for there was a passage
(@ie8ec) through every tower, communicating with
the intervals (curtains, μεταπύργια) between every
pair of towers by means of small doors, The sun-
baked bricks of which the wall was built must have

1 It is suggested that, as a siege was a novelty in the war,
Thucydides selected it for full description, just as he describes the
στάσις in Coreyra as a specimen. But the complications of the
siege and the adventures of the garrison were, perhaps, reasons
strong enough to induce Thucydides, who certainly picks and
chooses among events, to select the episode for one of his large-
scale pictures.

2G. B. Grundy, Topography of the battle of Pl., and Ἡ,
Wagner, Die Belagerung von Pl., compared.

xviii INTRODUCTION

been of the standard square pattern, since the
besieged were able to calculate exactly the height
of the wall by counting the number of the courses
in it. The greater part of the wall was covered
with whitewash, made from the lime of Cithaeron ;
but the building had been carried on at various
points simultaneously by the soldiers, and some of
them had omitted the whitewash. From the indica-
tions of date given in the narrative, it is calculated
that the whole wall (περιτείχισμα) had been built in
about forty days (early autumn of 429 B.c.): no
doubt several thousands of the soldiers had been
employed in the building. When the work was
completed, the greater part of the Peloponnesian
forces had been withdrawn. Evidently the intention
was to starve the garrison into submission; and
for this purpose it was sufficient to leave a guard
(φύλακες) to man the wall. Thebes, too, was scarcely
two miles off; and it was arranged that, in case of
an emergency, assistance should be summoned from
there by signal (c. 22, 7). The portion of the guard
on duty slept in the space between the two faces of
the wall, the remainder were in camp outside the
wall; but, in case of an emergency, the men in
camp would, of course, hasten to the assistance of
the guard, every man to his post (c. 22, 5, 6).
From the men in camp, moreover, a picket of 300
men was specially told off to make for the point
where the danger seemed to be, the instant any
alarm was raised. It will be noticed from the con-
struction of the wall that, if you seized and held any
two towers with a few men, it would not be difficult
to effect an escape across the intervening space.

Two little points Thucydides has left to the
‘general intelligence, so to say, of the public. He

THE ESCAPE FROM PLATAEA xix

does not explain what the length of the ladders
would have to be in proportion to the ascertained
height of the wall—a Greek reader would under-
stand the business of hypotenuse and sides; nor
does he mention how the fugitives, having mounted
the wall at one side, got down again at the other.
But there is no need to suppose that they jumped!

2. τάφροι (cc. 22, 1; 23, 2, 3,4; 24, 1), There
was a ditch both within and without the wall of
circumvallation. It appears that the inner ditch
had not much water in it; no more, evidently, than
was easily forded if the ice on it gave way (cf. ο. 22,
1, 5 with ὁ. 23, 5). On the ‘other hand, the ditch
on the outer side was very full and difficult to cross.
The difference is natural, because the outer ditch
would receive the water brought down from the
northern slopes of Cithaeron. The bricks for build-
ing the wall were made of the clay dug out from the
ditches,

3. (a) ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουςα ὁδός, (0) ἡ én”
᾿Αθηνῶν ὁδός (c. 24, 1, 2). It is tolerably clear
that the Plataean fugitives left the town at the
NE corner, from which point the descent is some-
what steep to the plain.! They then turned to the
left, and struck the direct road from Plataea to
Thebes. A Theban party meanwhile was hurrying
off along the road that led from Plataea to the Oak’s
Heads Pass, and which joined the main road from

1 When Thucydides says that they ‘had the Chapel of Andro-
crates,’ the Plataean hero, ‘on the right,’ it must by no means be
assumed that they passed the Chapel. The statement is merely
an indication of the road taken. As Munro, J. of Hell. Stud.
1904, p. 158, rightly says, Thucydides means that they went by
the road that runs to the left of the Chapel, and not by that
which led into the main road from Megara to Thebes. For the
Chapel see Woodhouse, /. of //ell. Stud. 1898, p. 38.

xx INTRODUCTION

Thebes to Athens! They had, of course, chosen
the ordinary road from Plataea to Athens, which
they assumed that the fugitives had taken. After
the fugitives had gone two-thirds of a mile towards
Thebes, they turned off to the right that they might
join the road leading from Erythrae into the main
road at Hysiae and thence to the Oak’s Heads.
They, however, did not continue along the main
road from Hysiae and cross the pass, but ‘took to
the hills’ and so escaped to Athens.

3. THE TROUBLES IN CORCYRA

Two naval engagements had been fought between
the Corinthian and Corcyrean fleets near the islands
called Sybota in 433 B.c. Neither battle had a
decisive result; but. in the second the Corinthians
made over a thousand prisoners. The majority
were slaves, and were sold; but two hundred and
fifty were men of importance in Corcyra. These
men were treated with consideration in Corinth,
and every effort was made to win them over to the
Peloponnesian cause. What happened in Corcyra
between this time and the date of the events re-
corded in 111. 70-81 we do not know. Thucydides
mentions Corcyrean ships as forming part of the
Athenian navy ; but it is apparent that the defensive
alliance formed with Athens was not interpreted by
Corcyra as imposing on her an obligation to put
forth any great effort for the assistance of her ally.
During the first years of the war the Peloponnesians
were, of course, too weak at sea to attempt to force

1 Tf at Eleutherae, the name Oak’s Heads, as Munro /.c. suggests,
must have covered more than the Eleutherae Pass.

THE TROUBLES IN CORCYRA XXxi

Corcyra to abandon her alliance with Athens. Even
if the island remained passive, the friendship of
Corcyra was very precious to the side that enjoyed
it; for the island is the half-way house, as it were,
in the ‘coasting voyage’ to Italy and Sicily; her
navy was strong; her power on the opposite main-
land was great.

How long the prisoners remained at Corinth we ,
do not know. But well before 428 B.c. the purpose
of Corinth had been so far achieved that the men
undertook, in return for their liberty, to induce
their fellow-citizens to change sides. The prisoners
belonged to the aristocracy of Corcyra, whose wealth
was derived from trade; and in order to make their
release seem natural, it was pretended that each man
was to pay the great ransom of four to five talents.
The restored citizens set to work, and gradually
made such an impression that, when rival embassies
from Athens and Corinth appeared on the scene,
and the question was debated what line Corcyra
should take, the majority voted for a compromise :
the existing defensive alliance (ἐπιμαχία) with Athens
was to be maintained; but so also was friendship
with the Peloponnesians. As a help towards under-
standing the account of the party struggles that
ensued, the following notes, together with the map
of Corcyra, will be found useful :-—

Norres to THE Map or CorcyRa

1. The ancient city of Corcyra lay not on the site of
the modern town, but on the peninsula to the south of it.
The remains are very scanty, and many sites are un-
certain. The narrative of Thucydides, however, gives
valuable clues in several cases.

2. The two harbowrs—the Hyllaic and that ‘by the

xxii INTRODUCTION

agora towards the mainland’ (c. 72, 3)—may be regarded
as identified beyond doubt. Later authors name the
latter the harbour of Alcinous. The position of the
Agora is fixed with confidence, on the evidence of the
ground and of the inscription found there, and now in
the British Museum !—in the low ground on the south of
the harbour, at the foot of a hill. The Arsenal must in
consequence (c. 74, 2) have been on the south shore of
the harbour. It is probable, however, on the one hand,
that in ancient times the harbour extended rather farther
inland on the south side than it'does now; and, on the
other, that some low rocks at the extreme south-east
corner projected farther northwards into the sea.

3. There has been much discussion as to the identi-
fication of the unnamed ‘Island before the Heraeum’
(c. 75, 5). Many have fixed on Ptychia (now Vido) ;
but the best authorities? are now agreed that the site is
to be found in the modern citadel of Corfu, which is
separated by a canal from the mainland. We must
suppose that in ancient times what is now the citadel
was a natural or artificial island.

4. The Heraeum, ie. the temple and τέμενος of Hera
Acria (of the Height), appears from the narrative to have
been inside the city (cf. especially c. 79, 1), and the only
position that fulfils all the conditions is the hill nearest
to the harbour of Alcinous.

5. The position of the Acropolis is quite uncertain.
But it must have been on a height that commanded the
Hyllaic harbour.

6. The τέμενος of Zeus and that of Alcinous, and the
shrine of Dionysus, cannot be located. The shrine of the
Dioscuri would seem, from c. 75, to have been near the
part of the harbour of Alcinous in which Nicostratus
anchored.

1 See note on ὁ. 75. ᾿
3 The slight-remarks of Th. Reinach in Rev. des Et. grec. x.
p. 149 cannot outweigh the opinions of B, Schmidt and Partsch,

DEMOSTHENES IN AETOLIA xxiii

4, DEMOSTHENES IN AETOLIA AND AMPHILOCHIA

The plans of Pericles for the prosecution of the
war with the Peloponnesian confederacy did not die
with his death. Until the capture of the Spartan
prisoners at Spacteria in 425 B.c., beyond the time
reached in this book, all the items of his policy were
still carried out. Attica was still abandoned when
the Peloponnesians invaded it; fleets were still
dispatched to make descents on the Peloponnesian
coasts ; a sharp look-out on the conduct of the allies
was still kept up. But Athens went farther than
this: she combined with the defensive policy pursued
by Pericles an offensive policy, which had for its
object the isolation of the Peloponnese. It is not to
be doubted that this design was itself the logical
outcome of the Periclean policy. He had himself
aimed at closing the sea against the Peloponnesians,
at cutting off their corn-supplies at the sources.
Pericles had never contemplated a defensive policy
at sea ; even the intervention in Sicily (c. 86) was only
a violation of Periclean maxims in so far as it was an
experiment preparatory to a scheme of conquest.

But what is entirely new is the design of striking
at the Peloponnesians on land; and this design is
due to one man, Demosthenes, the most capable
leader that Athens produced in the war, after
Pericles and Alcibiades. Some years before the
outbreak of the war Athens had made alliance with
most of Acarnania. There was a fierce rivalry for
the trade of this region. The Corinthian towns,
Ambracia, Leucas, Anactorium, were the backbone
of the Peloponnesian power here. In 429 B.c. the
confederacy had made an abortive attempt to win
Acarnania. It is not surprising that, as soon as

xxiv INTRODUCTION

Athens was free to counter this attack, she made the
attempt. The fall of Mytilene and Plataea opened
the way to the resumption of the offensive at sea.
The outcome of the disturbances in Coreyra, which
then immediately claimed attention, was favourable
to Athens, for an offensive and defensive alliance
with that island replaced the defensive alliance.
We need not follow the actions in Sicily nor the
undertakings of Nicias, which were conducted on
Periclean lines. Demosthenes, too, with his fleet of
thirty ships, was sent out in accordance with the
regular plan—merely to make the usual descents on
the Peloponnesian coasts, and to look to the Athenian
interests in the west of Greece. Instead, he formed
the bold design of attacking Boeotia from the west
side with the help of a great army raised in
Acarnania, Locri, and Phocis.!

When his rash and disastrous invasion of Aetolia
brought this design to a premature end, the Aetolians
took occasion to make an attempt on Naupactus.
Eurylochus the Spartan led 3000 men from Heraclea
to their support. Uniting with them, he ravaged
the land of Naupactus. Demosthenes was still
there, for he had not ventured to return home.
But he had profited by his errors, and his conduct
of the campaign that ensues in Amphilochia is in
marked contrast with his previous foolhardiness.
Not only did he save Naupactus, but he frustrated
the second attempt of the Peloponnesians to get
Acarnania, and shattered the power of Ambracia,
which was the centre of the Peloponnesian influence

1 Phocis had been lost to Athens since the battle of Coronea,
447 B.c.; but Demosthenes expected to win the Phocians over
by persuasion or force. They were no friends of the Delphians,
or of the Dorians of the north, or of Thebes.

DEMOSTHENES IN AETOLIA XXV

in that region. Knowledge of these stirring events
was evidently gained by Thucydides from the adven-
turous soldier himself.

1. τῶν MeccHNicoon χάριτι meiceeic (c. 95, 1; cf.
cc. 94, 3; 97, 1). Thucydides seems anxious not to
throw the blame for the scheme of Aetolian conquest
on Demosthenes. He lays stress on the insistence
of the Messenians. It must be admitted that the
gallant garrison of Naupactus had a special claim to
consideration. But the further design, the invasion
of Boeotia by land from the west, was due to Demo-
sthenes alone. It is clear that he himself came to
see that the thing was impracticable. Two years
later, he again took up the project of invading
Boeotia; but this time he approached it by sea
from Naupactus. He had awoken from his dream.

2. Ta κατ᾽ ’Aunpaxian (c. 115). It is evident
(c. 118, 6) that the adventure of Demosthenes in
Amphilochia touched the imagination of Thucydides,
as well it might. The drama, as unfolded by hin, is
easily followed, the only serious difficulty being that
we do not know which of two sites is Argos and which
is Crenae. Expressing the episodes of the story in
terms of the drama, we might analyze as follows :—

Prologue: Olpae seized—Argos and Crenae garri-
soned. Act J.: Eurylochus across Acarnania, with
Demosthenes at his heels. Act I/.: Battle before
Olpae. Act I/J.: The compact and its sequel—the
massacre—the flight to Agraeis. 4ct JV. : The Am-
braciots ambushed in the hills. ct V.: The herald.!

1 Prof. Bury’s opinion that the account of the Acarnanian
operations is tedious is to me very surprising (Ancient Greek
Historians, p. 157). I should have said that it is Thucydides at
his best in narrative; but perhaps a long course of Xenophon
has warped my judgment !

III. ΠἸΤΎΥΙΕ AND Diction

THE following notes, based on Lange, Chambry,
and Lamberton,! are intended to help towards an
appreciation of the style and diction of Thucydides.
They deal with the things that must be taken into
consideration in any attempt to estimate his merits
or shortcomings.

I. Influence of Rhetoric, especially of Gorgias,
the creator of the self-conscious ‘antithetic’ style.

Antithesis, most frequent in speeches and in
reflective passages, such as cc. 82, 83; see especially
the series of contrasts in c. 82, 4-5. Antithesis is
often combined with or assisted by—

(a) An intentional echo in the sound of con-
trasted words, as cc. 43, 4 ὑπεύθυνον τὴν παραίνεσιν
ἔχοντας πρὸς ἀνεύθυνον τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀκρόασιν: 63, 3
αἰσχρὸν ἦν προδοῦναι τοὺς εὐεργέτας πολὺ δέ γε
αἴσχιον ; . Ἕλληνας καταπροδοῦναι: 64, 5 ἐς τὸν
ἡμέτερόν TE ἀκούσιον μηδισμὸν καὶ τὸν ὑμέτερον ἑκού-
σιον ἀττικισμόν : οἷ. cc. 87, 4; 39, 2; 82, 4.

(Ὁ) Drawing together contrasted words, as c.
32, 2 ὀλίγους μὲν αὐτὸν τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἐς φιλίαν
προσάξεσθαι, πολὺ δὲ πλείους τῶν φίλων πολεμίους
ἕξειν: 88, 1 ὁ γὰρ παθὼν τῷ δράσαντι... ἐπ-

1 Thukydides in Auswahl, B. Lange, Leipzig, 1896 ; Extraits
de Thucydide, M. Chambry, Paris, 1897 ; Thue. Books 77]. and IIT,

by Prof. W. A. Lamberton, 1905.
XXV1

STYLE AND DICTION XXVii

εξέρχεται : or, less frequently, by separating them
widely, as in 6. 36, 6 Bradraros τῶν πολιτῶν TH TE
δήμῳ παρὰ πολὺ ἐν τῷ τότε πιθανώτατος.

A false form of Antithesis, where single words
are contrasted and there is no real contrast between
the clauses in which they stand, is unpleasantly
frequent ; e.g. c. 13, 5 ᾧ γὰρ δοκεῖ μακρὰν ἀπεῖναι ἡ
Λέσβος, τὴν ὠφελίαν αὐτῳ ἐγγύθεν παρέξει: and so
with ἐν τῇ Αττικῃ and δὶ ἣν ἡ ᾿Αττική in the next
sentence.

Prodicus also, that sophist who first taught the
careful definition of words and distinction of apparent
synonyms, and whose style is amusingly taken off
by Plato in the Protagoras, had a marked influence
on the style of Thucydides. See, for example,
ce. 89, 2. Writing under this influence, Thucydides
is fond of making'a speaker found an argument on
the proper use of a term that is apt to be loosely
used; or, again, on the proper time for allowing
one’s conduct to be influenced by ἔλεος, δικαιοσύνη,
τὸ ξυμφέρον, τὸ δίκαιον, and the like (cf. c. 40, 1-2).

So much is said about the pregnant brevity of
Thucydides, his economy of words is so noticeable,
and even his tendency to omit a whole step in an
argument, that we are apt to overlook his tendency
to redundancy and pleonasm. Phrases like τὸ
πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι and ἢν ἐπ-εσβάλητε τὸ δεύτερον
(c. 18, 4) are frequent; or, again, like this: τὸ οὖν
μεταξὺ τοῦτο, of ἑκκαίδεκα πόδες (c. 21, 2). But
most remarkable is the frequent reiteration of the
same idea by his speakers. They really make very
few points, but they keep turning the same thought
over and over, regarding it from different points of
view, putting it in different ways. This tendency,
too, is no doubt a result of studying the new rhetoric.

Cc

XXVill INTRODUCTION

II. The Antithetic style is opposed on the one
hand to the running style (λέξις εἰρομένη) of
Herodotus, where the sentences may be of any
length, and ‘run on’ in a natural manner. Thucy-
dides himself writes in the running style often enough
in the narrative parts of his work. Indeed, that
style is the basis of his manner in narrative ; but he
likes to colour it with his special devices—antithesis,
ellipse, anacoluthon, accumulation of participles,
abstract nouns, article with neuter adj. or participle.
The Antithetic style is equally remote from the
periodic style of Isocrates and Demosthenes: it
co-ordinates clauses (parataxis) where we look for
dependence of clause on clause. Thucydides does
continually write periods of a sort; but, as Prof.
Lamberton rightly says, ‘the bond of union [between
the parts] is lax and mechanical, dnd the sentence if
long breaks up as easily and completely as if there
had been no attempt to hold it together.’ The

opening sentence of Diodotus’ speech forms a true
_ period, and is noted as an exception.

III. Diction.

(a) Attic Prose had not much of a tradition
behind it at the time when Thucydides wrote. The
development of poetry is notoriously anterior to the
development of prose; and at that early stage in
prose composition the traditions of epic and tragic
poetry and of the older Ionic prose writing were
sure to make a deep impression on an Attic prose
writer.
Examples of Epic words: ἀλκή (80), δοῦπος (22),
ἑσσάμενος, περικτίονες (104).

Tragic: ἅλωσις (51), αὐθέντης (58), xpi Go (109).

Tonic: ἐξαπιναίως (8, ete.) and ἐξαπίνης (89), νομίζω
= χρῶμαι.

STYLE AND DICTION xxix

(b) The frequency of nouns in -ovs, -τής, and -pa
formed from verbs is extraordinary.

Nouns in -ow express action: ¢. 82, 3-4 yields
a cluster of them. Other instances are ἐλευθέρωσις
and καταδούλωσις (10), δόκησις, προσποίησις (82), προ-
τίμησις (82). They are often used in periphrasis
with ποιεῖσθαι, or for the passive γίγνεσθαι: τὴν
παράδοσιν ἐποιησάμεθα (53).

Nouns in -τής express the occupation, function of
a person; but often in Thucydides they show the
intellectual or moral characteristic : σωφρονιστής (65),
διαλυτής (82, 5); with εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι these express
the agent.

Nouns m -μα: προκάλυμμα (67, 6), πρόσχημα.
(82, 4), φρόνημα (45).

The use of such nouns is part of the general
tendency to prefer the abstract noun to the concrete
verbal form. The substantives are reinforced by
(a) neut. adj. with article: see cc. 82, 4, 6, 7, 8;
83, 1-3; and (ὁ) the neut. partic. with article, as ἐν
τῷ διαλλάσσοντι τῆς γνώμης (10, 1).

(c) Co-ordination of dissimilars is very frequent,
sometimes in the case of single words, as in μᾶλλον
δὲ καὶ ἡσυχαίτερα (82, 2); more often in the case of
phrases and clauses, as in τῶν λιμένων τὴν yOow . .
ἐπέμενον τελεσθῆναι, καὶ ὅσα ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου ἔδει ad-
ικέσθαι (2, 2): οὐ σκοποῦντες ὅτι τυραννίδα ἔχετε τὴν
ἀρχὴν καὶ πρὺς ἐπιβουλεύοντας αὐτούς (87, 2), ἐσθήμασί
τε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομίμοις, ὅσα τε ἡ γῆ ἡμῶν ἀνεδίδου
ὡραῖα... ἐπιφέροντες (58, 4): ἐξαπιναίως καὶ οὐ προσ-
δεχομένων (84, 3); ef. ec. 58, 3 (personal and imper-
sonal combined) ; 82, 8 ; 86, 3.

(4) Anacoluthon, free structure. The following
common varieties are to be noticed :—

1, Transition from subordinate to principal sen-

XXX INTRODUCTION

tence: as ἐν μὲν εἰρήνῃ οὐκ ἂν ἐχόντων πρό-
φασιν... πολεμουμένων δὲ. . αἱ ἐπαγωγαὶ
. ἐπορίζοντο (82, 1); cf. ὁ. 36, 2.

. A participle is put in the gen. abs., though it
refers to the subject or object of a verb,
as βοηθησάντων ὑμῶν προθύμως πόλιν προσ-
λήψεσθε (18, 7).

3. A partic. is added in nom. though it applies
to a word in a different case, as ἔδοξεν
αὐτοῖς. . ἀποκτεῖναι. . ἐπικαλοῦντες (36).

4, A change of construction may result from the
insertion of a passage in parenthesis (Thue.
is prone to parenthesis, e.g. cc. 38, 1 ; 39, 2;
57, 1); and, in a long and complicated
sentence, an easy indifference to gram-
matical exactness is shown. A striking
case is c. 34, 3, where ὁ μὲν ἐξῆλθε, ὁ δὲ.
εἶχεν replaces ἐξελθόντα αὐτὸν... εἶχεν.

5. A word is placed as if it were to belong to
two clauses, but when the second arrives,
the word is abandoned : as παράδειγμα αὐτοῖς
οὔτε. . ἐγένοντο... οὔτε ἡ παροῦσα εὐδαιμονία
παρέσχεν ὄκνον (39, 3): cf. cc. 67, 6 ἀμύνατε:
71, 1 ταῦτα : 96, 3.

(6) The subject of a verb is contracted or expanded
in meaning as the sentence proceeds. This happens,
for example, more than once in the narrative of the
Corcyrean disturbances, as in c. 81, 2, where, though
the subject is Κερκυραῖοι, the verb presently applies
only to the democratic party among the Corcyreans.
It is common also to subdivide a substantive by
apposition with μὲν. . δέ, as in 6. 18, 3 vies . . at
μὲν... . αἱ δέ.

(7) The order of words is accommodated to the
order of the thoughts, the position being fixed

bo

STYLE AND DICTION eet

according to their relative importance in the writer’s
mind. ‘The following are so frequent as to deserve
separate notice :—

1. Accusative at beginning, indicating the prin-
cipal theme of the sentence, as in καὶ τὴν ἐς
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐσβολήν .. (15, 1); cf. ο. 113, 6.

2. A governing conjunction is postponed to words
that are prominent, as in καὶ of ᾿Αθηναῖοι

. ὡς ἑώρων (4, 1); ef. ¢. 5, 1.

3. A nom. substantive may stand as a signal
before a pron., when an emphatic statement
is to be made about it, as in πάθος yap
τοῦτο . . (113, 6).

4. Gen. or dat. is put before the words from
which it takes its construction, as in τῆς
Καρίας ἐκ Μυοῦντος ἀναβάς (19, 2); the posi-
tion of αὐτῶν and αὐτοῖς in this matter is
often noteworthy.

(g) Accumulation of participles in a sentence is a
striking feature of the style. Sometimes successive
stages are marked by them (cc. 16, 1 ; 74, 3); often
they are in different relationship to the main action.
They may be joined by καί, as in cc. 8, 4; 55, 2; or
they may be without connecting link, as in cc. 59, 1;
110, 1.

IV. THE SPEECHES

1. ALREADY in ancient times Thucydides is com-
mended as the first historian who composed true
speeches—Snpnyopia.. He has told us what method
he followed: ‘I have made every speaker say what
seemed to me most appropriate on each occasion,
taking care to keep as close as I could to the spirit of
what was actually said. If it is asked why ‘Thucy-
dides inserts these set speeches, the true answer is
probable that oratory was in his day advancing rapidly
in importance and in technical excellence, and that
the δημηγορία, the λόγος, held in Athenian life a place
as important as that held by the πρᾶξις or ἔργον.
Already in Herodotus the persons speak, but in an
informal, conversational manner. Direct speech in
history was but a legacy received from epic poetry.
Naturally, influence and power of political discourse
were enormously enhanced by the appearance of
rhetoric. The age of Pericles did not regard
Themistocles as a great orator; even Pericles did
not, so Plutarch says, write out his speeches for
the Assembly ; but he was probably the last great
statesman who did not do so. Rhetoric found direct
speech already existing in Ionic history, and natur-

1 ai δημηγορίαι αὐτοῦ, ἐν αἷς οἵονταί τινες τὴν ἄκραν τοῦ συγγρα-

φέως εἷναι δύναμιν Dionys. Περὶ τοῦ Θουκ. x. c. 34.
XXxii

“THE SPEECHES XXXi

ally it exerted as powerful an influence in the domain
of Attic history as it exerted on Attic oratory.

2. In manner, too, Herodotus had followed the
usage of epic. His speeches and dialogues have
the simplicity and grace of the Homeric discourses ;
even the longer ones ‘have the conversational tone
rather than the rhetorical.’! It cannot be said that
there is no display of rhetoric in the discourses of
Herodotus ; but it is quite clear that his preference
was for the simple colloquial manner of the epic
heroes. He professes to give the actual words of
the speakers ; and in the main he makes them talk
not that he may present in this way an analysis οὗ
motives, but that he may diversify the narrative and
retain the attention of his listeners.. Thucydides was
the first writer to introduce δημηγορίαι proper into
history ; and the writers on rhetoric regarded him,
and him alone, as an orator as well as a historian,
thus bearing emphatic testimony to the importance
of his speeches in the history of their art.

3. The speeches in Thucydides occupy more than
a fifth of the whole work. The occasion chosen for
their introduction is always a notable conjuncture in
the development of the war ; not necessarily, as Sir R.
Jebb points out, an occasion of much importance in
relation to the war; but always, as we should expect
to find in Thucydides, the occasion of some event
that he can treat as ‘typical of its kind.’ In the
first book, indeed, all the occasions on which a speech
is inserted aré in themselves of the first importance.
But here, as always, he makes the speeches the
means .of affording us an insight into the inner
motives of action, or into the character and policy of

l Jebb in Hellenica, p. 169.

χχχὶν INTRODUCTION

whole states or of political parties. He condenses in
a single speech or in the speeches of opposed orators
all the reflexions that Ae thinks appropriate to the
situation ; and thus the speakers become personifica-
tions of that political idea which inspired them.
The words in which they express the idea are for the
most part supplied by Thucydides ; the form, the
topics, and the structure alike are largely dependent
on the popular rhetoric of the day.

4. As regards the form, it is easy to blame
Thucydides for the excessive use of the rhetorical
figures of language. These are the σχήματα Τοργίεια
remarked by the Scholiasts and the ancient com-
mentators in general; μειρακιώδεις σχηματισμοί
and θεατρικὰ σχήματα Dionysius calls them. The
commonest of these figures is, of course, the antithesis.
Now it is hardly reasonable to complain just because
this figure is frequent in Thucydides; and perhaps
nobody would do so had it not received a bad name
as one of the ‘Gorgian’ tricks. Thucydides deals
with a subject that is full of contrasts. There is the
contrast between Ionian and Dorian, Athenian and
Spartan ; between pretence and reality, promise and
fulfilment ; and Thucydides was bound to bring these
contrasts out. But in the speeches where all the
‘figures’ are naturally most frequent, he sometimes
lets a feeling for antithesis carry him into verbal
contrasts that contain little or no substance. It was
the fashion of the day, and Thucydides followed it
at times only too faithfully... Unfortunately, too, he
does not always rest content with the antithetic form

1 Dionysius, as Blass says, declares the figures to be unworthy
of the grave, austere dignity of Thucydides. They can hardly be
excused altogether on the ground that fashion required them.
This excuse makes the κτῆμα és αἰεί into an ἀγώνισμα ἐς τὸ

THE SPEECHES XXXV

pure and simple. With antithesis he occasionally com-
bines those less desirable ‘figures,’ such as paromoiosis
or jingle in the sound of whole clauses, and parisosis
or equality in the length of clauses; but such
trivialities are less common in him than in Antiphon,
for example, or Isocrates, and they are certainly not
numerous enough to warrant us in saying that
Thucydides deliberately aimed at them. It would
be fairer to say that he does not always avoid them.
One of the minor figures, paronomasia, or jingle in
the sound of words, is undoubtedly common even in
the descriptions. But it must be remembered that
in all Greek literature, from Homer downwards,
this paronomasia is common.! The practice is so
notorious and constant that it may be enough here
to point out that ὀδύσσομαι occurs in Homer only and
always as in paronomasia with the name ’Odvoceis.”
“On the whole, in spite of Gorgias, the minor ‘ figures
of language’ are no commoner in Thucydides than
they are in Homer. Of course Gorgias did not
invent the figures; he first taught them. Suidas
mentions books περὶ τῶν παρ Ὁμήρῳ σχημάτων ῥητο-
ρικῶν : Aristotle in the Rhetoric goes to Homer (JI.
Ix. 526) for his example of paromoiosis; and in the
tract de vita et poesi Homeri, attributed to Plutarch,
several examples of the minor figures are collected
from the Iliad and Odyssey. As for the other class of
‘figures,’ the figures of thought, such as irony, the
rhetorical question, asyndeton, anaphora, they are so

παραχρῆμα! On the other hand, I do not think we can say that
antithesis is foreign to the nature of the grave style. We must
distinguish between this and the minor σχήματα λέξεως.
1 Nieschke, de Thucydide Antiphontis discipulo, Miinden, 1885.
2 Jl, Iv, 140 Προθόος 604s: but by no means only with proper
names; e.g. 11, xvitl. 541 πίειραν ἄρουραν εὐρεῖαν, Od. 1x. 415
ὠδίνων ὀδύνῃσιν.

XXXV1 INTRODUCTION

seldom used by Thucydides that they do not count
as characteristic of his style.

5. In the choice and arrangement of his subject
matter he is never the slave of rhetoric. He gives
us, of course, the ordinary exordium 1 (προοίμιον),
argumentatio (ἀγῶνες), and peroratio (ἐπίλογος). He
uses, too, the rhetorical commonplaces, such as honour
(τὸ καλόν), interest (τὸ συμφέρον), justice (τὸ δίκαιον) ;
and in handling these he has always at command an
extraordinary abundance of arguments and aphorisms
that surpasses anything to be found elsewhere in
Greek oratory. His power of invention wrings from
Dionysius an emphatic eulogy; to us it becomes at
times actually wearisome,” the same materials being
grouped again and again in different shapes, as in a
kaleidoscope.

Ipsae illae contiones, says Cicero of Thucydides’
speeches, ita multas habent obscuras abditasque sententias,
via ut intelligantur. In the speeches much more often
than the narrative, ἀσαφὲς γίγνεται τὸ βραχύ. The
sentences are overloaded with ideas, they are compli-
cated by the intrusion of numerous clauses which
stand in various relations to the main construction.
It is not that he is incapable of writing clearly when
he comes to write a speech ; nothing, for example,
could be more clearly expressed than the last speech
in his history, the magnificent address delivered by
Nicias during the retreat from Syracuse. But un-
fortunately he shows too often a preference for the
complicated over the simple form of expression ; he
likes to write in long, straggling, ill-balanced periods

1 This may be omitted to produce an effect of abruptness and
vehemence, as in the case of the Elean Teutiaplus’ brief harangue,

I. 30.
2 Cf. Mahaffy, Greek Prose Literature.

THE SPEECHES . ΧΧΧΥῚΙ

that. contrast strangely with their machine-turned
antithesis, and the rhymes and jingles in the clauses.

6. Of the speeches contained in the Third Book,
those delivered for and against the Mytileneans
were probably heard by Thucydides. The violent
statements attributed to Cleon, and his imitation of
Periclean oratory accord with all that is known of
him. As for the unknown Diodotus, we may
suppose that everything urged on behalf of the
Mytileneans during the debate is condensed into
his. speech. On the other hand, Prof. Bury thinks
that much of the matter contained in both speeches
is ‘purely Thucydidean ’—all the reflexions, in fact,
on the theory of punishment; and he points out,
what is doubtless true, whether it is what Cleon
said or what Thucydides thought that Cleon might
have said, that there is in Cleon’s speech a covert
attack on the character of Pericles as an idealist.

In the Olympian address and in the speeches of
the Plataean and the Theban, Thucydides must have
gone to work with greater freedom.

The digression on party strife in the Greek states
must be reckoned along with the speeches. It is
written in the same tortuous, artificial style in
which large parts of the speeches are written; and
we may surmise that if any speaker had been avail-
able for the purpose, the author would have attributed
these reflexions to him instead of giving them in his
own character. How far Thucydides sometimes
goes in putting his own thoughts into the mouth
of another is to be seen in the First Book, where
Pericles, speaking in the Athenian Assembly, is made
to answer step by step a forecast of the war given
at Sparta by a Corinthian whose speech he had not
heard.

XXXV1il - INTRODUCTION

In the speech of Diodotus! we have the earliest
discussion of the Sophistic Theory of Punishment
as a deterrent; and the reflexions on Party Strife
are packed with allusions to the jive cardinal virtues
of the Sophists—Courage, Justice, Wisdom, Tem-
perance, and ὁσιότης or εὐσέβεια.

1 Mr. Ἐς M. Cornford has some very interesting comments on
this speech in his Thucydides mythistoricus.

Υ. MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT

THE seven MSS. that are of importance for determin-
ing the text of Thucydides fall into two groups :—

1. Laurentianus, C ; in the Laurentian library at
Florence, on parchment, 27 lines to the page. Date
between 900 and 950; the oldest MS., and, on the
whole, the best. The first six pages, down to ὁ. 16,
1 νήσους are by a later hand.

Monacensis, G; in Munich library, quarto on
paper. 13th century. The upper margin of the
page is destroyed; hence the sign [G] means that,
in the place referred to, the reading of this MS.
is lost.

2. Vaticanus, B; in the Vatican library; small
folio on parchment, 30 to 32 lines on a page. 11th
century. Not decisively inferior to C, but with its
companions derived, in the first two books, from a
different recension of the text. From III. to ΥἹ. 92
it does not differ nearly so often (the proportion is
1 to 4) from the C group, and is probably a de-
scendant of the same recension. From VI. 92 to
the end B differs widely from all the other MSS.

Augustanus, F ; large folio on parchment. Dated
1301. Formerly at Augsburg, now at Munich.

Cisalpinus or Italus, A; at Paris, large folio on
parchment. 11th or 12th century. It was lost

ΧΧΧΙΧ

xl "INTRODUCTION

from 1815 to 1869, and rediscovered by R. Prinz in
the National Library.

Palatinus, E ; at Heidelberg ; large folio on parch-
ment. 11th century. The only good MS. that
contains the two Lives.

-Britannicus, M; in the British Museum ; quarto
on parchment, 27 lines to the page. 11th century.
This MS. belongs on the whole to the second group,
but it often agrees with the first against ΒΑ ΒΕ,

In fixing the text, the readings of B and C are of
course the most important. It happens that C is
more often confirmed by the text of Dionysius than
B; and there is a suspicion that readings peculiar to
B are sometimes the result of conjecture. In a
passage where CG have one reading, BAEKFM
another, it is best to choose the reading of CG if
both are equally acceptable; and if, as sometimes
happens, E or M agree with CG, the claims of the
reading to preference are strengthened.

The other sources from which the text can be
occasionally corrected are the long quotations in
Dionysius, the Scholia (only a small portion of which
are of any considerable authority), and the numerous
citations from Thucydides or else imitations in later
writers, rhetoricians, grammarians and the Scholia to
Homer, Aristophanes, and other authors. There is
no sufficient reason for supposing that the MSS. of
Thucydides are specially corrupt. There are very
numerous small mistakes ; the insertion or omission
of short words, such as τέ, δέ, ὅτι, is frequent. But
the MSS. are an average lot ; not one of them is of
great merit—there is nothing like the Bodleian
Plato, for example, or the Paris Anabasis; but we
may be confident that they yield between them a
very fair text exhibiting in general only those forms

MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT xli

of error that become familiar to readers of Greek
manuscripts. The present editor, at least, readily
confesses that a larger acquaintance with MSS. has
caused him to withdraw entirely from the opinion of
those who detect incessant interpolations and whole-
sale corruptions in these very ordinary MSS.

VI. DIFFERENCES

BETWEEN THE TEXT OF THIS

EDITION AND THAT OF Mr. SruaRt JONES
IN BIBLIOTHECA OXONIENSIS

Tus EDITION

Stuart JONES

ἄκοντας. . τὰ
[ἢ βορέου]
ἥκιστα
τὸ κενὸν
ὁμοίους
εἶεν
a
κολάζειν
ἔχωσι
μὴ ἀμνημονεῖν
κεκμηκότας
ὑμεῖς

XV rn
καὶ ταῦτα

οἷ Ss πα
καὶ οἰκίαι
ξύμπαντας

[Θηβαῖοι]

ὠμὴ ἡ στάσις
ὠφελίας
προτιθέντες
φθάσωσι

ὅτε

τὸν λόφον

ὁ, 11, 4 ἑκόντας [τὰ]
c. 23, 5 ἢ βορέου
ὁ. 24, 1 ἥκιστ᾽ «ἂν»
ce. 80, 4 τὸ καινὸν
c. 40, 8 ὁμοίως
c. 44, 2 ἐᾶν
5 ᾧ
c. 52, 2 κολάσειν
ὁ. 56, 7 ἔχουσι
ὁ. 59, 2 [μὴ ἀμνημονεῖν]
κεκμηῶτας
c. 64, 1 ἡμεῖς
c. 66, ὃ κἀνταῦθα
ὁ. 67, 3 Kal <ai> οἰκίαι
7 ξύμπαντας «τὰς»
ce, 68, 1 [a]
3 Θηβαῖοι
ὁ. 82, 1 ὠμὴ στάσις
6 ὠφελίᾳ
8 προστιθέντες
c. 88, 3 φθάνωσι
c. 97, 3 ὁπότε
ὁ. 107, 2 [τὸν λόφον]
Ὁ. 67,
6,

5 post κρίναντες paragraphum inserui
82, 1 post Λακεδαιμονίους interpunxi
, 3 post "OAras gravius interpunxi

δ; 118, 4 post ἐστίν interrogationis signum posui

adhauc, st fors Ferret, pares esse concilio possemus

ante ὑμῖν dele 7 ο. 40, 7 post παντὸς adde τότ᾽

CoNJECTURES :

ὁ. 11, 1 «ἂν» ἀντισουμένου, quod nos soli

ΟΡ Ὁ
6. 45,

3 lege καὶ ταὐτὰ ὅμως mp aerate eadem tamen scelera

admittunt homines
dele ὀλίγων

c. 82, 7 dele θαρσῆσαι
ce. 108, 2 post ᾿Αμπρακιῶται dele καὶ

ς, 107, 4

ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ͂

ἸΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ. £

1 Tod δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους Πελοποννήσιοι
καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἅμα τῷ σίτῳ ἀκ- The Pelopor-
μάζοντι ἐστράτευσαν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττι- Wayans invade
κήν (ἡγεῖτο δὲ αὐτῶν ᾿Αρχίδαμος Mt time.

20 Ζευξιδάμου Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλεύς), καὶ
ἐγκαθεζόμενοι ἐδήουν τὴν γῆν: καὶ προσβολαίΐ,
ὥσπερ εἰώθεσαν, ἐγίγνοντο τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
ἱππέων ὅπῃ παρείκοι, καὶ τὸν πλεῖστον ὅμιλον
τῶν ψιλῶν εἶργον τὸ μὴ προεξιόντας τῶν

8 ὅπλων τὰ ἐγγὺς τῆς πόλεως κακουργεῖν. ἐμ- τὸ
μείναντες δὲ χρόνον οὗ εἶχον τὰ σιτία ἀν-
εχώρησαν καὶ διελύθησαν κατὰ πόλεις.

2 Μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἐσβολὴν τῶν Πελοποννησίων
εὐθὺξ Λέσβος πλὴν Μηθύμνης Lesvos,
ἀπέστη ἀπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων, βουληθέντες reer ene
μὲν καὶ πρὸ τοῦ πολέμου, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ Athens.
Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐ προσεδέξαντο, ἀναγκασθέντες,

1 9. post εἶργον add. διὰ CG.

££ 1 B

οι

2

3

bo

2
3

2 OOYKYAIAOY

\ “ , 3
δὲ καὶ ταύτην τὴν ἀπόστασιν πρότερον ἢ

a / n
διενοοῦντο ποιήσασθαι. τῶν τε γὰρ λιμένων
\ a \ lal » rf
Poauleesy τὴν χῶσιν καὶ τειχῶν οἰκοδόμησιν
Mytil \ ᾿ /
mente τὸ καὶ νεῶν ποίησιν ἐπέμενον τελε-
the revolt.

an ΝΥ “ ’ fal if
σθῆναι, καὶ ὅσα ἐκ τοῦ Llovrov
» > , , \ -» \ ἃ
ἔδει ἀφικέσθαι, τοξότας τε καὶ σῖτον, καὶ ἃ
/ 9 / \ ,
μεταπεμπόμενοι ἦσαν. Tevédior γὰρ ὄντες av-
cal / \ a \ 3 A
τοῖς Sidbopor καὶ Μηθυμναῖοι καὶ αὐτῶν
/ SN , \ vd /
Μυτιληναίων ἰδίᾳ ἄνδρες κατὰ στάσιν, πρό-
7 / οὗ / a 5
ἕενοι ᾿Αθηναίων, μηνυταὶ γίγνονται τοῖς ᾿Αθη-
A Ὁ / ᾽ὔ \ / 3) \
ναΐοις ὅτι ξυνοικίζουσί te τὴν Λέσβον és τὴν
΄ ld \ \ a Ὁ
Μυτιλήνην βίᾳ καὶ τὴν παρασκευὴν ἅπασαν
Ν ’ὔ \ fal lal
peta Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ Βοιωτῶν Evyyevav
\
ὄντων ἐπὶ ἀποστάσει ἐπείγονται" καὶ εἰ μή
/ ” / > \
Tis προκαταλήψεται ἤδη, στερήσεσθαι αὐτοὺς
δ Ὁ - 3 \
Λέσβου. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι (ἦσαν yap τεταλαι-
if if n / \ fal /
πωρημένοι ὑπό TE τῆς νόσου καὶ TOD πολέμου
, Ἂ ‘i / i;
ἄρτι καθισταμένου καὶ ἀκμάζοντος) μέγα μὲν
» ς rn 3 / ΄
ἔργον ἡγοῦντο εἶναι Λέσβον προσπολεμώσασθαι
A ig 2
ναυτικὸν ἔχουσαν καὶ δύναμιν ἀκέραιον, καὶ
Ν a x 7;
οὐκ ἀπεδέχοντο TO πρῶτον τὰς κατηγορίας,
lal / / a \ / a
μεῖζον μέρος νέμοντες τῷ μὴ βούλεσθαι ἀληθῆ
/ \ / /
εἶναι" ἐπειδὴ μέντοι Kal πέμψαντες πρέσβεις
> » \ M / V4 be
οὐκ ἔπειθον τοὺς Μυτιληναίους τήν te Evvoi-
\ \ / i
κισιν Kal τὴν παρασκευὴν διαλύειν, δείσαντες
a > 4 Ἃς , 3
προκαταλαβεῖν ἐβούλοντο. καὶ πέμπουσιν ἐξ-
an “Δδλ 7
απιναίως τεσσαράκοντα ναῦς αἱ ἔτυχον περὶ
t / a - -
Πελοπόννησον παρεσκευασμέναι πλεῖν: Κλεῖπ-

12. μεταπεπεμμένοι Cobet.
6. 740m. ABEFM. 9. ξυνοίκησιν ABFM.

15

ao

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (2—4) 8

/ \ e / . / 4 τς ? /
midns δὲ ὁ Δεινίου τρίτος αὐτὸς ἐστρατήγει.
ἐσηγγέλθη γὰρ αὐτοῖς ὡς εἴη ᾿Απόλλωνος

a , /
Μαλόεντος ἔξω τῆς πόλεως ἑορτή, poet sent
ἐν ἡ πανδημεὶ Μυτιληναῖοι ἑορτά- »Y Athens

oo

\ > / Gy 4 / >? lal
Cover, καὶ ἐλπίδα εἶναι ἐπειχθέντας ἐπιπεσεῖν
” δ x \ a ¢ al > \ /
ἄφνω, καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα: εἰ δὲ μή,
Μυτιληναίοις εἰπεῖν ναῦς τε παραδοῦναι καὶ
, na \ / \ a
τείχη καθελεῖν, μὴ πειθομένων δὲ πολεμεῖν.
an , fal
4 καὶ ai μὲν νῆες @yovto: tas δὲ τῶν Μυτι-
/ / / & » x Ν
ληναίων δέκα τριήρεις, αἱ ἔτυχον βοηθοὶ παρὰ
cal \ a /
σφᾶς κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν παροῦσαι, κατέσχον
ἃ > lal \ \ ” 2 > aA >
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐς
\ lal
5 φυλακὴν ἐποιήσαντο. τοῖς δὲ Μυτιληναίοις
5. > n "AO a ὃ βὰ 2
Εὔβοιαν καὶ πεζῇ ἐπὶ Γεραιστὸν “δ approach.
UZ δι VA 2 / 9 / lel
ἐλθών, ὁλκάδος ἀναγομένης ἐπιτυχών, πλῷ
a “ > fal
χρησάμενος καὶ τριταῖος ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν ἐς
/ Ν
Μυτιλήνην ἀφικόμενος ἀγγέλλει τὸν ἐπίπλουν.
\ / a
606 δὲ οὔτε ἐς τὸν Μαλόεντα ἐξῆλθον, τά τε
Μ. a a \ / \ \ ς
ἄλλα τῶν τειχῶν καὶ λιμένων περὶ τὰ ἡμι-
4. τέλεστα φαρξάμενοι ἐφύλασσον. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθη-
ναῖοι οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον καταπλεύ- War between
᾿ nens an
σαντες ὡς ἑώρων, ἀπήγγειλαν μὲν Lesbos.
ε DY
οἱ στρατηγοὶ Ta ἐπεσταλμένα, οὐκ ἐσακουόν-
\ al /
tov δὲ τῶν Μυτιληναίων és πόλεμον καθί-
σταντο. ἀπαράσκευοι δὲ οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι καὶ
> he ’ ἧς a ” /
ἐξαίφνης ἀναγκασθέντες πολεμεῖν ἔκπλουν μέν
Twa ἐποιήσαντο τῶν νεῶν ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν

to

33. πέρι Haase: πέριξ Meineke.
4. 8. ναυμαχίᾳ ABEFM.

οι

οὐ

ὮΝ

σι

for)

5

2

4 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

> ὔ Ν fal , » ᾽ν
ὀλίγον πρὸ τοῦ λιμένος, ἔπειτα καταδιωχθέντες
ἣν fal ΕῚ n rn / ,
ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν νεῶν λόγους ἤδη προσέ-
n fal / n \
φερον τοῖς στρατηγοῖς, βουλόμενοι τὰς ναῦς TO
’ὔ vA «ς r
παραυτίκα, εἰ δύναιντο, ὁμολογίᾳ τινὶ ἐπιεικεῖ
> / Ν Γ \ A ’
ἀποπέμψασθαι. καὶ οἱ στρατηγοὶ τῶν Αθη-
la > / \ > \ / \ >
ναΐων ἀπεδέξαντο καὶ αὐτοὶ φοβούμενοι μὴ οὐχ
φ \ 9 / , fal N >
ἱκανοὶ ὦσι Λέσβῳ πάσῃ πολεμεῖν. καὶ av-
\ , ,
An armistice. οκωχὴν ποιησάμενοι πέμπουσιν ἐς

pypilone sends πὸὺς ᾿Αθήνας οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι τῶν

; 2

Sgnesaice τε διαβαλλόντων ἕνα, ᾧ μετέμελεν

» \ », Ὑ if \ a

ἤδη, καὶ ἄλλους, εἴ πως πείσειαν Tas vats

Φ a ¢ lal SENN: » >

ἀπελθεῖν ὡς σφῶν οὐδὲν νεωτεριούντων. ἐν

yi \ ’ / \ > \ /

τούτῳ δὲ ἀποστέλλουσι Kai ἐς τὴν Λακεδαί-
i \ a

μονα πρέσβεις τριήρει, λαθόντες τὸ τῶν ᾿Αθη-

4 , ON Ὁ a / Ν

ναίων ναυτικὸν, οὗ ὥρμουν ἐν τῇ Marea πρὸς

“» / ld -

βορέαν τῆς πόλεως" οὐ γὰρ ἐπίστευον τοῖς
\ rn > 7 , \

ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων προχωρήσειν. καὶ οἱ μὲν

3 \ , , \ a /

és τὴν Λακεδαίμονα ταλαιπώρως διὰ τοῦ πελά-
/ a

yous κομισθέντες αὐτοῖς ἔπρασσον ὅπως τις

na > fal /
βοήθεια ἥξει" οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν πρέσβεις
. ῸΝΝ 5 Ψ ΕΣ /
War renewed. ὡς οὐδὲν ἦλθον πράξαντες, és πόλε-

flelp αν. wov καθίσταντο οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι καὶ
en oh ἡ ἄλλη Λέσβος πλὴν Μηθύμνης:

an rd , \
οὗτοι δὲ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐβεβοηθήκεσαν, καὶ
Ἴμβριοι καὶ Λήμνιοι καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὀλίγοι
τινὲς ξυμμάχων. καὶ ἔξοδον μέν τινα πανδημεὶ
> / « a > \ A lal 5
ἐποιήσαντο οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι ἐπὶ τὸ τῶν ᾿Αθη-
/ ῳ δ
ναίων στρατόπεδον, καὶ μάχη ἐγένετο, ἐν ἡ
> Μ BA ς an ”
οὐκ ἔλασσον ἔχοντες οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι οὔτε
28. ἐν τῇ Μαλέᾳ del. Herwerden.

10

σι

10

3

4

2

7

6

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ I (4—7) 5

? / ΝΜ ? / / > ΄
ἐπηυλίσαντο οὔτε ἐπίστευσαν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς,
2 > > , Μ 4 \ e , >
ἀλλ᾽ ἀνεχώρησαν: ἔπειτα οἱ μὲν ἡσύχαξον, ἐκ
Πελοποννήσου καὶ μετ’ ἄλλης παρασκευῆς
/ , 4 XN
βουλόμενοι εἰ προσγένοιτό τι κινδυνεύειν: καὶ
γὰρ αὐτοῖς Μελέας Λάκων ἀφικνεῖται καὶ
lal εἶ A
“Ἑρμαιώνδας Θηβαῖος, of προαπεστάλησαν μὲν
τῆς ἀποστάσεως, φθάσαι δὲ οὐ δυνάμενοι τὸν
a 3 / ? / / Ἂς \
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπίπλουν κρύφα μετὰ τὴν
/
μάχην ὕστερον ἐσπλέουσι τριήρει, Kal παρή-
͵ὕ ᾽
νουν πέμπειν τριήρη ἄλλην καὶ πρέσβεις μεθ
rn > a
ἑαυτῶν: Kal ἐκπέμπουσιν. of δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
πολὺ ἐπιρρωσθέντες διὰ τὴν τῶν The Athenians
; Α ᾿ , prepare to invest
Μυτιληναίων ἡσυχίαν ξυμμάχους Mytilene.
τε προσεκάλουν, of πολὺ θᾶσσον παρῆσαν
Cra 2Q\ > \ » \ a / \
ὁρῶντες οὐδὲν ἰσχυρὸν ἀπὸ τῶν Λεσβίων, καὶ
/ na /
περιορμισάμενοι TO πρὸς νότον τῆς πόλεως
/ an /
ἐτείχισαν στρατόπεδα δύο ἑκατέρωθεν τῆς πό-
/ a
News, Kal τοὺς ἐφόρμους ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς
λιμέσιν ἐποιοῦντο. καὶ τῆς μὲν θαλάσσης
53 ‘ \ na \ Ψ" “ \
εἶργον μὴ χρῆσθαι τοὺς Μυτιληναίους, τῆς δὲ
na rn \ ” 2 ,ὔ 4 a
γῆς τῆς μὲν ἄλλης ἐκράτουν οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι
καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι Λέσβιοι προσβεβοηθηκότες ἤδη,
\ \ \ \ , > \ al
τὸ δὲ περὶ τὰ στρατόπεδα ov πολὺ κατεῖχον
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ναύσταθμον δὲ μᾶλλον ἣν αὐτοῖς
πλοίων καὶ ἀγορὰ ἡ Μαλέα. καὶ τὰ μὲν
a J. A > a
περὶ Μυτιλήνην οὕτως ἐπολεμεῖτο.
Κατὰ δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον τοῦ θέρους
τούτου ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ περὶ Ἰ1Π]έλο- WestCoast

, = hears , OF GREECE.
ποννησον ναῦς ἀπέστειλαν τριά- Athenian fleet

15. ἀγορὰ Kriiger: ἀγορᾶς codd.

to

0

σι

15

oo

μ»

on

8

i)

6 OBOYKYAIAOY

\ 3 , Ν A
senttoNau. KovTa καὶ ᾿Ασώπιον τὸν Φορμίωνος
pactus, whence / ΄ ’ ΄
an unsuccessful OTPaTHYOV, κελευσάντων Ακαρνάνων δ
attack is made A , , , ,
on Oeniadae τῶν Dopyiwvos twa σφίσι πέμψαι
and Leucas. x εχ ΕἾ Ἂν \

ἢ υἱὸν ἢ ξυγγενῆ ἄρχοντα. καὶ
, ε a A aA
παραπλέουσαι at νῆες τῆς Λακωνικῆς τὰ ἐπι-

,
θαλάσσια χωρία ἐπόρθησαν. ἔπειτα τὰς μὲν

,ὔ / lal fal
πλείους ἀποπέμπει TOV νεῶν πάλιν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου 10
€ 3 ΤΑ 2 ἊΝ ᾿] » ΄ 5 a
ὁ ᾿Ασώπιος, αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἔχων δώδεκα ἀφικνεῖται
4 > al
és Ναύπακτον, καὶ ὕστερον ᾿Ακαρνᾶνας ava-
/ \ ΄ ’
στήσας πανδημεὶ στρατεύει ἐπ᾽ Οἰνιάδας, καὶ
» x \ iN 3 a ” Ν
ταῖς τε ναυσὶ κατὰ τὸν ᾿Αχελῴον ἔπλευσε καὶ
f \ aA \ , \ , tiny
ὁ κατὰ γῆν στρατὸς ἐδήου THY χώραν. ὡς δ᾽ 1
ὦ Ν δ ἢ / \
οὐ προσεχώρουν, Tov μὲν πεζὸν ἀφίησιν, αὐτὸς
\ , >’ 4 \ > , 3
δὲ πλεύσας és Λευκάδα καὶ ἀπόβασιν ἐς
a /
Νήρικον ποιησάμενος ἀναχωρῶν διαφθείρεται
/ n a / Xx a
αὐτὸς τε Kal τῆς στρατιᾶς τι μέρος ὑπὸ τῶν
νι / 4 \ a a
αὐτόθεν τε ξυμβοηθησάντων καὶ φρουρῶν τινῶν 2
/ / \ \
ὀλίγων. καὶ ὕστερον ὑποσπόνδους τοὺς νεκροὺς
’ Je thee) a \ Ὁ
ἀποπλεύσαντες of ᾿Αθηναῖοι παρὰ τῶν Λευκα-
/ /
δίων ἐκομίσαντο.

Οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πρώτης νεὼς ἐκπεμφθέντες
Mytilenean Μυτιληναίων πρέσβεις, ὡς αὐτοῖς
envoys at ἕ ; = a ἢ
Olympia. of Λακεδαιμόνιοι εἶπον ᾿Ολυμπίαζε

παρεῖναι, ὅπως καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ξύμμαχοι
ἀκούσαντες βουλεύσωνται, ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς τὴν
Ὀλυμπίαν: ἣν δὲ Ὀλυμπιὰς 7 Δωριεὺς Ῥόδιος
τὸ δεύτερον ἐνίκα. καὶ ἐπειδὴ μετὰ τὴν ἑορτὴν
κατέστησαν ἐς λόγους, εἶπον τοιάδε.

σι

20. αὐτόθι CG.

9

bo

oo

10

bo

3

9
10

STOPION Τ' (7—10) 7

“TS μὲν καθεστὸς τοῖς “EXAnot νόμιμον, ὦ
Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι, ἴσμεν" gxordium of
τοὺς γὰρ ἀφισταμένους ἐν τοῖς er speech.
πολέμοις καὶ ξυμμαχίαν τὴν πρὶν ἀπολείποντας
οἱ δεξάμενοι, καθ᾽ ὅσον μὲν ὠφελοῦνται, ἐν δ
ἡδονῇ ἔχουσι, νομίζοντες δὲ εἶναι προδότας
τῶν πρὸ τοῦ φίλων χείρους ἡγοῦνται. καὶ
οὐκ ἄδικος αὕτη ἡ ἀξίωσίς ἐστιν, εἰ τύχοιεν
πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἵ τε ἀφιστάμενοι καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὧν
διακρίνοιντο ἴσοι μὲν τῇ γνώμῃ ὄντες καὶ τὸ
εὐνοίᾳ, ἀντίπαλοι δὲ τῇ παρασκευῇ καὶ δυνάμει,
πρόφασίς τε ἐπιεικὴς μηδεμία ὑπάρχοι τῆς
ἀποστάσεως: ὃ ἡμῖν καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις οὐκ ἦν,
μηδέ τῳ χείρους δόξωμεν εἶναι εἰ ἐν τῇ
εἰρήνῃ τιμώμενοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς
ἀφιστάμεθα.

μ᾿
i)

ce I \ \ “ ὃ , \ ’ a a
ερὶ yap τοῦ δικαίου καὶ ἀρετῆς πρῶτον
/ “4:
ἄλλως τε καὶ ξυμμαχίας δεόμενοι Exposition of
, , , ἼΘῚΓ relavions
τοὺς λόγους ποιησόμεθα, εἰδότες οὔτε with Athens.
@ grounds for
φιλίαν ἰδιώταις βέβαιον γιγνομένην the revolt.
, , , , \ ’
οὔτε κοινωνίαν πόλεσιν ἐς οὐδέν, EL μὴ μετ
> A / ’ ’ t , Ν
ἀρετῆς δοκούσης ἐς ἀλλήλους γίγνοιντο καὶ
2 e id s > \ a ,
τἄλλα ὁμοιότροποι εἶεν" ἐν γὰρ τῷ διαλλάσσοντι
τῆς γνώμης καὶ αἱ διαφοραὶ τῶν ἔργων
/ Ὁ r \ \ Ε , Vd
καθίστανται. ἡμῖν δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις ξυμμαχία
, an / a nr
ἐγένετο πρῶτον ἀπολιπόντων μὲν ὑμῶν ἐκ TOV 10
Μηδικοῦ πολέμου, παραμεινάντων δὲ ἐκείνων
κ \ , an ,
πρὸς τὰ ὑπόλοιπα τῶν ἔργων. ξύμμαχοι

οι

13. post ὃ add. καὶ C.
6. γίγνοιτο Boehme.

8 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

/ > / > eae , a
μέντοι ἐγενόμεθα οὐκ ἐπὶ καταδουλώσει τῶν
«ς ’

Ελλήνων ᾿Αθηναίοις, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθερώσει ἀπὸ
a a /
4 τοῦ Μήδου τοῖς “EXXnow. καὶ μέχρι μὲν ἀπὸ
n lal /
Tov ἴσου ἡγοῦντο, προθύμως εἱπόμεθα ἐπειδὴ
δὲ ἑωρῶμεν αὐτοὺξῤ τὴ μὲν τοῦ Μήδου
ἔχθραν avévtas, τὴν δὲ τῶν ξυμμάχων
δούλωσιν ἐπαγομένους, οὐκ ἀδεεῖς ἔτι ἦμεν.
2O7 AP Ἂν Laer | , \
5 ἀδύνατοι δὲ ὄντες καθ᾽ ἕν γενόμενοι διὰ πολυ-
if 4
ψηφίαν ἀμύνασθαι οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐδουλώθησαν
\ (of aia ᾿ , ς lal \ am, \
πλὴν ἡμῶν Kal Χίων: ἡμεῖς δὲ αὐτόνομοι δὴ
A ,
ὄντες καὶ ἐλεύθεροι TH ὀνόματι Evvertpated-
fs
6 σαμεν. Kal πιστοὺς οὐκέτι εἴχομεν ἡγεμόνας
, a f
᾿Αθηναίους, παραδείγμασι τοῖς “ππτρογυγνομένοις
9 \ a \
χρώμενοι" οὐ yap εἰκὸς ἣν αὐτοὺς οὺς μὲν
lal / /
μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν ἐνσπόνδους ἐποιήσαντο καταστρέ-
\ x ς / ” ”
ψασθαι, τοὺς δὲ ὑπολοίπους, εἴ ποτε ἄρα
11 ἐδυνήθησαν, μὴ δρᾶσαι τοῦτος καὶ εἰ μὲν
/ 9 /
αὐτόνομοι ἔτι ἦμεν ἅπαντες, βεβαιότερον ἂν
ἡμῖν ἦσαν μηδὲν νεωτεριεῖν: ὑποχειρίους δὲ
ἔχοντες τοὺς πλείους, ἡμῖν δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου
€ n / 3 / Μ ”
ομιλοῦντες, χαλεπώτερον εἰκότως ἐμελλον οἴσειν
καὶ πρὸς τὸ πλέον ἤδη εἶκον τοῦ ἡμετέρου
᾿ς
ἔτι μόνου ἀντισουμένου, ἄλλως τε καὶ ὅσῳ
δυνατώτεροι αὐτοὶ αὑτῶν ἐγίγνοντο καὶ ἡμεῖς
2 / \ \ b) 4 / ,
2 ἐρημότερο. τὸ δὲ ἀντίπαλον δέος μόνον
¢e ,
πιστὸν ἐς ξυμμαχίαν: ὁ yap παραβαίνειν τι
a / a
βουλόμενος τῷ μὴ προύχων ἂν ἐπελθεῖν
b / , eis , 2 > ᾽
8 ἀποτρέπεται. αὐτόνομοί τε ἐλείφθημεν οὐ δι

19, ἐπειγομένους Ross. 25. προγενομένοις Hude: προ-
γεγενημένοις Weidner. 29. δυνηθεῖεν Dobree.

τ

σι

5

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (10--19) 9

ἴλλο ἢ ὅ ὑτοῖς ἐς τὴν ἀρχὴν εὐπρεπείᾳ
ἄ τι ἢ ὅσον αὐτοῖς ἐς τὴν ἀρχὴν εὐπρεπείς
΄ \ ͵ n ἘΣ] ae 3 ΄
τε λόγου καὶ γνώμης μᾶλλον ἐφόδῳ ἢ ἰσχύος
\
47a πράγματα ἐφαίνετο καταληπτά. ἅμα μὲν 15
a \ x ΄ὔ
γὰρ μαρτυρίῳ ἐχρῶντο μὴ ἂν τούς γε
» / e , 7 , 2>Q/7
ἰσοψήφους ἑκόντας, εἰ μή TL ἠδίκουν οἷς
a a a x
ἐπῇσαν, ξυστρατεύειν: ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ δὲ Kal τὰ
κράτιστα ἐπί τε τοὺς ὑποδεεστέρους πρώτους
n lal , rn
ξυνεπῆγον καὶ [τὰ] τελευταῖα λιπόντες τοῦ 30
Ν / 5 / ΨΥ a
ἄλλου περιῃρημένου ἀσθενέστερα ἔμελλον ἕξειν.
> \ b 3 © A ” 2 4 » a
δεὶ δὲ ad ἡμῶν ἤρξαντο, ἐχόντων ἔτι τῶν
πάντων αὐτῶν τε ἰσχὺν καὶ πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ
an e £
θ στῆναι, οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως ἐχειρώσαντο. TO TE
a lal τ ,ὔ
ναυτικὸν ἡμῶν παρεῖχέ τινα φόβον μή ποτε
> ἃ , x Cae AN x »
καθ᾽ ἕν γενόμενον ἢ ὑμν ἢ ἄλλῳ τῳ
/ / ’ὔ \ \
7 προσθέμενον κίνδυνον σφίσι παράσχῃ. τὰ δὲ
καὶ ἀπὸ θεραπείας τοῦ τε κοινοῦ αὐτῶν καὶ
lal 2 if
8τῶν αἰεὶ προεστώτων περιεγιγνόμεθα. οὐ
, b hs Soh ip 3 n > a a
μέντοι ἐπὶ πολύ γ᾽ ἂν ἐδοκοῦμεν δυνηθῆναι, 30
ΝΣ e /
εἰ μὴ ὁ πόλεμος ὅδε κατέστη, παραδείγμασι
, a > \ ” , 5 ¢
12 χρώμενοι τοῖς ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους. Tis οὖν αὕτη
a / Suen: XK , V4 > ἫΝ
ἢ φιλία ἐγίγνετο ἢ ἐλευθερία πιστή, ἐν ἡ
: \ , 3 / « / Ὗ e
Tapa γνώμην ἀλλήλους ὑπεδεχόμεθα, καὶ ol
\ r a
μὲν ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ δεδιότες ἐθεράπευον,
aA lal \
ἡμεῖς δὲ ἐκείνους ἐν τῇ ἡσυχίᾳ TO αὐτὸ 5
ἐποιοῦμεν; ὅ τε τοῖς ἄλλοις μάλιστα εὔνοια
/ lal 6 “ rn e / 5 Ν
πίστιν βεβαιοῖ, ἡμῖν τοῦτο ὁ φόβος ἐχυρὸν
“-“ /
παρεῖχε, δέει τε TO πλέον ἢ φιλίᾳ κατεχόμενοι

το
σι

11 17. ἑκόντας 8610]. : ἄκοντας codd. 20. τὰ del. Kriiger.
30. δοκοῦμεν Kriiger: ἔτι δοκοῦμεν Steup.
12... ὃ pr. ἢ cfG: ἡ cett. 7. πίστιν del. Classen.

τῷ

co

13

10 OBOYKYAIAOY

, 9 e , a ,
ξύμμαχοι tev: καὶ ὁποτέροις θᾶσσον παρά-
> , , e , , \
oxo. ἀσφάλεια θάρσος, οὗτοι πρότεροί τι Kat 10
΄ ΝΜ [γέ ν Loe
παραβήσεσθαι ἔμελλον. ὥστε εἴ τῳ δοκοῦμεν
> lal ’, \ \ / ,
ἀδικεῖν προωαποστάντες διὰ τὴν ἐκείνων μέλλησιν
a 2 a n if
τῶν ἐς ἡμᾶς δεινῶν, αὐτοὶ οὐκ ἀνταναμείναντες
na 3 Ψ a 9 a
σαφῶς εἰδέναι εἴ τι αὐτῶν ἔσται, οὐκ ὀρθῶς
aA > : 5 A es
σκοπεῖ. εἰ yap δυνατοὶ ἦμεν ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου καὶ 15
2 a n , Μ
ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι καὶ ἀντιμελλῆσαι, τί ἔδει
an rn e if > , > >
ἡμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι; ἐπ
> / \ ” IES n > n \ 24°?
ἐκείνοις δὲ ὄντος αἰεὶ Tod ἐπιχειρεῖν Kal ἐφ
rn 4 lal \ rf
ἡμῖν εἶναι δεῖ τὸ προαμύνασθαι.
-ς T ΄ » , \ ἈΠ 5
ovavTas ἔχοντες προφάσεις καὶ αἰτίας, ὦ
/ 2 a
Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι, ἀπέστημεν, σαφεῖς
Ν - ve a / ,
μὲν τοῖς ἀκούουσι γνῶναι ws εἰκότως ἐδρά-
e \ \ ἘΣ δὲ > a \ \
σαμεν, ixavas δὲ ἡμᾶς ἐκφοβῆσαι καὶ πρὸς
/ ΤΡ ΣΝ \
ἀσφάλειάν τινα τρέψαι, βουλομένους μὲν καὶ
aN ee ” 5 aA » / 3 / e
πάλαι, ὅτε ETL ἐν TH εἰρήνῃ ἐπέμψαμεν ὡς
a a \
ὑμᾶς περὶ ἀποστάσεως, ὑμῶν δὲ ov προσ-
/ / fal \ \
δεξαμένων κωλυθέντας: νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ Βοιωτοὶ
Ἂν /
προυκαλέσαντο εὐθὺς ὑπηκούσαμεν, καὶ ἐνομί-
fal / ,
ζομεν ἀποστήσεσθαι διπλῆν ἀπόστασιν, ἀπὸ τε 1
a ¢ / \ 3} lal al 3 \
τῶν λλήνων μὴ ξὺν κακῶς ποιεῖν αὐτοὺς
5 2 , a /
μετ ᾿Αθηναίων ἀλλὰ ξυνελευθεροῦν, ἀπὸ τε
> a 3 ,
Αθηναίων μὴ αὐτοὶ διαφθαρῆναι ὑπ ἐκείνων
ἐν ὑστέρῳ ἀλλὰ προποιῆσαι.
¢ , , an n
Η μέντοι ἀπόστασις ἡμῶν θᾶσσον γεγένηται 15

σι

9. ἢμεν] εἶναι CG. 16. ἀντιμελλῆσαι Schol. alter:
ἀντεπιμελλῆσαι codd.: ἀντιμελλῆσαί τι Heilmann, qui post
ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι distinxit. 17. ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι del. Bohme:

ἐκείνους ἱέναι Kriiger.

~

-

STOPION IT (12—13) 11

\ > id Φ Ν na \ /
καὶ ἀπαράσκευος" ἡ καὶ μᾶλλον χρὴ ξυμμάχους
/ e a \ / /
δεξαμένους ἡμᾶς διὰ ταχέων βοή- Reasons why
, “ , the Pelopon-
θειαν ἀποστέλλειν, ἵνα φαίνησθε jesians chould
Ἂ ~ send help.
ἀμύνοντές τε οἷς δεῖ καὶ ἐν τῷ “Vere?

> a \ / ΄, \ \
αὐτῷ τοὺς πολεμίους βλάπτοντες. καιρὸς δὲ
΄ , / x 2 A
ὡς οὔπω πρότερον. νόσῳ τε yap ἐφθάραται

an ΄, a
᾿Αθηναῖοι Kal χρημάτων δαπάνῃ, vijés τε
“ 3
αὐτοῖς αἱ μὲν περὶ τὴν ὑμετέραν εἰσίν, αἱ ὃ
᾽ Lal > \ \
ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν τετάχαται. ὥστε οὐκ εἰκὸς αὐτοὺς
nr al lal /

περιουσίαν νεῶν ἔχειν, ἢν ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ θέρει
~ / \ a ee 2 ΄ \
τῴδε ναυσί Te Kal πεζῷ ἅμα ἐπεσβάλητε TO

ε [

/ > > x e a > > nr ? /
δεύτερον, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ὑμᾶς οὐκ ἀμυνοῦνται ἐπιπλέ-
οντας ἢ ἀπ᾿ ἀμφοτέρων ἀποχωρήσονται. νομίσῃ
τε μηδεὶς ἀλλοτρίας γῆς πέρι οἰκεῖον κίνδυνον
ἕξε » γὰρ δοκεῖ μακρὰν ἀπεῖναι ἡ Λέσβο
ἕξειν. ᾧ γὰρ δοκεῖ μακρὰ vat ἡ Λέσβος,

AN 4 , b] lal ? 4 a > AY
τὴν ὠφελίαν αὐτῷ ἐγγύθεν παρέξει. ov yap

ἄς ΝΎ lal ς /
ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ ἔσται ὁ πόλεμος, ὥς τις οἴεται,
ἀλλὰ δι ἣν ἡ ᾿Αττικὴ ὠφελεῖται. ἔστι δὲ

rn \ fal /

TOV χρημάτων ἀπὸ τῶν ξυμμάχων ἡ πρόσοδος,
καὶ ἔτι μείζων ἔσται, εἰ ἡμᾶς καταστρέψονται"
οὔτε γὰρ ἀποστήσεται ἄλλος τά τε ἡμέτερα
, Ψ' BY
προσγενήσεται, πάθοιμέν τ᾽ ἂν δεινότερα ἢ
e \ / th \ id lal
οἱ πρὶν δουλεύοντες. βοηθησάντων δὲ ὑμῶν
ν᾿ / / x.
προθύμως πόλιν τε προσλήψεσθε ναυτικὸν
ἔχουσαν μέγα, οὗπερ ὑμῖν. μάλιστα προσδεῖ,

\ bd] / cree / ς fal
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους ῥᾷον καθαιρήσετε ὑφαιροῦντες

> n \ / 7 \ rn
αὐτῶν τοὺς ξυμμάχους (θρασύτερον yap πᾶς τις

/ / ! 4
προσχωρήσεται), THY τε αἰτίαν ἀποφεύξεσθε
ἃ \ a a
ἣν εἴχετε μὴ βοηθεῖν τοῖς ἀφισταμένοις. ἢν
44, ἔχετε BG.

25

ΓΝ

0

14

2

18

to

15

12 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

δ᾽ ἐλευθεροῦντες φαίνησθε, τὸ κράτος τοῦ
tA
πολέμου βεβαιότερον ἕξετε.

“Αἰσχυνθέντες οὖν τάς τε τῶν Ελλήνων
Peroration. és ὑμᾶς ἐλπίδας καὶ Δία τὸν
7 7 2 Φ a e ἱρὰ ” \ f 2

λύμπιον, ἐν οὗ τῷ ἱερῷ ἴσα καὶ ἱκέται
> / > ΄ ie tp
ἐσμέν, ἐπαμύνατε ΜΜυτιληναίοις ξύμμαχοι

, a a
γενόμενοι, καὶ μὴ προῆσθε ἡμᾶς ἴδιον μὲν
τὸν κίνδυνον τῶν σωμάτων παραβαλλομένους,

\ \ Ν > n a > /
κοινὴν δὲ τὴν ἐκ τοῦ κατορθῶσαι ὠφελίαν
ἅπασι δώσοντας, ἔτει δὲ κοινοτέραν τὴν

a /
βλάβην, εἰ μὴ πεισθέντων ὑμῶν σφαλησόμεθα.
’, rn
γίγνεσθε δὲ ἄνδρες οἵουσπερ ὑμᾶς οἵ τε
7 a
“Ἕλληνες ἀξιοῦσι, καὶ τὸ ἡμέτερον δέος

΄ 3
βούλεται."

Τοιαῦτα μὲν οἱ Μυτιληναῖοι εἶπον. οἱ δὲ

,
δ τα Λακεδαιμόνιον καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι

3 x
Mylieneand ἐπειδὴ ἤκουσαν, προσδεξάμενοι τοὺς

Pel - ΄ \ ,
aN) a λόγους ξυμμάχους τε τοὺς Λεσβίους
fresh invasi ; Ν ᾿
of Attic. ρος προ ἡσανπῦν, καὶ THY ἕ ΤῊΣ
projected.

᾿Αττικὴν ἐσβολὴν τοῖς τε Evp-
μάχοις παροῦσι κατὰ τάχος ἔφραζον ἰέναι ἐς
τὸν ᾿Ισθμὸν τοῖς δύο μέρεσιν ὡς ποιησόμενοι,
καὶ avTol πρῶτοι ἀφίκοντο, καὶ ὁλκοὺς
παρεσκεύαζον τῶν νεῶν ἐν TH ᾿Ισθμῷ ὡς
ὑπεροίσοντες ἐκ τῆς Κορίνθου ἐς τὴν πρὸς
᾿Αθήνας θάλασσαν καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ ἅμα
ἐπιόντες. καὶ οἱ μὲν προθύμως ταῦτα
ἔπρασσον, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ξύμμαχοι βραδέως τε
ξυνελέγοντο καὶ ἐν καρποῦ ξυγκομιδῇ ἧσαν

7. παροῦσι del. Steup.

45

οι

15

ISTOPION Γ (13—17) 13

6 καὶ ἀρρωστίᾳ τοῦ στρατεύειν. αἰσθόμενοι δὲ
αὐτοὺς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοιν διὰ κατά- It is abandoned

on account of

γνωσιν ἀσθενείας σφῶν TapacKev- Athenian naval
activity. A

afouévous, δηλῶσαι βουλόμενοι ὅτι Peloponnesian |
οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἐγνώκασιν ἀλλ᾽ οἷοί τέ tion for Lesbos. δ
εἰσι μὴ κινοῦντες τὸ ἐπὶ Λέσβῳ ναυτικὸν καὶ
τὸ ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἐπιὸν ῥᾳδίως ἀμύνεσθαι,
ἐπλήρωσαν ναῦς ἑκατὸν ἐσβάντες αὐτοί τε
πλὴν ἱππέων καὶ πεντακοσιομεδίμνων καὶ οἱ
μέτοικοι, καὶ παρὰ τὸν ᾿Ισθμὸν ἀναγαγόντες 10
ἐπίδειξίν τε ἐποιοῦντο καὶ ἀποβάσεις τῆς
2 Πελοποννήσου 4 δοκοίη αὐτοῖς. οἱ δὲ Λακε-
δαιμόνιοι ὁρῶντες πολὺν τὸν παράλογον τά τε
ὑπὸ τῶν Λεσβίων ῥηθέντα ἡγοῦντο οὐκ ἀληθῆ
καὶ ἄπορα νομίζοντες, ὡς αὐτοῖς καὶ οἱ τὸ
ξύμμαχοι ἅμα οὐ παρῆσαν καὶ ἠγγέλλοντο
καὶ αἱ περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον τριάκοντα
νῆες τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τὴν περιοικίδα αὐτῶν
πορθοῦσαι, ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. ὕστερον
δὲ ναυτικὸν παρεσκεύαζον ὅ τι πέμψουσιν ἐς 2
τὴν Λέσβον, καὶ κατὰ πόλεις ἐπήγγελλον

oe)
Ss

a an 4

τεσσαράκοντα νεῶν πλῆθος καὶ ναύαρχον
᾽ ,
προσέταξαν ᾿Αλκίδαν, ὃς ἔμελλεν ἐπιπλεύσεσθαι.
’ a a
ἀνεχώρησαν δὲ καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ταῖς ἑκατὸν
\

17 ναυσίν, ἐπειδὴ καὶ ἐκείνους εἶδον. [καὶ κατὰ
Ν / rn a a
TOV χρόνον τοῦτον ὃν ai νῆες ἔπλεον ἐν τοῖς

lal \ “- “΄οὀ} > a ΕΣ \ /
πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες ἅμ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐνεργοὶ + κάλλει

i

i: erat A / \ Xx yw ,
ἐγένοντο, παραπλήσιαι δὲ Kal ἔτι πλείους

16 17. τριάκοντα del. Steup.
17,017 860], Steup. 3. κάλλει] σ᾽ καὶ X’ Herbst: καὶ
ἄλλῃ Stahl: μιᾷ πόλει Widmann.

14 ΘΟΥΚΎΛΔΙΔΛΟΝ

» 4 fa} / “ \ 7 \
2 ἀρχομένου τοῦ πολέμου. τὴν τε yap ᾿Αττικὴν 5
\ Yi Ν ὋΣ a \ /
καὶ Εὔβοιαν καὶ Σαλαμῖνα ἑκατὸν ἐφύλασσον,
\ \ / \ >
καὶ περὶ [᾿ελοπόννησον ἕτεραι ἑκατὸν ἦσαν,
\ δὲ e \ IU / \ 2 a
χωρὶς αἱ περὶ Ἰ]οτείδαιαν καὶ ἐν τοῖς
by / σ e a [2 εχ;
ἄλλοις χωρίοις, ὥστε αἱ πᾶσαι ἅμα ἐγίγνοντο

co

> ἜΝ ’ / \ / \
ἐν ἑνὶ θέρει διακόσιαι καὶ πεντήκοντα. καὶ τὸ
τὰ χρήματα τοῦτο μάλιστα ὑπανήλωσε μετὰ
Ποτειδαίας. τήν τε γὰρ [Ποτείδαιαν δίδραχμοι
ε A ’ 7 ae at \ \ e ,
ὁπλῖται ἐφρούρουν (αὑτῷ γὰρ καὶ ὑπηρέτῃ
> 4 fel is \
δραχμὴν ἐλάμβανε τῆς ἡμέρας), τρισχίλιοι μὲν
οἱ πρῶτοι, ὧν οὐκ ἐλάσσους διεπολιόρκησαν, 15
e / x \ / X / \
ἑξακόσιοι δὲ καὶ yidtor μετὰ Φορμίωνος, oi
a al a
TpoaTnrOov: νῆές τε αἱ πᾶσαι τὸν αὐτὸν
Ν
μισθὸν ἔφερον. τὰ μὲν οὖν χρήματα οὕτως
ὑπανηλώθη τὸ πρῶτον, καὶ νῆες τοσαῦται δὴ

rs

πλεῖσται ἐπληρώθησαν. 90
18 Μυτιληναῖοι δὲ κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον ὃν

ἢ 3

Lespos. The οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι περὶ τὸν ἰσθμὸν
Athenians, un- A Bak 7 e /
able to confine ἧσων ἐπὶ Μήθυμναν ὡς προδιδομένην
the Mytileneans . ἢ \ in ay,

to their walls, ἐστράτευσαν κατὰ γῆν αὐτοί τε
send Paches x pie tate t τ Ἢ

with reinforee- καὶ οἱ ἐπίκουροι" καὶ προσβαλόντες:
ments. He in- ἧς ;

vests Mytilene. Τῇ πόλει, ἐπειδὴ οὐ προυχώρει ἡ

οι

προσεδέχοντο, ἀπῆλθον ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αντίσσης καὶ
Πύρρας καὶ ᾿Ἐρέσου, καὶ καταστησάμενοι τὰ
ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι ταύταις βεβαιότερα καὶ τείχη
κρατύναντες διὰ τάχους ἀπῆλθον ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. 10
ς ἐστράτευσαν δὲ καὶ οἱ Μηθυμναῖοι ἀναχωρη-
σάντων αὐτῶν ἐπ᾽ "Αντισσαν" καὶ ἐκβοηθείας
τινὸξ γενομένης πληγέντες ὑπό τε τῶν
13, αὐτῳ ABCEF.

ISTOPION Γ' (17—20) 15

᾿Αντισσαίων καὶ τῶν ἐπικούρων ἀπέθανόν τε

᾿ς πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνεχώρησαν οἱ λοιποὶ κατὰ τάχος. 15

gol δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα, τούς τε
Μυτιληναίους τῆς γῆς κρατοῦντας καὶ τοὺς
σφετέρους στρατιώτας οὐχ ἱκανοὺς ὄντας
εἴργειν, πέμπουσι περὶ τὸ φθινόπωρον ἤδη
ἀρχόμενον Ilaynta τὸν ᾿᾿πικούρου στρατηγὸν 5
4 καὶ χιλίους ὁπλίτας ἑαυτῶν. οἱ δὲ αὐτερέται
πλεύσαντες τῶν νεῶν ἀφικνοῦνται καὶ περι-
τειχίζουσι Μυτιλήνην ἐν κύκλῳ ἁπλῴ τείχει"
φρούρια δ᾽ ἔστν ἣἧ ἐπὶ τῶν καρτερῶν

Ὁ
o

5 ἐγκατῳκοδόμηται. καὶ ἡ μὲν Μυτιλήνη κατὰ

το
a

/ ” > / Ἅ, bie an Ν 2
κράτος ἤδη ἀμφοτέρωθεν καὶ ἐκ γῆς καὶ ἐκ
e
θαλάσσης εἴργετο, Kal ὁ χειμὼν ἤρχετο
γίγνεσθαι. :
al

19 ΠΠροσδεόμενοι δὲ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι χρημάτων

és τὴν πολιορκίαν, καὶ αὐτοὶ First extra-
: ; r τὰ 5 , ordinary war-
ἐσενεγκόντες τότε πρῶτον ἐσφορὰν tax mised at
nens.
διακόσια τάλαντα, ἐξέπεμψαν καὶ rebuff in Asia.
ὰ a
ἐπὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἀργυρολόγους ναῦς δώδεκα 5
καὶ Λυσικλέα πέμπτον αὐτὸν στρατηγόν.
,

20 δὲ ἄλλα TE ἠργυρολόγει καὶ περιέπλει, καὶ
lol / > an > Ν Ἂς fal
τῆς Καρίας ἐκ Μυοῦντος ἀναβὰς διὰ τοῦ
Μαιάνδρου πεδίου μέχρι τοῦ Σανδίου λόφου,
ἐπιθεμένων τῶν Καρῶν καὶ ᾿Αναιυτῶν αὐτός 10

᾿ \ n ΜΝ an
te διαφθείρεται καὶ τῆς ἄλλης στρατιᾶς
πολλοί.
a > an fal a
20 Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος of Ἰ]λαταιῆς (ἔτι

18 24.3 Kriiger: of codd. 25. ἐγκατοικοδομεῖται Bloomfield :
ἐγκατῳκοδόμητο Haase: ἐγκατῳκοδομεῖτο Poppo: ἐγκατῳκοδομήθη

Bekker.

16 ΘΟΥ ΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ,

Ν b] rn € \ a /
yap ἐπολιορκοῦντο ὑπὸ τῶν Πελοποννησίων
καὶ Βοιωτῶν) ἐπειδὴ τῷ τε σίτῳ

, * lal
ἐπιλείποντι ἐπιέζοντο Kal ἀπὸ τῶν
Ἰ σης 0 a ? ,
the ines of the Αθηνῶν οὐδεμία ἐλπὶς ἣν τιμωρίας
ἴοῦσ Yi
pestouete οὐδὲ ἄλλη σωτηρία ἐφαίνετο, ἐπι-
7 > / \ > / ε
βουλεύουσιν αὐτοί τε καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ Evp-
πολιορκούμενοι πρῶτον μὲν πάντες ἐξελθεῖν
a \ n
καὶ ὑπερβῆναι τὰ τείχη τῶν πολεμίων, ἢν
δύνωνται βιάσασθαι, ἐσηγησαμένων τὴν πεῖραν τὸ
> n 7 an G / > \
αὐτοῖς Θεαινέτου τε τοῦ ‘Toruidouv ἀνδρὸς
4 ὅς Ed [ὃ a 7 A
μάντεως καὶ Εὐπομπίδου τοῦ Δαϊμάχου, ὃς
2 καὶ ἐστρατήγει: ἔπειτα οἱ μὲν ἡμίσεις
ἣν VA
ἀπώκνησάν πως τὸν κίνδυνον μέγαν ἡγησά-
7 Ἄ
μενοι, ἐς δὲ ἄνδρας διακοσίους καὶ εἴκοσι 15
΄ ΓΑΙ a γ.. 7 3 \ ,
μάλιστα ἐνέμειναν τῇ ἐξόδῳ ἐθελονταὶ τρόπῳ
8 τοιῷδε. κλίμακας ἐποιήσαντο ἴσας τῷ τείχει
τῶν πολεμίων: ἔἕξυνεμετρήσαντο δὲ ταῖς
a lal , Yj lal
ἐπιβολαῖς τῶν πλίνθων, ἣ ἔτυχε πρὸς σφᾶς
οὐκ ἐξαληλιμμένον τὸ τεῖχος αὐτῶν. ἠριθ- 2
μοῦντο δὲ πολλοὺ ἅμα τὰς ἐπιβολάς, καὶ
ἔμελλον οἱ μέν τινες ἁμαρτήσεσθαι οἱ δὲ
πλείους τεύξεσθαι τοῦ ἀληθοῦς λογισμοῦ,
ἄλλως τε καὶ πολλάκις ἀριθμοῦντες καὶ ἅμα
οὐ πολὺ ἀπέχοντες, ἀλλὰ ῥᾳδίως καθορωμένου 90
fal ἐν 9
4és ὃ ἐβούλοντο Tod τείχους. τὴν μὲν οὖν
ξυμμέτρησιν τῶν κλιμάκων οὕτως ἔλαβον, ἐκ
τοῦ πάχους τῆς πλίνθου εἰκάσαντες τὸ μέτρον.
᾿ς \ a 5 fal / ἐν fal
21 τὸ δὲ τεῖχος ἣν τῶν [Πελοποννησίων τοιόνδε TH

Ῥιάταάθα. The
Plataeans decide
to attempt to

σι

20 4. ἐπιλείποντι Naber: ἐπιλιπόντι codd. 10. ἐσηγησα-
μένου ABEFM vp. G. 12. Εὐπομπίδου KE: Εὐπολπίδου cett.
26. és ὃ] ὅσον Stahl.

bo

oo

22

ISTOPION Τ' (20—22) 17

= \ ,ὔ \ J
οἰκοδομήσει. εἶχε μὲν δύο τοὺς περιβόλους,
,ὔ lal \ »
πρὸς τε Ἰλαταιῶν καὶ εἰ TUS Description οἵ
nr / a ᾿ li Ss.
ἔξωθεν am’ ᾿Αθηνῶν ἐπίοι, διεῖχον “hr
\ ΄ ’ὔ € / / / > γ᾽
δὲ of περίβολοι ἑκκαίδεκα πόδας μάλιστα ἀπ
Ἁ fal .$ /
ἀλλήλων. τὸ οὖν μεταξὺ τοῦτο, οἱ ἑκκαίδεκα
4 -“ / > ,ὔ /
πόδες, τοῖς φύλαξιν οἰκήματα διανενεμημένα
> 50 \ > ἕξ an 2 A / θ
ὠκοδόμητο, καὶ ἣν ξυνεχῆ ὥστε ἕν φαίνεσθαι
n \ > f ΝΜ > if 0 ὃ \
τεῖχος παχὺ ἐπάλξεις ἔχον ἀμφοτέρωθεν. διὰ
/ \ b] 7 UZ φ A \
δέκα δὲ ἐπάλξεων πύργοι ἦσαν μεγάλοι καὶ
3 ce a ν᾽ / , Ἂς Μ
ἰσοπλατεῖς τῷ τείχει, διήκοντες ἔς τε τὸ ἔσω
/ fal Ψ' Ν Ν “
μέτωπον αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ αὐτοὶ καὶ τὸ ἔξω, ὥστε
\ 3 X vA ἃ \ >
πάροδον μὴ εἶναι παρὰ πύργον, ἀλλὰ διε
n ͵7 a \ ere « /
αὐτῶν μέσων διῇῆσαν. τὰς οὖν νύκτας, ὁπότε
\ ΝΜ , \ \ > Ἂ ΕΣ 7,
χειμὼν εἴη νοτερός, τὰς μὲν ἐπάλξεις ἀπέλειπον,
> \ an a Μ ’ > 7ὔ \
ἐκ δὲ τῶν πύργων ὄντων δι’ ὀλίγου Kal
Μ lal \ \ > “ ἊΝ
ἄνωθεν στεγανῶν τὴν φυλακὴν ἐποιοῦντο. τὸ
a Φ a φ rn e a
μὲν οὖν τεῖχος ᾧ περιεφρουροῦντο οἱ [[λαταιῆς
an € ᾽ A VA
τοιοῦτον ἦν. of δ᾽, ἐπειδὴ παρεσκεύαστο
> -“ 7, 4 /
αὕτοις, τ σαντες VUKTA ειμέριον The 220 attempt
Ἂ : ae Β Sects x " ρ to scale the wall
ὕδατι καὶ ἀνέμῳ καὶ ἅμ ἀσέληνον ona wet night.
a na ig an
ἐξῆσαν: ἡγοῦντο δὲ οἵπερ καὶ τῆς πείρας
-» x Ν,
αἴτιοι. ἦσαν. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν τὴν τάφρον
/ Δ an 3 if ΝΜ
διέβησαν ἣ περιεῖχεν αὐτούς, ἔπειτα προσ-
ἐμειξ δ Ἵ A λεμί λαθό
ἐμειξαν τῷ τείχει τῶν πολεμίων λαθόντες
\ 7, > \ \ Ἃς AN
Tous φύλακας, ava τὸ σκοτεινὸὸ μὲν οὐ
QJ ΕῚ fol / - rn
προϊδόντων αὐτῶν, ψόφῳ δὲ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ
ie > ,' al rn
προσιέναι αὐτοὺς ἀντιπαταγοῦντος τοῦ ἀνέμου
> /
οὐ KaTakovodyTwv: ἅμα δὲ Kal διέχοντες πολὺ
6. οἱ ἑκκαίδεκα πόδες del. Herwerden. 12. καὶ ante
αὐτοὶ del. Herbst.
C

οι

οι

18 ΘΟΥΚΥΎΔΙΔΟΥ

Φ ee οἷ “ \ , Ν
ἦσαν, ὅπως τὰ ὅπλα μὴ κρουόμενα πρὸς
7 3, A 9s N -
ἄλληλα αἴσθησιν παρέχοι. ἦσαν δὲ εὐσταλεῖς
a ¢ / x Ν Ni / fa
τε TH ὁπλίσει καὶ τὸν ἀριστερὸν μόνον πόδα
Ὁ ἊΨ > / “ a \ Ν
ὑποδεδεμένοι ἀσφαλείας ἕνεκα τῆς πρὸς τὸν
, \ μ / /
πηλόν. κατὰ οὗν μεταπύργιον προσέμισγον
\ \ 2 ΄ 2Q/ 4 δ. ποσὰ ,ὔ >
πρὸς τὰς ἐπάλξεις, εἰδότες ὅτι ἐρῆμοί εἰσι,
n \ δ \ , \
πρῶτον μὲν ol τὰς κλίμακας φέροντες, Kal
J Wf \
προσέθεσαν : ἔπειτα ψιλοὶ δώδεκα ξὺν ξιφιδίῳ
x ΄ 5 Ψ Φ «ς - a 9 A €
καὶ θώρακι ἀνέβαινον, ὧν ἡγεῖτο ᾿Αμμέας ὁ
/ x a 2 , \ N ΤΥ
Κοροίβου καὶ πρῶτος ἀνέβη: μετὰ δὲ αὐτὸν
ς « / aA b] > ς ᾿ lal /
οἱ ἑπόμενοι ἕξ ἐφ᾽ ἑκάτερον τῶν πύργων
7 \ a
ἀνέβαινον. ἔπειτα ψιλοὶ ἄλλοι μετὰ τούτους
\ / It
ξὺν δορατίοις ἐχώρουν, οἷς ἕτεροι κατόπιν τὰς
/ / a 3 oe ,
ἀσπίδας ἔφερον, ὅπως ἐκεῖνοι ῥᾷον προσβαίνοιεν,
Ν »Μ ( e , \ a vA
Kal ἔμελλον δώσειν ὁπότε πρὸς τοῖς πολεμίοις
9 6. \ ΝΜ / Sieh »
εἶεν. ὡς δὲ ἄνω πλείους ἐγένοντο, ἤσθοντο
€ 2 an γ΄ ,ἷ / z
οἱ ἐκ τῶν πύργων φύλακες: κατέβαλε yap τις
fal n / b \ a
τῶν Πλαταιῶν ἀντιλαμβανόμενος ἀπὸ τῶν
we a a ,
ἐπάλξεων κεραμίδα, ἣ πεσοῦσα δοῦπον ἐποίησεν.
\ bent | Ane \ \ “ Senay νὴ
καὶ αὐτίκα βοὴ ἣν, τὸ δὲ στρατόπεδον ἐπὶ τὸ
a , Ἂς Yj i by \ \
τεῖχος ὥρμησεν' ov yap ἤδει ὅ TL ἣν TO δεινὸν
fal \ an / \ e
σκοτεινῆς νυκτὸς Kal χειμῶνος ὄντος, καὶ ἅμα
an ,ὔ lal n VA
οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει τῶν Τ]λαταιῶν ὑπολελειμμένοι

ἐξελθόντες προσέβαλον τῷ τείχει τῶν Ἰ]ελο-:

/ 2 » x e ” 5 na
ποννησίων ἐκ τοὔμπαλιν ἢ οἱ ἄνδρες αὐτῶν
/ “ Ν \ \
ὑπερέβαινον, ὅπως ἥκιστα πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὸν
lal a \ 4 \
6vouv ἔχοιεν. ἐθορυβοῦντο μὲν οὖν κατὰ
, / a x > N ee 4 >
χώραν μένοντες, βοηθεῖν δὲ οὐδεὶς ἐτόλμα ἐκ

14. πόδα μόνον ABEF. 23-24. ἀνέβαινον et ἐχώρουν
transposuit Classen. 30. δοῦπον A: ψόφον cett. 35. προσ-
έβαλλον C. 36. ἢ Cf: 7 cett.

bo
οι

-.

28

to

ISTOPION Τ' (22—23) 19

a a a > > /
τῆς ἑαυτῶν φυλακῆς, ἀλλ᾿ ἐν ἀπόρῳ ἦσαν
/ /
εἰκάσαι τὸ γιγνόμενον. Kal οἱ τριακόσιοι
αὐτῶν, οἷς ἐτέτακτο παραβοηθεῖν εἴ τι δέοι,
rn / \ \ /
ἐχώρουν ἔξω τοῦ τείχους πρὸς τὴν βοήν.
/ ” ᾽ Ν Θ / ,
φρυκτοί τε ἤροντο ἐς τὰς Θήβας πολέμιοι"
a \ \ e > fol , n
παρανῖσχον δὲ καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ΠΙλαταιῆς
an \ ,
ἀπὸ τοῦ τείχους φρυκτοὺς πολλοὺς πρότερον
παρεσκευασμένους ἐς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ὅπως ἀσαφῆ
\ a a / lal , >
τὰ σημεῖα τῆς φρυκτωρίας τοῖς πολεμίοις ἢ
\ \ a ” , Ν ,
καὶ μὴ βοηθοῖεν, ἄλλο τι νομίσαντες τὸ γυγνό-
μενον εἶναι ἢ τὸ ὄν, πρὶν σφῶν οἱ ἄνδρες
ς > / / \ a > fal b
οἱ ἐξιόντες διαφύγοιεν καὶ τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς ἀντι-
᾽ lal a
λάβοιντο. οἱ δ᾽ ὑπερβαίνοντες τῶν Πλαταιῶν
᾽ vA e e lal > rn
ἐν τούτῳ, ὡς οἱ πρῶτοι αὐτῶν They succeed
΄ὔ la) i 4 i
ἀνεβεβήκεσαν καὶ τοῦ πύργου Wa eet
€ / / .
ἑκατέρου τοὺς φύλακας διαφθεί- er wench
, a
pavtes ἐκεκρατήκεσαν, τάς τε διόδους τῶν
» 9 4 > \ > ΄ Y é ?
πύργων ἐνστάντες αὐτοὶ ἐφύλασαον μηδένα δι
fal an /
αὐτῶν ἐπιβοηθεῖν, καὶ κλίμακας προσθέντες
Ν an na 4
ἀπὸ τοῦ τείχους τοῖς πύργοις Kal ἐπαναβιβά-
” a
σαντες ἄνδρας πλείους, of μὲ ἀπὸ τῶν
/ fa)
πύργων τοὺς ἐπιβοηθοῦντας καὶ κάτωθεν καὶ
» >
ἄνωθεν εἶργον βάλλοντες, of δ᾽ ἐν τούτῳ οἱ
/ \ / / “ \
πλείους πολλὰς προσθέντες κλίμακας ἅμα Kal
τὰς ἐπάλξεις ἀπώσαντες διὰ τοῦ μεταπυργίου
ε ͵,ὔ € \ , SUL “
ὑπερέβαινον. ὁ - δὲ διακομιζόμενος αἰεὶ ἵστατο
rn } fol rn
ἐπὶ τοῦ χείλους τῆς τάφρου καὶ ἐντεῦθεν
ἀρ", δῇ , \ ea ” a
érofevoy τε καὶ ἠκόντιζον, εἴ τις παραβοηθῶν
παρὰ τὸ τεῖχος κωλυτὴς γίγνοιτο τῆς

42, ἐπετέτακτο Kriiger. 48, ἔξωθεν C.

40

~

or

24

20 BOY KYAIAOY

a > x \ Uy /
διαβάσεως. ἐπεὶ δὲ πάντες διεπεπεραίωντο,
e an Ua a a
οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν πύργων χαλεπῶς οἱ τελευταῖοι
/ / \ ἣν ta
καταβαίνοντες ἐχώρουν ἐπὶ τὴν τάφρον, Kal
e , an
ἐν τούτῳ οἱ τριακόσιοι αὐτοῖς ἐπεφέροντο
4 ς \ 5 a
λαμπάδας ἔχοντες. οἱ μὲν οὖν Ἰ]λαταιῆς
, a n , an
ἐκείνους ἑώρων μᾶλλον ἐκ TOU σκότους ἑστῶτες
3. 4X a y fol / \ Sh, td
ἐπὶ τοῦ χείλους τῆς τάφρου, καὶ ἐτόξευόν τε
/ \ \ a
καὶ ἐσηκόντιζον ἐς Ta γυμνά, αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐν τῷ
5 - ” e \ N /
ἀφανεῖ ὄντες ἧσσον Sia τὰς λαμπάδας
“-“ “ lh an fal
καθεωρῶντο, ὥστε φθάνουσι, τῶν IIhataav
ἂν e “ vA \ /
καὶ οἱ ὕστατοι διαβάντες τὴν τάφρον,
ἴω st / - /
χαλεπῶς δὲ καὶ βιαίως: KpvoTadros τε γὰρ

vA / Sa] “ ’ “
ἐπεπήγει οὐ βέβαιος ἐν αὐτῇ wot ἐπελθεῖν, :

x /

ἀλλ οἷος ἀπηλιώτου ἢ βορέου ὑδατώδης
a \ €. Ἂν A tle a Ὁ
μᾶλλον, καὶ ἡ νὺξ τοιούτῳ ἀνέμῳ ὕπονει-

J \ x ef 5 ’ A 5 re ἃ
φομένη πολὺ τὸ ὕδωρ ἐν αὐτῇ ἐπεποιήκει, ὃ
/ vA \
μόλις ὑπερέχοντες ἐπεραιώθησαν. ἐγένετο δὲ
καὶ ἡ διάφευξις αὐτοῖς μᾶλλον διὰ τοῦ

na \ / e / x 2 Ν
χειμῶνος τὸ μέγεθος. ὁρμήσαντες δὲ ἀπὸ
212 of them τῆς τάφρου of Ἰϊλαταιῆς ἐχώρουν
reach Athens ; \ A , , cars
in safety. ἁθρόοι τὴν ἐς Θήβας φέρουσαν ὁδόν,

ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχοντες τὸ τοῦ ᾿Ανὸ L ἡρῷ
ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχοντες τὸ τοῦ Ανδροκράτους peor,
/ “ x a UA > \
νομίζοντες ἥκιστ᾽ «ἂν» σφᾶς ταύτην αὐτοὺς
ὑποτοπῆσαι τραπέσθαι τὴν ἐς τοὺς πολεμίους"
καὶ ἅμα ἑώρων τοὺς []ελοποννησίους τὴν
an 5)
πρὸς Κιθαιρῶνα καὶ Apvos κεφαλὰς τὴν ἐπ
᾿Αθηνῶν φέρουσαν μετὰ λαμπάδων διώκοντας.

bo
i=)

5

4 καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν ἐξ ἢ ἑπτὰ σταδίους οἱ Τ]λαταιῆς τὸ

28
24

31. ἢ βορέου del. Dobree.
5. ἂν add. Madvig.

is)

25

2
25

STOPION Τ' (23—25) 21

\ > \ aA le) > 4 ΝΜ >
τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν Θηβῶν ἐχώρησαν, ἔπειθ
“5
ὑποστρέψαντες ἦσαν τὴν Tpos τὸ ὄρος
A τῶν > , / \ ¢ , x
φέρουσαν ὁδὸν ἐς Epv@pas καὶ Touds, καὶ
/ fal rn
AaBopevor τῶν ὀρῶν διαφεύγουσιν ἐς τὰς
> Ud Ν
Αθήνας, ἄνδρες δώδεκα καὶ διακόσιοι ἀπὸ 15
, a <
πλειόνων" εἰσὶ γάρ τινες αὐτῶν οἱ ἀπετράποντο
> \ , \ e ΄ 7 SN
és τὴν πόλιν πρὶν ὑπερβαίνειν, els δ᾽ ἐπὶ
a \
τῇ ἔξω τάφρῳ τοξότης ἐλήφθη. οἱ μὲν
οὖν Ἰ]ελοποννήσιοι κατὰ χώραν ἐγένοντο τῆς
/ / e > 5 fol /
βοηθείας παυσάμενοι: οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως 20
an a \ f γὺ. 5 ,)
Πλαταιῆς τῶν μὲν γεγενημένων εἰδότες οὐδέν,
τῶν δὲ ἀποτραπομένων σφίσιν ἀπαγγειλάντων
ὡς οὐδεὶς περίεστι, κήρυκα ἐκπέμψαντες, ἐπεὶ
ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, ἐσπένδοντο ἀναίρεσιν τοῖς
lal / x \ τ \ 2 VA
νεκροῖς, μαθόντες δὲ TO ἀληθὲς ἐπαύσαντο.
e \ \ a a ” Ὁ
οἱ μὲν δὴ τῶν Πλαταιῶν ἄνδρες οὕτως
ὑπερβάντες ἐσώθησαν.
> \ a / a » fal a
Ex δὲ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος
τελευτῶντος ἐκπέμπεται Σάλαιθος 1 espos,
ξ s , Salaethus steals
ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος ἐς Μυτιλήνην into Mytilene

, \ ΄ > , and encourages
τριήρει. και πλεύσας ες Πύρραν the Denleged ἕο

καὶ ἐξ αὐτῆς πεζῇ κατὰ χαράδραν 4% δ
΄ ἃ
τινά, ἣ ὑπερβατν ἣν τὸ περιτείχισμα,
Ν ’ / > \ / Ν
διαλαθὼν ἐσέρχεται ἐς τὴν Μυτιλήνην, καὶ
ἔλεγε τοῖς προέδροις ὅτι ἐσβολή τε ἅμα ἐς
\ ᾽ \ a
τὴν Αττικὴν ἔσται Kal ai τεσσαράκοντα νῆες
/ an al
παρέσονται as ἔδει βοηθῆσαι αὐτοῖς, προ- τὸ
αποπεμφθῆναί τε avTos τούτων ἕνεκα καὶ
“ n ΜΝ 2: / i" e \
ἅμα τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιμελησόμενος. καὶ οἱ μὲν

to
οι

6. ὑποβατὸν Herwerden.

26

ἴω]

26

22 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

a > / \ x \
Μυτιληναῖοι ἐθάρσουν τε καὶ πρὸς τοὺς
\
᾿Αθηναίους ἧσσον εἶχον τὴν γνώμην ὥστε

ν / «“ \ » Δ Ψ' Φ \
ξυμβαίνειν. ὅ τε χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα οὗτος, Kal

/ » a / 2 te ae a
τέταρτον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε ὃν
Ψ
Θουκυδίδης ξυνέγραψεν.
rn > /
Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπυγιγνομένου θέρους οἱ Ἰϊελοπον-
The Pel. send νήσιοι ἐπειδὴ τὰς ἐς τὴν Μυτιλήνην
c1das with ἃ
fleet to Lesbos. δύο Kal τεσσαράκοντα ναῦς ἀπέ-
They invade τ Ν Fi A =
Attica. στείλαν ἄρχοντα ᾿Αλκίδαν, ὃς ἦν
nr / \
αὐτοῖς ναύαρχος, προστάξαντες, αὐτοὶ ἐς τὴν
> \ \ e / Seoul: Ὁ“ €
Αττικὴν καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐσέβαλον, ὅπως οἱ
> fal “ὦ
AOnvaio. ἀμφοτέρωθεν OopuBovpevor ἧσσον
ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐς τὴν Μυτιλήνην καταπλεούσαις
> » {- na \ an > n 4
ἐπιβοηθήσωσιν. ἡγεῖτο δὲ τῆς ἐσβολῆς ταύτης
“ na
Κλεομένης ὑπὲρ [Παυσανίου τοῦ Ἰ]λειστοά-
/
νακτος υἱέος βασιλέως ὄντος Kal νεωτέρου ἔτι,
Ἕ Ν Y fol
Tatpos δὲ ἀδελφὸς ὦν. ἐδήωσαν δὲ τῆς
ce an /
Αττικῆς τά Te πρότερον τετμημένα [καὶ] εἴ
> / Α, e 2 a \
τι ἐβεβλαστήκει καὶ ὅσα ἐν ταῖς πρὶν
ἐσβολαῖς παρελέλειπτο' καὶ ἡ ἐσβολὴ αὕτη
/ / a 3 ig Ἂ \
χαλεπωτάτη ἐγένετο τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις μετὰ τὴν
δευτέραν. ἐπιμένοντες γὰρ αἰεὲ ἀπὸ τῆς
Λέσβου τι πεύσεσθαι τῶν νεῶν ἔργον ὡς ἤδη
/ ? an NX \ /
πεπεραιωμένων ἐπεξῆλθον τὰ πολλὰ τέμνοντες.
e rd WON ? i > tad i /
ὡς δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἀπέβαινεν αὐτοῖς ὧν προσεδέχοντο
e lal ἮΝ
καὶ ἐπελελοίπει ὁ σῆτος, ἀνεχώρησαν καὶ
/
διελύθησαν κατὰ πόλεις.

3. δύο καὶ 560]. Kriiger. 4. ἄρχοντα Stephanus: ἔχοντα
codd. 8. καταπλεούσαις del. Steup. 12. prius δὲ] δὴ
Stahl. 13. καὶ del. L. Dindorf.

oO

10

μι

5

ISTOPION Τ' (25—28) 23

a ΓΑ
27 Ot δὲ Μυτιληναῖοι ἐν τούτῳ, ὡς αἵ τε
fal a > ᾽ \ an
νῆες αὐτοῖς οὐχ ἧκον ἀπὸ τῆς The fect had

/ / iv
᾿ς Πελοποννήσου ἀλλὰ ἐνεχρόνιζον καὶ τοῦ γος ἀπ νο

a , i
ο΄ ὁ σῖτος ἐπελελοίπει, ἀναγκάζονται Siatic party

‘ > a
ο΄ ξυμβαίνειν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους sovernment to
: ;
διὰ τάδε. ὁ Σάλαιθος καὶ αὐτὸς With Paches.
> / »” Ν “ «. / x
ov προσδεχόμενος ἔτι τὰς ναῦς ὁπλίζει τὸν
a / a
δῆμον πρότερον ψιλὸν ὄντα ὡς ἐπεξιὼν τοῖς
8 ᾿Αθηναίοις" οἱ δὲ ἐπειδὴ ἔλαβον ὅπλα, οὔτε
a lal / ,
ἠκροῶντο ἔτι τῶν ἀρχόντων, κατὰ ξυλλόγους 10
/ “
τε γιγνόμενοι ἢ τὸν σῖτον ἐκέλευον τοὺς
‘Suvatovs φέρειν ἐς τὸ φανερὸν καὶ διανέμειν
ἅπασιν, ἢ αὐτοὶ ξυγχωρήσαντες πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους
\ / i
28 ἔφασαν παραδώσειν τὴν πόλιν. γνόντες δὲ οἱ
a 3 ‘A
ἐν τοῖς πράγμασιν οὔτ᾽ ἀποκωλύειν δυνατοὶ
> n
ὄντες, εἴ τ ἀπομονωθήσονται τῆς Tho fate ot
ξυμβάσεως κινδυνεύσοντες, ποιοῦνται Mytiene to
a Ψ' , 4
κοινῇ ὁμολογίαν πρός τε Πάχητα * Athens δ
\ Ν , “ ᾽ Ψ \
καὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, ὥστε ᾿Αθηναίοις μὲν
-“ lal e lal
ἐξεῖναι βουλεῦσαι περὶ Μυτιληναίων ὁποῖον
ἄν τι βούλωνται καὶ τὴν στρατιὰν ἐς
\ / yd b] a VA Ν
τὴν πόλιν δέχεσθαι αὐτούς, πρεσβείαν δὲ

_

ἀποστέλλειν ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας Μυτιληναίους τὸ
\ « n ? ce > x 4 >.
περὶ ἑαυτῶν: ἐν ὅσῳ δ᾽ ἂν πάλιν ἔλθωσι,
Πάχητα μήτε δῆσαι Μυτιληναίων μηδένα
2 μηδὲ ἀνδραποδίσαι μήτε ἀποκτεῖναι. ἡ μὲν
ξύμβασις αὕτη ἐγένετο, οἱ δὲ πράξαντες πρὸς
, a “8
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους μάλιστα τῶν Μυτιληναίων 15

98 2. ἀποκωλύειν Stahl: ἀποκωλύσειν codd. 13. unde]
μήτε vulg.

8 τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις te δόξη. πέμψας δὲ καὶ ἐς

29

24 BOYKYAIAOY

an ” 6 e \ 9 lal ’
περιδεεῖς ὄντες, ὡς ἡ στρατιὰ ἐσῆλθεν, οὐκ
> ἡ ἐς ΝΕ 3 ἈΠῸ Ν \ \ o
ἡνέσχοντο, ἄλλ ἐπὶ τοὺς βωμοὺς ὅμως
/ ΄ 3 9 ,ὔ > x [2
καθίζουσιν Ilayns δ᾽ ἀναστήσας αὐτοὺς ὥστε
\; n -
μὴ ἀδικῆσαι, κατατίθεται ἐς Τένεδον μέχρι οὗ

to

\ » /
τὴν ᾿Αντισσαν τριήρεις προσεκτήσατο Kal
9 \ x Ἂς, / , -
τἄλλα τὰ περὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον καθίστατο 7
an /
αὐτῷ ἐδόκει.
}Σ Ὁ
Οἱ δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς τεσσαράκοντα ναυσὶ 1[]ελο-
/ ἃ ΄
Seven days after Ποννήσιοι, ods ἔδει ἐν τώχει παρα-
the Pel. ἢ , \
Lititocatthe ψενέσθαι, πλέοντες περί τε αὐτὴν
f Asia. \ ,
ὁοαϑῦ οὗ Asia. τὴν Ἰ]ελοπόννησον ἐνδιέτριψαν καὶ
\ \ ” ἴον lal /
κατὰ τὸν ἄλλον πλοῦν σχολαῖοι κομισθέντες
\ nN 9: rn / εἰ / i
τοὺς μὲν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ᾿Αθηναίους λανθά-
\ \ A / ” /
νουσι, πρὶν δὴ τῇ Δήλῳ ἔσχον, προσμείξαντες

an

2 Ae? δ Ag a 3 ΄, Ἶ »
δ᾽ amr αὐτῆς τῇ Ἰκάρῳ καὶ Μυκόνῳ πυν-
1A lal ve e J ΟΣ
θάνονται πρῶτον ὅτι ἡ Μυτιλήνη ἑάλωκεν.

/
2 βουλόμενοι δὲ TO σαφὲς εἰδέναι κατέπλευσαν 1

90

2

29

yy a 2
és “EuBarov τῆς “EpvOpaias: ἡμέραι δὲ μά-
A a , ε , e ἈΝ re.
Mota ἦσαν τῇ Μυτιλήνῃ ἑαλωκυίᾳ ἑπτὰ ὅτε
> eT / , N
ἐς τὸ “EuBatov κατέπλευσαν. πυθόμενοι δὲ
\ \ bY τὰ 5 a i AS
τὸ σαφὲς ἐβουλεύοντο ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, καὶ

ἔλεξεν αὐτοῖς Τευτίαπλος ἀνὴρ λεῖος τάδε. 1

“᾿Αλκίδα καὶ Πελοποννησίων ὅσοι πάρεσμεν
Animmediate ἄρχοντες τῆς στρατιᾶς, ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ
Motives" πλεῖν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ Μυτιλήνην πρὶν
τς ἐκπύστους γενέσθαι, ὥσπερ ἔχομεν.
κατὰ γὰρ τὸ εἰκὸς ἀνδρῶν νεωστὶ πόλιν 5

7. Μήλῳ Miiller-Striibing. 8. ᾿Ικάρῳ] Κάρῳ AE: Κλάρῳ
M: Πάρῳ Haase.

0

0

te)

-

91

90
31

ISTOPION I’ (28—31) 25

5 als \ Ν > , δι. Εν \
ἐχόντων πολὺ TO ἀφύλακτον εὑρήσομεν, κατὰ
\ / ΟΥ̓ ΄ὔ ka > lal / > /
μὲν θάλασσαν καὶ πάνυ, ἣἧ ἐκεῖνοί τε ἀνέλ-

, Ν
πίστοι ἐπιγενέσθαι ἄν τινα σφίσι πολέμιον καὶ
a \
ἡμῶν ἡ ἀλκὴ τυγχάνει μάλιστα οὖσα" εἰκὸς
an > / /
δὲ καὶ TO πεζὸν αὐτῶν κατ᾽ οἰκίας ἀμελέστερον
/ > /
ὡς κεκρατηκότων διεσπάρθαι. εἰ οὖν προσπέ-
Ἁ, a
σοιμεν ἄφνω τε Kal νυκτός, ἐλπίζω μετὰ TOV
a , ΝΜ
ἔνδον, εἴ τις ἄρα ἡμῖν ἐστὶν ὑπόλουπος εὔνους,
fel Ἂ, \
καταληφθῆναι ἂν Ta πράγματα. καὶ μὴ
,ὔ
ἀποκνήσωμεν τὸν κίνδυνον, νομίσαντες οὐκ
Υ'. 3 x Ν r / KR Ν
ἄλλο τι εἶναι τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πολέμου ἢ τὸ
fa) \ lal
τοιοῦτον, ὃ εἴ τις στρατηγὸς ἔν TE αὑτῷ
φυλάσσοιτο καὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἐνορῶν ἐπίιχει-
/ lal a ”
poin, πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν ὀρθοῖτο.
¢ \ fal > ἐν > Ψ \
Ο μὲν τοσαῦτα εἰπὼν οὐκ ἔπειθε Tov
> ἢ of. ,ὕ - ᾽
Αλκίδαν. ἄλλοι δέ τινες τῶν ἀπ᾽ Arcidas decides
> I :
Iwvias φυγάδων καὶ of Λέσβιοι © rm home
. ,ὔ , > \ a \
<ol> ξυμπλέοντες παρήνουν, ἐπειδὴ τοῦτον τὸν
/ an lal > 2 / /
κίνδυνον φοβεῖται, τῶν ἐν Ἰωνίᾳ πόλεων
καταλαβεῖν τινὰ ἢ Κύμην τὴν Αἰολίδα, ὅπως
/ ©
ἐκ πόλεως ὁρμώμενοι τὴν ᾿Ιωνίαν ἀποστήσωσιν
/ ’ -“
(ἐλπίδα δ᾽ εἶναι" οὐδενὶ γὰρ ἀκουσίως ἀφῖχθαι)
ἂς \ /
καὶ τὴν πρόσοδον ταύτην μεγίστην οὖσαν
> , ΕῚ , Ea
Αθηναίων [ἢν] ὑφέλωσι, καὶ ἅμα, ἢν ἐφορμῶσι
σφίσιν, αὐτοῖς δαπάνη γίγνηται: πείσειν τε
οἴεσθαι καὶ ἸΠισσούθνην ὥστε ἕξυμπολεμεῖν.

ὁ δὲ οὐδὲ ταῦτα ἐνεδέχετο, ἀλλὰ τὸ πλεῖστον
16. κενὸν CM: καινὸν cett. : κοινὸν Steup.
4. οἱ add. Madvig. 8. ἀκουσίῳ Lindau. 10. ἣν
del. Herwerden : tv’ Dobree. ἀφέλωσι AB. 11. σφίσιν

αὐτοῖς δαπάνη GM Schol.: αὐτοῖς (αὐτοὺς CE) δαπάνη σφίσι cett.

_

0

οι

26 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

n , a /
τῆς γνώμης εἶχεν, ἐπειδὴ τῆς Μυτιλήνης
ὑστερήκει, ὅτι τάχιστα τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ πάλιν 15

82 προσμεῖξαι. ἄρας δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Εμβάτου παρ-

. 5 γ \ \ 4
His proceedings emAel, Kal προσσχὼν Μυοννήσῳ
on the coast of Ἂς ᾿ Ἷ A Ἐπ
Asia Minor. τῇ Τηίων τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους οὺς
κατὰ πλοῦν εἰλήφει ἀπέσφαξε τοὺς πολλούς.

\ b] Ἂς ” / 2 lal

2 καὶ ἐς τὴν "Ἔφεσον καθορμισαμένου αὐτοῦ 5
b t a > > / > i} 2
Σαμίων τῶν ἐξ Avaiwy ἀφικόμενοι πρέσβεις
ἔλεγον οὐ καλῶς τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐλευθεροῦν

> / > ν᾿ / BA al >
αὐτὸν, εἰ ἄνδρας διέφθειρεν οὔτε χεῖρας ἀνται-
΄ »" , , ᾽ \ ἜΛΕΟΝ
ρομένους οὔτε πολεμίους, ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ ὑπὸ
ἀνάγκης ξυμμάχους" εἴ Te μὴ παύσεται, 10
3. ἡ \ 3. τἉ fal > n > /
ὀλίγους μὲν αὐτὸν τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἐς φιλίαν
προσάξεσθαι, πολὺ δὲ πλείους τῶν φίλων
‘4 “ \ . \ 2 , \
πολεμίους ἕξειν. καὶ ὁ μὲν ἐπείσθη τε Kal

eo

Χίων ἄνδρας ὅσους εἶχεν ἔτι ἀφῆκε καὶ τῶν
ἄλλων τινάς. ὁρῶντες γὰρ τὰς ναῦς οἱ τὸ
+ » » > \ ,
ἄνθρωποι οὐκ ἔφευγον, ἀλλὰ προσεχώρουν
nr 4 nan
μᾶλλον ὡς ᾿Αττικαῖς καὶ ἐλπίδα οὐδὲ THY
/ L, 2 / > / a
ἐλαχίστην εἶχον μή ποτε ᾿Αθηναίων τῆς
θαλάσσης κρατούντων ναῦς Πελοποννησίων ἐς
33 Ἰωνίαν παραβαλεῖν. ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς ᾿Εφέσου ὁ

Oa eway ᾿Αλκίδας ἔπλει κατὰ τάχος καὶ
Sie φυγὴν ἐποιεῖτο: ὠφθη yap ὑπὸ τῆς
Paches.

Σαλαμινίας καὶ Παράλου ἔτι περὶ
Κλάρον ὁρμῶν (αἱ δ᾽ am ᾿Αθηνῶν ἔτυχον δ
πλέουσαι), καὶ δεδιὼς τὴν δίωξιν ἔπλει διὰ
τοῦ πελάγους ὡς γῇ ἑκούσιος οὐ σχήσων
ἄλλῃ ἢ Πελοποννήσῳ.

2 To δὲ ἸΠάχητι καὶ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἦλθε

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (81---84) 27

fol > / -
μὲν καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ‘EpvOpaias ἀγγελία, ἀφικνεῖτο 10
/ n
δὲ καὶ πανταχόθεν" ἀτειχίστου yap οὔσης τῆς
᾽ \
Ἰωνίας μέγα τὸ δέος ἐγένετο μὴ παραπλέοντες
οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι, εἰ καὶ ὡς μὴ διενοοῦντο
ο΄ μένειν, πορθῶσιν ἅμα προσπίπτοντες τὰς
᾿ ’ > ΄, , τὰν ? a ’ a
πόλεις. αὐτάγγελοι δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἰδοῦσαι ἐν τῇ 15
Κλάρῳ ἥ τε Πάραλος καὶ ἡ Σαλαμινία
” e \ 6 x a > a \
ἔφρασαν. ὁ δὲ ὑπὸ σπουδῆς ἐποιεῖτο τὴν
δίωξιν. καὶ μέχρι μὲν ἸΙάτμου τῆς νήσου
ἐπεδίωξεν, ὡς δ᾽ οὐκέτι ἐν καταλήψει ἐφαίνετο,
᾿
ἐπανεχώρει. κέρδος δὲ ἐνόμισεν, ἐπειδὴ οὐ 20
μετεώροις περιέτυχεν, ὅτε οὐδαμοῦ ἐγκατα-
-“ ‘eee , -
ληφθεῖσαι ἠναγκάσθησαν στρατόπεδόν τε ποιεῖ-
\ ’
σθαι καὶ φυλακὴν σφίσι καὶ ἐφόρμησιν
84 παρασχεῖν. παραπλέων δὲ πάλιν ἔσχε καὶ
,
ἐς Νότιον τὸ Κολοφωνίων, οὗ κατῴ- paches recovers
a / i
κηντο Κολοφώνιοι τῆς ἄνω πόλεως Nm
C4 / ς \ 3 / \ fal /
ἑαλωκυίας ὑπὸ ᾿Ιταμάνους καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων
\ tA 50 2 / 4.2 Ν
κατὰ στάσιν ἰδίαν ἐπαχθέντων: ἑάλω δὲ δ
/ Ὁ Ὁ e / /
μάλιστα αὕτη ὅτε ἡ δευτέρα Ἰ]ελοποννησίων
>? \ ? \ ᾽ \ ων ον, >? φ ἱρὰ
ἐσβολὴ ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐγίγνετο. ἐν οὖν τῷ
Νοτίῳ οἱ καταφυγόντες καὶ κατοικήσαντες
/
αὐτόθι αὖθις στασιάσαντες, of μὲν παρὰ
Πισσούθνου ἐπικούρους ᾿Αρκάδων τε καὶ τῶν τὸ
/
βαρβάρων ἐπαγαγόμενοι ἐν διατειχίσματι εἶχον,
\ a ? fal ” / , e
καὶ τῶν ἐκ τῆς ἄνω πόλεως Κολοφωνίων οἱ
Ψ, /
μηδίσαντες ξυνεσελθόντες ἐπολίτευον, οἱ δὲ

oe

no

33 18. Πάτμου Schol.: Λάτμου codd.
34, ἐν ἰδίᾳ Kriiger. ll. ἐπαγαγόμενοι Kriiger : ἐπαγόμενοι
codd.

8

-_

35

bo

28 OOYKYAIAOY

/ 4
ὑπεξελθόντες τούτους καὶ ὄντες φυγάδες τὸν
©
Πάχητα ἐπάγονται. ὁ δὲ προκαλεσάμενος ἐς
, i a A
λόγους ‘Iamwiav τῶν ἐν τῷ διατειχίσματι
᾽ lA by Ὁ x \ bhp ret 2
Αρκάδων ἄρχοντα, ὥστε, ἢν μηδὲν ἀρέσκον
λέγῃ, πάλιν αὐτὸν καταστήσειν ἐς τὸ τεῖχος
an 3 Ὁ fal 4 \ Jen > 3 , e >
σῶν Kal ὑγιᾶ, ὁ μὲν ἐξῆλθε Tap αὐτόν, ὁ ὃ
» “ " > a > / 3 > Ν
ἐκεῖνον μὲν ἐν φυλακῇ ἀδέσμῳ εἶχεν, αὐτὸς
\ A
δὲ προσβαλὼν τῷ τειχίσματι ἐξαπιναίως καὶ
-“ vA 3
οὐ προσδεχομένων αἱρεῖ, τούς τε ᾿Αρκάδας
\ a £ Ὁ δ /
καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων ὅσοι ἐνῆσαν διαφθείρει"
7
καὶ τὸν ‘Immiav ὕστερον ἐσαγαγὼν ὥσπερ ἐ-
Ι
σπείσατο, ἐπειδὴ ἔνδον ἦν, ξυλλαμβάνει καὶ
/
κατατοξεύει. ἸΚολοφωνίοις δὲ Νότιον παρα-
\ n
δίδωσι πλὴν τῶν μηδισάντων. καὶ ὕστερον
"AGO n 2 \ / \ \
nvaiot οἰκιστὰῤῤ πέμψαντες κατὰ τοὺς
an / /
ἑαυτῶν νόμους κατῴκισαν τὸ Νότιον, Evvaya-
ἃ a /
yovtes πάντας ἐκ τῶν πόλεων, εἴ πού τις ἣν
/
Κολοφωνίων.
«ς Ἂς / /
O δὲ Πάχης ἀφικόμενος és τὴν Μυτιλήνην

Hesendsthe τήν τε Πύρραν καὶ "Epecoy παρε-
leaders in the ἡ P pP p P

revolt of | στήσατο, καὶ Σάλαιθον λαβὼν ἐν
ytilene to = ;
Athens. τῇ πόλει Tov Λακεδαιμόνιον κεκρυμ-

t > , 2 AN 2 / \ \ BI
μένον ἀποπέμπει ἐς tas Αθήνας Kat τοὺς ἐκ
a e ἃ
τῆς Τενέδου Μυτιληναίων ἄνδρας ἅμα ods
\ ” Μ > Lal ” 5. 7
κατέθετο καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλος αὐτῷ αἴτιος ἐδόκει
* a x
εἶναι τῆς ἀποστάσεως." ἀποπέμπει δὲ Kal
τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸ πλέον, τοῖς δὲ λοιποῖς

(3 / / \ \ \ a /
ὑπομένων καθίστατο τὰ περὶ τὴν Μυτιλήνην

16. τῶν Classen: τὸν codd. 19. μὲν fGM: δ᾽ cett.
24. ἔσπειστο Cobet.

—_

5

to
[2

σι

10

36

eo

36

ISTOPION Τ' (34—36) 29

a \ ” / e > a m7
καὶ τὴν ἄλλην Λέσβον ἢ αὐτῷ ἐδόκει.
Χ rn 3 lal rn ,
ἀφικομένων δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν καὶ τοῦ Σαλαίθου
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸν μὲν Σάλαιθον εὐθὺς AtHENS. A

resolution tu

a ,
ἀπέκτειναν, ἔστιν ἃ παρεχόμενον put the
prisoners and

τά τ᾽ ἄλλα καὶ ἀπὸ Πλαταιῶν (ἔτι the whole
population of

yap ἐπολιορκοῦντο) ἀπάξειν Ἰ]ελο- Mytileneto 5
} ‘ τ πῇ J , death, is recon-
ποννησίους" περὶ δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν sidered.
, fal \ 3 an “-
γνώμας ἐποιοῦντο, καὶ ὑπὸ ὀργῆς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς
if / a
οὐ τοὺς παρόντας μόνον ἀποκτεῖναι, ἀλλὰ Kal
A oe ,ὔ “ e a
tous ἅπαντας Μυτιληναίους. ὅσοι ἡβῶςσι,
a » /
παῖδας δὲ καὶ γυναῖκας ἀνδραποδίσαι, ἐπι- 10
a / Μ » / “ >
καλοῦντες τὴν TE ἄλλην ἀπόστασιν OTL οὐκ
, ev γ. : id
ἀρχόμενοι ὥσπερ οἱ ἄλλοι ἐποιήσαντο, Kal
4 > / nan . fol Μδ
προσξυνελάβοντο οὐκ ἐλάχιστον τῆς ὁρμῆς αἱ
/ an ’ / /
ΤΠ]ελοποννησίων νῆες és Ἰωνίαν ἐκείνοις βοηθοὶ

τολμήσασαι παρακινδυνεῦσαι" οὐ yap ἀπὸ 15
/ \ (4

βραχείας διανοίας ἐδόκουν τὴν ἀπόστασιν

ποιήσασθαι. πέμπουσιν οὖν τριήρη ὡς

νΝ nr 7
Πάχητα ἄγγελον τῶν δεδογμένων, κατὰ τάχος
͵7ὔ 7] / \
κελεύοντες διαχρήσασθαι Μυτιληναίους. καὶ
“Ὁ / \ fal
τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ μετάνοιά τις εὐθὺς ἣν αὐτοῖς καὶ 2
» \ > Ν \ / \ /
ἀναλογισμὸὸῤ ὠμὸν τὸ βούλευμα καὶ μέγα
an / ef. lal a x
ἐγνῶσθαι, πόλιν ὅλην διαφθεῖραι padrov ἢ
> \ = /, ᾽ , lal nw
οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους. ὡς δ᾽ ἤσθοντο τοῦτο τῶν
/ id /
Μυτιληναίων οἱ παρόντες πρέσβεις καὶ οἱ
> a fal ’ /
αὐτοῖς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμπράσσοντες, παρε- %
͵7 \
σκεύασαν τοὺς ἐν τέλει ὥστε αὖθις γνώμας
» an rf ,
προθεῖναι καὶ ἔπεισαν ῥᾷον, διότι καὶ ἐκείνοις

11, post ἀπόστασιν add. καὶ Classen. 18. προσξυνελάβοντο
CG γρ.Β8Ε": rpocéuveBaderocett. 27. προθεῖναι: προσθεῖναι codd.

συ

97

to

37

30 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

7 a , \ 7 a a
ἔνδηλον ἣν βουλόμενον TO πλέον τῶν πολιτῶν
9 / i Φ ἴον /
αὖθίς twas σφίσιν ἀποδοῦναι βουλεύσασθαι.
th 8 ὑθὺ > / ΜΨ
καταστάσης εὐὔθυς ἐκκλησίας ἄλλαι τε
5 / th
yvopat ἀφ ἑκάστων ἐλέγοντο καὶ Κλέων ὁ
/ ef AS Vd
Κλεαινέτου, ὅσπερ καὶ τὴν προτέραν ἐνενικήκει
[4 >? a x Aimer 2 \ ΜΝ /
ὥστε ἀποκτεῖναι, ὧν Kal ἐς τὰ ἄλλα βιαιότατος
al n / \
TOV πολιτῶν τῷ τε δήμῳ Tapa πολὺ ἐν
τος / ΄ \ 5 >
τῷ τότε πιθανώτατος, παρελθὼν αὖθις ἔλεγε
τοιάδε.
/ \ , yy
“Πολλάκις μὲν ἤδη ἔγωγε καὶ ἄλλοτε ἔγνων
He ce, , ,
SPEEOH OF δημοκρατίαν ὅτι ἀδύνατόν ἐστιν
LEON. Long ἥ Ε ΒΞ ps
exordium on the ἑτέρων ἄρχειν, μάλιστα δ᾽ ἐν TH
incapacity of a ‘ a Ἢ εἶδε
the Athenian νυν UPETEPA περί Μυτιληναίων
democracy for ; £ διὰ A Ἢ θ᾽
Empire. μεταμελειίᾳ. a γὰρ τὸ κα
©, Ἂ > \ \ > 7 Ἂς 3 /
ἡμέραν ἀδεὲς Kal ἀνεπιβούλευτον πρὸς ἀλλή-
\ τ Ν x
λους καὶ ἐς τοὺς ξυμμάχους τὸ αὐτὸ ἔχετε,
\ “ x x / ΄ (ieee 3A
καὶ 6 τι ἂν ἢ λόγῳ πεισθέντες ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν
X an ΄
ἁμάρτητε ἢ οἴκτῳ ἐνδῶτε, οὐκ ἐπικινδύνως
a an \ \ a
ἡγεῖσθε ἐς ὑμᾶς καὶ οὐκ ἐς τὴν τῶν ξυμμάχων
1 a “
χάριν μαλακίζεσθαι, οὐ σκοποῦντες ὅτι τυ-
i \ ν᾿ \ \
pavvida ἔχετε τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ πρὸς ἐπιβου-
vf > \ ie 4 > / “δ
λεύοντας αὑτοὺς καὶ ἄκοντας ἄρχομενοῦς, ΦΊΟΥΣ
A ye \
οὐκ ἐξ ὧν ἂν χαρίζησθε. βλαπτόμενοι αὐτοὶ
5 lal ¢€ rn > > 2 & x 5 4 a
ἀκροῶνται ὑμῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ ὧν av ἰσχύι μᾶλλον
an ,ὔ hi / \
ἢ τῇ ἐκείνων εὐνοίᾳ περιγένησθες. πάντων δὲ
, > / e a \ /
δεινότατον et βέβαιον ἡμῖν μηδὲν καθεστήξει
© x / re \ / . 3
ὧν ἂν δόξῃ πέρι, μηδὲ γνωσόμεθα ὅτι χείροσι

80. καταστάσης δ᾽] δ᾽ om. C: καὶ καταστάσης cG.
2, ἀδύνατος Steup. 4. ἡμετέρᾳ AEFM: ἡμέρᾳ BG].
18. οἱ om. codd., add. b.

iv)

5

σι

σι

98

38

ISTOPION Τ' (36—38) 31

/ / / /
νόμοις ἀκινήτοις χρωμένη πόλις κρείσσων
lal ” 4
ἐστὶν ἢ καλῶς ἔχουσιν ἀκύροις, ἀμαθία τε
\ , ? ͵ ΕΥ̓ ΄
μετὰ σωφροσύνης ὠφελιμώτερον ἢ δεξιότης
’ / a
μετὰ ἀκολασίας, of Te φαυλότεροι τῶν
\ \
ἀνθρώπων πρὸς τοὺς ξυνετωτέρους ws ἐπὶ τὸ
a /
πλέον ἄμεινον οἰκοῦσι τὰς πόλεις. οἱ μὲν
a /
yap τῶν TE νόμων σοφώτεροι βούλονται
φαίνεσθαι τῶν τε αἰεὶ λεγομένων ἐς τὸ κοινὸν
, ε > My , > Ἃ
περιγίγνεσθαι, ὡς ἐν ἄλλοις μείζοσιν οὐκ ἂν
δηλώσαντες τὴν γνώμην, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου
τὰ πολλὰ σφάλλουσι τὰς πόλεις: οἱ δ᾽
ἀπιστοῦντες τῇ ἐξ αὑτῶν ξυνέσει ἀμαθέστεροι
μὲν τῶν νόμων ἀξιοῦσιν εἶναι, ἀδυνατώτεροι
Ν fal rn ᾽ / is ,
δὲ τοῦ καλῶς εἰπόντος μέμψασθαι λόγον,
Ν \ ” > Ἂς nr ” nr A
κριταὶ δὲ ὄντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου μᾶλλον ἢ
> bed 6 rn \ Vs ἃ § \ \
ἀγωνισταὶ ὀρθοῦνται τὰ πλείω. ὡς οὖν χρὴ Kal
al a / fal
ἡμᾶς ποιοῦντας μὴ δεινότητι καὶ ξυνέσεως ἀγῶνι
/ an
ἐπαιρομένους παρὰ δόξαν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πλήθει
παραινεῖν.
ec OF \ \ Ld ¢ Ψ , ’ an ΄, Ν
Ἐμγὼ μὲν οὖν ὁ αὐτός εἰμι τῇ γνώμῃ καὶ
θαυμάζω μὲν τῶν προθέντων αὖθις Abdsuriity οἵ
reopening Θ
περὶ Μυτιληναίων λέγειν καὶ χρόνου «ιορίϊον.
διατριβὴν ἐμποιησάντων, ὅ ἐστι πρὸς τῶν
> , an ς \ \ a ,
ἠδικηκότων μᾶλλον (ὁ yap παθὼν τῷ δράσαντι
ἀμβλυτέρᾳ τῇ ὀργῇ ἐπεξέ Ἰμύνεσθ
μβλυτέρᾳ τῇ ὀργῇ ἐπεξέρχεται, ἀμύνεσθαι
\ a Lal [τὰ b] La /
δ τῷ παθεῖν ὅτε ἐγγυτάτω κείμενον
> / Ὰ ΄, Ν / >
ἀντίπαλον ὃν μάλιστα τὴν τιμωρίαν ἀναλαμ-

24. πλεῖστον B Stobaeus. 32. post δὲ add. τὸν Stobaeus.
36. post παρὰ add. τὸ Reiske.
6. ἀμύνασθαι ABEFM yp. G: τὸ ἀμύνασθαι Cobet. 8. ὃν

del. Haase. λαμβάνει Classen: ἂν λαμβάνοι Hude.

80

35

ao

92 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

ἣν θ Z δὲ N “ yy «
βάνει), αὐμαζῷ o€ Καὶ ὁσπὶς ἐστᾶν oO
a x
avTepav καὶ ἀξιώσων ἀποφαίνειν τὰς μὲν τὸ
i >’ / Cd nN > , ”
Μυτιληναίων ἀδικίας ἡμῖν ὠφελίμους οὔσας,
\ δ᾽ « , \ fal ᾽,
τὰς ἡμετέρας ξυμφορὰς τοῖς ξυμμάχοις
i / A \ nn [τ x lak
2 βλάβας καθισταμένας. καὶ δῆλον ὅτι ἢ τῷ
΄ lh a ᾽ lel
λέγειν πιστεύσας TO πάνυ δοκοῦν ἀνταποφῆναι
3
ὡς οὐκ ἔγνωσται ἀγωνίσαιτ᾽ ἄν, ἢ κέρδει τὸ
, Ἂ, a /
ἐπαιρόμενος TO εὐπρεπὲς TOD λόγου ἐκπονήσας
/ n
ὃ παράγειν πειράσετα. ἡ δὲ πόλις ἐκ TOV
lal 3 ue \ \ 9 e / /
τοιῶνδε ἀγώνων Ta μὲν ἄθλα ἑτέροις δίδωσιν,
aN Χ \ ΄ > I ” 2
4 αὐτὴ δὲ τοὺς κινδύνους ἀναφέρει. αἴτιοι ὃ
a n a iy:
ὑμεῖς κακῶς ἀγωνοθετοῦντες, οἵτινες εἰώθατε 2
‘ a / ,
θεαταὶ μὲν τῶν λόγων γίγνεσθαι, ἀκροαταὶ
ὧν n » \ \ ΄ yy
δὲ τῶν ἔργων, τὰ μὲν μέλλοντα ἔργα
a 9 / n
ἀπὸ τῶν εὖ εἰπόντων σκοποῦντες ὡς δυνατὰ
/ θ \ δὲ / ἤὸ ’
γίγνεσθαι, τὰ δὲ πεπραγμένα ἤδη, οὐ
x MN / , \
τὸ δρασθὲν πιστότερον ὄψει λαβόντες ἢ TO2
1h \ an t [al
ἀκουσθέν, ἀπὸ TOV λόγῳ καλῶς ἐπιτιμησάντων "

~)
οι

on

/ N / na
καὶ μετὰ καινότητος μὲν λόγου ἀπατᾶσθαι
” \ Li \ Ni ἡ
ἄριστοι, μετὰ δεδοκιμασμένου δὲ μὴ ξυνέπεσθαι
524 " an ΕΣ a 3 N >) /
ἐθέλειν, δοῦλοι ὄντες τῶν αἰεὶ ἀτόπων,

συ

[2 / Ν an 3 / Ν / \
ὑπερόπται δὲ τῶν εἰωθότων, καὶ μάλιστα μὲν :

go
Oo

FN. > a 4 / / 2
αὐτὸς εἰπεῖν ἕκαστος βουλόμενος δύνασθαι, εἰ
/ / al a
δὲ μή, ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι τοῖς τοιαῦτα λέγουσι
\ an a a ,
μὴ ὕστεροι ἀκολουθῆσαι δοκεῖν τῇ γνώμῃ,
.
id \
ὀξέως δέ τι λέγοντος προεπαινέσαι, καὶ προ-
/ 3 /
αἰσθέσθαι τε πρόθυμοι εἶναι τὰ λεγόμενα καὶ 35
an - \ an = Ue
προνοῆσαι βραδεῖς τὰ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποβησόμενα,
aA Τὰ ” ie 2 an XN 9 φΦ
7 ζητοῦντες τε ἄλλο TL ὡς εἰπεῖν ἢ ἐν οἷς

34. τι] του Kriiger. 35. εἷναι del. Poppo.

39

bo

wo

ISTOPION Τ' (38—39) 33

ζῶμεν, φρονοῦντες δὲ οὐδὲ περὶ τῶν παρόντων
ἱκανῶς" ἁπλῶς τε ἀκοῆς ἡδονῇ ἡσσώμενοι καὶ
σοφιστῶν θεαταῖς ἐοικότες καθημένοις μᾶλλον
ἢ περὶ πόλεως βουλευομένοις.

“Ὧν ἐγὼ πειρώμενος ἀποτρέπειν ὑμᾶς
ἀποφαίνω Μυτιληναίους μάλιστα Mytilene has no
δὴ μίαν πόλιν ἠδικηκότας ὑμᾶς. for revolting,
ἐγὼ γάρ, οἵτινες μὲν μὴ δυνατοὶ φέρειν τὴν
ὑμετέραν ἀρχὴν ἢ οἵτινες ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων
ἀναγκασθέντες ἀπέστησαν, ξυγγνώμην ἔχω'
νῆσον δὲ οἵτινες ἔχοντες μετὰ τειχῶν καὶ
κατὰ θάλασσαν μόνον φοβούμενοι, τοὺς
ἡμετέρους πολεμίους, ἐν ᾧ καὶ αὐτοὶ τριήρων
παρασκευῇ οὐκ ἄφαρκτοι ἧσαν πρὸς αὐτούς,
αὐτόνομοί τε οἰκοῦντες καὶ τιμώμενοι ἐς τὰ
πρῶτα ὑπὸ ἡμῶν τοιαῦτα εἰργάσαντο, τί
ἄλλο οὗτοι ἢ ἐπεβούλευσάν τε καὶ ἐπανέστη-
σαν μᾶλλον ἢ ἀπέστησαν (ἀπόστασις μέν γε
τῶν βίαιόν τι πασχόντων ἐστίν), ἐζήτησάν
τε μετὰ τῶν πολεμιωτάτων ἡμᾶς στάντες
διαφθεῖραι; καίτοι δεινότερόν ἐστιν ἢ εἰ
καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς δύναμιν κτώμενοι ἀντεπολέμησαν.
παράδειγμα δὲ αὐτοῖς οὔτε αἱ τῶν πέλας

Ν > / Ὁ ? / nO € a
ξυμφοραὶ ἐγένοντο, ὅσοι ἀποστάντες ἤδη ἡμῶν 2

ἐχειρώθσαν, οὔτε ἡ παροῦσα εὐδαιμονία
΄ » ἊΝ a > \ ὃ “he
παρέσχεν ὄκνον μὴ ἐλθεῖν ἐς τὰ eva
/ x \ Ν , a \
γενόμενοι δὲ πρὸς τὸ μέλλον θρασεῖς καὶ
i a
ἐλπίσαντες μακρότερα μὲν τῆς δυνάμεως,
/ \ n / / »
ἐλάσσω δὲ τῆς βουλήσεως, πόλεμον ἤραντο,
ἰσχὺν ἀξιώσαντες τοῦ δικαίου προθεῖναι" ἐν
; D

5

x]

bo
οι

34 OBOYKYAIAOY

ὦ yao ῳήθησαν περιέσεσθαι, ἐπέθεντο ἡμῖν
ry, ρ t ω) μ) ρ , )

ἐ

a /
4 οὐκ ἀδικούμενοι. εἴωθε δὲ τῶν πόλεων ais

xX / N. 5 , > ,
ἂν μάλιστα καὶ δι’ ἐλαχίστου ἀπροσδόκητος
> / »f- 5 [2 / \ \
εὐπραγία ἔλθῃ, ἐς ὕβριν τρέπειν. τὰ δὲ
, lal , lal
πολλὰ κατὰ λόγον τοῖς ἀνθρώποις εὐτυχοῦντα
bo / Xx \ / \ /
ἀσφαλέστερα ἢ παρὰ δόξαν, καὶ κακοπραγίαν
ὡς εἰπεῖν ῥᾷον ἀπωθοῦνται ἢ εὐδαιμονίαν

5 διασῴζονται. χρῆν δὲ Μυτιληναίους καὶ

-.7

99

, n >
πάλαι μηδὲν διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων ὑφ
rn a /
ἡμῶν τετιμῆσθαι, καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἐς τόδε

/ ,
ἐξύβρισαν: πέφυκε γὰρ καὶ ἄλλως ἄνθρωπος
τὸ μὲν θεραπεῦον ὑπερφρονεῖν, τὸ δὲ μὴ
ig a Ui / \ \
ὑπεῖκον θαυμάζειν. κολασθέντων δὲ Kal

a es a > / N \ a
The resolution VOY ἀξίως τῆς αδικίας, Kal μὴ τοῖς
is just. \ ae ς ΠΑ) A \

μὲν ὀλίγοις ἡ αἰτία προστεθῇ, τὸν

an » na

δὲ δῆμον ἀπολύσητες. πάντες yap ὑμῖν γε

ὁμοίως ἐπέθεντο, οἷς γ᾽ ἐξῆν ὡς ἡμᾶς τραπο-

/ n 4 5 A (é > τὸ > Ν

μένοις νῦν πάλιν ἐν τῇ πόλει εἰναι" ἀλλὰ
Ἂ a

τὸν μετὰ τῶν ὀλίγων κίνδυνον ἡγησάμενοι

, lal

βεβαιότερον ξυναπέστησαν. τῶν τε ξυμμάχων

ΕΙΣ σκέψασθε εἰ τοῖς τε ἀναγκασθεῖσιν

pve ὑπὸ [te] τῶν πολεμίων καὶ τοῖς

la) rn /

ἑκοῦσιν ἀποστᾶσι Tas αὐτὰς ζημίας προσθήσετε,

τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα οὐ βραχείᾳ προφάσει ἀπο

/ , x Ρ x : ἡ / 3

ε / >

στήσεσθαι, ὅταν ἢ κατορθώσαντι ἐλευθέρωσις

3 x yA \ a » / Ὁ ἫΝ

ἢ ἢ σφαλέντι μηδὲν παθεῖν ἀνήκεστον ; ἡμῖν

δὲ πρὸς ἑκάστην πόλιν ἀποκεκινδυνεύσεται

29. ἀπροσδόκητος post μάλιστα posuit Hude. ὶ 80. εὐ-
πραγία Phot.: εὐπραξία codd. 94, χρῆν EG: χρὴ cett.
35. διαφέροντας ABCF. 42. ἡμῖν B. 43. τραπομένοις

ΓΜ : τρεπομένοις cett. 48, post ὑπὸ add. τε codd., del. f.

σι
ς

40

2

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (39---40) 35

,
τά τε χρήματα καὶ αἱ ψυχαί, καὶ τυχόντες
\ 2 ἴω / a ΝΜ
μὲν πόλιν ἐφθαρμένην παραλαβόντες τῆς ἔπειτα
le ᾽ /
προσόδου, δι ἣν ἰσχύομεν, TO λοιπὸν στερή-
΄ Ν / \ a
σεσθε, σφαλέντες δὲ πολεμίους πρὸς τοῖς
, a lal
ὑπάρχουσιν ἕξομεν, Kal ὃν χρόνον τοῖς νῦν
καθεστηκόσι δεῖ ἐχθροῖς ἀνθίστασθαι, τοῖς
οἰκείοις ξυμμάχοις πολεμήσομεν. οὔκουν δεῖ
- / Μ᾽ / δ Υ
προθεῖναι ἐλπίδα οὔτε λόγῳ πιστὴν οὔτε
χρήμασιν ὠνητήν, ὡς ξυγγνώμην ἁμαρτεῖν
ἀνθρωπίνως λήψονται. ἄκοντες μὲν γὰρ οὐκ
re
ἔβλαψαν, εἰδότες δὲ ἐπεβούλευσαν - ξύγγνωμον
δ᾽ ἐστὶ τὸ ἀκούσιον.
«Bae \ 5 \ ! na \ a
γὼ μὲν οὖν Kal τότε πρῶτον Kal νῦν
\ a a
διαμάχομαι μὴ μεταγνῶναι ὑμᾶς τὰ προδε-
LA al ; a
Soypéva, μηδὲ τρισὶ τοῖς ἀξυμφορωτάτοις τῇ
> A ν m4 e a Yd \ 3 /
ἀρχῇ, οἴκτῳ καὶ ἡδονῇ λόγων καὶ ἐπιεικείᾳ,
VA ΜΝ: / \ \ e
ἁμαρτάνειν. ἔλεός τε γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς ὁμοίους
ε
δίκαιος ἀντιδίδοσθαι, καὶ μὴ πρὸς τοὺς οὔτ
ἀντοικτιοῦντας ἐξ ἀνάγκης τε καθεστῶτας αἰεὶ
/ “ / lh εν
πολεμίους: οἵ τε τέρποντες λόγῳ ῥήτορες

Δ Ξ γα, rn \
ἕξουσι καὶ ἐν ἄλλοις ἐλάσσοσιν ἀγῶνα, καὶ

40

\ > z ς \ / , δ tal ΄,
μὴ ἐν ᾧ ἡ μὲν πόλις βραχέα ἡσθεῖσα μεγάλα
ζημιώσεται, αὐτοὺ δὲ ἐκ τοῦ εὖ εἰπεῖν τὸ

aA = > 7 δὴ ς ᾿ / XN
παθεῖν εὖ ἀντιλήψονται' Kal ἡ ἐπιείκεια πρὸς

\ th > U \ \ \
τοὺς μέλλοντας ἐπιτηδείους Kal τὸ λοιπὸν
ἔσεσθαι μᾶλλον δίδοται ἢ πρὸς τοὺς ὁμοίως
τε καὶ οὐδὲν ἧσσον πολεμίους ὑπολειπομένους.

δῦ. ἔπειτα] ἐπετείου Weil. 56. ἐστερήσεσθε Herwerden.
2. προσθεῖναι ABCG. 14. ῥήτορες del. Naber. 20.
ὁμοίως Thiersch : ὁμοίους codd.

5

36 BOY KYAIAOY

4 ἕν τε ξυνελὼν λέγω: πειθόμενοι μὲν ἐμοὶ τά
τε δίκαια ἐς Μυτιληναίους καὶ τὰ ξύμφορα
, a
ἅμα ποιήσετε, ἄλλως δὲ γνόντες τοῖς μὲν οὐ
-“ “ \ Ἂν \ fal ,
χαριεῖσθε, ὑμᾶς δὲ αὐτοὺς μᾶλλον δικαιώσεσθε.
εἰ γὰρ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ
χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε. εἰ δὲ δὴ καὶ οὐ προσῆκον
ὅμως ἀξιοῦτε τοῦτο δρᾶν, παρὰ τὸ εἰκός τοι
καὶ τούσδε ξυμφόρως δεῖ κολάξεσθαι, ἢ
παύεσθαι τῆς ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἀκινδύνου
ὅ ἀνδραγαθίζεσθαι. τῇ τε αὐτῇ ζημίᾳ ἀξιώσατε
pary . τῇ τε αὐτῇ ζημίς τ
> / \ \ > / e /
ἀμύνασθαι Kal μὴ ἀναδγητότεροι οἱ διαφεύ-
γοντες τῶν ἐπιβουλευσάντων φανῆναι, ἐνθυμη-
θέντες ἃ εἰκὸς ἣν αὐτοὺς ποιῆσαι κρατήσαντας
ς a » \ oe , > ,
ὑμῶν, ἄλλως τε Kal tmpovTapEavtas ἀδικίας.
4 Ν « \ \ 4 \ “A
6 μάλιστα δὲ οἱ μὴ ξὺν προφάσει τινὰ κακῶς
ποιοῦντες ἐπεξέρχονται καὶ διολλύναι, τὸν
κίνδυνον ὑφορώμενοι τοῦ ὑπολειπομένου ἐχθροῦ"
ὁ γὰρ μὴ ξὺν ἀνάγκῃ τι παθὼν χαλεπώτερος
διαφυγὼν τοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς ἴσης ἐχθροῦ.

a a
7 “Μὴ οὖν προδόται. γένησθε ὑμῶν αὐτῶν,
A / a
Peroration. γενόμενοι δ᾽ ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τῇ

a \
γνώμῃ τοῦ πάσχειν Kal ὡς πρὸ παντὸς ἂν
ἐτιμήσασθε αὐτοὺς χειρώσασθαι, νῦν ἀντ-

Ἢ \ Ν
απόδοτε μὴ μαλακισθέντες πρὸς τὸ παρὸν
αὐτίκα μηδὲ τοῦ ἐπικρεμασθέντος ποτὲ δεινοῦ
8 ἀμνημονοῦντες. κολάσατε δὲ ἀξίως τούτους TE
\ lal + fe / A
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ξυμμάχοις παράδειγμα σαφὲς

22. re C: dé cett. 87. διολλύναι Stahl : διόλλυνται codd.
42. ἐγγύτατα τῇ C: ἐγγυτάτῃ cett. 45, παρὸν αὐτίκα]
παραυτίκα Schneider. ἱ

τῷ
σι

40

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ I’ (40---49) 37

/ ὰ x > an /
καταστήσατε, ὃς av ἀφιστῆται, θανάτῳ ζημιω-
/ fal fal
σόμενον. τόδε γὰρ ἢν γνῶσιν, ἧσσον τῶν 50
πολεμίων ἀμελήσαντες τοῖς ὑμετέροις αὐτῶν
Lal ”
μαχεῖσθε ξυμμάχοις.
a + x
41 Τοιαῦτα μὲν ὁ Κλέων εἶπεν: μετὰ δ᾽ αὐτὸν
,ὔ e > f Ὁ“ \
Διόδοτος ὁ Εἰὐκράτους, ὅσπερ καὶ gprecu oF
2 a , 2 , > , Diopotus.
ἐν τῇ προτέρᾳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἀντέλεγε
, \ > a /
μάλιστα μὴ ἀποκτεῖναι Μυτιληναίους, παρελ-
/
θὼν καὶ τότε ἔλεγε τοιάδε. δ
ςς Οὔ \ ,ὔ \ ὃ ,
42 ὔτε τοὺς προθέντας τὴν διαγνώμην
\ an . .
αὖθις περὶ Μυτιληναίων αἰτιῶμαι, Reconsideration

” \ ἢ Η͂ ᾿ is sometimes
οὔτε TOUS μεμφομένους μὴ TOANAKLS necessary and

᾿ ἐδ ᾿ ὅπ: is not to be
περί τῶν μεγίστων βουλεύεσθαι discouraged.
ἐπαινῶ, νομίζο δὲ δύο τὰ ἐναντιώτατα
1B rL νὰ / Ν 2 (4 φ' Ν
εὐβουλίᾳ εἶναι, τάχος τε καὶ ὀργήν, ὧν τὸ
\ \ > / al / \ \ \
μὲν μετὰ ἀνοίας φιλεῖ γίγνεσθαι, TO δὲ μετὰ
ἢ ἀπαιδευσίας καὶ βραχύτητος γνώμης. τούς τε
/ lol
λόγους ὅστις διαμάχεται μὴ διδασκάλους τῶν
ve , A > tA , 5 x γὺ
πραγμάτων γίγνεσθαι, ἢ ἀξύνετός. ἐστιν ἢ ἰδίᾳ τὸ
τι αὐτῷ διαφέρει: ἀξύνετος μέν, εἰ ἄλλῳ τινὶ
¢ ρ μεν» εὖ f
ς a \ fe) 5 \
ἡγεῖται περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος δυνατὸν εἷναι καὶ
\ > la) / ,ὔ > ? a ?
μὴ ἐμφανοῦς φράσαι, διαφέρει δ᾽ αὐτῷ, εἰ
, , an an
βουλόμενός τι αἰσχρὸν πεῖσαι εὖ μὲν εἰπεῖν
οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖται περὶ τοῦ μὴ καλοῦ δύνασθαι, τὸ
εὖ δὲ διαβαλὼν. ἐκπλῆξαι ἂν τούς τε ἀντε-
ϑιροῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀκουσομένους. χαλεπώτατοι

οι

δὲ καὶ οἱ ἐπὶ χρήμασι προκατηγοροῦντες
ἐπίδειξίν τινα. εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἀμαθίαν κατῃ-

42 ὅ. δὲ ΟΜ: τε cett. 18. διαφέρει Schol. : διαφέροι codd.
18. προκατηγοροῦντες Ο : προσκατηγοροῦντες cett. 19. ἀντί-

δειξιν fGM. ᾿
54499

4

σι

fon)

43

43

38 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

rn ε Ν / 3 , Xx /
τιῶντο, ὁ μὴ πείσας ἀξυνετώτερος av δόξας
ΑἿΣ x > , b) / 3 / >
εἶναι, ἢ ἀδικώτερος ἀπεχώρει: ἀδικίας ὃ
/
ἐπιφερομένης πείσας τε ὕποπτος γίγνεται καὶ
A \
μὴ τυχὼν μετὰ ἀξυνεσίας καὶ ἄδικος. ἥ τε
, 5 > a 5) a a , \
πόλις οὐκ ὠφελεῖται ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε: φόβῳ γὰρ

> a a , \ tal ? x
ὠποστερεῖται τῶν ξυμβούλων. Kal πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν:

ψΨ᾽ a > ΓΑ / Μ A 7

ὀρθοῖτο ἀδυνάτους λέγειν ἔχουσα τοὺς τοιού-

TOUS τῶν πολιτῶν' ἐλάχιστα γὰρ ἂν πεισθεῖεν
\ \

ἁμαρτάνειν. χρὴ δὲ τὸν μὲν ἀγαθὸν πολίτην

\ > rn \ 2 lal ἊΨ 5 2 x

μὴ ἐκφοβοῦντα τοὺς ἀντεροῦντας, ἀλλ᾿ ἀπὸ

τιν , ” L \ See
τοῦ ἴσου φαίνεσθαι ἄμεινον λέγοντα, τὴν δὲ

σώφρονα πόλιν τῷ τε πλεῖστα εὖ βουλεύοντι

\ , / » Ἂν ’ n rn
μὴ προστιθέναι τιμήν, ἀλλὰ μηδ᾽ ἐλασσοῦν τῆς
ὑπαρχούσης, καὶ τὸν μὴ τυχόντα γνώμης οὐχ
Ὁ nr 3 \ 5.» / ef \ “
ὅπως ζημιοῦν ἀλλὰ μηδ᾽ ἀτιμάζειν. οὕτω γὰρ ὅ

nan NS an 4 /
Te κατορθῶν ἥκιστα ἂν ἐπὶ τῷ ἔτι μειζόνων :

bs a Ν᾿: , x Ν te /
ἀξιοῦσθαι παρὰ γνώμην τι Kal πρὸς χάριν λέγοι,
“ Ἂ a a / /
ὅ TE μὴ ἐπιτυχὼν ὀρέγοιτο τῷ αὐτῷ χαριζόμενός
XN \ \ “-
TL καὶ αὐτὸς προσάγεσθαι τὸ πλῆθος.
« Caer > , Ὁ n \ ,
ν ἡμεῖς τἀναντία δρῶμεν, καὶ προσέτι
Ἔν , ie ,
Βυδρίοίοπ οἴ ἤν τις καὶ ὑποπτεύηται κέρδους
motives prompts

. 7 ¢
the Athenians μὲν €vexa Ta βέλτιστα δὲ ὅμως
to lose good

counsel, λέγειν, φθονήσαντες THs οὐ βεβαίου
δοκήσεως τῶν κερδῶν τὴν φανερὰν ὠφελίαν
a / > / - \
τῆς πόλεως ἀφαιρούμεθα. καθέστηκε δὲ

> \ > Ἂ nr > fA / \
τἀγαθὰ ἀπὸ Tod εὐθέος λεγόμενα μηδὲν
/ a “ al
ἀνυποπτότερα εἶναι τῶν κακῶν, ὥστε δεῖν
ε , , \ ’ 1 πὰ
ὁμοίως τὸν τε τὰ δεινότατα βουλόμενον πεῖσαι

35. τὸ ABEFM.
9. βουλόμενον C: βουλευόμενον cett.

20

τῷ
oO

oo
οι

οι

ISTOPION Τ' (42- 44) 39

> / , \ na \ Ἂ Ν
ἀπάτῃ προσάγεσθαι τὸ πλῆθος καὶ τὸν τὰ
x ᾿ς
ἀμείνω λέγοντα ψευσάμενον πιστὸν γενέσθαι.
’ / , fol
μόνην τε πόλιν διὰ τὰς περινοίας εὖ ποιῆσαι
ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς μὴ ἐξαπατήσαντα ἀδύνατον"
« \ ὃ \ “ >? ἣΝ 3 a
ὁ yap διδοὺς φανερῶς τι ἀγαθὸν ἀνθυποπτεύεται
4 9 a λέ ἕξ Ἂ δὲ Ν \
ἀφανῶς πῃ πλέον ἕξειν. χρὴ δὲ πρὸς τὰ
, an lal a nr
μέγιστα καὶ ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε ἀξιοῦν τι ἡμᾶς
περαιτέρω προνοοῦντας λέγειν ὑμῶν τῶν ov
5 f A Μ' Ὗ ς ie
ὀλίγου σκοπούντων, ἄλλως τε Kal ὑπεύθυνον
7 Ἂν
τὴν παραίνεσιν ἔχοντας πρὸς ἀνεύθυνον τὴν
©
ὑμετέραν ἀκρόασιν. εἰ yap 6 τε πείσας Kal ὁ
/ e
ἐπισπόμενος ὁμοίως ἐβλάπτοντο, σωφρονέστερον
fol τ >
ἂν ἐκρίνετε: νῦν δὲ πρὸς ὀργὴν ἥντιν᾽ ἂν
τύχητε ἔστιν ὅτε σφαλέντες τὴν τοῦ πείσαντος
μίαν γνώμην ζημιοῦτε καὶ οὐ τὰς ὑμετέρας
αὐτῶν, εἰ πολλαὶ οὖσαι ξυνεξήμαρτον.
Lied tye agate OW ov » a \
44 γὼ δὲ παρῆλθον οὔτε ἀντερῶν περὶ
Μυτιληναίων οὔτε κατηγορήσων. 1s the penalty
emande
ov yap περὶ τῆς ἐκείνων ἀδικίας expedient?
e nr ¢ > , ᾽ fal > \ \ fol
ἡμῖν ὁ ἀγών, εἰ σωφρονοῦμεν, ἀλλὰ περὶ τῆς
ἢ / 2 wr » ᾿Ν > "A
Ω ἡμετέρας εὐβουλίας. ἤν Te γὰρ ἀποφήνω
πάνυ ἀδικοῦντας αὐτούς, οὐ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ
> rn / > \ Id ν
ἀποκτεῖναι κελεύσω, εἰ μὴ ξυμφέρον, ἤν τε
lal A /
καὶ ἔχοντάς τι ξυγγνώμης ἐᾶν, εἰ τῇ πόλει
\ » Ν / 7 Ν \ ἴω
8 μὴ ἀγαθὸν φαίνοιτος νομίζω δὲ περὶ τοῦ
} a rn a
μέλλοντος ἡμᾶς μᾶλλον βουλεύεσθαι ἢ τοῦ

ὡς:

σι

παρόντος. καὶ τοῦτο ᾧ μάλιστα Κλέων
16. ἀξιοῦντι CEG. 22. ἥντιν᾽ ἂν Stahl: ἥντινα codd.

25. εἴ at Cobet.
44 8, ἔχοντας Lindau: ἔχοντες codd. ἐᾶν Lindau: elev

codd. 11. @ CG: 6 cett.

10

25

σι

nS

40 OBOYKYAIAOY

DI / /
ἰσχυρίζεται, ἐς τὸ λοιπὸν ξυμφέρον ἔσεσθαι
\ e ἢ
πρὸς τὸ ἧσσον ἀφίστασθαι θάνατον ζημίαν
an an x /
προθεῖσι, καὶ αὐτὸς περὶ Tod ἐς TO μέλλον

fal / ,

καλῶς ἔχοντος ἀντισχυριζόμενος τἀναντία γιγ-
a: nr nr an nr
νώσκω. Kal οὐκ ἀξιῶ ὑμᾶς τῷ εὐπρεπεῖ τοῦ
/ / an rn ,
ἐκείνου λόγου τὸ χρήσιμον. τοῦ ἐμοῦ ἀπώ-

/ a δ y
σασθαι. δικαιότερος yap ὧν αὐτοῦ ὁ Royos

‘i x a 6 Ψ, > N. ’ /
πρὸς τὴν νῦν ὑμετέραν ὀργὴν ἐς Μυτιληναίους

[heer ΕΝ >’ , e a \ > f}
Tay ἂν ἐπισπάσαιτο" ἡμεῖς δὲ οὐ δικαζόμεθα
\ >’ » [2 lal / n > A
πρὸς αὐτούς, ὥστε τῶν δικαίων δεῖν, ἀλλὰ

/ A e ,ὔἅ
βουλευόμεθα περὶ αὐτῶν, ὅπως χρησίμως

ἕξουσιν.

“Ἔν οὖν ταῖς πόλεσι πολλῶν θανάτου
On the in; Emule πρόκεινται, καὶ οὐκ ἴσων
Nee GN τῷδε, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλασσόνων ἁμαρτημάτων *
wrongdoing. ὅμως δὲ τῇ ἐλπίδι ἐπαιρόμενοι

Zz \ a
κινδυνεύουσι, καὶ οὐδείς πω καταγνοὺς ἑαυτοῦ
\ / a > ΙΑ Φ > ᾿
μὴ περιέσεσθαι τῷ ἐπιβουλεύματι ἦλθεν ἐς τὸ
, t ᾽ / 4 e
2 δεινόν. πόλις Te ἀφισταμένη Tis TH ἥσσω
a VA \ Xx /
τῇ δοκήσει ἔχουσα THY παρασκευὴν ἢ οἰκείαν
Ἃ » / / > /
ἢ ἄλλων ξυμμαχίᾳ τούτῳ ἐπεχείρησεν ;
Ψ
8 πεφύκασί τε ἅπαντες καὶ ἰδίᾳ καὶ δημοσίᾳ
if le
ἁμαρτάνειν, καὶ οὐκ ἔστι νόμος ὅστις ἀπείρξει
Yh >? Ν / 7 \ an n
τούτου, ἐπεὶ διεξεληλύθασί γε διὰ πασῶν τῶν
A /
ζημιῶν of ἄνθρωποι προστιθέντες, εἴ πως
a x n
ἧσσον ἀδικοῖντο ὑπὸ τῶν κακούργων. Kal
> a /
eikos TO πάλαι τῶν μεγίστων ἀδικημάτων
μαλακωτέρας κεῖσθαι αὐτάς, παραβαινομένων

2. tnula mpdxerrar ABEFM +p. G. ὃ. τοῦτο ABEFM
yp. G. 13. προτιθέντες Kriiger.

bo

0

σι

-

0

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (44—46) 41

‘ a / > 4 V4 e \
δὲ τῷ χρόνῳ ἐς τὸν θάνατον αἱ πολλαὶ
ἀνήκουσιν: καὶ τοῦτο ὅμως παραβαίνεται.
i /
4 ἢ τοίνυν δεινότερόν τι τούτου δέος εὑρετέον
ἐστὶν ἢ τόδε γε οὐδὲν ἐπίσχει, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ μὲν 30
΄
πενία ἀνάγκῃ τὴν τόλμαν παρέχουσα, ἡ δ᾽
> , lcd \ ΄ \ /
ἐξουσία ὕβρει τὴν πλεονεξίαν καὶ φρονήματι,
φ > ” / > aA al > rd
ai δ᾽ ἄλλαι ξυντυχίαι ὀργῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων,
> / \
ὡς ἑκάστη τις κατέχεται ὑπ ἀνηκέστου τινὸς
Ὰ /
5 κρείσσονος, ἐξάγουσιν ἐς τοὺς κινδύνους. ἥ 2%
© €
τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως ἐπὶ παντί, ὁ μὲν
e ΄ ΄ ᾽ > 4 \ e \ \
ἡγούμενος, ἡ ὃ ἐφεπομένη, Kal ὁ μὲν τὴν
> \ > / « \ \ > /
ἐπιβουλὴν ἐκφροντίζων, ἡ δὲ τὴν εὐπορίαν
A ΄, na a 3
τῆς τύχης ὑποτιθεῖσα, πλεῖστα βλάπτουσι,
nq n of
καὶ ὄντα ἀφανῆ κρείσσω ἐστὶ τῶν ὁρωμένων
n \ [2 rf > > » Lal > \ »
δεινῶν. καὶ ἡ τύχη ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς οὐδὲν ἔλασσον
΄ > \ > / ? / \
ξυμβώλλεται ἐς τὸ ἐπαίρειν: ἀδοκήτως yap
ἔστιν ὅτε παρισταμένη καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑὕὑπο-
δεεστέρων κινδυνεύειν τινὰ προάγει, καὶ οὐχ
/ a
ἧσσον τὰς πόλεις, ὅσῳ περὶ τῶν μεγίστων 85
4 A ” > n \ \
τε, ἐλευθερίας ἢ ἄλλων ἀρχῆς, καὶ μετὰ
πάντων ἕκαστος ἀλογίστως ἐπὶ πλέον τι
CAEN »Ὁ 7] e a 3 ' \
αὑτὸν ἐδόξασεν. ἁπλῶς τε ἀδύνατον Kal
A > ’ὔ e Μ a > /
πολλῆς εὐηθείας, ὅστις οἴεται τῆς ἀνθρωπείας
4 a
φύσεως ὁρμωμένης προθύμως τι πρᾶξαι ἀπο- 40
/
τροπήν τινα ἔχειν ἢ νόμων ἰσχύι ἢ ἄλλῳ τῳ
δεινῷ.
16 ee Οὐ \ ” n ΄ Aa ,
ὔκουν χρὴ οὔτε τοῦ θανάτου τῇ ζημίᾳ

eo
i)

for)

~

18. καὶ τοῦτο] κἀν τούτῳ Kriiger: fort. καὶ ταὐτὰ. 20.
τόδε C: τὸ cett. 28. ὀργὴν Stahl. || τὸν ἄνθρωπον Classen.
28. ἐπιβουλὴν M: ἐπιβολὴν cett. 36; ze Cr om. cett.

38. αὑτὸν vulg. : αὐτῶν codd.

42 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

/ U a
ὡς ἐχεγγύῳ πιστεύσαντας χεῖρον βουλεύσα-

ἣ ζ ” >] ΄ ee
Severity will σθαι οὔτε ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαι
have an exas-

5 an 3 n e > »
perating effect. τοῖς ἀπόστασιν ως ουκ ECOTAL

σι

lal 7
μεταγνῶναι καὶ ὅτι ἐν βραχυτάτῳ τὴν

wo

φ if a / \ “ rn
ἁμαρτίαν καταλῦσαι. σκέψασθε yap ὅτι νῦν
a / a
μέν, ἤν τις Kal ἀποστᾶσα πόλις γνῷ μὴ
»- δ 9: La \
περιεσομένη, ἔλθοι av ἐς ξύμβασιν δυνατὴ
AY a
οὖσα ἔτι τὴν δαπάνην ἀποδοῦναι, καὶ τὸ
\ 4 an 3 / \ / ”
λοιπὸν ὑποτελεῖν: ἐκείως δὲ τίνα οἴεσθε 10
Yi n
ἥντινα οὐκ ἄμεινον μὲν ἢ νῦν TapacKevaced ban,
/ fal
πολιορκίᾳ δὲ παρατενεῖσθαι ἐς τοὔσχατον, εἰ
xX 4 oN. if A \ \ a
τὸ αὐτὸ δύναται σχολῇ Kal ταχὺ ξυμβῆναι;
δ a lal > Vs an /
3 ἡμῖν τε πῶς ov βλάβη δαπανᾶν καθημένοις
\ Ν > / , Ἃ ef /
διὰ τὸ ἀξύμβατον Kal, ἢν ἕλωμεν, πόλιν 15
rd 7 na εἶ an ff \
ἐφθαρμένην παραλαβεῖν Kal τῆς προσόδου τὸ
\ a Vf
λοιπὸν am αὐτῆς στέρεσθαι; ἰσχύομεν δὲ
Ν \ / a “ > A
4 πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους τῷδε. ὥστε Ov δικαστὰς
a a an fal ,
ὄντας δεῖ ἡμᾶς μᾶλλον τῶν ἐξαμαρτανόντων
> an ΄ XN ς an Ὁ > \
ἀκριβεῖς βλάπτεσθαι ἢ ὁρᾶν ὅπως ἐς τὸν 90
, a /
ἔπειτα χρόνον μετρίως κολάζοντες ταῖς πόλεσιν
“ , / a
ἕξομεν ἐς χρημάτων λόγον ἰσχυούσαις χρῆσθαι,
\ \ \ a / a
καὶ τὴν φυλακὴν μὴ ἀπὸ τῶν νόμων τῆς
/ 5) a a ᾽ > 5 \ n
δεινότητος ἀξιοῦν ποιεῖσθαι, ἀλλ ἀπὸ τῶν

σι

ἔργων τῆς ἐπιμελείας. οὗ νῦν τοὐναντίον 2
n + Wi \e \ / 2 ,
δρῶντες, ἤν τινα ἐλεύθερον καὶ βίᾳ ἀρχόμενον
>’ \ ’ὔ 5 ΄,
εἰκότως πρὸς αὐτονομίαν ἀποστάντα χείρω-
n , fel an
σώμεθα, χαλεπῶς οἰόμεθα χρῆναι τιμωρεῖσθαι.
\ \ 4 3 / > 3 Va
6 χρὴ δὲ τοὺς ἐλευθέρους οὐκ ἀφισταμένους

46 11]. παρασκευάσεσθαι vulg.: παρασκευάσασθαι coda. 12.
δὲ Reiske: τε codd. εἰ cfG : ἢ cett. 25. τἀναντία ABF.

ISTOPION Γ' (46—47) 43

σφόδρα κολάζειν, ἀλλὰ πρὶν ἀποστῆναι σφόδρα 80

/ Ν / μέ ’
φυλάσσειν καὶ προκαταλαμβάνειν ὅπως μηδ
’ ce
és ἐπίνοιαν τούτου ἴωσι, κρατήσαντάς τε ὅτι
ἜΑ / \ woe, 2 /
ἐπ᾽ ἐλάχιστον τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπιφέρειν.

ι7 “Ὑμεῖς δὲ σκέψασθε ὅσον ἂν καὶ τοῦτο

¢ / / i;
ἁμαρτάνοιτε Κλέωνι πειθόμενοι. pyen it the
a \ \ econ ¢ κα » penalty pro-
2viv μὲν yap ὑμῖν ὁ δῆμος ἐν Posed is just, it
A ἢ , » isi jient.
πάσαις ταῖς πόλεσιν εὔνους ἐστί, *'DexPemen
x x > , - ? ’ὔ ” 2\
καὶ ἢ οὐ ξυναφίσταται τοῖς ὀλίγοις ἤ, ἐὰν
βιασθῇ, ὑπάρχει τοῖς ἀποστήσασι πολέμιος
/ an / /
εὐθύς, καὶ τῆς ἀντικαθισταμένης πόλεως
Ν a , » > ,
τὸ πλῆθος ξύμμαχον ἔχοντες ἐς πόλεμον
ἈΕῚ ἢ ? \ a \ a \
ἐπέρχεσθε. εἰ δὲ διαφθερεῖτε τὸν δῆμον τὸν
,’ / an
Μυτιληναίων, ὃς οὔτε μετέσχε τῆς ἀποστάσεως,
/
ἐπειδή τε ὅπλων ἐκράτησεν, ἑκὼν παρέδωκε
\ / a \ /
τὴν πόλιν, πρῶτον μὲν ἀδικήσετε TOUS εὐεργέτας
/ “-“ a
κτείνοντες, ἔπειτα καταστήσετε τοῖς δυνατοῖς
rn ,
τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὃ βούλονται μάλιστα: ἀφ-
/ \ / a \
ἱστάντες yap τὰς πόλεις τὸν δῆμον εὐθὺς
΄ a 5
ξύμμαχον ἕξουσι. προδειξάντων ὑμῶν τὴν
\ a rn «
αὐτὴν ζημίαν τοῖς τε ἀδικοῦσιν ὁμοίως

eo

- an / a / \ »)ὼ
4 κεῖσθαι καὶ τοῖς μή. δεῖ δέ, καὶ εἰ ἠδίκησαν,
\ al τ ἃ ,ὔ lal , Ia
μὴ προσποιεῖσθαι, ὅπως ὃ μόνον ἡμῖν ἔτι ξύμ-

4 \ / / \ fal
5 μαχὸν ἐστι μὴ πολέμιον γένηται. καὶ τοῦτο 9

πολλῴ ξυμφορώτερον ἡγοῦμαι ἐς τὴν κάθεξιν
τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἑκόντας ἡμᾶς ἀδικηθῆναι ἢ δικαίως
ods μὴ δεῖ διαφθεῖραι. καὶ τὸ Κλέωνος τὸ
αὐτὸ δίκαιον καὶ ξύμφορον τῆς τιμωρίας οὐχ
εὑρίσκεται ἐν αὐτῷ δυνατὸν ὃν ἅμα γίγνεσθαι.

‘7 9. τὸν] τῶν ABEFM. 25, ταὐτῷ Kriiger.

10

25

48

49

2

μ»

49

44 ϑΘου ΚΎΙΑΘΥ

e¢ δὴν lal δὲ / > / {ὃ 3 \
μεῖς δὲ γνόντες ἀμείνω τάδε εἶναι Kal
: / Μ ΄ , £53
Peroration. μήτε οἴκτῳ πλέον νείμαντες μήτ
2 / 2O\ > Ν IA γ» > >
ἐπιεικείᾳ, ols οὐδὲ ἐγὼ ἐῶ προσάγεσθαι, ἀπ
> a na
αὐτῶν δὲ τῶν παραινουμένων πείθεσθέ μοι
fA

Μυτιληναίων ods μὲν Πάχης ἀπέπεμψεν ὡς

3 a a “Ὁ: , \ > ”
ἀδικοῦντας κρῖναι Ka? ἡσυχίαν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἄλλους
A > A {ὃ \ ” xX / > \
ἐᾶν οἰκεῖν. τάδε yap ἔς Te TO μέλλον ἀγαθὰ
\ a / » 7 “ \
καὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἤδη φοβερά: ὅστις yap

9 ΓΑ \ VA
εὖ βουλεύεται πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους κρείσσων

Δ 5 2

ἐστὶν ἢ μετ᾽ ἔργων ἰσχύος ἀνοίᾳ ἐπιών."
a \ e lé “-
Τοιαῦτα δὲ ὁ Διόδοτος εἶπεν. ῥηθεισῶν

a a rd

Small majority δὲ τῶν γνωμῶν τούτων μάλιστα

f i 3 iA \
Asecond ship ἀντιπάλων mpds ἀλλήλας οἱ

reaches Lesbos ? » 3 ᾿ ᾽ ree:
ΤΉ ane A@nvaio. ἦλθον μὲν ἐς ἀγῶνα
to vent 7 a , \ ray 2
therecution Of@s τῆς δοξῆς καὶ ἐγένοντο ἐν

of the decree. Ὁ / 2 , ᾽ ,ὕ
τῇ χειροτονίᾳ ἀγχώμαλοι, ἐκράτησε

\ e rn / \ ἐφ > \ ”
δὲ ἡ τοῦ Διοδότου. καὶ τριήρη εὐθὺς ἄλλην

> , \ / “ \ ,
ἀπέστελλον κατὰ σπουδήν, ὅπως μὴ φθασάσης

an / /
THs προτέρας εὕρωσι διεφθαρμένην τὴν πόλιν"

- ,

προεῖχε δὲ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ νυκτὶ μάλιστα. παρα-
σκευασάντων δὲ τῶν Μυτιληναίων πρέσβεων τῇ

\ με \ Ν \ / ς th
νηὶ οἶνον Kal ἄλφιτα καὶ μεγάλα ὑποσχομένων,

\ rn a

εἰ φθάσειαν, ἐγένετο σπουδὴ τοῦ πλοῦ τοιαύτη
ef » / « 7 y \
ὥστε ἤσθιον τε ἅμα ἐλαύνοντες οἴνῳ καὶ
ἐλαίῳ ἄλφιτα πεφυραμένα, καὶ οἱ μὲν ὕπνον

ἐλαίῳ pita ραμένα, K ἑ μὲν ὃ

an © ind

ἡροῦντο κατὰ μέρος, οἱ δὲ ἤλαυνον. κατὰ
τύχην δὲ πνεύματος οὐδενὸς ἐναντιωθέντος

1. δὲ] μὲν ΕἾΟΜ. 3. ἀλλήλας f[GM: ἀλλήλους cett.
5. ὁμοίως Bredow. 9. προτέρας] priorem Valla: δευτέρας
codd. 15. mepupuéva CE,

σι

10

σι

50

bo

oo

51

ISTOPION Τ' (48—51) 45

a "s a
καὶ τῆς μὲν προτέρας νεὼς οὐ σπουδῇ
΄, 915 n > / 7 \
πλεούσης ἐπὶ πρᾶγμα ἀλλόκοτον, ταύτης δὲ

,
τοιούτῳ τρόπῳ ἐπειγομένη, ἡ μὲν ἔφθασε 30
τοσοῦτον ὅσον Ildynta ἀνεγνωκέναι τὸ
ψήφισμα καὶ μέλλειν δράσειν τὰ δεδογμένα,
ἡ δ᾽ ὑστέρα αὐτῆς ἐπικατάγεται καὶ διε-

΄ \ a \ n \ ς
κώλυσε μὴ διαφθεῖραι. παρὰ τοσοῦτον μὲν ἡ
Μυτιλήνη ἦλθε κινδύνους τοὺς δ᾽ ἄλλους
” ἃ ς 4 > /
ἄνδρας ods ὁ Iladyns ἀπέπεμψεν Fate of the
δ ti) ᾿ξ x" 2 AN Mytileneans
ὡς αἰτιωτάτους OVYTAS τῆς aTrO- and of Lesbos.

4 ᾿ς / e
στάσεως Κλέωνος γνώμῃ διέφθειραν οἱ
> al 3 / μὰ /
Αθηναῖοι (ἦσαν δὲ ὀλίγῳ πλείους χιλίων),

\ , , : \ a

καὶ Μυτιληναίων τείχη καθεῖλον καὶ ναῦς
, ec \ / \ > ”

παρέλαβον. ὕστερον δὲ φόρον μὲν οὐκ ἔταξαν

bd fol rn

Λεσβίοις, κλήρους δὲ ποιήσαντες τῆς γῆς πλὴν

τῆς Μηθυμναίων τρισχιλίους τριακοσίους μὲν

τοῖς θεοῖς ἱεροὺς ἐξεῖλον, ἐπὶ δὲ τοὺς ἄλλους τὸ
lal al 4 /

σφῶν αὐτῶν κληρούχους τοὺς λαχόντας ἀπέ-

e > 4 4 ὔ lal
πεμψαν" οἷς ἀργύριον Λέσβιοι ταξάμενοι τοῦ
κλήρου ἑκάστου τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ δύο μνᾶς φέρειν

> \ > / \ a A \
αὐτοὶ εἰργάζοντο τὴν γῆν. παρέλαβον δὲ

\ \ > Lo > / / 43 an
καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ πολίσματα οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 15
ὅσων Μυτιληναῖοι ἐκράτουν, καὶ ὑπήκουον
“ > / \ \ \ /
ὕστερον ᾿Αθηναίων. τὰ μὲν κατὰ Λέσβον
οὕτως ἐγένετο.

> \ a > a / x \ Ψ'

Ev δὲ τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει μετὰ τὴν Λέσβου

’ lal “
ἅλωσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι Νικίου τοῦ Νικη- xicias seizes the
ράτου στρατηγοῦντος ἐστράτευσαν δ Of Minoa.
\ an a

ἐπὶ ΜινῴωμΟν τὴν νῆσον, ἣ κεῖται πρὸ
Μεγάρων: ἐχρῶντο δὲ αὐτῇ πύργον ἐνοικοδο- 5

σι

2

3

52

51

52

46 OOYKYAIAOY

/ e a ΄ 5
μήσαντες οἱ Μεγαρῆς φρουρίῳ. ἐβούλετο Se
/ \ \ ἧς >
Νικίας τὴν φυλακὴν αὐτόθεν δι’ ἐλάσσονος
ml oe , \ A T5128 a , \
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ μὴ ἀπὸ τοῦ Βουδόρου καὶ
an = n 5 ee ,
τῆς Σαλαμῖνος εἶναι, τούς τε [᾿ελοποννησίους,
ἐτᾷ \ lal » 3. αν ,
ὅπως μὴ ποιῶνται ἔκπλους αὐτόθεν λανθάνοντες
/ i
τριήρων τε, οἷον Kal TO πρὶν γενόμενον, Kal
λῃστῶν ἐκπομπαῖς, τοῖς τε Μεγαρεῦσιν ἅμα
δὲ 2 a ς ἣν Φ » x a N id
μηὸὲεν ἐσπλεῖν. ἐλὼν οὖν ἀπὸ τῆς ἰσαίας
“ Ἅ 4 7 lal
πρῶτον δύο πύργω προύχοντε μηχαναῖς ἐκ
θαλάσσης καὶ τὸν ἔσπλουν ἐς τὸ μεταξὺ τῆς
/ > , > , \ \ » fo
νήσου ἐλευθερώσας ἀπετείχιζε Kal TO ἐκ τῆς
3 φΦ lé
ἠπείρου, ἡ κατὰ γέφυραν διὰ τενάγους
ἐπιβοήθεια ἣν τῇ νήσῳ οὐ πολὺ διεγχούσ
ἤθεια ἣν τῇ νήσῳ οὐ ὺ διεχούσῃ
A » / AS a Ly,
τῆς ἠπείρους. ὡς δὲ τοῦτο ἐξειργάσαντο ἐν
if. ,ὔ hed
ἡμέραις ὀλίγαις, ὕστερον δὴ καὶ ἐν TH νήσῳ
- Ν \ \
τεῖχος ἐγκαταλιπὼν καὶ φρουρὰν ἀνεχώρησε
τῷ στρατῷ.
« «
24 εἰ \ δὲ \ , \ “ θέ
πὸ δὲ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρονους τοῦ θέρους

/ Ν £ an /
FallofPratara. τούτου καὶ ot [᾿λαταινιῆς οὐκέτι
Spartan com-

mission to ἔχοντες σῖτον οὐδὲ δυνάμενοι πο-
decide on ἐν 2 a
its fate. λιορκεῖσθαι ξυνέβησαν τοῖς 1]ελο-

/ a / VA D as Ps
ποννησίοις τοιῷδε τρόπῳ. προσέβαλλον αὐτῶν
an id
τῷ τείχει, of δὲ οὐκ ἐδύναντο ἀμύνεσθαι.
\ Ν ὦ ᾿ ἐ Ἂ 3 /
γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος ἄρχων τὴν ἀσθένειαν
αὐτῶν βίᾳ μὲν οὐκ ἐβούλετο ἑλεῖν (εἰρημένον
Ν " iy an δι , “ le 3:
yap ἦν αὐτῷ ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος, ὅπως, εἰ
/ 3
σπονδαὶ γίγνοιντό ποτε πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ
9, τούς] πρός Hiinnekes. || post Πελοποννησίους add. σκοπῶν
Stahl. 13. ἀπὸ τῆς Νισαίας del. Classen. 19.

ἐξειργάσατο ΟΜ.
δ. προσέβαλον ABEFM.

=
Oo

20

or

ISTOPION ΤΓ' (51—53) 47

Evyywpoiev ὅσα πολέμῳ χωρία ἔχουσιν
« ὔ > Yd \ > A »Μ e
ἑκάτεροι ἀποδίδοσθαι, μὴ avadotos εἴη ἡ
Πλάταια ὡς αὐτῶν ἑκόντων προσχωρησάντων),
προσπέμπει δὲ αὐτοῖς κήρυκα λέγοντα, εἰ
βούλονται παραδοῦναι τὴν πόλιν ἑκόντες τοῖς 15
Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ δικασταῖς ἐκείνοις χρήσασθαι,
τούς τε ἀδίκους κολάσειν, παρὰ δίκην δὲ
> / r \ e a . id ͵7ὔ
8 οὐδένα. τοσαῦτα μὲν ὁ κῆρυξ εἶπεν: οἱ δέ
3 \ πὸ > “Ὁ > 0 / ἐδ
(ἦσαν γὰρ ἤδη ἐν τῷ ἀσθενεστάτῳ) παρέδοσαν
\ / \ \ fal ΝΜ e
τὴν πόλιν. καὶ τοὺς Ἰ]λαταιᾶς ἔτρεφον oi 30
Πελοποννήσιοι ἡμέρας τινάς, ἐν ὅσῳ οἱ ἐκ τῆς
Λακεδαίμονος δικασταὶ πέντε ἄνδρες ἀφίκοντο.
ἐλθόντων δὲ αὐτῶν κατηγορία μὲν οὐδεμία
προυτέθη, ἠρώτων δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐπικαλεσάμενοι

μ».

nr / Ψ' \ \

τοσοῦτον μόνον, εἴ τι Λακεδαιμονίους Kal τοὺς 2%
ξυμμάχους ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ τῷ καθεστῶτι
> / > ΄ > / e ’ Μ
ἀγαθὸν [τι] εἰργασμένοι εἰσίν. οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον
> / “-
αἰτησάμενοι μακρότερα εἰπεῖν καὶ προτάξαντες

“Ὁ > an b ts / Ν > /
σφῶν αὐτῶν ᾿Αστύμαχόν te τὸν ᾿Ασωπολάου

\ / » > / / ΜΝ
καὶ Λάκωνα τὸν Αἰειμνήστου πρόξενον ὄντα 80

/
Λακεδαιμονίων: καὶ ἐπελθόντες ἔλεγον τοιάδε.
n / 9

ὅ8 “Τὴν μὲν παράδοσιν τῆς πόλεως, ὦ Aake-

σι

/ ΄ fal
δαιμόνιοι, πιστεύσαντες ὑμῖν ἐποιήη- Derexce oF

" , 5 «5.
σάμεθα, οὐ τοιάνδε δίκην οἰόμενοι τς fant

ig / / s ὰ
ὑφέξειν, νομιμωτέραν δέ τινα ἔσε- fi we arse

\ al i itles
Oa, καὶ ἐν δικασταῖς οὐκ ἂν ili be fruitless. 5
” “ “oa
ἄλλοις δεξάμενοι, ὥσπερ Kal ἐσμέν, ὍΝ
/ x € a e 4 \ » ᾽ν >
γενέσθαι [ἢ ὑμῖν), ἡγούμενοι τὸ ἴσον μάλιστ
17. κολάσειν Kriiger: κολάζειν codd. 27. τι del. Bohme.
53 5, ἂν Kriiger: ἐν codd. 7. ἢ ὑμῖν non legit Schol,

48 ΘΟΥΚΥΆΤΑΘΥ

x Lal
2 ἂν φέρεσθαι. νῦν δὲ φοβούμεθα μὴ ἀμφοτέρων
, if na rn
ἅμα ἡμαρτήκαμεν" TOV τε γὰρ ἀγῶνα περὶ τῶν
δεινοτάτων εἶναι εἰκότως ὑποπτεύομεν καὶ
a \ a /
ὑμᾶς μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε, τεκμαιρόμενοι
προκατηγορίας τε ἡμῶν οὐ προγεγενημένης
Φ \ a2 a » , 5) \ , 5 ΄
ἢ χρὴ ἀντειπεῖν (ἀλλ αὐτοὶ λόγον ἠτησάμεθα)
, a i
To Te ἐπερώτημα βραχὺ ὄν, ᾧ τὰ μὲν ἀληθῆ
> / >? / id Ν \ na
ἀποκρίνασθαι ἐναντία γίγνεται, Ta δὲ ψευδῆ
EX » / ἊΝ ”
ἔλεγχον ἔχει. πανταχόθεν δὲ ἄποροι καθε-
an / A
στῶτες ἀναγκαζόμεθα Kal ἀσφαλέστερον δοκεῖ
le
εἶναι εἰπόντας TL κινδυνεύειν: Kal yap ὁ μὴ
ς \ , a aN ες Ἀγ, x
ῥηθεὶς λόγος τοῖς ὧδ ἔχουσιν αἰτίαν ἂν
παράσχοι ὡς, εἰ ἐλέχθη, σωτήριος ἂν ἣν.
n N » ς ἡ \ n ” x
χαλεπῶς δὲ ἔχει ἡμῖν πρὸς τοῖς ἄλλοις καὶ
c: , » a \ \ ” b) /
ἡ πειθώ. ἀγνῶτες μὲν yap ὄντες ἀλλήλων
ἐπεσενεγκάμενοι μαρτύρια ὧν ἄπειροι ἦτε
> Ai > » rn Ν X 5Ὰν. 7 Ie
ὠφελούμεθ᾽ av: νῦν δὲ πρὸς εἰδότας πάντα

ie)

ΠΕ

λελέξεται, καὶ δέδιμεν οὐχὶ μὴ προκαταγνόντες :

ἡμῶν τὰς ἀρετὰς ἥσσους εἶναι τῶν ὑμετέρων

yy > \ a > \ \ + Lf
ἔγκλημα αὐτὸ ποιῆτε, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἄλλοις χάριν
φέροντες ἐπὶ διεγνωσμένην κρίσιν καθιστώμεθα.
54 παρεχόμενοι δὲ ὅμως ἃ ἔχομεν δίκαια πρός
ἈΝ ft id x > € an ΝΥ Ν᾿
τε τὰ Θηβαίων διάφορα καὶ ἐς ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς
ἄλλους “Ἕλληνας, τῶν εὖ δεδραμένων ὑπόμνησιν

ποιησόμεθα καὶ πείθειν πειρασόμεθα.

2. “Φαμὲν γὰρ πρὸς τὸ ἐρώτημα τὸ βραχύ,
εἴ τι Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμ-

Previous
i a 7 a 5) \
ere μάχους ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ τῷδε ἀγαθὸν
Sparta. ΄ > \ ε
πεποιήκαμεν, εἰ μὲν ὡς πολεμίους

> a > > an ἀν Ἂν \ > ,
ἐρωτᾶτε, οὐκ ἀδικεῖσθαι ὑμᾶς μὴ εὖ παθόντας,

μ-

5

to
σι

σι

3

rs

55

eo

55

ISTOPION Γ' (53—55) 49

, Ki : / > My e id
φίλους δὲ νομίζοντας αὐτοὺς ἁμαρτάνειν
an lal 7
μᾶλλον τοὺς ἡμῖν ἐπιστρατεύσαντας. τὰ ὃ
> “a > / \ x \ an > \
ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ καὶ πρὸς tov Μῆδον ἀγαθοὶ

ἴω ,

γεγενήμεθα, τὴν μὲν οὐ λύσαντες νῦν πρότεροι,

a \ 4 / 2 / n
τῷ δὲ ξυνεπιθέμενοι τότε ἐς ἐλευθερίαν τῆς

“Ἑλλάδος μόνοι Βοιωτῶν. καὶ γὰρ ἡἠπειρῶταί
μ γὰρ ἠπειρ

᾽
τε ὄντες ἐναυμαχήσαμεν ἐπ ᾿Αρτεμισίῳ, μάχῃ
τε τῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ γῇ γενομένῃ παρεγενό-
μεθα ὑμῖν τε καὶ Ilavoavia: εἴ τέ τι ἄλλο
a / /
Kat ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ἐγένετο ἐπικίμδυνον
a “ , \ ΄ /
τοῖς "“EdAnot, πάντων παρὰ δύναμιν μετέ-
a / 7:
σχομεν. καὶ ὑμῖν, ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἰδίᾳ,
/
ὅτεπερ δὴ μέγιστος φόβος περιέστη τὴν
\ . an
Σπάρτην μετὰ τὸν σεισμὸν τῶν és ᾿Ιθώμην
Εἱλώτων ἀποστάντων, τὸ τρίτον μέρος ἡμῶν
αὐτῶν ἐξεπέμψαμεν ἐς ἐπικουρίαν’ ὧν οὐκ
εἰκὸς ἀμνημονεῖν.
“ec K \ λ \ \ \ , A
al τὰ μὲν παλαιὰ Kal μέγιστα τοιοῦτοι
2 , Ge / \ ᾽ /
ἠξιώσαμεν εἶναι, πολέμιοι δὲ ἐγενό- How the
μεθα ὕστερον. ὑμεῖς δὲ αἴτιοι" “ΝΣ Pesan.
ὃ / \ , Ὡ Θ a - cal
εομένων yap ξυμμαχίας ὅτε Θηβαῖοι ἡμᾶς
᾽ ν ε rs ᾽ , \ \ ᾽
ἐβιάσαντο, ὑμεῖς ἀπεώσασθε καὶ πρὸς ᾿Αθη-
ναίους ἐκελεύετε τραπέσθαι ὡς ἐγγὺς ὄντας,

a \ , a
ὑμῶν δὲ μακρὰν ἀποικούντων. ἐν μέντοι τῷ
/ na
πολέμῳ οὐδὲν ἐκπρεπέστερον ὑπὸ ἡμῶν οὔτε
> te » > , < > > > lel
ἐπάθετε οὔτε ἐμελλήσατε. εἰ δ᾽ ἀποστῆναι

᾿Αθηναίων οὐκ ἠθελήσαμεν ὑμῶν κελευσάντων,
οὐκ ἠδικοῦμεν " καὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι ἐβοήθουν ἡμῖν
ἐναντία Θηβαίοις ὅτε ὑμεῖς ἀπωκνεῖτε, καὶ
4. γὰρ] δὲ ΑΒΡ.
K

10

15

σι

4

δ6

2

3

5

56

50 OBOYKYALIAOY

na 5 A

προδοῦναι αὐτοὺς οὐκέτι ἢν καλόν, ἄλλως TE

3 /
καὶ ods εὖ παθών τις Kal αὐτὸς δεόμενος
προσηγάγετο ξυμμάχους καὶ πολιτείας μετέ-
37 \ 3 Ν / EN
λαβεν, ἰέναι δὲ ἐς τὰ παραγγελλόμενα εἰκὸς
Ὁ ΄ ἃ \ ΒΝ ἢ a na
ἣν προθύμως. ἃ δὲ ἑκάτεροι ἐξηγεῖσθε τοῖς
/ \
ξυμμάχοις, οὐχ οἱ ἑπόμενοι αἴτιοι εἴ TL μὴ
lal ? a ’ > ε » a δεν \ \
καλῶς ἐδρᾶτο, GAN οἱ ἄγοντες ἐπὶ τὰ μὴ

ὀρθῶς ἔχοντα.

lal / an
“Θηβαῖοι δὲ πολλὰ μὲν καὶ ἄλλα ἡμᾶς

: . lal >
Wrongs inflicted ἠδίκησαν, τὸ δὲ τελευταῖον αὐτοὶ
on Plataea by

Thebes. ξύνιστε, δι ὅπερ καὶ τάδε πά-
\ iN ,
TXOMEV. πόλιν γὰρ αὐτοὺς THY ἡμετέραν KaTA-

λαμβάνοντας ἐν σπονδαῖς καὶ προσέτι ἱερομηνίᾳ
μ ρ ρομηνίς
3: rn > a \ Ν n
ὀρθῶς τε ἐτιμωρησάμεθα κατὰ τὸν πᾶσι νόμον
fal \ / , ΗΝ
καθεστῶτα, τὸν ἐπιόντα πολέμιον ὅσιον εἶναι
/ a , > Ν
ἀμύνεσθαι, καὶ νῦν οὐκ ἂν εἰκότως δι αὐτοὺς
’ὔ Ἂς A va γ'
βλαπτοίμεθα. εἰ γὰρ τῷ αὐτίκα χρησίμῳ
Ὁ \ / / \
Sparta, ifshe ὑμῶν τε Kal ἐκείνων πολεμίῳ TO

ards justice / ͵ “ x 3 a
andhertrue, δίκαιον λήψεσθε, τοῦ μὲν ὀρθοῦ

i tet το Φανεῖσθε οὐκ ἀληθεῖς κριταὶ ὄντες,
πα "8 στὸ δὲ ξυμφέρον μᾶλλον θεραπεύ-
airy οντες. καίτοι εἰ νῦν ὑμῖν ὠφέλιμοι
δοκοῦσιν εἶναι, πολὺ καὶ ἡμεῖς καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι
Ἕλληνες μᾶλλον τότε ὅτε ἐν μείζονι κινδύνῳ
ἦτε. νῦν μὲν γὰρ ἑτέροις ὑμεῖς ἐπέρχεσθε
δεινοί, ἐν ἐκείνῳ δὲ τῷ καιρῷ, ὅτε πᾶσι
δουλείαν ἐπέφερεν ὁ βάρβαρος, οἵδε μετ᾽

αὐτοῦ ἦσαν. καὶ δίκαιον ἡμῶν τῆς νῦν
19. eipara An. Bekk.: ἐδρᾶτε codd.
3. ὅπερ Poppo: ἅπερ codd. 6. τε οἵη. ABEFM.

20

σι

20

57

ISTOPION Τ' (55—57) 51

a \
ἁμαρτίας, εἰ dpa ἡμάρτηταί τι, ἀντιθεῖναν τὴν
/ \
τότε προθυμίαν: καὶ μείζω τε πρὸς ἐλάσσω
εὑρήσετε καὶ ἐν καιροῖς οἷς σπάνιον ἦν τῶν
, lol —
Ἑλλήνων τινὰ ἀρετὴν τῇ Ξέρξου δυνάμει
> / > lal / ἴω € \ Ν
ἀντιτάξασθαι, ἐπῃνοῦντο τε μᾶλλον οἱ μὴ τὰ
͵ὔ Ν \ yy € lal > /
ξύμφορα πρὸς τὴν ἔφοδον αὑτοῖς ἀσφαλείᾳ
/ bya we \ “- \ tf
πράσσοντες, ἐθέλοντες δὲ τολμᾶν μετὰ κινδύνων
a /
τὰ βέλτιστα. ὧν ἡμεῖς γενόμενοι Kal τιμη-
θέντες ἐς τὰ πρῶτα νῦν ἐπὶ τοῖς αὐτοῖς
fal > /
δέδιμεν μὴ διαφθαρῶμεν, ᾿Αθηναίους ἑλόμενοι
/ rn Xx ¢ na / /
δικαίως μᾶλλον ἢ ὑμᾶς Kepdaréws. καίτοι
χρὴ ταὐτὰ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ὁμοίως φαίνεσθαι
, \ Ν / \ ΜΝ
γιγνώσκοντας, καὶ τὸ ξυμφέρον μὴ ἄλλο τι
νομίσαι ἢ τῶν ξυμμάχων τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ὅταν
αἰεὶ βέβαιον τὴν χάριν τῆς ἀρετῆς ἔχουσι καὶ
Ν lal fol
TO παραυτίκα που ὑμῖν ὠφέλιμον καθιστῆται.
“ec II / , “ a \ (ὃ
ροσκέψασθέ τε ὅτι νῦν μὲν παράδειγμα
al -“ “ «
τοῖς πολλοῖς τῶν Ελλήνων ἀνδρ- Harshness to

, a i
ayabias νομίζεσθε" εἰ δὲ περὶ ἡμῶν fee wn ὍΘ

SS /
γνώσεσθε μὴ τὰ εἰκότα (οὐ yap ται τίν οὐ
» n a \ .
ἀφανῆ κρινεῖτε τὴν δίκην τήνδε, SP
4 nr lal
ἐπαινούμενοι δὲ περὶ οὐδ᾽ ἡμῶν μεμπτῶν),
4 δι “
ὁρᾶτε ὅπως μὴ οὐκ ἀποδέξωνται ἀνδρῶν
a /
ἀγαθῶν πέρι αὐτοὺς ἀμείνους ὄντας ἀπρεπές
TL ἐπιγνῶναι, οὐδὲ πρὸς ἱεροῖς τοῖς κοινοῖς
“ J ἈΝ e a a > a fel € is
σκῦλα ἀπὸ ἡμῶν τῶν εὐεργετῶν τῆς ᾿λλάδος

2 ἀνατεθῆναι. δεινὸν δὲ δόξει εἶναι ἸΠλάταιαν

21. τι cG: om. cett. 34, ὅταν] of ἂν Kriiger. 35.
ἔχουσι Heilmann: ἔχωσι codd.
1, προσσκέψασθε Meineke. 7, ἀποδέξονται ex corr. 6.

wo

0

35

52 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ

eo

nS

58

bw

/ a \ \
Λακεδαιμονίους πορθῆσαι, καὶ τοὺς μὲν πατέρας
/ ‘i al
ἀναγράψαι ἐς τὸν τρίποδα τὸν ἐν Δελφοῖς bv
/ a
ἀρετὴν τὴν πόλιν, ὑμᾶς δὲ Kal ἐκ παντὸς
a € a / /
τοῦ “Ἑλληνικοῦ πανοικεσίᾳ διὰ Θηβαίους ἐξ-
Lal a Xi: -“
αλεῖψραι. ἐς τοῦτο γὰρ δὴ ξυμφορᾶς προ-
77 ,
κεχωρήκαμεν, οἵτινες Μήδων τε κρατησάντων
Ue lal a al
ἀπωλλύμεθα καὶ νῦν ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πρὶν
if n
φιλτάτοις Θηβαίων ἡσσώμεθα καὶ δύο ἀγῶνας
\ , VA fd \
τοὺς μεγίστους ὑπέστημεν, τότε μέν, τὴν
/ \ t a a
πόλιν εἰ μὴ παρέδομεν, λιμῷ διαφθαρῆναι,
a / /
νῦν δὲ θανάτου δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι. καὶ περι-
, > / an ic N 7
εώσμεθα ἐκ πάντων ἸΪλαταιῆς of παρὰ δύναμιν
΄ > \ “ δ ΨᾺ \ 5 ΄
πρόθυμοι ἐς τοὺς “EXAnvas ἐρῆμοι καὶ ἀτιμώ-
an Υ. a
pnto καὶ οὔτε τῶν τότε ξυμμάχων ὠφελεῖ
a / re
οὐδείς, ὑμεῖς τε, ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἡ μόνη
\ / 52
ἐλπίς, δέδιμεν μὴ ov βέβαιοι ἦτε.
ee ,ὔ 3 a tA \ lal σ΄. a
Καίτοι ἀξιοῦμέν ye καὶ θεῶν ἕνεκα τῶν
fal \ / \
Earnest appeal υμμαχίικὼν ποτε ενομένων και
to remember the ξυμμ ‘xX "ἃ 2 ᾿ Y Ὁ yy,
past of Plataea τῆς ἀρετῆς τῆς ἐς τοὺς “EXAnvas
and to ac 3
humanely. καμφθῆναι ὑμᾶς καὶ μεταγνῶναι εἴ
e \ , > / ’ \
τι ὑπὸ Θηβαίων ἐπείσθητε, τήν τε δωρεὰν
ἀνταπαιτῆσαι αὐτοὺς μὴ κτείνειν οὺς μὴ ὑμῖν
/
πρέπει, σώφρονά TE ἀντὶ αἰσχρᾶς κομίσασθαι
VA x μὲ ἡὃ \ id ” lé
χάριν, καὶ μὴ ἡδονὴν δόντας ἄλλοις κακίαν
> AN 5 an \ \ Ἂν XN e »
αὐτοὺς ἀντιλαβεῖν: βραχὺ γὰρ τὸ τὰ ἡμέτερα
΄ tal Spits \ \ td
σώματα διαφθεῖραι, ἐπίπονον δὲ τὴν δύσ-

κλειαν αὐτοῦ ἀφανίσαι. οὐκ ἐχθροὺς γὰρ
ἡμᾶς εἰκότως τιμωρήσεσθε, ἀλλ’ εὔνους, κατ᾽

15. πανοικησίᾳ ABCFM. 18. ἀπωλλύμεθα f: ἀπολλύ-
μεθα codd. 22. δίκῃ om. Β.

7. teC: δὲ cett.

bo
οι

qn

ISTOPION ΤΓ' (57—59) 53

“ nr
8 ἀνάγκην πολεμήσαντας. ὥστε καὶ τῶν
σωμάτων ἄδειαν ποιοῦντες ὅσια ἂν δικάζοιυτε
\ Le] μά € / / x
Kal προνοοῦντες ὅτι ἑκόντας TE ἐλάβετε καὶ 15
χεῖρας προϊσχομένους (ὁ δὲ νόμος τοῖς Ἕλλησι᾽
μὴ κτείνειν τούτους), ἔτει δὲ καὶ εὐεργέτας
γεγενημένους διὰ παντός. ἀποβλέψατε γὰρ
ἐς πατέρων τῶν ὑμετέρων θήκας, ods ἀπο-
/ ς \ Us / > a
θανόντας ὑπὸ Μήδων καὶ tadévtas ἐν τῇ 30
ἡμετέρᾳ ἐτιμῶμεν κατὰ ἔτος ἕκαστον δημοσίᾳ
ἐσθήμασί τε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομίμοις, ὅσα τε
ἡ γῆ ἡμῶν ἀνεδίδου ὡραῖα, πάντων ἀπαρχὰς
» / 5 \ S / /
ἐπιφέροντες, εὖνοι μὲν ἐκ φιλίας χώρας,
4 ¢€ ᾿ς δ
ξύμμαχοι δὲ ὁμαίχμοις ποτὲ γενομένοις. ὧν 35
a = fal
ὑμεῖς τοὐναντίον ἂν δράσαιτε μὴ ὀρθῶς
, / 7 / \ Ἁ
γνόντες. σκέψασθέ τε" Ilavoavias μὲν γὰρ
54 > \ / > a 4
ἔθαπτεν αὐτοὺς νομίζων ἐν γῇ Te φιλίᾳ
τιθέναι καὶ παρ᾽ ἀνδράσι τοιούτοις " ὑμεῖς
δὲ εἰ κτενεῖτε ἡμᾶς καὶ χώραν τὴν ἸΠλαταιίδα 30
oh! 6
Θηβαΐδα ποιήσετε, Ti ἄλλο ἢ ἐν πολεμίᾳ TE
lal \
καὶ παρὰ τοῖς αὐθένταις πατέρας τοὺς
a a e
ὑμετέρους καὶ ξυγγενεῖς ἀτίμους yepav ὧν
νῦν ἴσχουσι καταλείψετε; πρὸς δὲ καὶ γῆν
Lg
ἐν ἡ ἠλευθερώθησαν οἱ “Ἕλληνες δουλώσετε, 35
e ΄ aA e “ἰῷ "2 2 > ΄
ἱερά τε θεῶν οἷς εὐξάμενοι Μήδων ἐκράτησαν
ἐρημοῦτε καὶ θυσίας τὰς πατρίους τῶν ἑσσα-
/
μένων Kal κτισάντων ἀφαιρήσεσθε.
59 “Οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης, ὦ Λακεδαι-
, a .
μόνιοι, τάδε, οὔτε ἐς τὰ κοινὰ τῶν Ῥοτοταίϊοπ.
ἢ Ἢ Ve , Ἀ ΕῚ \ /
AANVOVY νομιμὰ Kal ἐς TOUS προγόνους
ἁμαρτάνειν οὔτε ἡμᾶς τοὺς εὐεργέτας

~

σι

54 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

3 ᾽ Ὁ » A > \ 3 /
ἀλλοτρίας ἕνεκα ἔχθρας μὴ αὐτοὺς ἀδικηθέντας 5
διαφθεῖραι, φείσασθαι δὲ καὶ ἐπικλασθῆναι
a , / \ ee
τῇ γνώμῃ οἴκτῳ σώφρονι λαβόντας, μὴ ὧν
' Ψ if , rn ᾽
πεισόμεθα μόνον δεινότητα κατανοοῦντας, ἀλλ
οἷοί τε ἂν ὄντες πάθοιμεν καὶ ὡς ἀστάθμητον
\ n “ ἣν / > x \ ? id
τὸ τῆς ξυμφορᾶς ᾧτινί ποτ᾽ ἂν καὶ ἀναξίῳ 10
2 ξυμπέσοι. ἡμεῖς τε, ὧς πρέπον ἡμῖν καὶ ὡς
a \
ἡ χρεία προάγει, αἰτούμεθα ὑμᾶς, θεοὺς τοὺς
ς / \ \ a Cr / )
ομοβωμίους Kal κοινοὺς τῶν ᾿λλήνων ἐπι-
, a f 4 ’
βοώμενοι, πεῖσαι τάδε, προφερόμενοι «θ᾽»
Φ ἃ / an , \
ὅρκους ods of πατέρες ὑμῶν ὥὦμοσαν [μὴ 15
n / a n
apvnuovety| ἱκέται γιγνόμεθα ὑμῶν τῶν
πατρῴν τάφων καὶ ἐπικαλούμεθα τοὺς
la) \ if Ὁ X\ Δ N
κεκμηῶτας μὴ γενέσθαι ὑπὸ Θηβαίοις μηδὲ
a > iA /- »” n
τοῖς ἐχθίστοις φίλτατοι ὄντες παραδοθῆναι.

, ͵ , e \
ἡμέρας τε ἀναμιμνῇσκομεν ἐκείνης ἣ τὰ 20
3 n a

λαμπρότατα μετ᾽ αὐτῶν πράξαντες νῦν ἐν
an , os lal i
τῆδε Ta δεινότατα κινδυνεύομεν παθεῖν. ὅπερ
\ al a &
δὲ ἀναγκαῖόν te καὶ χαλεπώτατον τοῖς ὧδε
” / a , \ a / e
ἔχουσι λογου τελευτᾶν, διότι καὶ τοῦ βίου ὁ
, a / ,
κίνδυνος ἐγγὺς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, παυόμενοι λέγομεν 2
\ /
ἤδη ὅτι οὐ Θηβαίοις παρέδομεν τὴν πόλιν
/ , /, a
(εἱλόμεθα yap av πρό γε τούτου τῷ αἰσχίστῳ
ὀλέθρῳ λιμῷ τελευτῆσαι), ὑμῖν δὲ πιστεύσαντε
ρῳ λιμῷ τελευτῆσαι), ὑμῖν ς
/ \ , > \ / 5
προσήλθομεν (καὶ δίκαιον, εἰ μὴ πείθομεν, ἐς
x ,
τὰ αὐτὰ καταστήσαντας τὸν ἕξυντυχόντα

oo

eo

59 8. κατανοοῦντας c: κατανοοῦντες codd. 14. προφερό-
μενοι C: προσφερόμενοι cett. || θ᾽ add. Stahl. 15. μὴ ἀμνη-
μονεῖν del. Cobet. 18. κεκμηκότας CEM. 21. per’
αὐτῶν Gm: μεθ᾽ αὑτῶν cett. 30. καταστήσαντας [Ὁτη :
καταστήσαντες cett.

σι

ISTOPION Τ' (59—61) 55

A an / I
4 κίνδυνον ἐᾶσαι ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς ἑλέσθαι), ἐπισκή-

60

61

61

» e
πτομέν τε ἅμα μὴ ἸΠλαταιῆς ὄντες οἱ προθυ-
, \ \ ἝἭ 8, / Θ ,
μότατοι περὶ τοὺς “EXAnvas γενόμενοι Θηβαίοις
τοῖς ἡμῖν ἐχθίστοις ἐκ τῶν ὑμετέρων χειρῶν

a >
καὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας πίστεως, ἱκέται ὄντες, ὦ
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, παραδοθῆναι, γενέσθαι ὲ
n an \ \ ” “
σωτῆρας ἡμῶν καὶ μὴ τοὺς ἄλλους “λληνας
a ¢ n ͵ὔ 5»
ἐλευθεροῦντας ἡμᾶς διολέσαι.
Τοιαῦτα μὲν οἱ Πλαταιῆς εἶπον. οἱ δὲ
“ ,ὔ
Θηβαῖοι δείσαντες πρὸς τὸν λόγον The ‘Thebans
< , ask leave
αὐτῶν μὴ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοί τι reply.
-“ 7
ἐνδῶσι, παρελθόντες ἔφασαν καὶ αὐτοὶ βούλε-
-“ /
σθαι εἰπεῖν, ἐπειδὴ Kal ἐκείνοις παρὰ γνώμην
fal , ,ὔ ,ὕ an \
THY αὐτῶν μακρότερος λόγος ἐδόθη τῆς πρὸς
τὸ ἐρώτημα ἀποκρίσεως. ὡς δ᾽ ἐκέλευσαν,
ἔλεγον τοιάδε.
3 A
ovs μὲν λόγους οὐκ ἂν ἡτησά ἣν,
121 λ ἠτησάμεθα εἰπεῖν
εἰ καὶ αὐτοὶ βραχέως τὸ ἐρωτηθὲν Βεριν or tHe
: ᾿ A A na cop ay LBEBANS. 6
ATTEKPLVAVTO και μὴ ἔπι NaS Plataeans have

; ri > ᾿ praised them-
τραπόμενοίύ κατηγορίαν ἐποιήσαντο selves and

᾿ ς Ἔν ἧς 3 a attacked us at
καὶ περὶ αὑτῶν ἔξω τῶν προ- length.” -

ΓΑ \ Ψ +O\ ’ £ \ A
κειμένων Kal ἅμα οὐδὲ ἠτιαμένων πολλὴν τὴν
> / \ » Lg > ‘ 3 /
ἀπολογίαν καὶ ἔπαινον ὧν οὐδεὶς ἐμέμψατο.
rn \ \ \ a a lal
νῦν δὲ πρὸς μὲν τὰ ἀντειπεῖν δεῖ, τῶν δὲ
yf /
ἔλεγχον ποιήσασθαι, ἵνα μήτε ἡ ἡμετέρα

> \ ve 3 a / e fd / \
αὐτοὺς κακία ὠφελῇ μήτε ἡ τούτων δόξα, TO
> > ἣν ‘\ > Ἃ > Ἂ ,
δ᾽ ἀληθὲς περὶ ἀμφοτέρων ἀκούσαντες κρίνητε.
« ral \ “-“ if
“Ἡμεῖς δὲ αὐτοῖς διάφοροι ἐγενόμεθα

32. οἱ om. ABEFM.
2. otro Hude.

oO

σι

62

iw)

56 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ.

an “ [2 a ΄ /
πρῶτον ὅτι ἡμῶν κτισάντων [[}λάταιον
ee A ” B /
Origin of the ὕστερον τῆς ἄλλης OLWTLAS

ife \ Y 7 ’ a a
Platseaanl = καὶ ἄλλα χωρίά per αὐτῆς, ἃ
Thebes.

fd Φ ΄ > /
ξυμμείκτους ἀνθρώπους ἐξελάσαντες
Μ >) 3 / - “« 5 (2 \
ἔσχομεν, οὐκ ἠξίουν οὗτοι, ὥσπερ ἐτάχθη TO
la) e / ξ.,ν5 Ε a ” \ -
πρῶτον, ἡγεμονεύεσθαι ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, ἔξω δὲ τῶν
” lal / \ (4
ἄλλων Βοιωτῶν παραβαίνοντες τὰ πάτρια,
\ ΄ ΓΑ Ἂν
ἐπειδὴ προσηναγκάξοντο, προσεχώρησαν πρὸς
? / x > > a Ἀν ς a
Αθηναίους καὶ pet αὐτῶν πολλὰ ἡμᾶς
” 2 ᾽ Lz x > /
ἔβλαπτον, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν καὶ ἀντέπασχον.
5 Ν \ e >
“Ἐπειδὴ δὲ καὶ ὁ βάρβαρος ἦλθεν ἐπὶ
A \ e / a
Defence against ΤῊΝ Ελλάδα, φασὶ μόνοι Βοιωτῶν
e charge οὔ . ‘ ἢ
“medism.’ οὐ μηδίσαι, καὶ τούτῳὠῳ μάλιστα
> / > / \ ε an a
αὐτοί τε ἀγάλλονται Kal ἡμᾶς λοιδοροῦσιν.
¢€ a δὲ δί \ > \ ” 8 “
ἡμεῖς δὲ μηδίσαι μὲν αὐτοὺς οὔ φαμεν διότι
20? 9 , fe) ΄ ΡΣ ΡΝ IONS Ὁ
οὐδ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίους, τῇ μέντοι αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ ὕστερον
ἐπὶ ᾽ ,ὔ \ \ / le
ἐόντων ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπὶ τοὺς “EXAnvas μόνους
> la > / / / >
αὖ Βοιωτῶν ἀττικίσαι. καίτοι σκέψασθε ἐν
“ lal lal
οἵῳ εἴδει ἑκάτεροι ἡμῶν τοῦτο ἔπραξαν.
a \ \ / / ,
ἡμῖν μὲν yap ἡ πόλις τότε ἐτύγχανεν οὔτε
3 3 / > / /
κατ ὀλιγαρχίαν ἰσόνομον πολιτεύουσα οὔτε
\ if ¢ / / \
κατὰ δημοκρατίαν: ὅπερ δέ ἐστι νόμοις μὲν
A ,
καὶ τῷ σωφρονεστάτῳ ἐναντιώτατον, ἐγγυτάτω
X / Pa > / lal ἊΣ
δὲ τυράννου, δυναστεία ὀλίγων ἀνδρῶν εἶχε
\ Φ »O7 /
Ta πράγματα. καὶ οὗτοι ἰδίας δυνάμεις
ie » n / > Ν rn
ἐλπίσαντες ἔτι μᾶλλον σχήσειν εἰ τὰ τοῦ
/ / VA > / \ an
Μήδου κρατήσειε, κατέχοντες ἰσχύι τὸ πλῆθος
fy / Ν / /
ἐπηγάγοντο αὐτόν" καὶ ἡ ξύμπασα πόλις οὐκ
δ᾿ a a ᾽
αὐτοκράτωρ οὖσα ἑαυτῆς τοῦτ᾽ ἔπραξεν, οὐδ
Y a ? , e \ \ ,
ἄξιον αὐτῇ ὀνειδίσαι ὧν μὴ μετὰ νόμων

bo
So

οι

μι
σι

20

ΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Γ᾽ (61—63) 57

5 ἥμαρτεν. ἐπειδὴ γοῦν ὅ te Μῆδος ἀπῆλθε
, /
καὶ τοὺς νόμους draBe, σκέψασθαι χρή,
a / Μ
᾿Αθηναίων ὕστερον ἐπιόντων τήν τε ἄλλην
« ΄ Ἂν, \ ς / , ,
Ελλάδα καὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν χώραν πειρωμένων
ὑφ᾽ αὑτοῖς ποιεῖσθαι καὶ κατὰ στάσιν ἤδη
an /
ἐχόντων αὐτῆς τὰ πολλά, εἰ μαχόμενοι ἐν
»
Κορωνείᾳ καὶ νικήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἠλευθερώ-
c
\ / Ἂν \ ΜΝ a
σαμεν τὴν Βοιωτίαν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους νῦν
rn yA
προθύμως ξυνελευθεροῦμεν, ἵππους τε παρέ-
i lal
χοντες Kal παρασκευὴν ὅσην οὐκ ἄλλοι τῶν
,
ξυμμάχων.
\ \ a
“Kal ta μὲν ἐς τὸν μηδισμὸν τοσαῦτα
- an /
ἀπολογούμεθα" ws δὲ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλόν Plataca has

joined Athens

> , \ “ Ὧν ἐν
τε ἡἠδικήκατε τοὺς “Ελληνας καὶ attacks on
" 7 5 wee the liberty of

ἀξιώτερί ἐστε πάσης Cnplas, Greece: she
cannot make

/ /
πειρασόμεθα ἀποφαίνειν. ἐγένεσθε her former
alliance with the

ἐπὶ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ τιμωρίᾳ, ws φατέ, Greeks ἃ ground
> or considera-
Αθηναίων ξύμμαχοι καὶ πολῖται. tion.
οὐκον χρῆν τὰ πρὸς ἡμᾶς μόνον ὑμᾶς
ἐπάγεσθαι αὐτοὺς καὶ μὴ ξυνεπιέναι μετ᾽
αὐτῶν ἄλλοις, ὑπάρχον γε ὑμῖν, εἴ τι καὶ
ἄκοντες προσήγεσθε ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων, τῆς τῶν
Λακεδαιμονίων τῶνδε ἤδη ἐπὶ τῷ Μήδῳ
ξυμμαχίας γεγενημένης, ἣν αὐτοὶ μάλιστα
προβάλλεσθε: ἱκανή γε hv ἡμᾶς τε ὑμῶν
ἀποτρέπειν, καί, τὸ μέγιστον, ἀδεῶς παρέχειν
βουλεύεσθαι. ἀλλ᾽ ἑκόντες καὶ οὐ βιαζόμενοι
8 ἔτι εἵλεσθε μᾶλλον τὰ ᾿Αθηναίων. καὶ λέγετε

9, ἐπάγεσθαι vulgo: ὑπάγεσθαι codd. 10. ὑπάρχον γε
M: ὑπάρχοντες Εἰ : ὑπάρχον τε cett.

ao

-

64

bo

[ων]

64

58 OBOYKYAIAOY

a ,
ὡς αἰσχρὸν ἣν προδοῦναι τοὺς εὐεργέτας"
πολὺ δέ γε αἴσχιον καὶ ἀδικώτερον τοὺς
πάντας “ἔλληνας καταπροδοῦναι, οἷς ξυνω-
ΤᾺ ,
μόσατε, ἢ ᾿Αθηναίους μόνους, τοὺς μὲν
καταδουλουμένους τὴν Ἑλλάδα, τοὺς δὲ
ἐλευθεροῦντας. καὶ οὐκ ἴσην αὐτοῖς τὴν χάριν
» / > \ > 6: > /
ἀνταπέδοτε οὐδὲ αὐσχύνης ἀπηλλαγμένην"

ς an \ A, > rd > “ὰ - /
ὑμεῖς μὲν γὰρ ἀδικούμενοι αὐτούς, ὡς pare, :

ἐπηγάγεσθε, τοῖς δὲ ἀδικοῦσιν ἄλλους ξυνεργοὶ
, Us N 3 \
KATETTNTE. καίτοι τὰς ὁμοίας χάριτας μὴ
> , > \ a x \ Ν
ἀντιδιδόναι. αἰσχρν μᾶλλον ἢ τὰς μετὰ
7 \ 4 , 2 ᾽ / Ni
δικαιοσύνης μὲν ὀφειληθείσας, ἐς ἀδικίαν δὲ
? / n / τ te 2O\ /
ἀποδιδομένας. δῆλόν TE ἐποιήσατε οὐδὲ τότε
- « , 4 / > ,
τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἕνεκα μόνοι οὐ μηδίσαντες,
Ἧ ᾽ ἘΣ a a
ἀλλ’ ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἡμεῖς δέ, τοῖς μὲν
’ὔ lal rn ,
ταὐτὰ βουλόμενοι ποιεῖν, τοῖς δὲ τἀναντία.
\ ἴω > an ’ » e 9 e / 3 I,
καὶ νῦν ἀξιοῦτε, ἀφ’ ὧν δι’ ἑτέρους ἐγένεσθε
a i ᾽
ἀγαθοί, ἀπὸ τούτων ὠφελεῖσθαι. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ
Ἀν ἢ Ψ Ν 4 % Zi
εἰκός: ὥσπερ δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους εἵλεσθε, τούτοις
/ \ Ν /
ξυναγωνίζεσθε, καὶ μὴ προφέρετε τὴν τότε
\ 3 a lal
γενομένην ξυνωμοσίαν ws χρὴ am αὐτῆς νῦν
΄ > ,ὔ \ ὅττι, ΤᾺ, AS
σῴξζεσθωι. ἀπελίπετε γὰρ αὐτὴν Kal παρα-
/ la) n 3 /
βάντες ξυγκατεδουλοῦσθε μᾶλλον Αἰγινήτας
Y a
καὶ ἄλλους Twas τῶν ἕξυνομοσάντων ἢ
διεκωλύετε, καὶ ταῦτα οὔτε ἄκοντες ἔχοντές τε
, - na
τοὺς νόμους οὕσπερ μέχρι τοῦ δεῦρο Kal οὐδενὸς
an , a \ Ve
ὑμᾶς βιασαμένου ὥσπερ ἡμᾶς. τὴν τελευταίαν
: :
τε πρὶν περιτειχίζεσθαι πρόκλησιν ἐς ἡσυχίαν
nr 7 /
ἡμῶν, ὥστε μηδετέροις ἀμύνειν, οὐκ ἐδέχεσθε.
8. ὑμεῖς CG. 17. ὑμῶν AEM.

bo
οι

οι

ISTOPION Γ' (63—65) 59

/ x 5 e a , a a
4 τίνες ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν δικαιότερον πᾶσι τοῖς
Ἑλλησι μισοῖντο, οἵτινες ἐπὶ τῷ ἐκείνων κακῷ
> , 4, \ ἃ /
ἀνδραγαθίαν προύθεσθε; καὶ ἃ μέν ποτε"
/ ΄ / ᾽ /
χρηστοὶ ἐγένεσθε, ws φατέ, οὐ προσήκοντα
νῦν ἐπεδείξατε, ἃ δὲ ἡ φύσις αἰεὶ ἐβούλετο,
ἐξηλέγχθη ἐς τὸ ἀληθές: μετὰ γὰρ ᾿Αθηναίων
ἄδικον ὁδὸν ἰόντων ἐχωρήσατε.
ὅ “Τὰ μὲν οὖν ἐς τὸν ἡμέτερόν τε ἀκούσιον
μηδισμὸν καὶ τὸν ὑμέτερον ἑκούσιον ἀττικισμὸν
65 τοιαῦτα ἀποφαίνομεν’ ἃ δὲ τελευταῖά φατε

ἀδικηθῆναι (παρανόμως γὰρ ἐλθεῖν The object of

the attempt on

ἡμᾶς ἐν σπονδαῖς καὶ ἱερομηνίᾳ Plataea was
4 good, and the

52 \ \ e / , > /
ἐπὶ τὴν υὑμετεραν πολινὶ, οὐ νομι- ἘΥΟΙΠΝ was
i ; ἐς is justified.
ζομεν οὐδ᾽ ἐν τούτοις ὑμῶν μᾶλλον Plataea is to
- x ὃ A ‘ ernie eae naa for ΤῈ
2 ἁμαρτεῖν. εἰ μὲν ya εἴς αὐτοὶ treachery anc
πὶ ΤΡ \ a , had 1h Α cruelty to the
πρὸς τε THY πόλιν ἐλθόντες ἐμα- prisoners.
/ \ \ a a
χόμεθα καὶ τὴν γῆν ἐδῃοῦμεν ὡς πολέμιοι,
ἀδικοῦμεν: εἰ δὲ ἄνδρες ὑμῶν οἱ πρῶτοι καὶ
/ \ / / fel
χρήμασι καὶ γένει, βουλόμενοι THs μὲν ἔξω
/ A ἴω lal
ξυμμαχίας ὑμᾶς παῦσαι, és δὲ τὰ κοινὰ τῶν
a an ,
πάντων Βοιωτῶν πάτρια καταστῆσαι, ἐπεκαλέ-
/ , fa)
σαντο ἑκόντες, TL ἀδικοῦμεν; οἱ γὰρ ἄγοντες
a r lal « / ᾽ ’ Ege)
3 παρανομοῦσι μᾶλλον τῶν ἑπομένων. ἀλλ OUT
an a / lal a
ἐκεῖνοι, ὡς ἡμεῖς κρίνομεν, οὔτε ἡμεῖς" πολῖται
\ Μ “ e a \ /
δὲ ὄντες ὥσπερ ὑμεῖς Kal πλείω παραβαλ-
/ \ n rn rd
λόμενοι, TO ἑαυτῶν τεῖχος ἀνοίξαντες Kal ἐς
\ > n / ᾽ /
τὴν αὐτῶν πόλιν φιλίως, οὐ πολεμίως

18, οὖν om. ABFM. 22, ἀπεδείξατε Classen.
3. lepounvia margo Stephani: ἱερομηνίαις codd. 18,
φιλίους, οὐ πολεμίους Steup.

τὸ

66

iw)

3

66

60 OOYKYAIAOY

, > te , e a pi
κομίσαντες ἐβούλοντο τούς TE ὑμῶν χείρους

/ A. ye: ee /
μηκέτι, μᾶλλον γενέσθαι τούς τε ἀμείνους τὰ 30

ἄξια ἔχειν, σωφρονισταὶ ὄντες τῆς γνώμης καὶ
τῶν σωμάτων τὴν πόλιν οὐκ ἀλλοτριοῦντες
ἀλλ’ ἐς τὴν ξυγγένειαν οἰκειοῦντες, ἐχθροὺς
οὐδενὶ καθιστάντες, ἅπασι δ᾽ ὁμοίως ἐνσπόν-
Sous. τεκμήριον δὲ ὡς οὐ πολεμίως ἐπράσ-
σομεν" οὔτε γὰρ ἠδικήσαμεν οὐδένα, προείπομέν
τε τὸν βουλόμενον κατὰ τὰ τῶν πάντων
Βοιωτῶν πάτρια πολιτεύειν ἰέναι πρὸς ἡμᾶς.
καὶ ὑμεῖς ἄσμενοι χωρήσαντες καὶ ξύμβασιν ὃ
ποιησάμενοι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἡσυχάζετε, ὕστερον
δὲ κατανοήσαντες ἡμᾶς ὀλίγους ὄντας, εἰ ἄρα
καὶ ἐδοκοῦμέν τι ἀνεπιεικέστερον πρᾶξαι οὐ
μετὰ τοῦ πλήθους ὑμῶν ἐσελθόντες, τὰ μὲν

μι

€ an an
ὁμοῖα οὐκ ἀνταπέδοτε ἡμῖν, μήτε νεωτερίσαι
” / / 4 > aA
ἔργῳ λόγοις τε πείθειν ὥστε ἐξελθεῖν,
b] / \ x AN » aA \
ἐπιθέμενοι δὲ παρὰ τὴν ξύμβασιν, ods μὲν
«ς ,) [οἷ
ἐν χερσὶν ἀπεκτείνατε, οὐχ ὁμοίως ἀλγοῦμεν
/ ἃ Ν
(κατὰ νόμον γὰρ δή τινα ἔπασχον), οὺς δὲ
χεῖρας προϊσχομένους καὶ ἕξωγρήσαντες ὕὑπο- 1
a a /
σχόμενοί TE ἡμῖν ὕστερον μὴ κτενεῖν παρανόμως
/ an 3 Ἂν bys > lal
διεφθείρατε, πῶς οὐ δεινὰ εἴργασθε; κἀνταῦθα
a ,
τρεῖς ἀδικίας ἐν ὀλίγῳ πράξαντες, τήν TE
lal € a fal Ν
λυθεῖσαν ὁμολογίαν καὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τὸν
a rn \.
ὕστερον θάνατον καὶ τὴν περὶ αὐτῶν ἡμῖν μὴ 2
lal / x “
κτείνειν ψευσθεῖσαν ὑπόσχεσιν, ἢν τὰ ἐν τοῖς

3. τῶν C: om. cett. 11. πείθειν Classen: πείσειν
codd, 16. μὴ κτενεῖν ὕστερον Hude. 17. κἀνταῦθα
Naber: καὶ ταῦτα codd. 21. κτενεῖν Herwerden. || ὑπό-

θεσιν ΑΒΕ,

0

67

bo

[2]

μ᾿»

σι

67

IZTOPION Τ' (65—67) 61

lal -“ \ lal ve \ e ~
ἀγροῖς ὑμῖν μὴ ἀδικῶμεν, ὅμως φατὲ ἡμᾶς
a a \ ? lal
παρανομῆσαι καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀξιοῦτε μὴ ἀντιδοῦναι
/ »Μ Ld \ > ἣν ΄,
δίκην. οὔκ, ἤν γε οὗτοι τὰ ὀρθὰ γιγνώσκωσιν"
vA \ > a 4 f
πάντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἕνεκα κολασθήσεσθε.
ἴω φ ὔ
“Καὶ ταῦτα, ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, τούτου
Ay fal : Ἂ
ἕνεκα ἐπεξήλθομεν καὶ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν Itis for Sparta
ἣ ΝΘ ᾿; ξ a . sce to enact a just
καὶ μῶν, νὰ VUMELS MEV εἰδῆτε penalty,
lal / lal \ 4
δικαίως αὐτῶν καταγνωσόμενοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἔτι
€ , / οὗ \ \
ὁσιώτερον τετιμωρημένο. Kal μὴ παλαιὰς
» Ν / 7
ἀρετάς, εἴ τις apa καὶ ἐγένετο, ἀκούοντες
fo a \ a x ,ὔ
ἐπικλασθῆτε, ἃς χρὴ τοῖς μὲν ἀδικουμένοις
/ rn \ 325 / nr
ἐπικούρους εἶναι, τοῖς δὲ αἰσχρόν τι δρῶσι
ε /
διπλασίας ζημίας, ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ προσηκόντων
\ 2 a \
ἁμαρτάνουσιν. μηδὲ ὀλοφυρμῴ καὶ οἴκτῳ
> / , / n 6 ΤᾺ
ὠφελείσθων, πατέρων τε τάφους τῶν ὑμετέρων
,ὔ Ἂ / / \
ἐπιβοώμενοι καὶ τὴν σφετέραν ἐρημίαν. καὶ
a 7 “ ,
yap ἡμεῖς ἀνταποφαίνομεν πολλῷ δεινότερα
an \ Xx (a rn
παθοῦσαν τὴν ὑπὸ τούτων ἡλικίαν ἡμῶν
/ φ f ᾿ \ x a
διεφθαρμένην, ὧν πατέρες οἱ μὲν πρὸς ὑμᾶς
\ / »” > / μὰ /
τὴν Βοιωτίαν ἄγοντες ἀπέθανον ἐν Κορωνείᾳ,
2 ἴω re \ id > /
οἱ δὲ πρεσβῦται λελειμμένοι καὶ <ai> οἰκίαι
an a / n e / an
ἐρῆμοι πολλῷ δικαιοτέραν ὑμῶν ἱκετείαν ποιοῦν-
J
Tat τούσδε τιμωρήσασθαι. οἴκτου τε ἀξιώτεροι
/ a
τυγχάνειν οἱ ἀπρεπές τι πάσχοντες τῶν
> , e \ / 4 “ Ν
ἀνθρώπων, οἱ δὲ δικαίως, ὥσπερ οἵδε, τὰ
,ὔ , be an
ἐναντία ἐπίχαρτοι εἶναι. Kal τὴν νῦν ἐρημίαν
᾽ \ \ ,
du ἑαυτοὺς ἔχουσιν: τοὺς yap ἀμείνους Evp-
(é , , /
μάχους ἑκόντες ἀπεώσαντο. παρενόμησάν τε

3. εἰδῆτε] φανῆτε Rauchenstein, 4, ἡμᾶς et τετιμωρη-
μένους Kriiger. 17. κατ᾽ οἰκίας Stahl: ai add, Kriiger.

οι

6

»
é

68

68

62 OBOYKYAIAOY

/ e a Ἴ
οὐ προπαθόντες ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, μίσει δὲ πλέον ἢ
δίκῃ κρίναντες-- καὶ οὐκ ἀνταποδόντες νῦν
A
τὴν ἴσην τιμωρίαν: ἔννομα yap πείσονται Kal
\ a ,
οὐχὶ ἐκ μάχης χεῖρας προϊσχόμενοι, ὥσπερ
φασίν, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἐς δίκην σφᾶς
αὐτοὺς παραδόντες. ἀμύνατε οὖν, ὦ Λακεδαι-
Ρ' 2 ἣν lal an € / ,
Peroration, μόνιοι, Kal τῷ τῶν ϑλλήνων νόμῳ
« \ a / \ Cn ”
ὑπὸ τῶνδε παραβαθέντι, Kal ἡμῖν ἄνομα
ἴω / ᾿ /
παθοῦσιν ἀνταπόδοτε χάριν δικαίαν ὧν πρό-
ἢ a “ ,
θυμοὶ γεγενήμεθα, καὶ μὴ τοῖς τῶνδε λόγοις
περιωσθῶμεν ἐν ὑμῖν, ποιήσατε δὲ τοῖς
“Ἕλλησι παράδειγμα οὐ λόγων τοὺς ἀγῶνας
/ 2 εἰ » a ’ an nN
προθήσοντες ἀλλ᾿ ἔργων, ὧν ἀγαθῶν μὲν
ὄντων βραχεῖα ἡ ἀπαγγελία ἀρκεῖ, ἁμαρτανο-
/ vA
μένων δὲ λόγοι ἔπεσι κοσμηθέντες προκαλύμ-
/ ,
ματα γίγνονται. ἀλλ᾽ ἢν οἱ ἡγεμόνες, ὥσπερ
νῦν ὑμεῖς κεφαλαιώσαντες πρὸς τοὺς ξύμπαντας
/ >
«τὰς» διαγνώμας ποιήσησθε, ἧσσόν τις ἐπ
»Ὸ ΒΩ \ , 3.
ἀδίκοις ἔργοις λόγους καλοὺς ζητήσει.

lal \ € lal 3 ὁ \
Τοιαῦτα δὲ of Θηβαῖοι εἶπον. οἱ δὲ
, \ fs
The Plataeangs τλακεδαιμόνιοι δικασταὶ νομίζοντες
\ / b] lal ο
Pie σὸ ἐπερώτημα σφίσιν ὀρθῶς ἕξειν,
n / ον
Hestecyed, εἴ τι ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ UT αὐτῶν

ἀγαθὸν πεπόνθασι, διότι τόν τε ἄλλον χρόνον

ges a > \ x x \

ἠξίουν δῆθεν αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὰς παλαιὰς Ilav-
/ \ \ M75 δὰ e /

σανίου peta τὸν Μῆδον σπονδὰς ἡσυχάζειν

καὶ ὅτε ὕστερον [ἃ] πρὸ τοῦ περιτειχίζεσθαι

26. post οὐκ add. ἂν Dobree. || ἀνταποδώσοντες Stahl.
42. ras add. Hude.
8. ἃ del. Heilmann.

25

co
οι

qn

ISTOPION Τ' (67—68) 63

προείχοντο αὐτοῖς, κοινοὺς εἶναι κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνα,
ὡς οὐκ ἐδέξαντο, ἡγούμενοι τῇ ἑαυτῶν δικαίᾳ
βουλήσει ἔκσπονδοι ἤδη ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν κακῶς
πεπονθέναι, αὖθις τὸ αὐτὸ ἕνα ἕκαστον παρ-
αγαγόντες καὶ ἐρωτῶντες, εἴ τι Λακεδαιμονίους
καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἀγαθὸν ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ
δεδρακότες εἰσίν, ὁπότε μὴ φαῖεν, ἀπάγοντες
ἀπέκτεινον καὶ ἐξαίρετον ἐποιήσαντο οὐδένα.

2 διέφθειραν δὲ Πλαταιῶν μὲν αὐτῶν οὐκ

3
ἐλάσσους διακοσίων, ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ πέντε καὶ
εἴκοσιν, of δξυνεπολιορκοῦντο: γυναῖκας δὲ

,ὔ ἢ
8 ἠνδραπόδισαν. τὴν δὲ πόλιν ἐνιαυτὸν μέν

μ»Ἄ

tia Θηβαῖοι Μεγαρέων ἀνδράσι κατὰ στάσιν
/ lal
ἐκπεπτωκόσι Kal ὅσοι τὰ σφέτερα φρονοῦντες
Πλαταιῶν περιῆσαν ἔδοσαν ἐνοικεῖν' ὕστερον
\ / r ee, > Μ lal b] n
δὲ καθελόντες αὐτὴν ἐς ἔδαφος πᾶσαν ἐκ τῶν
θεμελίων ὠκοδόμησαν πρὸς τῴ Ἡραίῳ κατα-
μελίων φκοδόμη pos τῷ Ἡραίς
΄΄ / nr A iA
γώγιον διακοσίων ποδῶν πανταχῇ κύκλῳ
οἰκήματα ἔχον κάτωθεν καὶ ἄνωθεν, καὶ
ὀροφαῖς καὶ θυρώμασι τοῖς τῶν [Τ]λαταιῶν
3 ΄ \ lal ” a ba 2 n
ἐχρήσαντο, Kal τοῖς ἄλλοις ἃ ἣν ἐν τῷ
/ »Μ Ν \ / /
τείχει ἔπιπλα, χαλκὸς Kal σίδηρος, κλίνας
Fr. A f \
κατασκευάσαντες ἀνέθεσαν τῇ Ἥρᾳ, καὶ νεὼν
ς , ΄ ᾽ , Sun \
ἑκατόμπεδον λίθινον ὠκοδόμησαν αὐτῇ. τὴν
\ na , b] / paren 7
δὲ γῆν δημοσιώσαντες ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐπὶ δέκα
» Ἁ > Oey ὦ “ Ν / \
ἔτη, καὶ ἐνέμοντο Θηβαῖοι. σχεδὸν δέ τι καὶ
\ 4 \ fal ¢€ /
τὸ ξύμπαν περὶ ἸΙλαταιῶν of Λακεδαιμόνιοι
οὕτως ἀποτετραμμένοι ἐγένοντο Θηβαίων ἕνεκα,
Ν , ,
νομίζοντες ἐς τὸν πόλεμον αὐτοὺς ἄρτι τότε
9, ἐκείνας Reiske. 21. Θηβαῖοι del. Classen.

80

64 OOYKYAIAOY

/ 3 / ie \ \ \
5 καθιστάμενον ὠφελίμους εἶναι. Kal τὰ μὲν
/ a
kata IIhdtavay ἔτει τρίτῳ Kal ἐνενηκοστῷ
> \ 3 ee if 5 5 “
ἐπειδὴ ᾿Αθηναίων ξύμμαχοι ἐγένοντο οὕτως 40

ἐτελεύτησεν. ὃ

09 Αἱ δὲ τεσσαράκοντα νῆες τῶν ἹἸ]ελοπον-
The Pelopon. γΜῆησίων αἱ Λεσβίοις βοηθοὶ ἐλθοῦσαι,
erat ttm ὡς τότε φεύγουσαι διὰ τοῦ πελάγους
ieee toe ἔς τε τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπιδιωχθεῖσαι
ee καὶ πρὸς τῇ Κρήτῃ χειμασθεῖσαι 5

Ν Less oA / Ν \ ,
καὶ ἀπ᾿ αὐτῆς σποράδες πρὸς τὴν Ἰ]ελοπόν-
νῆσον κατηνέχθησαν, καταλαμβάνουσιν ἐν τῇ
Κυλλήνῃ τρεῖς καὶ δέκα τριήρεις Λευκαδίων
καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν καὶ Βρασίδαν τὸν Τέλλιδος

VA > / > / >’ /

2 ξύμβουλον ᾿Αλκίδᾳ ἐπεληλυθότα. ἐβούλοντο 10

Ν Ξε ὃ t e a Aé ς
γὰρ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ὡς τῆς Λέσβου ἡμαρ-
τήκεσαν, πλέον τὸ ναυτικὸν ποιήσαντες ἐς τὴν
Κέρκυραν πλεῦσαι στασιάζουσαν, δώδεκα μὲν
ναυσὶ μόναις παρόντων ᾿Αθηναίων περὶ Ναύ-
πακτον, πρὶν δὲ πλέον τι ἐπιβοηθῆσαι ἐκ τῶν 15
> a U Ὁ ΄ \
Αθηνῶν ναυτικόν, ὅπως προφθάσωσι, καὶ
παρεσκευάζοντο ὅ τε Βρασίδας καὶ ὁ ᾿Αλκί-
δας πρὸς ταῦτα.

70 οΟἱὲ γὰρ Κερκυραῖοι ἐστασίαζον, ἐπειδὴ οἱ

᾽ ΄, Oy ’ an (on) A

Corcyra. Out- αὐχμάλωτοι ἦλθον αὐτοῖς οἱ ἐκ τῶν

break of strife Nes ᾿ Ἂν ΤῊΝ

after the return στερὴ Ἐπίδαμνον vavpayiav ὑπὸ
of prisoners Zs

from Corinth, Κορινθίων ἀφεθέντες, τῷ μὲν λόγῳ
a /

ὀκτακοσίων τωλάντων τοῖς προξένοις διηγ- ὃ

γυημένοι, ἔργῳ δὲ πεπεισμένον ΚΚορινθίοις

Κέρκυραν προσποιῆσαι. καὶ ἔπρασσον οὗτοι,

69 6, καὶ del. Classen.

~

70

IZTOPION Γ᾽ (68—70) 65

“ “
ἕκαστν τῶν πολιτῶν μετιόντες, ὅπως
> , 3 / Ν , "
ἀποστήσωσιν ᾿Αθηναίων τὴν πόλιν. καὶ
> / 3 fol Ν᾽ \ /
ἀφικομένης ᾿Αττικῆς τε νεὼς καὶ Κορινθίας
fal ,
πρέσβεις ἀγουσῶν καὶ ἐς λόγους καταστάντων
r >
ἐψηφίσαντο Κερκυραῖοι ᾿Αθηναίοις μὲν ξύμμαχοι
εἶναι κατὰ τὰ ξυγκείμενα, Ἰ]ελοποννησίοις δὲ
φίλοι ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον. καὶ (ἦν γὰρ
Πειθίας ἐθελοπρόξενός τε τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ
τοῦ δήμου προειστήκει) ὑπάγουσιν αὐτὸν
iG amet > , , > ,
οὗτοι οἱ ἄνδρες ἐς δίκην, λέγοντες ᾿Αθηναίοις
\ / r e ἃς 5 \
τὴν Κέρκυραν καταδουλοῦν. ὁ δὲ ἀποφυγὼν
ἀνθυπάγει αὐτῶν τοὺς πλουσιωτάτους πέντε
ἄνδρας, φάσκων τέμνειν χάρακας ἐκ τοῦ τε
Διὸς τοῦ τεμένους καὶ τοῦ ᾿Αλκίνου: ζημία
δὲ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην χάρακα ἐπέκειτο στατήρ.
» Ν > rn \ \ \ ; \ e r
ὀφλόντων δὲ αὐτῶν Kal πρὸς τὰ ἱερὰ ἱκετῶν
/ \ a an / “
καθεζομένων διὰ πλῆθος τῆς ζημίας, ὅπως
΄ Ε a e ᾿ δ: ἐν x
ταξάμενοι ἀποδῶσιν, ὁ IleBias (ἐτύγχανε yap
καὶ βουλῆς wv) πείθει ὥ D νόμῳ σασθ
αἱ βουλῆς ὦν) πείθει ὥστε τῷ νόμῳ χρήσασθαι.
e \ lal ,
οἱ © ἐπειδὴ τῷ TE νόμῳ ἐξείργοντο καὶ
[2 > 7, Ν / “ ” nan
ἅμα ἐπυνθάνοντο τὸν 1]ειθίαν, ἕως ἔτι βουλῆς
» »Ἅ , Ν an b] 7. \
ἐστί, μέλλεν TO πλῆθος ἀναπείσειν τοὺς
αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοις φίλους τε καὶ ἐχθροὺς
΄ / , \ / ? 4
νομίζειν, ξυνίσταντό τε καὶ λαβόντες ἐγχειρίδια
> ’ὔ ΕῚ ἊΝ \ 2 / ‘
ἐξαπιναίως ἐς τὴν βουλὴν ἐσελθόντες τὸν τε
IlecOiav κτείνουσι καὶ ἄλλους τῶν τε βουλευτῶν
καὶ ἰδιωτῶν ἐς ἑξήκοντα: οἱ δέ τινες τῆς

αὐτῆς γνώμης τῷ Πειθίᾳ ὀλίγοι ἐς τὴν:

N » ἴω
᾿Αττικὴν τριήρη κατέφυγον ἔτι παροῦσαν.

9. ἀποστήσουσιν Cobet. 28. ὀφειλόντων ABEF.
Ε

20

66 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

- \ la) \ / σ
11 δράσαντες δὲ τοῦτο καὶ ξυγκαλέσαντες Κερ-
,ἷ 5 a
Steps taken by KUpalous εἶπον OTL ταῦτα Καὶ
i « - pA
the oligarchs βέλτιστα εἴη ray ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν
a ΟΣ, /
δουλωθεῖεν ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων, TO τε λοιπὸν μηδε-
τέρους δέχεσθαι ἀλλ’ ἢ μιᾷ νηὶ ἡσυχάζοντας
Ρ x pe ΠΟΙΌΣ ,
x \ / Wh e lal e \ 5.
TO δὲ πλέον πολέμιον ἡγεῖσθαι. ὡς δὲ εἶπον,

on

καὶ ἐπικυρῶσαι ἠνάγκασαν τὴν γνώμην.

2 πέμπουσι, δὲ καὶ ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας εὐθὺς
πρέσβεις περί τε τῶν πεπραγμένων διδάξοντας
ὡς ξυνέφερε καὶ τοὺς ἐκεῖ καταπεφευγότας 10
. πείσοντας μηδὲν ἀνεπιτήδειον πράσσειν, ὅπως ᾿

72 μή τις ἐπιστροφὴ γένηται. ἐλθόντων δὲ οἱ
The two parties ᾿Αθηναῖοι τούς Te πρέσβεις ὡς νεω-
parts ofCoreyra. τερίζοντας ξυλλαβόντες, καὶ ὅσους
ἔπεισαν, κατέθεντο ἐς Αἴγιναν.

on

>) rn
2 Ev δὲ τούτῳ τῶν Κερκυραίων οἱ ἔχοντες
Ν / Pe te Υ͂ /
Ta πράγματα ἀρ τριήρους Κορινθίας
καὶ Λακεδαιμοδίιων πρέσβεων ἐπιτίθενται τῷ
/
3 δήμῳ, Kal μαχόμενοι ἐνίκησαν. ἀφικομένης
\ e A \ ,
δὲ νυκτὸς ὁ μὲν δῆμος ἐς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν καὶ
fel / rn
TA μετέωρα τῆς πόλεως καταφεύγει καὶ αὐτοῦ 10
, ¢ ΕΣ
ξυλλεγεὶς ἱδρύθη, καὶ τὸν Ὑλλαϊκὸν λιμένα
be e x / > x / a
εἶχον: οἱ δὲ τήν τε ἀγορὰν κατέλαβον, οὗπερ
e \ ” se Ni Ν , Ν
οἱ πολλοὶ @KOUY αὑτῶν, καὶ τὸν λιμένα τὸν
73 πρὸς αὐτῇ καὶ πρὸς τὴν ἤπειρον. τῇ δ
ὑστεραίᾳ ἠκροβολίσαντό τε ὀλίγα καὶ ἐς τοὺ
POLS. ΦΚΡ : 7 es:
» εἶ , 5 \
ἀγροὺς περιέπεμπον ἀμφότεροι, τοὺς δούλους
n / tf
παρακαλοῦντές τε καὶ ἐλευθερίαν ὑπισχνούμενοι"
ἐς an \ Re “ 5 » Ν an
καὶ τῷ μὲν δήμῳ τῶν οἰκετῶν τὸ πλῆθος 5
14 VA a / a
παρεγένετο ξύμμαχον, τοῖς δ᾽ ἑτέροις ἐκ τῆς

74

τῷ

78

ISTOPION Γ' (71—75) 67

> / b] ’ ’ / ὃ ΙΑ δ᾽
ἠπείρου ἐπίκουροι ὀκτακόσιοι. διαλιπούσης
¢ / ras φ ’ὔ ‘
ἡμέρας μάχη αὖθις γίγνεται καὶ 4 battle result-
a ¢ a , > ΄ \ ing in victory
νικᾷ ὁ δῆμος χωρίων TE ἰσχύι καὶ forthe
i ig aA ats.
πλήθει προύχων: ai τε γυναῖκες “mors
αὐτοῖς τολμηρῶς ξυνεπελάβοντο βάλλουσαι
al an n PS
ἀπὸ TOV οἰκιῶν τῷ κεράμῳ Kal παρὰ φύσιν
΄ A \ i = ΄, Ν a
ὑπομένουσαι τὸν θόρυβον. γενομένης δὲ τῆς
fol \ , Pd , / 3 5 ,
τροπῆς περὶ δείλην ὀψίαν, δείσαντες οἱ ὀλίγοι
᾿ e - fal
μὴ αὐτοβοεὶ ὁ δῆμος τοῦ TE νεωρίου κρατήσειεν
> \ \ an , > an \
ἐπελθὼν καὶ σφᾶς διαφθείρειεν, ἐμπιπρᾶσι τὰς
, fol lal Ν
οἰκίας τὰς ἐν κύκλῳ τῆς ἀγορᾶς καὶ τὰς
, “ KX, Ἣν Μ ν , BA
ξυνοικίας, ὅπως μὴ ἢ ἔφοδος, φειδόμενοι οὔτε
Ξ'
οἰκείας οὔτε ἀλλοτρίας, ὥστε καὶ χρήματα
\ > / ΄ \ e ,
πολλὰ ἐμπόρων κατεκαύθη καὶ ἡ πόλις
/ a a ΝΜ
ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφθαρῆναι, εἰ ἄνεμος
ἐπεγένετο τῇ φλογὶ ἐπίφορος ἐς αὐτήν
Ύ ῇ ryt pos ἐς αὐτὴν.
\ e \ / a / e
Kai of μὲν παυσάμενοι τῆς μάχης ὡς
\ / a
ἑκάτεροι ἡσυχάσαντες τὴν νύκτα ἐν φυλακῇ
ἦσαν: καὶ ἡ Κορινθία ναῦς τοῦ δήμου
/ a
κεκρατηκότος ὑπεξανήγετ al τῶν ἐπικούρων
e / ,
οἱ πολλοὶ ἐς τὴν ἤπειρον λαθόντες διεκομί-
Ker! Ὁ; , ς ΄ T /
σθησαν. Ba δὲ ἐπυγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ Νικόστρατος
/ Ν .
ὁ Διειτρέφους ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγὸς ek ner
Ἂς thenian ships
παραγίγνεται βοηθῶν ἐκ Ναυπάκτου trom Naupactus.
/
δώδεκα ναυσὶ καὶ Μεσσηνίων πεντακοσίοις
ε ig ’ i » \ if
ὁπλίταις: ξύμβασίν te ἔπρασσε καὶ πείθει
“ fal > “ / sf ΝΜ
ὥστε ξυγχωρῆσαι ἀλλήλοις δέκα μὲν ἄνδρας
\ > 7 δ
τοὺς αἰτιωτάτους κρῖναι, οἱ οὐκέτι ἔμειναν,
AY > ΝΜ > a
tous δ᾽ ἄλλους οἰκεῖν σπονδὰς πρὸς ἀλλήλους
΄ὔ +) 4
ποιησαμένους καὶ πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους, ὥστε τοὺς

ὧι

-

bo

0

68 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

\ \ Ν , bi \ <j
2 αὐτοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ φίλους νομίζειν. καὶ ὁ τὸ
\ fal Z ” » ΄ e
μὲν ταῦτα πράξας ἔμελλεν ἀποπλεύσεσθαι" οἱ
fal / \
δὲ τοῦ δήμου προστάται πείθουσιν αὐτὸν
\ r fa! fal lal
πέντε μὲν ναῦς τῶν αὐτοῦ σφίσι καταλιπεῖν.
ee ᾿ / / 93 e
ὅπως ἧσσόν τι ἐν κινήσει ὧσιν οἱ ἐναντίοι,
Μ \ 9 Ν , 2 [ον > lal
ἴσας δὲ αὐτοὶ πληρώσαντες ἐκ σφῶν αὐτῶν 15
ss , \ id \ / Ὁ \
8 ξυμπέμψειν. καὶ ὁ μὲν ξυνεχώρησεν, οἱ δὲ
\ \ / IN a /
τοὺς ἐχθροὺς κατέλεγον ἐς Tas ναῦς. δείσαντες
x > tal \ > \ > / ΕΣ n
δὲ ἐκεῖνοι μὴ ἐς tas ᾿Αθήνας ἀποπεμφθῶσι
Ν rn / /
καθίζουσιν ἐς τὸ τῶν Διοσκόρων ἱερόν.
, \
4 Νικόστρατος δὲ αὐτοὺς ἀνίστη τε Kai παρε- 2
lal ¢ » € nr ne
puOcito. ὡς δ᾽ οὐκ ἔπειθεν, ὁ δῆμος ὁπλισθεὶς
> \ A 7 i bs e b] \ > la id \
ἐπὶ τῇ προφάσει ταύτῃ, ws οὐδὲν αὐτῶν ὑγιὲς
, a a \ lal ? if. /
διανοουμένων τῇ τοῦ τὴ ξυμπλεῖν ἀπιστίᾳ, τά
a >’ fal > fal >) a » \
Te ὅπλα αὐτῶν ἐκ τῶν οἰκιῶν ἔλαβε καὶ

ro

3 fal \ ΟῚ 13 3. A) T ,ὔ
QUTWMVY τινας οἷς ἐπέτυχον, ει μῆὴ Νικόστρατος 5

nr

J. , CaN \
ἐκώλυσε, διέφθειραν av. ὁρῶντες δὲ οἱ ἄλλοι
\ / / > Nes Cad,
Ta γιγνόμενα καθίζουσιν ἐς τὸ “Ἥραιον ἱκέται
/ e
καὶ γίγνονται οὐκ ἐλάσσους τετρακοσίων. ὁ
AN a 2 /
δὲ δῆμος δείσας μή τι νεωτερίσωσιν ἀνίστησί
\ / / \ \
τε αὐτοὺς πείσας καὶ Svaxouifer ἐς τὴν πρὸ 30
rn ¢€ UA n / a
τοῦ Ἡραίου νῆσον, καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἐκεῖσε
αὐτοῖς διεπέμπετο.

16 Τῆς δὲ στάσεως ἐν τούτῳ οὔσης τετάρτ

n ή {) Pad

Xx / e le \ ἣν “

The Pelo- ἢ πέμπτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μετὰ τὴν τῶν
ponnesian Bs εἶ ῇ

fleet arrives. ἀνδρῶν ἐς τὴν νῆσον διακομιδὴν αἱ

ἐκ τῆς Κυλλήνης Πελοποννησίων νῆες, μετὰ

σι

Ν > a 9 i nr ΓΝ μὴ (cA Lo
τὸν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιωνίας πλοῦν ἐφ᾽ ὅρμῳ οὖσαι,
παραγίγνονται τρεῖς καὶ πεντήκοντα" ἦρχε δὲ

76 5. ἐφ᾽ ὅρμῳ Stahl: ἔφορμοι codd.

af

Co

78

2

78

ISTOPION Τ' (75—78) 69

> -»" » / Ὁ \ ᾿ \
αὐτῶν ᾿Λλκίδας, ὅσπερ Kal πρότερον, καὶ
/ > Lal , ’ if ι »ἤ,
Βρασίδας αὐτῷ ξύμβουλος ἐπέπλει. ορμισά-
δὲ > 7 / fol ’ / [2
μενοι δὲ ἐς Σύβοτα λιμένα τῆς ἠπείρου ἅμα
“ ͵ὔ i. \ A
ἕω ἐπέπλεον τῇ Κερκύρᾳ. οἱ δὲ πολλῷ
θ " \ It / > >
ορύβῳ Kal πεφοβημένοι Τὰ T Εν indecisive naval
A / ᾿
τῇ πόλει καὶ τὸν ἐπίπλουν παρε- “resement
᾿ , [2 e / lal ἢ ν᾿ + dees.
σκευάζοντό τε ἅμα ἑξήκοντα ναῦς καὶ Tas αἰεὶ
\
πληρουμένας ἐξέπεμπον πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους,
παραινούντων ᾿Αθηναίάν σφᾶς τε ἐᾶσαι
fal fal «
πρῶτον ἐκπλεῦσαι καὶ ὕστερον πάσαις ἅμα
/ 7 a \ a
ἐκείνους ἐπιγενέσθαι. ὡς δὲ avTois πρὸς τοῖς
nr ζ΄
πολεμίοις ἦσαν σποράδες αἱ νῆες, δύο μὲν
\
εὐθὺς ηὐτομόλησαν, ἐν ἑτέραις δὲ ἀλλήλοις οἱ
’ὔ
ἐμπλέοντες ἐμάχοντο, ἣν δὲ οὐδεὶς κόσμος
lal / > 4 \ € v
τῶν ποιουμένων. ἰδόντες δὲ οἱ Ἰ]ελοποννήσιοι
\
τὴν ταραχὴν εἴκοσι μὲν ναυσὶ πρὸς τοὺς
» a \
Κερκυραίους ἐτάξαντο, ταῖς δὲ λοιπαῖς πρὸς
\ , A an > , e YY Ω
τὰς δώδεκα ναῦς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὧν ἦσαν αἱ
/
δύο Σαλαμινία καὶ Πάραλος. καὶ οἱ μὲν
an Tal /
Κερκυραῖοι κακῶς τε καὶ κατ᾽ ὀλίγας προσ-
/ > , \ > ς / Φ ’
πίπτοντες ἐταλαυπώρουν τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτούς " οἱ ὃ
al rn x
᾿Αθηναῖοι φοβούμενοι τὸ πλῆθος καὶ τὴν
/
περικύκλωσιν ἁθρόαις μὲν οὐ προσέπιπτον
οὐδὲ κατὰ μέσον ταῖς ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς τεταγμέναις,
᾿ rs
προσβαλόντες δὲ κατὰ κέρας καταδύουσι μίαν
ναῦν. καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα κύκλον ταξαμένων
αὐτῶν περιέπλεον καὶ ἐπειρῶντο θορυβεῖν.
js n .
γνόντες δὲ of πρὸς τοῖς Κερκυραίοις καὶ
/ \ Ὁ Ψ Ὁ Vs ,
δείσαντες μὴ ὅπερ ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ γένοιτο,

3. ἐταλαιπώρουν τὸ Haase: ἐταλαιπωροῦντο codd.

a

σι

79

bn

w

79

70 BOYKYAIAOY

5 a \ Uf - ΄ e a
ἐπιβοηθοῦσι, Kat γενόμεναι ἁθρόαι αἱ νῆες
Ψ' Ν / an ΕΣ / a
ἅμα τὸν ἐπίπλουν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐποιοῦντο.
id 3 ¢€ / / / /
οἱ δ᾽ ὑπεχώρουν ἤδη πρύμναν κρουόμενοι καὶ
, \ “ ,
ἅμα τὰς τῶν Κερκυραίων ἐβούλοντο προ-
a fy, / a lal
καταφυγεῖν ὅτι μάλιστα, ἑαυτῶν σχολῇ TE
΄ z Ν Ν a / an
ὑποχωρούντων καὶ πρὸς σφᾶς τεταγμένων τῶν
ἐναντίων.
« \ 5 , ΄ /
Η μὲν οὖν ναυμαχία τοιαύτη γενομένη
> , > ey 7 , \ € A
ἐτελεύτα ἐς ἡλίου δύσιν, καὶ ot ἹΚερκυραῖοι

ὃ fe \ ,ὔ ᾽ ΄ὕ

Ths Pelonons εἰσαντες μὴ σφίσιν ἐπιπλεύσαντες
sian ἢ tA a ᾿

eames 6 Oeil σὴν πόλιν ὡς κρατοῦντες οἱ

Corecyra

/ xX \ 4 an / >
πολέμιοι ἢ TOUS EK τῆς νήσου ἀνα-
> , 7
λάβωσιν ἢ Kal ἄλλο TL νεωτερίσωσι, τούς TE
eS an , Th > 4 4 /
ἐκ τῆς νήσου πάλιν ἐς τὸ Ἥραιον διεκόμισαν
A \ tf > ΄ e > > eet \ A
καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἐφύλασσον. οἱ δ ἐπὶ μὲν THY
/ tA nr an A
πόλιν οὐκ ἐτόλμησαν πλεῦσαι κρατοῦντες TH
/ an an
ναυμαχίᾳ, τρεῖς δὲ καὶ δέκα ναῦς ἔχοντες
fal nt
τῶν Κερκυραίων ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς τὴν ἤπειρον,
“ > / a > e / 5 \
ὅθενπερ avynyayovto. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐπὶ μὲν
Ἂν / 2Q\ lal > / / ’
τὴν πόλιν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐπέπλεον, καίπερ ἐν
a a / /
πολλῇ ταραχῇ καὶ φόβῳ ὄντας καὶ Βρασίδου
a , 3 , > ΄
παραινοῦντος, ὡς λέγεται, Αλκίδᾳ, ἰσοψήφου
Ν > ” Pd \ \ \ / ni
δὲ οὐκ ὄντος: ἐπὶ δὲ τὴν ΔΛευκίμμην τὸ
/ / Ny f
ἀκρωτήριον ἀποβάντες ἐπόρθουν τοὺς ἀγρούς.
ke \ a a fi UA \
ὁ δὲ δῆμος τῶν Κερκυραίων ἐν τούτῳ περιδεὴς
/ x 3: / € an
Gets warning of γενόμενος μὴ ἐπιπλεύσωσιν αἱ νῆες,
g ac an = / \
tne approach ot ois Te ἱκέταις ἦσαν ἐς λόγους Kal

sixty Athenian
ins an . fh As
sa τοῖς ᾿ἄλλοις, ὅπως σωθήσεται ἡ

6. πάλιν ἃ : πάλαι cett. 9. τρεῖς δὲ καὶ δέκα vulgo:
τρισκαίδεκα δὲ codd. (δὲ om. BM).

5

10

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (78—81) ww

ra) \ »"
πόλις, καί τινας αὐτῶν ἔπεισαν ἐς τὰς ναῦς δ
A / \ ¢ /
ἐσβῆναι' ἐπλήρωσαν yap ὅμως τριάκοντα
, \ > / ig \
προσδεχόμενοι τὸν ἐπίπλουν. οἱ δὲ Πελο-
/ , \
ποννήσιοι μέχρι μέσου ἡμέρας δηώσαντες τὴν
a \ fal
γῆν ἀπέπλευσαν, καὶ ὑπὸ νύκτα αὐτοῖς
> / e / an > “s
ἐφρυκτωρήθησαν ἑξήκοντα νῆες ᾿Αθηναίων προσ- 10
͵, eu. , & ε > a
πλέουσαι ἀπὸ Λευκάδος: as of ᾿Αθηναῖοι
, ?
πυνθανόμενοι τὴν στάσιν καὶ τὰς μετ
Ψ n Pes -
Αλκίδου ναῦς ἐπὶ Κέρκυραν μελλούσας πλεῖν
> / \ Ἶ > / Ν ,
ἀπέστειλαν καὶ Εὐρυμέδοντα τὸν Θουκλέους
Id ΄ an
81 στρατηγόν. οἱ μὲν οὖν Πελοποννήσιοι τῆς
\ b] \ \ VA > f
νυκτὸς εὐθὺς κατὰ τάχος ἐκομί- The Pelopon-
᾿Ξ ᾿ ‘ x ἐν nesian fleet
ζοντο ἐπ᾽ οἴκου Tapa τὴν γῆν" sails away.
Ἂ e / \ / > MS \
καὶ ὑπερενεγκόντες τὸν Λευκαδίων ἰσθμὸν τὰς
lal ΜΙ nr
ναῦς, ὅπως μὴ περιπλέοντες ὀφθῶσιν, ἀπο-
/ a ,ὔ
κομίζονται. Κερκυραῖοι δὲ αἰσθόμενοι τάς τε
> ca) a
Αττικὰς vats προσπλεούσας τάς TE τῶν
/ > / / A
πολεμίων οἰχομένας, λαβόντες τούς τε Μεσ-

τῷ

bo
σι

Ψ

, i \ , ” , ”
σηνίους ἐς τὴν πόλιν ἤγαγον πρότερον ἔξω
ΨΜ \ fal lal /
ὄντας, Kal τὰς ναῦς περιπλεῦσαι κελεύσαντες 10
ἃ “ /
ἃς ἐπλήρωσαν és τὸν Ὑλλαϊκὸν λιμένα, ἐν
id rn lal
ὅσῳ περιεκομίζοντο, τῶν ἐχθρῶν εἴ τινα

(4 lal lal
λάβοιεν, ἀπέκτεινον, καὶ ἐκ τῶν νεῶν ὅσους
ΝΜ 2 an 2 / > lal 2
ἔπεισαν ἐσβῆναι ἐκβιβάζοντες ἀπεχρῶντο, ἐς
Ν f / / rn a
τὸ “Ηραιὸν τε ἐλθόντες τῶν ἱκετῶν ὡς πεντή-
» an
κοντὰ ἄνδρας δίκην ὑποσχεῖν ἔπεισαν καὶ

κ
οι

/ / \
8 κατέγνωσαν πάντων θάνατον. οἱ δὲ πολλοὶ

3057, προσδεχόμενοι τὸν ἐπίπλουν om. ABF.
1 . 4 τὸν ac: τῶν codd. 8. λαβόντες del. Classen: λα-
θόντες Hude. 14. ἀπεχρῶντο yp. CFM An. Bekk. Suid. :
ἀπεχώρησαν codd.: dvexpavro Dion. Hal.

σι

82

82

72 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

fal e al e > > / is Coat?
TOV ἱκετῶν, OTOL οὐκ ἐπείσθησαν, ὡς ἑώρων
/ 4 “- a A
Ta γιγνόμενα, διέφθειρον αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ
>. li \ > an / Ἂν > /
ἀλλήλους, Kal ἐκ τῶν δένδρων τινὲς ἀπήγχοντο,
e ? e φ 207 > la) e ,
οἱ δ᾽ ὡς ἕκαστοι ἐδύναντο ἀνηλοῦντο. ἡμέρας
e [4 ἃ 3 / ¢ ‘4 > fa lal
Te ἑπτώ, ἃς ἀφικόμενος ὁ Εὐρυμέδων ταῖς
ἊΨ, nan nr
ἑξήκοντα ναυσὶ παρέμεινε, Kepxupaion σφῶν
a \ \ a > /
αὐτῶν τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δοκοῦντας εἷναι ἐφόνευον,

\ \ ary δ᾽ Z a \ A
τὴν μὲν αἰτίαν ἐπιφέροντες τοῖς τὸν δῆμον 2

4 >’ / ᾿ς ἈΝ 20.)
καταλύουσιν, ἀπέθανον δέ τινες καὶ ἰδίας
Ψ Ψ \ ” if /
ἔχθρας ἕνεκα, καὶ ardor χρημάτων σφίσιν
Ψ / id ἊΝ ων Ῥ Ὁ te
ὀφειλομένων ὑπὸ τῶν λαβόντων: πᾶσά τε
ΡΣ ΩΝ ἃ th ΤΣ Ν Ua lal 9 a
ἰδέα κατέστη θανάτου, καὶ οἷον φιλεῖ ἐν τῷ

4 ,ὔ 3 ΦῸΝ Ὁ > / ν
τοιούτῳ γίγνεσθαι, οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ ξυνέβη καὶ
a if
ἔτι περαιτέρω. Kal yap πατὴρ παῖδα ἀπέ-
κτεινε καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἱερῶὼν ἀπεσπῶντο καὶ
πρὸς αὐτοῖς ἐκτείνοντο, οἱ δέ τινες καὶ
/ na an A
περιοικοδομηθέντες ἐν τοῦ Διονύσου τῴ ἱερῷ
ἀπέθανον.
Οὕτως ὠμὴ στάσις προυχώρησε, ᾿ "Kal ἔδοξε
A massacre by μᾶλλον, διότι ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο
the democratic i ἐν i 7 y ;
pals ensues. ἐπεὶ ὕστερόν ye καὶ πᾶν ws’ εἰπεῖν
ψ
“Ἑλληνικὸν ἐωμήθη, διαφορῶν. οὐσῶν ἑκα-

ὡ:

0

35

\
σταχοῦ τοῖς Te. [rev ΄ δήμων προστάταις τοὺς 5

᾿Αθηναΐους ἐπάγεσθαι καὶ τοῖς ὀλίγοις τοὺς
Λακεδαιμονίους," καὶ ἐν "μὲν εἰρήνῃ οὐκ ἂν
ἐχόντων πρόφασιν οὐδ᾽ ἑτοίμων eee
αὐτούς, πολεμουμένων δὲ) Kar ξυμμαχίας. ἅμα
( ἑκατέροις" τῇ τῶν ἐναντίων καξώσει, καὶ σφίσιν

19. διέφθειρον GM Dion. Hal. : διέφθειραν cett.
1. ἡ στάσις Kriiger. 8. ἑτοίμων] ἐτόλμων Classen.

10

ths ἃ,
ISTOPION IT (81---89) 73

αὐτοῖς ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ προσποιήσει ῥᾳδίως di
éerraywyat τοῖς ἱνεωτερίζειν βουλδμένοις)
2 enopitorto. (καὶ ἐπέπεσε ΩΣ καὶ χαλεπὰ)
4 ὑκατὰ 'ὁτάσιιὴ ταῖς " πόλεσι, ἰγυγνόμενα μὲν, καὶ
“αἰεὶ ἐσόμενα ἕως ἂν ἡ αὐτὴ φύσις ἀνθρώπων 15
ἦ, ἐμᾶλλον δὲ καὶ ἡσυχαίτερα καὶ “τοῖς εἴδεσι
διηλλαγμένα;. ὡς ἂν (ἕκασται͵ αἱ μετάβολαὶ͵ ys
(τῶν ξυντυχιῶν ἐφιστῶνται. (ἐΐ ye yap εἰρήνῃ
κα ὑ"“ἀγαθοῖς πράγμασιν) ( (αἵ τε ΄ πόλεις καὶ οἱ
ἰδιῶται. ἀμείνους τὰς “γνϑώμας ἔχουσι διὰ τὸ =
μὴ és “ ἀκουσίους ἀνἄγκας πίπϊειν᾽ ὁ δὲ
πόλέμος ὑφελὼν τὴν εὐπορίαν (rot καθ᾽ ἡμέραν
βίαιος ᾿διδάσκαλος καὶ͵ (πρὸς τὰ παρόντα | τὰς
ὀργὰς; τῶν ᾿πολλῶν ὁμοιοῖ. ἐστασίαζέ τε ob
τὰ “τῶν “πόλεων, καὶ (τὰ ἐφυστερίξοντά που)
πύστει TOV “προγενομένων͵ πολὺ, (ἐπέφερε τὴν

ὑπερβοχὴν) τοῦ /

199

καινοῦσθαι Tas ͵ διαψοίας & δῶν
T ἐπιχειρήσεων ᾿ περιτεχνήσει καὶ τῶν; τιμωριῶν.
ἀτόπίᾳ. Jal τὴν εἰωθυῖα; ἀξίωσιν _ τῶν ὀνοῖ΄,
μάτων) (ἐς ta’ ἔργα ᾿ἀντήλλαξαν» τ τῇ * δικαιώσει. ary
τόλμα, μὲν γὰρ ( (ἀλόγιστος ἀνδρεία purer ιλέταιρος,
ἐνομίδθη, (μέλλησις, δὲ / προμηθὴς δειλία εὐ.
Tpe mS τὸ δὲ σῶφρον τοῦ" ἀνάνδρου" πρόσχημα,
καὶ τὸ πρὸς ἅπᾶν Evverdv ἐπὶ πᾶν “ ἀργόν"
πὸ δ᾽ ἐμπλήκτως ὀξὺν ἀνδρὸς μοίρᾳ πρόσετέθη; 35
(ἀσφαλείᾳ δὲ «τὸ ἐπιβουχεύσασθαι ἀποτροπῆς
5 πρόφᾶσις εὔχογος καὶ ὁ μὲν χαλεπᾶίνων

_

15. post φύσις add. τῶν B. 17. ἕκασται C: ἕκαστα
cett. 23. ante βίαιος add. βίου Kriiger. 26. ἀποπύ
FM: ἐπιπύστει Dion. Hal. 27. τοῦ] ἐς τὸ Dion.

36. ἀσφαλείᾳ ΒΙσΜ Schol.: ἀσφάλεια cett.

\

74 - OOYKYAIAOY

a a wee 6 8. en αὐτῷ ὕποπτος.
ἐπιβουχεύσας δέ τις τυχὼν᾽ ΠΟ καὶ ὑπο-
νοήδας͵ ἔτι Sewétepos: προβουλξύσας 88) ὅπῶς 40
(under / “αὐτῶν δεήσει, τῆς τε ἑταιρίας ᾿, διαλυτὴς
καὶ zoos? “ἐναντίους ἐκπεπληγμένος. (ἁπλῶς δὲ, ὁ
φθάσας TOD © “μέλλοντα ls Tt δρᾶν ἐπῃνεῖτο,
6 καὶ ὁ ἐπικελεύσας τὸν “μὴ διανοούμενον ‘Kal
μὴν καὶ τὸ ξυγγενὲς (τοῦ. ἑταιρικοῦ, ἀλλοτριώ- 4
τερον ἐγένετον' Sud TO “ἑτοιμότερον εἶναι ἀπρο-
φασίστως τολμᾶν" οὐ γὰρ μετὰ (τῶν 4 κειμενῶν
νόμων ὠφελίᾳ ai τοιαῦται ξύϑοδοι; ἀλλὰ ‘Tapa
TOUS “καθεστῶτας πλεονεξίᾳ. ᾿ καὶ τὰς ἐς “σφᾶς
αὐτοὺξ “πίστεις ov τῷ θείῳ ᾿ νόμῳ) μᾶλλον 50
ἐκρατύνοντο Gh TO κοινῇ τι παράνομῆσαι. “τά
TE “ἀπὸ τῶν" “ἐναντίων. καλῶς λεγόμενα. ἐνεδέ-
ἴχοντο ἔργων φυλακῇ; εἰ προύχοιεν, ἘΠ οὐ
Lemar (ἀγτιτιμώρήσασθαί τέ τινα΄ περὶ
πλείονος ἣν i (ἢ αὐτὸν͵ μὴ προπαθεῖν. καὶ 55
ι ὅρκοι εἴ που. apa ergo Ewadraryis, ἐν τῷ

-

Ζι
4 αὐτίκ , "πρὸς τὸ ἄπορον ͵ ἑκάτέρῳ. oe

ἥ

ἀξ vov οὐκ ἐχόντων ἄλχοθεν δύναμιν" (ἐν.
ταρατυχόντι ὁ φθάσας θαρσῆσαι, εἰ ἴδοι,
ΠΡ κτὸν, ἵ ἥδιόν διὰ τὴν πίστιν ἐτιμωρεῖτο, ἢ οο
(ἀπὸ τοῦ “ προφανοῦς; καὶ τό τε ἀδφαλὲς
ἐλσγίξετο καὶ ore ἀπάτῃ περιγενόμενος ΄ ᾿ξυνέ-
σεὼς ἀγώνισιμα͵ πρόσελάμβανεν. ς ED Sof)

7

πολλοὶ κακοῦρδοι ὄντες δεξιοὶ χέκλήνται ἢ

39. post τυχὼν add. τε Dion. Hal. 42. δὲ] re Haase.
48. ὠφελίᾳ Poppo: ὠφελίας codd. 59. θαρσῆσαι fort.
delendum : θαρσήσει Shilleto.

8

ISTOPION Γ᾽ (82—83) 75

ἀμαθεῖς ἀγαδοι, καὶ τῷ * μὲν) αἰσχύνονται, ἐπὶ 65
,
δὲ “τῴ ἀγάλλοόνται. ἘΤΩ͂Ν δ αὐτῶν͵ αἴτίον
ay ἡ. διὰ πλεονεξίαν ~ καὶ Beiter ie x! δ᾽
ἀὐτῶν) καὶ (ἐς τὸ φιλούι ἐκεῖν) καθισταμένων. τὸ
πρόθυϊον. + 3,08 γὰρ (ἐν͵ ταῖς πόλεσι) προότάυτες.
“μετὰ , ὁνόμαπος ἑκάτεροι εὐπρεποῦς, πλήθους τὸ
τε ἰδονομίας eee καὶ (ἀριστοκρατίας
σώφρονος pon ἐμήσει; (Ta μὲν Kowa hoy /

(Ocparetovres a@Xay ἐποιοῦνξον παντὶ Γ δὲ τρόπῳ"

88

2 ἀπίστως (ἐπὶ πολὺ διήνεγκεν" | od

ἀγωνιξό οἱ. ἀλχήλων »περιγέγνεσθαι. ὦ ἐτόλμη-
σάν τεχτὰ δεινότατα. ἐπεξῇσάν τε τὰς τιμωρίας 75

μείζους; οὐ. “μέχρι, τοῦ “δικαίου Kad τῇ
πόδι ξυμφόῤῥυ προστιθέντες, és δὲ τὸ ἑκατέ-
προ ποὺ αἰεὶ ἡδονὴν ἔχον ὁρίζοντες, ἱκαὶ ἢ
(μετὰ vigov, ἀδίκου καταγνώσεως, ἢ χεϊρὶ
κτώμξνοι τὸ κρατεῖν ἑτοῖμδι ἦσαν τὴν αὐτίκα 80
φιλούικίαν ἐκπιμπλάναι. Ὁ ὥσέξε εὐσεβείᾳ μὲν
οὐδέτέροι Ξένόβιζον, εὐπρεπείᾳ δὲ λόφου. _ ols?
ξυμβαίη ἐπιφθόνως τι διαπράξασθαι, ( ἄμξινον
ἤκούον. αἰτὰ ea έσα᾽ τῶν ’ πολιτῶν (ὑπ᾿
ἀμφοτέρων. ἣ 8 ὅτι, Z Emer! ἢ φθόνῳ 85
τοῦ ΤΡ ΟΣ ἡ υδιεφθέϊ είροντο.. 5 :

Οὕτωχ πᾶσα , ἀδέῶ κατέστη κακοτροπίας (διὰ
Tas’ στάσεις" “TO ᾿ Ἑλληνικῷ; καὶ TO ΟΣ ΕΣ ΞΈΩΣ

εὔηθες, (ob τὸ “γενναῖον πλεῖστον ἈΝ eee

of the disas-
μετέχει, κἀτάγελασθενὶ ἠφάγίσθη, τὸς αὐ σοπηίεία
common in 5

de (aur ἐτάχθαι ἀχλήλοις᾽ τῇ γνώμῃ Greek states

2 during the war.

.ὦ

, 66. αἴτιον del. Madvig. 67. 7 del. Hude. 77. /
τιθέντες Dion. Hal. ; προτιθέντες codd. 79. Karayi’

del. Herwerden.

| 76 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

γὰρ 4) ὁ διαλύσωνῚ οὔτε λόγος. ἐχυρὰς ἢ ᾿οὔτε
ὅρκος φοβερός," «κρείσσους δὲ ὄντες - ἅπαντες |
λογισμῷ. ἐς τὸ ἀνέλπιστον τοῦ “Βεβαίον) “ “μὴ
"αθεῖν μᾶλλόν προυόδκόπουν ἢ ,πιστεῦσαι 10

8 ἐδύναντο. καὶ (οἱ pavdrdrepov γνώμην ζὦ ὡς τὰ

- πλείω) )περιεγύγνοντο" τῷ yap δεδιέναι ‘OTE

(abravs aydeds) καὶ αν son ἐναντίων ξυύετόν,

μ μὴ λόγοις oe ἥσσους! OGL Καὶ ἐἐκ “τοῦ πολυ-

_\ ~ τρόπου apa THS γνώμης, φθάδωσδ προεπιβού-

aaa λευόμενοι, [τὸ ηρῶς «πρὸς; τὰ“ ἔῤγα; ἐχώρουν.

«(οἱ ἰδὲ) πε ας κὰν τ αι, ) καὶ
ζ ἔργῳ οὐδὲν σφᾶξ δεῖ λάμβάνειν ἃ γνώμῃ
ὁ Σοῦ ἄφαρκτοι (μᾶλλον διεφθείροντο.)

84 [Ἂν δ᾽ οὖν" τῇ Κερκύρᾳ τὰ πολλὰ αὐτῶν
ΣΕΘΑΝΕ ἘΠΕῚ προυτολμήθη, Kal, | ὁπόσα ὕβρει᾽ μὲν
lateness ἀρχόμενοι τὸ πχέον ἢ ᾿σωφροσύνῃ)
ὑπὸ τῶν τὴν τιμωρίαν παρασχόντων οἱ
ἀνταμυνόμενοι δράσειαν, πενίας δὲ τῆς δ
εἰωθυίας ἀπαλλαξείοντές τινες, μάλιστα δ᾽
ἂν διὰ πάθους, ἐπιθυμοῦντες τὰ τῶν πέλας
ἔχειν, παρὰ δίκην γιγνώσκοιεν, οἵ τε μὴ ἐπὶ
πλεονεξίᾳ, amo’ ἴσον δὲ μάλιστα ἐπιόντες
[ἀπαιδευσίᾳ ὀργῆς πλεῖστον ἐκφερόμενοι ὠμῶς 10
2 καὶ ἀπαραιτήτως ἐπέλθοιεν. ἕξυνταραχθέντος
τε (τοῦ βίου: ἐς τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον͵ τῇ πόλει
καὶ τῶν νόμων κρατήσασα) ἡ ἀνθρωπεία φύσις,
εἰωθυῖα (xa “παρὰ "τοὺς νόμους. ἀδικεῖν, ἀσμένη.

μι

5

83 1ῦ. φθάσωσι codd.: corr. Gildersleeve.

$4. ὃ 84 damnaverunt grammatici apud Schol. 2:
av Hude. 6. τινες f Schol.: τινας codd. 8. &
Madvig.

ISTOPION I (83—85) 77

ἐδήλωσεν ἀκρατὴς μὲν ὀργῆς οὖσα, (κρείσσων 15
δὲ τοῦ δικαίου;) πολεμία δὲ τοῦ προύχοντος "
οὐ γὰρ ἂν τοῦ τὲ ὁσίου τὸ τιμωρεῖσθαι
προυτίθεσαν τοῦ τε μὴ ἀδικεῖν τὸ κερδαίνειν,
> τ) Ν ΄ > \ 3 \ a
ἐν ᾧ μὴ βλάπτουσαν ἰσχὺν εἶχε τὸ φθονεῖν.

fal / \ \ “ / e
ya ιοῦσί TE TOUS κοινοὺς περὶ τῶν τοιούτων οἱ 20

ἄνθρωποι νόμους, (ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἅπασιν ἐλπὶς
ὑπόκειται σφᾶλεῖσι “κἂν αὐτοὺς “διασῴξεσθαι,)
ἐν ἄλλων τιμωρίαις προκαταλύειν καὶ μὴ
ὑπολείπεσθαι, εἴ ποτε ἄρα τις κινδυνεύσας
τινὸς δεήσεται αὐτῶν. 26

86 OL μὲν οὖν κατὰ τὴν πόλιν Κερκυραῖοι

a / ef N e ΄
ἃ ταῖς ναυσίν: ὕστερον δὲ οἱ φεύ-

ie > na lal , >

τοιαύταις οργαις TALS TPWTALS ES Athenian fleet
> , > / Nig 3 > leaves Corcyra.
ἀλλήλους ἐχρήσαντο, καὶ O Εὐρυ- The surviving
/ + [4 nw b A 7 “ns SC “
μέδων καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπέπλευσαν τ the mainland,
whence they Ξ
cross again to
the island ; they
harass the
enemy.

lal / ,
yovtes τῶν Κερκυραίων (διεσώθησαν
γὰρ αὐτῶν ἐς πεντακοσίους) τείχη
τε λαβόντες, ἃ ἣν ἐν TH Hel ἐκρά

| ς, ἃ tw ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ, ἐκράτουν
“ na an « ,
τῆς πέραν οἰκείας γῆς καὶ ἐξ αὐτῆς ὁρμώμενοι
, \ 2 a / ~ \ ”
ἔληζοντο Tous ἐν TH νήσῳ Kal πολλὰ ἔβλαπτον, 10
\ ἣν > Ἂν, / “Ὁ /
καὶ λιμὸς ἰσχυρὸς ἐγένετο ἐν TH πόλει.
8 ἐπρεσβεύοντο δὲ καὶ ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ
/ / -
Κόρινθον περὶ καθόδου: καὶ ὡς οὐδὲν αὐτοῖς
4 / an
ἐπράσσετο, ὕστερον χρόνῳ πλοῖα Kal ἐπικού-
/ n
ρους παρασκευασάμενοι διέβησαν ἐς τὴν νῆσον 15
/ a
4 ἑξακόσιον μάλιστα οἱ πάντες, Kal Ta πλοῖα
/ , 3 n
ἐμπρήσαντες, ὅπως ἀπόγνοια ἢ Tod ἄλλο τι
x a A An
ἢ κρατεῖν τῆς γῆς, ἀναβάντες ἐς τὸ ὄρος

85 10. ἐλήϊζον ABEFM yp. G.

86

bo

3

ΠΝ

5

87

78 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

Αἵ 3 vA an > / ”
τὴν Ἰστώνην, τεῖχος ἐνοικοδομησάμενοι ἔφθειρον
τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ τῆς γῆς ἐκράτουν.

Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους τελευτῶντος ᾿Αθηναῖοι

Βιοιυγ, Ships εἴκοσι ναῦς ἔστειλαν ἐς Σικελίαν
sent from _ ee , \ , 2
Athens toaid καὶ Λάχητα tov Μελανώπου στρα:
Leontini against ὦ ae Ν ΞΕ } \
Syracuse. τηγὸν αὐτῶν καὶ Χαροιάδην τὰν

τ᾿ “Ὁ
Εὐφιλήτου. οἱ γὰρ Συρακόσιοι καὶ Λεοντῖνοι :

/ VA
és πόλεμον ἀλλήλοις καθέστασαν. ξύμμαχοι
a / 93 r
δὲ τοῖς μὲν Συρακοσίοις ἦσαν πλὴν Καμαριναίων
εἰν. / , “ \ \ \
ai ἄλλαι Awpides πόλεις, αἵπερ καὶ πρὸς τὴν
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τὸ πρῶτον ἀρχομένου τοῦ
πολέμου ξυμμαχίαν ἐτάχθησαν, οὐ μέντοι
ξυνεπολέμησάν γε, τοῖς δὲ Λεοντίνοις αἱ
, a
Χαλκιδικαὶ πόλεις καὶ Καμάρινα: τῆς δὲ
> / \ \ > / 5 (2 a
Ιταλίας Λοκροὶ μὲν Συρακοσίων ἧσαν, Ῥηγῖνοι
δὲ κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενὲς Λεοντίνων. ἐς οὖν τὰς
᾿Αθήνας πέμψαντες οἱ τῶν Λεοντίνων ξύμμαχοι
κατά τε παλαιὰν ξυμμαχίαν καὶ ὅτι “lwves
5 , \ ᾽ / ῃ ,
ἦσαν πείθουσι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους πέμψαι σφίσι
ναῦς" ὑπὸ γὰρ τῶν Συρακοσίων τῆς τε γῆς
εἴργοντο καὶ τῆς θαλάσσης. καὶ ἔπεμψαν οἱ
a n ,
᾿Αθηναῖοι τῆς μὲν οἰκειότητος προφάσει,
/ \ / a 2 \ /
βουλόμενοι δὲ μήτε σῖτον ἐς τὴν Πελοπόννησον
,
ἄγεσθαι αὐτόθεν πρόπειράν τε ποιούμενοι εἰ
ίσι ὃ % εἴη τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ πράγματα
σφίσι δυνατὰ εἴη τ n la πράγμ
͵ , >
ὑποχείρια γενέσθαι. καταστάντες οὖν ἐς
« / a 5 / \ , 2 a
Ῥήγιον τῆς Itadias τὸν πόλεμον ἐποιοῦντο
lal , Ξ ͵΄
μετὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων. καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα.
fa) A , \
Tod δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἡ νόσος τὸ

19. τῆς ἸΙστώνης B. Schmidt, coll. 1v. 46, 1.

on

to
oS

ΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (8ὅ----88) 79

δεύτερον ἐπέπεσε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, ἐκλιποῦσα

/
μὲν οὐδένα χρόνον TO παντάπασιν, Second outbreak
of plague at

ἐγένετο δέ τις ὅμως διοκωχή. Athens.

bo

παρέμεινε δὲ TO μὲν ὕστερον οὐκ ἔλασσον
r , f » “
ἐνιαυτοῦ, τὸ δὲ πρότερον καὶ δύο ἔτη, ὥστε
> / Ἂν τ “ n ? /
Αθηναίων ye μὴ εἶναι 6 TL μᾶλλον ἐκάκωσε
Ν e an
τὴν δύναμιν: τετρακοσίων yap ὁπλιτῶν καὶ

oo

/ 9 ᾿. » / ἂ lal

τετρακισχιλίων ουκ ἐλάσσους ἀπέθανον eK Τῶν
4 \ / e / a \ ”

τάξεων Kal τριακοσίων ἱππέων, τοῦ δὲ ἄλλου

i

ΝΜ b) / > / 3. Ψ \ \ e
ὄχλου avekevpetos ἀριθμός. ἐγένοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ
\ \ , “ fal » » /
πολλοὶ σεισμοὶ τότε τῆς γῆς, ἔν τε ᾿Αθήναις
\ > > / N. > A \ ΄
καὶ ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ καὶ ἐν Βοιωτοῖς καὶ μάλιστα
Ψ 3 an an ,
ἐν ᾿Ορχομενῷ τῷ Βοιωτίῳ.
e \ > ΓΑ 2 lal x
88 Kal of μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ
€ lal lo) by rn lal
Ρηγῖνοι τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος τριά- The Athenian
\ ]
κοντα ναυσὶ στρατεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὰς πο ξοθρς eae
,

Αἰόλου νήσους καλουμένας: θέρους Aeolian islands.
\ > > / » ΄ὔ 9 > ,
yap δι ἀνυδρίαν ἀδύνατα ἣν ἐπιστρατεύειν.

, \ a > ᾽ / ”
2 νέμονται δὲ Λιπαραῖοι αὐτάς, Κνιδίων ἄποικοι
ὄντες. οἰκοῦσι, 8 ἐν μιᾷ τῶν νήσων οὐ
/ an \
μεγάλῃ, καλεῖται δὲ Λιπάρα: tas δὲ ἄλλας
/ δ ΄ fal
ἐκ ταύτης ὁρμώμενοι γεωργοῦσι, Διδύμην καὶ

8 Στρογγύλην καὶ ‘lepdv. νομίζουσι δὲ οἱ

VA a al ᾿ς a 4
ἐκείνῃ ἄνθρωποι ἐν τῇ ‘lepad ws ὁ “Ἥφαιστος
,ὔ \ nr
χαλκεύε, OTL τὴν νύκτα φαίνεται πῦρ
rn Ν /
ἀναδιδοῦσα πολὺ Kal THY ἡμέραν καπνόν.
a i! « a lal
κεῖνται δὲ αἱ νῆσοι αὗται κατὰ τὴν Σικελῶν
x M / a / ᾽ =
Kal εσσηνίων γῆν, ξύμμαχοι δ᾽ ἦσαν

87 7. ᾿Αθηναίους C, yp. A, yp. B, yp. F, qui post μᾶλλον add.
τούτους ἐπίεσε καὶ.

οι

σι

15

80 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

4 Συρακοσίων. τεμόντες δ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὴν γῆν,

89

΄ > , >? / 2 Ν « Ii
ὡς οὐ προσεχώρουν, ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς TO “Ρήγιον.
\ e \ 4 ἣν Ve a
καὶ ὁ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, καὶ πέμπτον ἔτος τῷ
La > Ha ΄Ὁ aA / /
πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα THE ὃν Θουκυδίδης ξυνέγραψεν.
fal 2 5 / / fi
Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγυγνομένου θέρους Ἰ]ελοποννήσιοι

Earthquakes Kat οἱ ξύμμαχοι μέχρι μὲν τοῦ
prevent the Lig x ΐ- XP ἐ

intended Ἰσθμοῦ ἦλθον ὡς es τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν
Invasion O - , a
Attica. ἐσβαλοῦντες, Ayidos τοῦ ᾿Αρχιδάμου

Ἑ / ,ὔ / lal
ἡγουμένου Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλέως, σεισμῶν
δὲ γενομένων πολλῶν ἀπετράποντο πάλιν καὶ

> > is 24 f Ἂν Ν / \
2o0vK ἐγένετο ἐσβολή. καὶ περὶ τούτους τοὺς

χρόνους, τῶν σεισμῶν κατεχόντων, τῆς Εὐβοίας
ἐν ᾿Οροβίαις ἡ θάλασσα ἐπανελθοῦσα ἀπὸ
τῆς τότε οὔσης γῆς καὶ κυματωθεῖσα ἐπῆλθε
τῆς πόλεως μέρος τι, καὶ τὸ μὲν κατέκλυσε,
τὸ δ᾽ ὑπενόστησε,κ καὶ θάλασσα νῦν ἐστι
πρότερον οὖσα γῆ" καὶ ἀνθρώπους διέφθειρεν
ὅσοι μὴ ἐδύναντο φθῆναι πρὸς τὰ μετέωρα

> Z. \ \ » / \ b dS
8 ἀναδραμόντες. καὶ περὶ Αταλάντην τὴν ἐπὶ

a a ? , rn ,
Λοκροῖς τοῖς ᾿Οπουντίοις νῆσον παραπλησία
γίγνεται ἐπίκλυσις, καὶ τοῦ τε φρουρίου τῶν
᾽ / na \ 4 a » /
Αθηναίων παρεῖλε καὶ δύο νεῶν ἀνειλκυσμένων

\ Sated, f b rey δὲ \ >
ἀ τὴν ἑτέραν κατέαξεν. ἐγένετο ὃὲ καὶ ἐν

id ’ /
Πεπαρήθῳ κύματος ἐπαναχώρησίς τις, οὐ
᾿ς (A ἧς “ /
μέντοι ἐπέκλυσέ γε: καὶ σεισμὸς τοῦ τείχους
/ a \ al x A
τι κατέβαλε καὶ TO πρυτανεῖον καὶ ἄλλας

as, θα Μ > » ,ὕ a
ὅ οἰκίας ὀλίγας. αἴτιον δ᾽ ἔγωγε νομίζω τοῦ

2 o 9 , ε \ Ue
TOLOUTOU, ἢ ὑσχυροτατος QO σεισμος ἐγένετο,

9. ἐπανελθοῦσα Schol.: ἐπελθοῦσα codd. 24, post
ἐγένετο add. τὸ Meineke.

on

ISTOPION ΤΓ' (88—91) 81

κατὰ τοῦτο ἀποστέλλειν Te THY θάλασσαν Kal
,ὕ
ἐξαπίνης πάλιν ἐπισπωμένην βιαιότερον τὴν
ἐπίκλυσιν ποιεῖν: ἄνευ δὲ σεισμοῦ οὐκ ἄν μοι
δοκεῖ τὸ τοιοῦτο ξυμβῆναι γενέσθαι.
la) 3 a Ν
Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους ἐπολέμουν μὲν καὶ
ἄλλοι, ὡς ἑκάστοις ξυνέβαινεν, ἐν τῇ Μόϑδοπο π΄
; toe ‘ Ἕ , “» Sicily forced to
Σικελίᾳ καὶ αὐτοὶ οἱ Σικελιῶται ἐπ᾽ join Athens.
ἀλλήλους στρατεύοντες καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ξὺν
a , , a \ , ΄
τοῖς σφετέροις ξυμμάχοις: ἃ δὲ λόγου μάλιστα
yA Xx \ a > , e fe ”
ἄξια ἢ peta τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἔπραξαν
ἢ πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους οἱ ἀντιπόλεμοι, τούτων

2 μνησθήσομαι. Χαροιάδου γὰρ ἤδη τοῦ ᾿Αθη-

ναίων στρατηγοῦ τεθνηκότος ὑπὸ Συρακοσίων
πολέμῳ Λάχης ἅπασαν ἔχων τῶν νεῶν τὴν
ἀρχὴν ἐστράτευσε μετὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων ἐπὶ
Μυλὰς τὰς Μεσσηνίων. ἔτυχον δὲ δύο φυλαὶ
ἐν ταῖς Μυλαῖς τῶν Μεσσηνίων φρουροῦσαι
καί τινα καὶ ἐνέδραν πεποιημέναι τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν

8 νεῶν. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι τούς τε

2 an 2 π Ν ἴς \ /

ἐκ τῆς ἐνέδρας τρέπουσι καὶ διαφθείρουσι πολ-
Uh a 7 14

λούς, Kal τῷ ἐρύματι προσβαλόντες ἠνάγκασαν

e / a

ὁμολογίᾳ τήν τε ἀκρόπολιν παραδοῦναι καὶ ἐπὶ

, fal ‘ an
4 Μεσσήνην ξυστρατεῦσαι. καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο ἐπελ-

91

/ ᾿ ve r ᾽ ‘A \ a
θόντων οἱ Μεσσήνιοι τῶν τε ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν
id
ξυμμάχων προσεχώρησαν καὶ αὐτοί, ὁμήρους
, ,
τε δόντες καὶ τὰ ἄλλα πιστὰ παρασχόμενοι.
fal 7 lal lal
Tod δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τριάκοντα
26. ἐπισπώμενον, αὖ videtur, Schol.: ἐπισπωμένης Meineke :
vide adnot.

7. ἀντιπόλεμοι Pollux: ἀντιπολέμιοι codd. 12. post
τὰς add. τῶν ABEFM,

G

25

on

82 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

a /
μὲν ναῦς ἔστειλαν περὶ Πελοπόννησον, ὧν

Navaloperae ἐστρατήγει Δημοσθένης τε ὁ ᾿Αλ-
tions of Nicias. ie 1Y led ἼΣ

Minoa seized. κισθένους καὶ ἹΠ]ροκλῆς ὁ Θεοδώρου,

Descent on

Boeotia. ἑξήκοντα δὲ ἐς Μῆλον καὶ δισχιλίους
e ᾽ὔ 2 / Χ > a ’ὔ, id
ὁπλίτας" ἐστρατήγει δὲ αὐτῶν Νικίας ὁ

\
2 Νικηράτου. τοὺς yap Μηλίους ὄντας νησιώτας
\ > 2Q/ e / ΣΌΝ 2 \ > [al
καὶ οὐκ ἐθέλοντας ὑπακούειν οὐδὲ ἐς TO αὐτῶν
ξυμμαχικὸν ἰέναι. ἐβούλοντο προσαγαγέσθαι.
8 ὡς δὲ αὐτοῖς δῃουμένης τῆς γῆς οὐ προσ-
εχώρουν, ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς Μήλου αὐτοὶ μὲν
” 2 Ψ \ nan - a ig ᾿ς
ἔπλευσαν ἐςξ Ὥρωπὸν τῆς ραϊκῆς, ὑπὸ
/ e a
νύκτα δὲ σχόντες εὐθὺς ἐπορεύοντο οἱ ὁπλῖται
ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν πεζῇ ἐς Τάναγραν τῆς Βοιωτίας.
4οἱ δὲ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως πανδημεὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι,
« ἴω lal
Ἱππονίκου te τοῦ Καλλίου στρατηγοῦντος
\ > Uh an / 3 Ν /
καὶ Evpupédovtos τοῦ Θουκλέους, ἀπὸ σημείου
ὅ ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ γῆν ἀπήντων. καὶ στρατο-
πεδευσάμενοι ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν ἐν τῇ
/ 2 ft NX. > ,ὔ . s a
Τανάγρᾳ ἐδήουν καὶ ἐνηυλίσαντο. καὶ τῇ
€. >
ὑστεραίᾳ μάχῃ κρατήσαντες τοὺς ἐπεξελθόντας
τῶν Ταναγραίων καὶ Θηβαίων τινὰς προσ-
/ a
βεβοηθηκότας καὶ ὅπλα λαβόντες καὶ τροπαῖον
στήσαντες ἀνεχώρησαν, οἱ μὲν ἐς τὴν πόλιν,
6oi δὲ ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς. καὶ παραπλεύσας ὁ
Νικίας ταῖς ἑξήκοντα ναυσὶ τῆς Λοκρίδος τὰ
ἐπιθαλάσσια ἔτεμε καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου.
ἢ

92 Ὑπὸ δὲ τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον Λακεδαιμόνιοι
Ly - \ > 4 3 ’ὔὕ
Ἡράκλειαν τὴν ἐν Τραχινίᾳφ ἀποικίαν

91 8. αὑτῶν Kriiger. 12. Τραϊκῆς Stahl: πέραν γῆς codd.

92 22 Τραχινίαις ABEFM suprascr. G.

ζι

_

to

bo

2

3

σι

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ TI (91—92) 83

Ν an fol
καθίσταντο ἀπὸ τοιᾶσδε γνώμης. Μηλιῆς
4 4 / > \ / ,
οἱ ξύμπαντές εἰσι μὲν τρία μέρη, The Lacedae-
a / ΄ ig found
Παράλιοι ᾿Ιριῆς Tpayiviors τούτων a 'scitioment at
δὲ of Tpayivior πολέμῳ ἐφθαρμένοι Merce
A 4 , a
ὑπὸ Οἰὐταίων ὁμόρων ὄντων, τὸ πρῶτον
μελλήσαντες ᾿Αθηναίοις προσθεῖναι σφᾶς
> / / ¥ \ > Υ͂ Ν -
αὐτούς, δείσαντες δὲ μὴ οὐ σφίσι πιστοὶ wat,
Σ ἢ
πέμπουσιν ἐς Λακεδαίμονα, ἑλόμενοι πρεσ-
/ n
βευτὴν Τεισαμενόν. ξυνεπρεσβεύοντο δὲ αὐτοῖς
a / lal
καὶ Δωριῆς, ἡ μητρόπολις τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων,
τῶν αὐτῶν δεόμενοι" ὑπὸ γὰρ τῶν Οἰταίων

J e
καὶ αὐτοὶ épGeipovto. ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ

Λακεδαιμόνιον γνώμην εἶχον τὴν ἀποικίαν
a /
ἐκπέμπειν, τοῖς te Τραχινίοις βουλόμενοι καὶ
τοῖς Δωριεῦσι τιμωρεῖν. καὶ ἅμα τοῦ πρὸς
’ 7, ,ὔ lal eee a 50. " ς
Αθηναίους πολέμου καλῶς αὐτοῖς ἐδόκει ἡ
/ / é 5 td \ Lal > /
πόλις καθίστασθαι" ἐπί τε yap τῇ Εὐβοίᾳ

Ν a » “ 3
ναυτικὸν παρασκευασθῆναι ἄν, ὥστ᾽ ἐκ"

/ a! vs / n > \
βραχέος τὴν διάβασιν γίγνεσθαι, τῆς τε ἐπὶ
, /

Θράκης παρόδου χρησίμως ἕξειν. τό τε
/ x na
ξύμπαν ὥρμηντο τὸ χωρίον κτίζειν. πρῶτον

Ὗ ΩΣ > a Ἂς \ ’ /
μὲν οὖν ἐν Δελφοῖς τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο,
/ \ g-/ \ > / > a
κελεύοντος δὲ ἐξέπεμψαν τοὺς οἰκήτορας αὐτῶν
τε καὶ τῶν περιοίκων, καὶ τῶν ἄλλων
Ἑλλήνων τὸν βουλόμενον ἐκέλευον ἕπεσθαι
πλὴν ᾿Ιώνων καὶ ᾿Αχαιῶν καὶ ἔστιν ὧν ἄλλων
5 an > \ \ a /
ἐθνῶν. οἰκισταὶ δὲ τρεῖς Λακεδαιμονίων

ἡγήσαντο, Λέων καὶ ᾿Αλκίδας καὶ Δαμάγων. :

5. ᾿Ιριῆς Bursian: ἱἹἹερῆς codd. 14. post αὐτοὶ add.
πολέμῳ CG.

ὧν

84 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

΄ \ > id ἮΝ; , > an
6 καταστάντες δὲ ἐτείχισαν τὴν πολιν ἐκ καινῆς,

98

94

΄“ . a
ἣ νῦν Ἡράκλεια καλεῖται, ἀπέχουσα Θερμο-
lal 4 lal
πυλῶν σταδίους μάλιστα τεσσαράκοντα, τῆς
\
δὲ θαλάσσης εἴκοσι. νεώριά Te παρεσκευάζοντο,
\ 5 \ \ ; ΄ > ΣΝ
καὶ εἶρξαν τὸ κατὰ Θερμοπύλας κατ᾽ αὐτὸ
x id ¢ ΄, an
TO στενόν, ὅπως εὐφύλακτα αὐτοῖς εἴη. οἱ
\ ’ a a / Vf
Heraclea does δὲ AOnvaioe τῆς πόλεως ταύτης
ad sa ξυνοικιζομένης TO πρῶτον ederoay
ΌΝ ᾿ς ς pare fal > / ΄
τε Kal ἐνομίσαν ἐπὶ τῇ Εὐβοίᾳ μάλιστα
/ ef / > ic /
καθίστασθαι, ὅτι βραχύς ἐστιν ὁ διάπλους
< Ἂς 4 na 7 , ” ,ὔ
πρὸς τὸ Κήναιον τῆς Εὐβοίας. ἔπειτα μέντοι
xX / ’ n > id > ἣν; Ψ fe
mapa δόξαν αὐτοῖς ἀπέβη: ov yap ἐγένετο
3 ᾽ Φ' Ἂς Ν > / ” \ 5S Ψ
ἀπ᾿ αὐτῆς δεινὸν οὐδέν. αἴτιον δὲ ἣν οἵ τε
Θεσσαλοὶ ἐν δυνάμει ὄντες τῶν ταύτῃ χωρίων,
\ Φ 5 \ Ay lal > Ψ ΄ὔ \
Kal ὧν ἐπὶ τῇ γῇ ἐκτίζετο, φοβούμενοι μὴ
,ὔ 4 Ψ ig a ” \
σφίσι μεγάλῃ ἰσχύν παροικῶσιν, ἔφθειρον καὶ
x Va
διὰ παντὸς ἐπολέμουν ἀνθρώποις νεοκαταστά-
γ᾽ -“
τοις, ἕως ἐξετρύχωσαν γενομένους τὸ πρῶτον
\ ‘4 a: fal is /
Kal πάνυ πολλούς (πᾶς yap τις Λακεδαιμονίων
> / /
οἰκιζόντων θαρσαλέως ἤει, βέβαιον νομίζων
Ἁ /
τὴν πόλιν)" οὐ μέντοι ἥκιστα οἱ ἄρχοντες
aA n ¥.
αὐτῶν τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων οἱ ἀφικνούμενοι τὰ
᾿ς ff: » Ni Ψ ’ /
πράγματά τε ἔφθειρον καὶ ἐς ὀλιγανθρωπίαν
f ’ v2 \ \
κατέστησαν, ἐκφοβήσαντες τοὺς πολλοὺς
χαλεπῶς τε καὶ ἔστιν ἃ οὐ καλῶς ἐξηγού-
A an /
μενοι, ὥστε ῥᾷον ἤδη αὐτῶν οἱ πρόσοικοι
ἐπεκράτουν. ᾿
[4 lal 3 > an / Ay οὗ \ > Ν
Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους, καὶ περὶ τὸν αὐτὸν
/ a an
χρόνον ὃν ἐν τῇ Μήλῳ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι κατεί-
94, d€éom. ABEFM yp. G. 35. εἶρξαν (sic) τὸ E: ἤρξαντο cett.

_

_

bo

δ᾽

5

2

ὧν

=~

σι

ΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (92—94) 8δ

\ e > Ν lal ys - "AO
χοντο, καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα νεῶν Αθη-
a /
vaio. περὶ Πελοπόννησον ὄντες Western

GREECE.

a > ὅχ͵ὼαιπ a “-
πρῶτον ἐν Ελλομενῷ τ Λευκα- Demosthenes
ρ pee Ly persuaded by

/ / / Μ
δία ουρούς τινας λοχήσαντες the Messenians
[A Ἢ $p ρ = ὸ ef x" 2 x to invade
διέφθειραν, ἔπειτα ὕστερον ἐπὶ Aetolia.
/ ’ a /
Λευκάδα peifov. στόλῳ ἦλθον, ᾿Ακαρνᾶσί
τε πᾶσιν, of πανδημεὶ πλὴν Οἰνιαδῶν Evp-
fal οὗ
έσποντο, καὶ Ζακυνθίοις καὶ Κεφαλλῆσι καὶ
-- e
Κερκυραίων πέντε καὶ δέκα ναυσίν. καὶ οἱ
an fol /
μὲν Λευκάδιοι τῆς τε ἔξω yas δῃουμένης
“- “ fal e Ψ
καὶ τῆς ἐντὸς τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ, ἐν ἡ καὶ ἡ Λευκάς
> \ \ een Be es , ,
ἐστι Kal TO ἱερὸν τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος, πλήθει
/ ς ἔ, e A ’ rn > ’ὔ,
βιαζόμενοι ἡσύχαζον: οἱ δὲ ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες ἠξίουν
fal /
Δημοσθένη τὸν στρατηγὸν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
,
ἀποτειχίζειν αὐτούς, νομίζοντες ῥᾳδίως τ᾽ ἂν
> lol / , + A ,
ἐκπολιορκῆσαι πόλεώς τε αἰεὶ σφίσι πολεμίας
a /
ἀπαλλαγῆναι. δΔημοσθένης δ᾽ ἀναπείθεται
rn
κατὰ τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον ὑπὸ Μεσσηνίων ὡς
\ > a rn rs /
καλὸν αὐτῷ στρατιᾶς τοσαύτης ἕξυνειλεγμένης
> an
Αἰτωλοῖς ἐπιθέσθαι, Ναυπάκτῳ τε πολεμίοις
9 a Ν
οὖσι καί, ἢν κρατήσῃ αὐτῶν, ῥᾳδίως καὶ τὸ
Μ. ? \ Ἂν 4 3 /
ἄλλο ᾿Ηπειρωτικὸν τὸ ταύτῃ ᾿Αθηναίοις προσ-

, \ \ » fy \ 53 \
ποιήσειν. τὸ yap ἔθνος μέγα μὲν εἶναι τὸ 3

A > la) \ ΄ ’ a \ \
τῶν Αἰτωλῶν καὶ μάχιμον, οἰκοῦν δὲ κατὰ
κώμας ἀτειχίστους, καὶ ταύτας διὰ πολλοῦ,
καὶ oKevn ψιλῇ χρώμενον οὐ χαλεπὸν
ἀπέφαινον, πρὶν ξυμβοηθῆσαι, καταστραφῆναι.

lal > a a
ἐπιχειρεῖν δ᾽ ἐκέλευον πρῶτον μὲν ᾿Αποδωτοῖς,
” Ν ᾽ a \ \ ΄
ἔπειτα δὲ ‘Oduovedot καὶ μετὰ τούτους

17. τ᾽. , πόλεώς τε] γ᾽ . . καὶ πόλεως C.

σι

-

0

15

30

95

95

86 BOYKYAIAOY

lal 4 , a
Evputaow, ὅπερ μέγιστον μέρος ἐστὶ τῶν
n i. an
Αἰτωλῶν, ἀγνωστότατοι δὲ γλῶσσαν καὶ
ὠμοφάγοι εἰσίν, ὡς λέγονται. τούτων γὰρ

ληφθέντων ῥᾳδίως καὶ τἄλλα προσχωρήσειν. :

ς

ὁ δὲ τῶν Μεσσηνίων χάριτι πεισθεὶς καὶ
ἘΠῚ 56. πῆδο μάλιστα νομίσας ἄνευ τῆς τῶν
into theinterior. "A θῃναίων δυνάμεως τοῖς ἠπειρώταις
/ \ an > an fe BY
ξυμμάχοις peta τῶν Αἰτωλῶν δύνασθαι ἂν
κατὰ γῆν ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ Βοιωτοὺς διὰ Λοκρῶν
τῶν Ὀζολῶν ἐς Κυτίνιον τὸ Δωρικόν, ἐν
δεξιᾷ ἔχων τὸν II ἦν, ἕως καταβαίη ἐ
a ἔχ ν ἸΙαρνασσόν, ἕως αβαίη ἐς
ε VA
Φωκέας, of προθύμως ἐδόκουν κατὰ τὴν
> f > ad A / 4
Αθηναίων αἰεί ποτε φιλίαν ἕξυστρατεύσειν
x x LA a \ fa) »
ἢ κἂν βίᾳ προσαχθῆναι (καὶ Φωκεῦσιν ἤδη
ὅμορος ἡ Βοιωτία ἐστίν), ἄρας οὖν ξύμπαντι
τῷ στρατεύματι ἀπὸ τῆς Λευκάδος ἀκόντων
τῶν ᾿Ακαρνάνων παρέπλευσεν ἐς Σόλλιον.
“-“ > lal
κοινώσας δὲ τὴν ἐπίνοιαν τοῖς ᾿Ακαρνᾶσιν, ὡς
2 / \, an tA \ ’
ov προσεδέξαντο διὰ τῆς Λευκάδος τὴν οὐ
περιτείχισιν, αὐτὸὸ τῇ λοιπῇ στρατιῇ,
Κεφαλλῆσι καὶ Μεσσηνίοις καὶ ΦΖακυνθίοις
> a a
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων τριακοσίοις τοῖς ἐπιβάταις τῶν
σφετέρων νεῶν (αἱ γὰρ πέντε καὶ δέκα τῶν

n an >
Κερκυραίων ἀπῆλθον νῆες), ἐστράτευσεν ἐπ᾽ 2

Αἰτωλούς. ὡρμᾶτο δὲ ἐξ Οἰνεῶνος τῆς
Λοκρίδος. οἱ δὲ ὈὈξζόλαι οὗτοι Λοκροὶ
ξύμμαχοι ἦσαν, καὶ ἔδει αὐτοὺς πανστρατιᾷ
ἀπαντῆσαι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς τὴν μεσόγειαν'

9, ξυστρατεύσειν Stahl: ξυστρατεῦσαι M: ξυ(ν)στρατεύειν
cett. 13. τῶν om. ABEFM.

φῦ
σι

οι

μι

0

ISTOPION Γ (94---97) 87

ΝΜ \ μέ a > al \ « ,
ὄντες yap ὅμοροι τοῖς Αἰτωλοῖς Kal ὁμόσκευοι 2%
/ > / ἡ 4 ,ὔ
μεγάλη ὠφελία ἐδόκουν εἶναι ξυστρατεύοντες
n /
μάχης Te ἐμπειρίᾳ τῆς ἐκείνων καὶ χωρίων...
lal a nr \ a
96 αὐλισάμενος δὲ TH στρατῷ ἐν τοῦ Διὸς Tod
Νεμείου τῷ ἱερῴ, ἐν ᾧ Ἡσίοδος The Actolians
e See Ὁ ar gees Σ unite to resist
ὁ ποιητὴς λέγεται ὑπὸ τῶν ταύτῃ him.
5 lal \ Ψ a , “
ἀποθανεῖν, χρησθὲν αὐτῴ ἐν Νεμέᾳ τοῦτο
a a Us
παθεῖν, ἅμα τῇ ἕῳ ἄρας ἐπορεύετο ἐς τὴν
> / \ e lal a , e /
2Aitwdlav. καὶ aiper τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ
id Ss Ἔ K ig \ a
Tlotidaviav καὶ τῇ δευτέρᾳ Κροκύλειον καὶ τῇ
Pa a
τρίτῃ Τείχιον, ἔμενέ te αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν λείαν
a i
ἐς Εὐπάλιον τῆς Λοκρίδος ἀπέπεμψεν: τὴν
\ A 3 \ » ΄
γὰρ γνώμην εἶχε τὰ ἄλλα καταστρεψάμενος 10
Ὁ > as ew] , > \ 4
οὕτως ἐπὶ Οφιονέας, εἰ μὴ βούλοιντο Evyyo-
ρεῖν, ἐς Ναύπακτον ἐπαναχωρήσας στρατεῦσαι

οι

ὕστερον.

8 Τοὺς δὲ Αἰτωλοὺς οὐκ ἐλάνθανεν αὕτη ἡ
παρασκευὴ οὔτε ὅτε τὸ πρῶτον ἐπεβουλεύετο,
ἐπειδή τε ὁ στρατὸς ἐσεβεβλήκει, πολλῇ
χειρὶ ἐπεβοήθουν πάντες, ὥστε καὶ οἱ
ἔσχατοι ᾿Οφιονέων οἱ πρὸς τὸν Μηλιακὸν
κόλπον καθήκοντες Βωμιῆς καὶ Καλλιῆς ἐβοή-

97 θησαν. τῷ δὲ Δημοσθένει τοιόνδε τι οἱ

_

5

Μεσσήνιοι παρήνουν, ὅπερ Kal TO He is attacked,
πρῶτον: ἀναδιδάσκοντες αὐτὸν τῶν Αἰτωλῶν
ὡς εἴη ῥαδία ἡ αἵρε ἰέναι ἐκέλευον ὅ
5 ein ῥᾷοια ἡ αἵρεσις, ἰένᾶι. ἐκέλευον ὅτι
ΟΝ \ , \ \ Ψ
τάχιστα ἐπὶ τὰς κώμας καὶ μὴ μένειν ἕως 5
ΓΝ » - / ’ / \
ἂν ξύμπαντες ἁθροισθέντες ἀντιτάξωνται, τὴν
? n lal e
26 ἐν ποσὶν αἰεὶ πειρᾶσθαι αἱρεῖν. ὁ δὲ
vA \ a / /
τούτοις Te πεισθεὶς Kal TH τύχῃ ἐλπίσας, ὅτι

iy)

98

97

88 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

Q\ > a 3 a \ \ 3
οὐδὲν αὐτῷ ἠναντιοῦτο, τοὺς Λοκροὺς οὐκ
ἐς 2 a A lal
ἀναμείνας ods αὐτῷ ἔδει προσβοηθῆσαι (ψιλῶν
\ lal As ,
yap ἀκοντιστῶν ἐνδεὴς ἣν μάλιστα) ἐχώρει
ie: ie an
ἐπὶ Aiyutiov, Kal κατὰ κράτος αἱρεῖ ἐπιών.
ς / ἊΝ. id ” \ > / > Ἂς
ὑπέφυγον γὰρ οἱ ἄνθρωποι καὶ ἐκάθηντο ἐπὶ
a , a fal he
τῶν λόφων τῶν ὑπὲρ THs πόλεως: ἦν γὰρ
27? ς a / > / fel /
ἐφ᾽ ὑψηλῶν χωρίων ἀπέχουσα τῆς θαλάσσης
3 ΄ , vA ig \ > /
ὀγδοήκοντα σταδίους μάλιστα. οἱ δὲ Αἰτωλοί
if \ » Φ 5: Ξὸν \ 7
(βεβοηθηκότες yap ἤδη ἦσαν ἐπὶ τὸ Αἰγίτιον)
id - 4 Ve \ a
προσέβαλλον τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις καὶ τοῖς Evp-
/ z 3 Ἂν lal 7 ν᾽
μάχοις καταθέοντες ἀπὸ τῶν λόφων ἄλλοι
5) \ 3 , \ ε / \ > if
ἄλλοθεν καὶ ἐσηκόντιζον, καὶ ὁπότε μὲν ἐπίοι
Ν a πὰ , e
τὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατόπεδον, ὑπεχώρουν,
ἀναχωροῦσι δὲ ἐπέκειντο: καὶ ἦν ἐπὶ πολὺ
/
τοιαύτη ἡ μάχη, διώξεις τε Kal ὑπαγωγαί,
> μι > / ee 9 e 2 rc
ἐν οἷς ἀμφοτέροις ἥσσους ἦσαν οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι.
/ \ Φ e td Le} / N /
μέχρι μὲν οὖν ot τοξόται εἶχόν τε τὰ βέλη
andisforeed αὐτοῖς καὶ οἷοί τε ἦσαν χρῆσθαι,
to retreat, with Sens mi , . ‘
heavy ie He οἱ δὲ AVTELYOV (τοξευόμενοι yap οἱ
remains ἃ
Naupactus. Αἰτωλοὶ ἄνθρωποι ψιλοὶ ἀνεστέλ-
᾿ Ά, \ lal ,ὔ J
λοντο)" ἐπειδὴ δὲ τοῦ τε τοξάρχου ἀποθα-
, \ /
vovTos οὗτοι διεσκεδάσθησαν Kal αὐτοὶ ἐκεκμή-
a / ie
κεσαν Kal ἐπὶ πολὺ τῷ αὐτῷ πόνῳ ξυνεχόμενοι,
“ 3 Ν a2 th \ > “ e
ot te Αὐτωλοὶ ἐνέκειντο καὶ ἐσηκοντιζον, οὕτω
, ,
δὴ τραπόμενοι ἔφευγον, καὶ ἐσπίπτοντες ἔς τε
χαράδρας ἀνεκβάτους καὶ χωρία ὧν οὐκ ἦσαν
,ὔ \ At ς ¢€ \
ἔμπειροι διεφθείροντο καὶ yap ὁ ἡγεμὼν
> a a CAA / ( / ξ Sa,
αὐτοῖς τῶν ὁδῶν Χρόμων ὁ Μεσσήνιος ἐτύγ-
18. ὑπέφυγον Herwerden: ὑπέφευγον codd. 18, προσέ-
βαλον CG. 20. ὅτε codd.

_

0

15

σι

ΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ I’ (97—99) 89

/
2yave τεθνηκώς. οἱ δὲ Αἰτωλοὶ ἐσακοντίζοντες
a a a /
πολλοὺς μὲν αὐτοῦ ἐν TH τροπῇ κατὰ πόδας
cl tin ” ͵ \ ys ᾿
αἱροῦντες ἄνθρωποι ποδώκεις καὶ ψιλοὶ δι- 15
΄ \ \ , a το κ ς ,
έφθειρον, τοὺς δὲ πλείους τῶν ὁδῶν ἁμαρτά-
\ 2 \ ef > / μέ
vovtas καὶ ἐς τὴν ὕλην ἐσφερομένους, ὅθεν
, n ,
διέξοδοι οὐκ ἦσαν, πῦρ κομισάμενοι περιεπίμ-
Tpacav: πᾶσά τε ἰδέα κατέστη τῆς φυγῆς καὶ
ἴω > / a ¥. lal > ,
τοῦ ὀλέθρου τῷ στρατοπέδῳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων,
, > ean \ ΄ \ \ > nr
μόλις τε ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Kal τὸν Oivedva
aA / “ \ ες ὔ e
τῆς Λοκρίδος, ὅθεν περ καὶ ὡρμήθησαν, οἱ
/ “-“
4 περιγενόμενοι, κατέφυγον. ἀπέθανον δὲ τῶν
“ 1g
te ξυμμάχων πολλοὶ καὶ αὐτῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
ig a /
ὁπλῖται περὶ εἴκοσι μάλιστα Kal ἑκατόν. %
“ \ Ν a \ ¢ / €. beach
τοσοῦτοι μὲν τὸ πλῆθος Kal ἡλικία ἡ αὐτὴ
- , A » > A VA
οὗτοι βέλτιστοι δὴ ἄνδρες ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ
“ > a 5] , / ix
τῷδε ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεως διεφθάρησαν
» / \ \ e Ὁ“ XN a
ἀπέθανε δὲ καὶ ὁ ἕτερος στρατηγὸς Προκλῆς.
/ (2
5 τοὺς δὲ νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἀνελόμενοι παρὰ 30
τῶν Αἰτωλῶν καὶ ἀναχωρήσαντες ἐς Ναύπακτον
> cr
ὕστερον ἐς tas ᾿Αθήνας ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐκομί-
θ ,ὔ \ \ N 4 \
σθησαν. Δημοσθένης δὲ περὶ Ναύπακτον καὶ
a n /
Ta χωρία ταῦτα ὑπελείφθη, τοῖς πεπραγμένοις

i)
bo

0

φοβούμενος τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. 35
99 Kata δὲ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους καὶ οἱ περὶ
Σικελίαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι πλεύσαντες ἐς 5 τον.

\ fs > > f. / \
τὴν Λοκρίδα ἐν amoBdce τέ τινι τοὺς
προσβοηθήσαντας Λοκρῶν ἐκράτησαν καὶ περι-

, e rn a 4 τὺ ν a ar
πόλιον αἱροῦσιν ὃ ἣν ἐπὶ τῷ "Αληκι TOTAMY. '

δ

(98 20. τῷ στρατοπέδῳ Reiske: τῶν στρατοπέδων cett. 26.
αὐτὴ] πρώτη Hude.

100

no

101

2

100
101

90 OOYKYAIAOY

Tod δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους Αἰτωλοὶ προπέμψαντες
The Actolians πρότερον ἔς τε Κόρινθον καὶ és
obtain help
from Sparta. Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις, Torodpov τε
tov Ὀφιονέα καὶ Βοριάδην τὸν Evputava καὶ
Τείσανδρον τὸν ᾿Αποδωτόν, πείθουσιν ὥστε
σφίσι πέμψαι στρατιὰν ἐπὶ Ναύπακτον διὰ

\ lal > , > ΄ \ 5.7
τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπαγωγήν. καὶ ἐξέπεμψαν
Λακεδαιμόνιοι περὶ τὸ φθινόπωρον τρισχιλίους
ὁπλίτας τῶν ξυμμάχων. (τούτων ἦσαν πεντα-
, > «ς , A > a ΄
κόσιοι ἐξ “Ηρακλείας τῆς ἐν Τραχῖνι πόλεως
,
τότε νεοκτίστου οὔσης") Σπαρτιάτης δ᾽ ἦρχεν

ΠΑ a a

Εὐρύλοχος τῆς στρατιᾶς, καὶ ξυνηκολούθουν
> a / \ 7. e an

αὐτῷ Μακάριος καὶ Μενεδάϊος of Σπαρτιᾶται.
ξυλλεγέντος δὲ τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐς Δελφοὺς

3 ’,΄ > ΄ ra

ἢ ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Εὐρύλοχος Λοκροῖς
hes ἢ aA > , 7 Ἢ

Delphion τοῖς ἰ(εύλανς οἰ πούτων yap ἢ
e 93 4 ¢

a aaa ὁδὸς ἣν és Ναύπακτον, καὶ ἅμα

τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐβούλετο ἀποστῆσαι αὐτούς.
ξυνέπρασσον δὲ μάλιστα αὐτῷ τῶν Δοκρῶν
᾿Αμφισσῆς διὰ τὸ τῶν Φωκέων ἔχθος δε-
διότες" καὶ αὐτοὶ πρῶτοι δόντες ὁμήρους καὶ
\ bY 7 a / \
Tous ἄλλους ἔπεισαν δοῦναι φοβουμένους τὸν
iA a ¢€ /
ἐπιόντα στρατόν, πρῶτον μὲν οὖν τοὺς ὁμόρους
>: al / 4 \ vA
αὐτοῖς Muovéas (ταύτῃ yap δυσεσβολώτατος
G , ” 3 ,ὔ \ /
ἡ Λοκρίς), ἔπειτα ᾿Ἰπνέας καὶ Μεσσαπίους
καὶ Τριταιέας καὶ Χαλαίους καὶ Τολοφωνίους

18. Μενεδαῖος Hudson (accentum corr. L. Dindorf): Mevé-
daros codd.

8. πρῶτοι Kriiger: πρῶτον codd. 11. Mvavéas in
titulis. 12. Μεταπίους Steph. Byz. 18. Τριτοιέας
CG: Τριταίους Steph. Byz. : Τριτέας in titulis.

οι

σι

1

0

02

2

eo

rs

On

ISTOPION I (100—102) 91

καὶ Ἡσσίους καὶ Οἰανθέας. οὗτοι καὶ ἕξυν-
eotpatevov πάντες. ᾿Ολπαῖοι δὲ ὁμήρους μὲν
ἔδοσαν, ἠκολούθουν δὲ οὔ: καὶ “Faior οὐκ
ἔδοσαν ὁμήρους πρὶν αὐτῶν εἷλον κώμην
Πόλιν ὄνομα ἔχουσαν. ἐπειδὴ δὲ παρεσκεύαστο
πάντα καὶ τοὺς ὁμήρους κατέθετο Demosthenes

with an Acar-
> / \ 2 ’ .
ἐς Κυτίνιον τὸ Awpixov, ἐχώρει nanian force

im ἀν τον τδὰ “i Ἵ repels his
τῶ στρατῷ. ETL THV Ναύπακτον attack.
lal lal / a
διὰ τῶν Λοκρῶν, καὶ πορευόμενος Οἰνεῶνα
αἱρεῖ αὐτῶν καὶ Εὐπάλιον: οὐ γὰρ προσε-
Ψ a
χώρησαν. γενόμενοι δ᾽ ἐν τῇ Ναυπακτίᾳ καὶ
οἱ Αἰτωλοὶ ἅμα ἤδη προσβεβοηθηκότες ἐδήουν
τὴν γῆν καὶ τὸ προάστειον ἀτείχιστον ὃν
/
εἷλον: ἐπί te Μολύκρειον ἐλθόντες τὴν Κοριν-
θίων μὲν ἀποικίαν, ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ ὑπήκοον,
“- > a
αἱροῦσιν. Δημοσθένης δὲ ὁ ᾿Αθηναῖος (ἔτι
\ p esis x Ἂ \ τ a > f
yap ἐτύγχανεν ὧν μετὰ τὰ ἐκ τῆς Αἰτωλίας
περὶ Ναύπακτον) προαισθόμενος τοῦ στρατοῦ
δ / \ ’ na > ἣν / >
καὶ δείσας περὶ αὐτῆς, ἐλθὼν πείθει ᾿Ακαρ-
n lal \ \ 9 n / >
vavas, χωλεπῶς Sia τὴν ἐκ τῆς Λευκάδος ava-
χώρησιν, βοηθῆσαι Ναυπάκτῳ. καὶ πέμπουσι
μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν χιλίους ὁπλίτας, οἱ
ἐσελθόντες περιεποίησαν τὸ χωρίον" δεινὸν γὰρ

4 \ 4 ” a , τὰς ἂν ὁ \
ἣν μὴ μεγάλου ὄντος TOU τείχους, OALYwY δὲ :

fal 2 , ᾽ ,ὔ

τῶν ἀμυνομένων, οὐκ ἀντίσχωσιν. Εὐρύλοχος
\ N e ’ a δ \

δὲ καὶ οἱ pet αὐτοῦ ws ἤσθοντο τὴν στρατιὰν
5 -“ / /
ἐσεληλυθυῖαν καὶ ἀδύνατον ὃν τὴν πόλιν Bia
e Lal > / > 7 Ν /
ἑλεῖν, ἀνεχώρησαν οὐκ ἐπὶ LledXomovyjcou,
> > Ἂ ἣν ’ \ fol

ἀλλ᾽ ἐς τὴν Αἰολίδα τὴν νῦν καλουμένην

25. τὴν ante νῦν et 26 és ante τὰ del. Steup.

οι

bo
So

25

6

7

103

τῷ

ϑ

108

92 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

Καλυδῶνα καὶ ἸΠλευρῶνα καὶ ἐς τὰ ταύτῃ

ig \ > ig an > / Cd

χωρία καὶ ἐς ΤΙρόσχιον τῆς Αἰτωλίας. οἱ
5) ‘i na ,

γὰρ ~Apmpaxidta. ἐλθόντες πρὸς αὐτοὺς

/ Ὁ Ν lal Μ lal

πείθουσιν ὥστε μετὰ σφῶν Αργει τε τῷ

᾿Αμφιλοχικῷ καὶ ᾿Αμφιλοχίᾳ τῇ ἄλλῃ ἐπι-:

a \ > / ee , “
χειρῆσαι καὶ ᾿Ακαρνανίᾳῳ ἅμα, λέγοντες ὅτι,
x a
ἢν τούτων κρατήσωσι, πᾶν τὸ ἠπειρωτικὸν
Δ ὃ / 4 / \ e

ακεδαιμονίοις ξύμμαχον καθεστήξει. καὶ ὁ
\
μὲν Evptroyos πεισθεὶς καὶ τοὺς Αἰτωλοὺς

> \ e 4 a a \ \ ,
ἀφεὶς ἡσύχαζε τῷ στρατῴ περὶ τοὺς χώρους:

fe Ξ -
τούτους, ἕως τοῖς ᾿Αμπρακιώταις ἐκστρατευσα-
, lal
μένοις περὶ TO “Apyos δέοι βοηθεῖν. καὶ τὸ
if
θέρος ἐτελεύτα.
e > ef 3 “ a
Oi δ᾽ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοῦ
΄ fal ,
Siciny, Trifing ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἐπελθόντες
i fal € /
a ai μετὰ τῶν Ελλήνων ξυμμάχων καὶ
μὲ a ,
ὅσοι Σικελῶν κατὰ κράτος ἀρχόμενοι ὑπὸ
Συρακοσίων καὶ ξύμμαχοι ὄντες ἀποστάντες
> a > \ VA / es)
αὐτοῖς [ἀπὸ Συρακοσίων] ξυνεπολέμουν, ἐπ
A | Nira Sy \ / ᾿ \ > /
νησσαν τὸ Σικελικὸν πόλισμα, οὗ τὴν ἀκρό-
ld Φ , aN e
πολιν Συρακόσιοι εἶχον, προσέβαλον, καὶ ὡς
οὐκ ἐδύναντο ἑλεῖν, ἀπῆσαν. ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀνα-
/ nan
χωρήσει ὑστέροις ᾿Αθηναίων τοῖς ξυμμάχοις
ἀναχωροῦσιν ἐπιτίθενται οἱ ἐκ τοῦ τειχίσματος
if ’ , ,
Συρακόσιοι, καὶ προσπεσόντες τρέπουσί τε
“ an /
μέρος TL τοῦ στρατοῦ Kal ἀπέκτειναν οὐκ

<

4 a \ lal rn
ὀλίγους. καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν ὁ

σι

Λάχης καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐς τὴν Λοκρίδα ἀπο- τὸ

26. ἐς del. Herwerden.
6. ἀπὸ Συρακοσίων del. Kistemaker.

ISTOPION Γ' (102—104) 93

\ “Om
βάσεις τινὰς ποιησάμενοι Kata τὸν Kaixivoy
ποταμὸν τοὺς προσβοηθοῦντας Λοκρῶν μετὰ

fa ,ὔ
Προξένου τοῦ Καπάτωνος ὡς τριακοσίους
ve >? / \ “ / ᾽
μάχῃ ἐκράτησαν καὶ ὅπλα λαβόντες ἀπε-
χώρησαν.
lal ’ fal an an
04 Tod δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος καὶ Δῆλον ἐκάθηραν
> lal \ Ἂς /
Αθηναῖοι κατὰ χρησμὸν δή τινα. purification
ἐκάθηρε μὲν γὰρ καὶ Πεισίστρατος % PE
᾿ς
ὁ τύραννος πρότερον αὐτήν, οὐχ ἅπασαν, ANN
ὅσον ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐφεωρᾶτο τῆς νήσου"
a a LU n
2ToTe δὲ πᾶσα ἐκαθάρθη τοιῷδε τρόπῳ. θῆκαι
ὅσαι ἦσαν τῶν τεθνεώτων ἐν Δήλῳ, πάσας
a \ a
ἀνεῖλον, καὶ TO λοιπὸν προεῖπον μήτε ἐναπο-
a /
θνήσκειν ἐν TH νήσῳ μήτε ἐντίκτειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐς
\ δ , / > tA εἶ c
τὴν Ῥήνειαν διακομίζεσθαι. ἀπέχει δὲ ἡ
Ῥήνεια τῆς Δήλου οὕτως ὀλίγον ὥστε ἸΠολυ-
κράτης ὁ Σαμίων τύραννος ἰσχύσας τινὰ
χρόνον ναυτικῷ καὶ τῶν τε ἄλλων νήσων
ἴρξας καὶ τὴν Ῥήνειαν ἑλὼν ἀνέθηκε τῷ
ἄρξας ὶ τὴν Ρήνειαν ὧν ἀνέθηκε τ
a e / / Nw
Aroddkovu τῷ Δηλίῳ ἁλύσει δήσας πρὸς τὴν
rn i 4 an
Δῆλον. καὶ -τὴν πεντετηρίδα τότε πρῶτον
\ \ / > / € > a \
peta τὴν κάθαρσιν ἐποίησαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὰ
/
3 Δήλια. ἣν δέ ποτε καὶ τὸ πάλαι μεγάλη
, > \ a a b , \
Evvodos és τὴν Δῆλον τῶν “lovey τε καὶ

/ nr c
περικτιόνων νησιωτῶν: ξύν τε yap γυναιξὶ

καὶ παισὶν ἐθεώρουν, ὥσπερ νῦν ἐς τὰ ᾿Ἐφέσια

Ἴωνες, καὶ ἀγὼν ἐποιεῖτο αὐτόθι καὶ γυμνικὸς

καὶ μουσικός, χορούς τε ἀνῆγον αἱ πόλεις.

4 δηλοῖ δὲ μάλιστα “Ὅμηρος ὅτι τοιαῦτα Hv ἐν
04 17. τὰ Δήλια del. Herwerden.

20

bo
—)

94 OOYKYAIAOY

τοῖς ἔπεσι τοῖσδε, & ἐστιν ἐκ προοιμίου 2%
? /
Απόλλωνος"
᾽ -
arr ὅτε Δήλῳ, Φοῖβε, μάλιστά γε θυμὸν
ἀν
ἐτέρφθης,
” e / 1.2 2 /
ἔνθα τοι ἑλκεχίτωνες “Idoves ἠγερέθονται
\ a ΄ὔ
σὺν σφοῖσιν τεκέεσσι γυναιξί τε σὴν ἐς

ἀγυιάν"
ΝΜ / 5 A x
ἔνθα σε πυγμαχίῃῇ «τε καὶ ὀρχηστυῖ καὶ
ἀοιδῇ 80
VA “ /
μνησάμενοι τέρπουσιν, ὅταν καθέσωσιν
ἀγῶνα.

: } a 5 7
5 ὅτι δὲ καὶ μουσικῆς ἀγὼν ἣν καὶ ἀγωνιούμενοι
bY ᾽ 3 fal 4s an vA > > r
ἐφοίτων ἐν τοῖσδε αὖ δηλοῖ, ἅ ἐστιν ἐκ τοῦ
rn Χ \ \ \
αὐτοῦ προοιμίου: τὸν yap Δηλιακὸν χορὸν

an fal / A fal Vi

τῶν γυναικῶν ὑμνήσας ἐτελεύτα τοῦ ἐπαίνου

¢o
or

? 7, \ 54 3 oe \ e a ? /
ἐς τάδε Ta ἔπη, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἑαυτοῦ ἐπεμνήσθη"
7 /
ἀλλ᾽ ἄγεθ, ἱλήκοι μὲν ᾿Απόλλων ᾿Αρτέμιδι
tf
ξύν,
, ιν 3 lal a >? lal \ AN
χαίρετε δ᾽ ὑμεῖς πᾶσαι. ἐμεῖο δὲ καὶ
/
μετόπισθε
7 bd ¢ , i > /
μνήσασθ, ὁππότε κέν Tis ἐπιχθονίων
ἀνθρώπων
i
ἐνθάδ᾽ ἀνείρηται ταλαπείριος ἄλλος ἐπελθών" 40
(one: n , δ᾽ » ἐφ AY “ὃ
ὦ κοῦραι, τίς ὔὄμμιν ἀνὴρ ἥδιστος
ἀοιδῶν
fal / 37
ἐνθάδε πωλεῖται, καὶ τέῳ τέρπεσθε μάλιστα;
ὑμεῖς δ᾽ εὖ μάλα πᾶσαι ὑποκρίνασθαι
3 ΄
ἀφήμως:"
27. ἄλλοτε Camerarius. 30. τε vulgo: om. codd. 41.
ὕμμιν codd. hymn. Hom. : ὑμῖν codd.

ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ' (104—105) 95

- ,ὔ »
“τυφλὸς ἀνήρ, οἰκεῖ δὲ Χίῳ ἔνι παιπα-
”
λοέσση.
«
a \ “ ᾽ , Ψ Ψ
6 τοσαῦτα μὲν “Ὅμηρος ἐτεκμηρίωσεν ὅτι ἦν
ἃ \
καὶ TO πάλαι μεγάλη Evvodos καὶ ἑορτὴ ἐν
tal / A \ \ a \ e
τῇ Δήλῳ: ὕστερον δὲ τοὺς μὲν χοροὺς οἱ
νησιῶται καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μεθ᾽ ἱερῶν ἔπεμπον,
n \ na
τὰ δὲ περὶ τοὺς ἀγῶνας Kal τὰ πλεῖστα
΄ Φ Ν a ¢e eee \ δ)
κατελύθη ὑπὸ ξυμφορῶν, ὡς εἰκὸς, πρὶν δὴ
? na / fal / \
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τότε τὸν ἀγῶνα ἐποίησαν καὶ
if
ἱπποδρομίας, ὃ πρότερον οὐκ HV.
05 Τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος ᾿Αμπρακιῶται,
, / p
ὥσπερ ὑποσχόμενοι Εὐρυλόχῳ τὴν
1 tack
στρατιὰν κατέσχον, ἐκστρατεύονται Pv Anonilo.
" Ee \ hian Argos and
ἐπὶ “Apyos τὸ ᾿Αμφιλοχικὸν τρισ- Sccupy Olpac.
id , Η
χιλίοις ὁπλίταις, καὶ ἐσβαλόντες initepenn
᾽ \ > , ΄ sthenes to lead
és τὴν ᾿Αργείαν καταλαμβάνουσιν them arainst the
ἊΨ al , i
Ὅλπας, τεῖχος ἐπὶ λόφου ἰσχυρὸν AMPTCIOS.

The Ambraciots

N A »Ἤ “ ’ nr ,
πρὸς τῇ θαλάσσῃ, 6 ποτε ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες τειχισά-
μενοι κοινῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐχρῶντο: ἀπέχει δὲ
> \ na > / / >’ / ”
ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Αργείων πόλεως ἐπιθαλασσίας οὔσης

/ x Μ / th «ς a!

2 πέντε Kal εἴκοσι σταδίους μάλιστα. οἱ δὲ
lal / .
᾿Ακαρνᾶνες οἱ μὲν ἐς Ἄργος ξυνεβοήθουν, oi
\ fol 3 Me > rs a / a
δὲ τῆς Apdiroyias ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χωρίῳ ὃ
Κρῆναι καλεῖται, φυλάσσοντες τοὺς μετὰ Εὐρυ-

/ / \ lh \ \

λόχου Iledorovynctovs μὴ λάθωσι πρὸς τοὺς
/

᾿Αμπρακιώτας διελθόντες, ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο.

, \ \ > \ / Ν >’

8 πέμπουσν, δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ Δημοσθένη τὸν és

\ ’ ld ’ / vA [ὦ
τὴν Αἰτωλίαν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγήσαντα, ὅπως
σφίσιν ἡγεμὼν γίγνηται, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς εἴκοσι

105 8. post ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες add. καὶ ᾿Αμφίλοχοι Niese.

on

96 ΘΟΥΚΎΥΎΔΙΔΟΥ

ναῦς ᾿Αθηναίων αἱ ἔτυχον περὶ Πελοπόννησον 30
3 ὃ ΩΣ ? , ἐς [4 ΄,
οὖσαι, ὧν ἦρχεν ᾿Αριστοτέλης τε ὁ Tipoxpa-

Δ lal ite) 7 5 ,

4 τους καὶ lepopav ὁ ᾿Αντιμνήστου. ἀπέστειλαν
δὲ καὶ ἄγγελον οἱ περὶ tas Ἔλπας ᾿Αμπρα-
n > \ lh : / / n
κιῶται ἐς τὴν πόλιν κελεύοντες σφίσι βοηθεῖν
/ A \ ec b > / >

πανδημεί, δεδιότες μὴ of μετ᾽ Εὐρυλόχου οὐ 2

ὃ
or

b

δύνωνται διελθεῖν τοὺς ᾿Ακαρνᾶνας καὶ σφίσιν
ἢ μονωθεῖσιν ἡ μάχη γένηται ἢ ἀναχωρεῖν
βουλομένοις οὐκ ἢ ἀσφαλές.

106 Οἱ μὲν οὖν per Εὐρυλόχου Πελοποννήσιοι

vv
Eurylochus ὡς noOovto τοὺῤῤή ἐν ᾿᾽Ολπαις
marchesthrough , ν ; ἐξ or ᾿
Acarnania and Αμπρακιώτας ἥκοντας, ἄραντες ἐκ
Joins ne oe
Ambraciots. τοῦ ΠΙροσχίου ἐβοήθουν κατὰ τάχος,

οι

καὶ διαβάντες τὸν ᾿Αχελῴον ἐχώρουν δι᾿

3 Ψ » 2 / Ἂν \ » ”

Axapvavias οὔσης ἐρήμου διὰ τὴν ἐς "Ἄργος

βοήθειαν, ἐν δεξιᾷ μὲν ἔχοντες τὴν Στρατίων

πόλιν καὶ τὴν φρουρὰν αὐτῶν, ἐν ἀριστερᾷ
/

2 δὲ τὴν ἄλλην ᾿Ακαρνανίαν. καὶ διελθόντες
τὴν Στρατίων γῆν ἐχώρουν διὰ τῆς Putias τὸ
\ 9 an > » y” \
καὶ αὖθις Μεδεῶνος παρ᾽ ἔσχατα, ἔπειτα διὰ
Λιμναίας: καὶ ἐπέβησαν τῆς ᾿Αγραίων, οὐκέτι

,
8 ᾿Ακαρνανίας, φιλίας δὲ σφίσιν. λαβόμενοι
\ a , “ “ ? 2 ssh,
δὲ Tod Θυάμου ὄρους, 6 ἐστιν Aypaixor,

ΣΡ
οι

ἐχώρουν δι αὐτοῦ καὶ κατέβησαν ἐς τὴν

᾿Αργείαν νυκτὸς ἤδη, καὶ διεξελθόντες μεταξὺ

τῆς τε ᾿Αργείων πόλεως καὶ τῆς ἐπὶ Kpnvas

᾿Ακαρνάνων φυλακῆς ἔλαθον καὶ προσέμειξαν
107 τοῖς ἐν Ὄλπαις ᾿Αμπρακιώταις. γενόμενοι

δὲ ἁθρόοι ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ καθίζουσιν ἐπὶ τὴν
106 14. ᾿Αγραϊκόν O. Miller: ἀγροῖκον codd.

bo

97

ISTOPION Τ' (105—107) 97

/ , \ U ’ ΄
Μητρόπολιν καλουμένην καὶ στρατόπεδον ἐποιή-
σαντο. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ταῖς εἴκοσι The battle of

\ > Ἂ oe Olpae. Decisive
ναυσὶν οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον παρα- Victory of

γίγνονται ἐς τὸν ᾿Αμπρακικὸν pony thenes
κόλπον βοηθοῦντες τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις, Buryiochs.

\ 4 ,ὔ \ » /
καὶ Δημοσθένης Μεσσηνίων μὲν ἔχων διακοσίους
ὁπλίτας, ἑξήκοντα δὲ τοξότας ᾿Αθηναίων. καὶ

a /
ai μὲν νῆες περὶ tas “Odmas [τὸν λόφον] ἐκ
/ > , . \ ᾽ a \
θαλάσσης ἐφώρμουν: οἱ δὲ ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες καὶ
/
᾿Αμφιλόχων ὀλίγοι (οἱ yap πλείους ὑπὸ
᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν βίᾳ κατείχοντο) ἐς τὸ ἴΑργο
μπρακίωτ ᾿ χ ς ργος
"ὃ θό ΄ὔ ᾿ ε ΄ὔ
ἤδη ξυνεληλυθότες παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς μαχού-
a / a
pevot τοῖς ἐναντίοις, Kal ἡγεμόνα τοῦ παντὸς
ξυμμαχικοῦ αἱροῦνται Δημοσθένη μετὰ τῶν

Ἢ lal Ag
σφετέρων στρατηγῶν. ὁ δὲ προσαγαγὼν
ἐγγὺς τῆς ᾿Ολπης ἐστρατοπεδεύσατο, χαράδρα
δ᾽ αὐτοὺς μεγάλη διεῖργεν. καὶ ἡμέρας μὲν
πέντε ἡσύχαζον, τῇ δ᾽ ἕκτῃ ἐτάσσοντο ἀμφό-
τεροι ws ἐς μάχην. καὶ (μεῖζον γὰρ ἐγένετο
καὶ περιέσχε τὸ τῶν [Πελοποννησίων στρατό-
πεδον) ὁ Δημοσθένης δείσας μὴ κυκλωθῇ

Δ
λοχίζει ἐς ὁδόν τινα κοίλην καὶ λοχμώδη
ὁπλίτας καὶ ψιλοὺς ξυναμφοτέρους ἐς
τετρακοσίους, ὅπως κατὰ τὸ ὑπερέχον τῶν
ἐναντίων ἐν τῇ Evvddm αὐτῇ ἐξαναστάντες
οὗτοι κατὰ νώτου γίγνωνται. ἐπεὶ δὲ
παρεσκεύαστο ἀμφοτέροις, ἦσαν ἐς χεῖρας,

10

1ὅ

bo

5

Δημοσθένης μὲν τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας ἔχων μετὰ 80

7. κόλπον om. ABEFM. 10. τὸν λόφον del. Herwerden.
28. νῶτον ABEFM suprascr. G.

H

108

nN

oo

108

98 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ

9 / Ν
Μεσσηνίων καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων ὀλίγων, τὸ δὲ
Μ > n . “ VA >
ἄλλο ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες ws ἕκαστοι τεταγμένοι ἐπ-
a Ν > if e ,
εἶχον, καὶ ᾿Αμφιλόχων οἱ παρόντες ἀκοντι-
£ \ V2 lal b)
otal, Ἰϊελοποννήσιοι δὲ καὶ Αμπρακιῶται ava-
\ Ve \ / Φ \
mE τεταγμένοι πλὴν Μαντινέων: οὗτοι δὲ
2 A > Υ' αλλ Ἂ; » »Ἷ τς ”
ἐν τῷ εὐωνύμῳ μᾶλλον καὶ οὐ TO κέρας ἄκρον
” ς / 5 » > ᾽ ΄, »
ἔχοντες ἁθρόοι ἤσαν, ἀλλ ὐρύλοχος ἐσχατον
\ ς 9 a
εἶχε TO εὐώνυμον καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, κατὰ
/ \ t > \
Μεσσηνίους καὶ Δημοσθένη. ὡς δ᾽ ἐν χερσὶν
/ a / e L
ἤδη ὄντες περιέσχον τῷ κέρᾳ οἱ 1]ελοποννήσιοι
rn Ν \ lal ,ὔ e
καὶ ἐκυκλοῦντο TO δεξιὸν τῶν ἐναντίων, οἱ ἐκ
an / n / n
τῆς ἐνέδρας ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες ἐπιγενόμενοι αὐτοῖς
/ / \ /
κατὰ νώτου προσπίπτουσί TE καὶ τρέπουσιν,
[χὰ / > by \ ς tal /
ὥστε μήτε ἐς ἀλκὴν ὑπομεῖναι φοβηθέντας τε
\ \ NS ον / μ
ἐς φυγὴν καὶ τὸ πλέον τοῦ στρατεύματος
an \ \ 2
καταστῆσαι: ἐπειδὴ γὰρ εἶδον τὸ κατ
7 ἈΠ aeN / Ων /
Εὐρύλοχον καὶ ὃ κράτιστον ἣν διαφθειρόμενον,
A an a) Ν ,
πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐφοβοῦντο. καὶ οἱ Μεσσήνιοι
/ an \ \
ὄντες ταύτῃ μετὰ τοῦ Δημοσθένους τὸ πολὺ
a + > a « \ > a
τοῦ ἔργου ἐπεξῆλθον. οἱ δὲ ᾿Αμπρακιῶται
\ © N Ν \ 4 > alley NX ᾽
καὶ οἱ κατὰ τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας ἐνίκων τὸ καθ
e \ \ \ \ ” 2 / ν
ἑαυτοὺς καὶ πρὸς τὸ “Apyos ἀπεδίωξαν: καὶ
ak an a /
yap μαχιμώτατοι τῶν περὶ ἐκεῖνα τὰ χωρία

τυγχάνουσιν ὄντες. ἐπαναχωροῦντες δὲ ὡς
4 x Vi / Ν id ΕΣ
EWPWY τὸ πλέον νενικημενον καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι
᾿Ακαρνᾶνες σφίσι προσέκειντο, χαλεπῶς
διεσώζοντο ἐς tas Ὄλπας: καὶ πολλοὶ
12. ἐξῆλθον ΑΒΕ : διεξῆλθον Μ. 18. καὶ post ᾿Αμπρακι-
Ora fort. delendum. 14. ἐπεδίωξαν Haase. 19.

Ολπας. . ἀτάκτως] interpunctionem correxi.

σι

109

iw)

ISTOPION [ (107—109) 99

> , beet a > ΄ \ > \ ,
ἀπέθανον αὐτῶν ἀτάκτως Kal οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ
z \
προσπίπτοντες πλὴν Μαντινέων: οὗτοι δὲ
μάλιστα ξυντεταγμένοι παντὸς τοῦ στρατοῦ
4
ἀνεχώρησαν. Kal ἡ μὲν μάχη ἐτελεύτα ἐς
/
ὀψέ.
- A ,
Μενεδάϊος δὲ τῇ ὕὑστεραίίφ Εὐρυλόχου
a Ν / > Ν
τεθνεῶτος καὶ Μακαρίου αὐτὸς Demosthenes

\ \ > κι Reads ~ makes a secret
παρειληφὼς τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ ἀπορῶν agreement with

᾿ Εξ a the Pelo-
μεγάλης ἥσσης γεγενημένης ὅτῳ ponnesians.
τρόπῳ ἢ μένων πολιορκήσεται ἔκ τε γῆς καὶ ἐκ
θαλάσσης ταῖς ᾿Αττικαῖς ναυσὶν ἀποκεκλῃμένος
ἢ καὶ ἀναχωρῶν διασωθήσεται, προσφέρει
λόγον περὶ σπονδῶν καὶ ἀναχωρήσεως Δημο-
σθένει καὶ τοῖς ᾿Ακαρνάνων στρατηγοῖς, καὶ
περὶ νεκρῶν ἅμα ἀναιρέσεως. οἱ δὲ νεκροὺς
μὲν ἀπέδοσαν καὶ τροπαῖον αὐτοὶ ἔστησαν
καὶ Tos ἑαυτῶν τριακοσίους μάλιστα
ἀποθανόντας ἀνείλοντο, ἀναχώρησιν δὲ ἐκ μὲν
τοῦ προφανοῦς οὐκ ἐσπείσαντο ἅπασι, κρύφα
δὲ Δημοσθένης μετὰ τῶν ἕξυστρατήγων
"Axapvavev σπένδονται Μαντινεῦσ, καὶ

᾿ Μενεδαΐῳ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἄρχουσι τῶν

09

Πελοποννησίων καὶ ὅσοι αὐτῶν ἦσαν ἀξιολο-
γώτατοι ἀποχωρεῖν κατὰ τάχος, βουλόμενος
ψιλῶσαι τοὺς ᾿Αμπρακιώτας τε καὶ τὸν
μισθοφόρον ὄχλον [τὸν ἕενικόν]), μάλιστα δὲ
Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ Πελοποννησίους διαβαλεῖν
ἐς τοὺς ἐκείνῃ χρήζων, “Ἕλληνας ὡς κατα-

23. és C: ἕως és vel ἕως cett.
21. τὸν gevixdy del. Herwerden.

20

15

100

ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ

/ lal
προδόντες τὸ ἑαυτῶν προυργιαίτερον ἐποιήσαντο.

\ ςε Ν , \ > » \ \
3 καὶ οἱ μὲν TOUS TE νεκροὺς ἀνείλοντο καὶ διὰ

2 μένων.

1.11

8 βουλόμενοι.

111

τάχους ἔθαπτον, ὥσπερ ὑπῆρχε, καὶ τὴν
> , is a > iD > 7

ἀποχώρησιν κρύφα ois ἐδέδοτο ἐπεβούλευον"
110 τῷ δὲ Δημοσθένει καὶ τοῖς ᾿Ακαρνᾶσιν ἀγγέλ-

Advance of
large Ambraciot
reinforcements.

λεται τοὺς ᾿Αμπρακιώτας τοὺς ἐκ
an /
τῆς πόλεως πανδημεὶ κατὰ τὴν

πρώτην ἐκ τῶν Ὀλπῶν ἀγγελίαν ἐπιβοηθεῖν
διὰ τῶν ᾿Αμφιλόχων, βουλομένους τοῖς ἐν
yy an 5" > \ an

Ολπαις ξυμμεῖξαι, εἰδότας οὐδὲν τῶν γεγενη-

’ \ a ἴον /
καὶ πέμπει εὐθὺς τοῦ στρατοῦ μέρος

[2 \ n \
TL τὰς ὁδοὺς προλοχιοῦντας Kal τὰ καρτερὰ
/ \ is) Μ “
προκαταληψομένους, καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ
lal /
ἅμα παρεσκευάζετο βοηθεῖν ἐπ᾿ αὐτούς. ἐν
id

The Ambraciots
at Olpae,
abandoned by
the Pelo-
ponnesians,
suffer heavily at
the hands of the
Acarnanians.,

τούτῳ δ᾽ of Μαντινῆς καὶ οἷς
ἔσπειστο πρόφασιν ἐπὶ λαχανισμὸν
καὶ φρυγάνων ξυλλογὴν ἐξελθόντες
ὑπαπῇσαν Kat ὀλίγου, ἅμα
ξυλλέγοντες ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἐξῆλθον δῆθεν'

προκεχωρηκότες δὲ ἤδη ἄπωθεν τῆς ᾿Ολπης
a ,’ fal

2 θᾶσσον ἀπεχώρουν. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αμπρακιῶται καὶ
ε bY . \ Die eh “ e /

of ἄλλοι, ὅσοι μὲν ἐτύγχανον οὕτως ἁθρόοι.

ξυνεξελθόντες, ὡς ἔγνωσαν ἀπιόντας, ὥρμησαν

\ sae
καὶ αὕτοι

καὶ ἔθεον δρόμῳ, ἐπικαταλαβεῖν
οἱ δὲ ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες τὸ μὲν πρῶτον

/ iA / © /
Kal πάντας ἐνόμισαν ἀπιέναι ἀσπόνδους ὁμοίως
\ / ig Ἂ ,
καὶ τοὺς ἸΠελοποννησίους ἐπεδίωκον, καί τινας

ἴον al lal ee \
αὐτῶν τῶν στρατηγῶν κωλύοντας Kal φάσ-

9. μὲν] μεμονωμένοι Classen: μὴ Hude: μένοντες Stahl. ||
οὕτως] τούτοις Herwerden. 10. ξυνελθόντες ABEF.

οι

σι

15

~

112

2

~

IZSTOPION Γ' (109—112) 101

κοντας ἐσπεῖσθαι αὐτοῖς ἠκόντισέ τις, νομίσας
καταπροδίδοσθαι σφᾶς" ἔπειτα μέντοι τοὺς
μὲν Μαντινέας καὶ τοὺς Πελοποννησίους ἀφίεσαν,
τοὺς δ᾽ ᾿Αμπρακιώτας ἔκτεινον. καὶ ἣν πολλὴ
ἔρις καὶ ἄγνοια εἴτε ᾿Αμπρακιώτης τίς ἐστιν εἴτε
Πελοποννήσιος. καὶ ἐς διακοσίους μέν τινας
αὐτῶν ἀπέκτειναν: οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι διέφυγον ἐς
τὴν ᾿Αγραΐδα ὅμορον οὖσαν, καὶ Σαλύνθιος
αὐτοὺς ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Αγραίων φίλος ὧν
ὑπεδέξατο.

Οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ᾿Αμπρακιῶται
ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπ᾽ ᾿Ιδομενήν. ἐστὸν pemosthenes
δὲ δύο λόφω ἡ ᾿Ἰδομενὴ ὑψηλώ" ον tre
τούτον τὸν μὲν μείζω νυκτὸς ‘wforcements.
ἐπιγενομένης οἱ προαποσταλέντες Tuning Plow,
ὑπὸ τοῦ Δημοσθένους ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατοπέδου
ἔλαθόν τε καὶ ἔφθασαν προκαταλαβόντες, τὸν
δ᾽ ἐλάσσω ἔτυχον οἱ ᾿Αμπρακιῶται προανα-
βάντες καὶ ηὐλίσαντο. ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης
δειπνήσας ἐχώρει καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα ἀπὸ
ἑσπέρας εὐθύς, avTos μὲν τὸ ἥμισυ ἔχων ἐπὶ
τῆς ἐσβολῆς, τὸ δ᾽ ἄλλο διὰ τῶν ᾿Αμφιλοχικῶν
ὀρῶν. καὶ ἅμα ὄρθρῳ ἐπιπίπτει τοῖς ᾿Αμπρα-
κιώταις ἔτι ἐν ταῖς εὐναῖς καὶ οὐ προησθημένοις
τὰ γεγενημένα, ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον νομίσασι
τοὺς ἑαυτῶν εἶναι' καὶ γὰρ τοὺς Μεσσηνίους
πρώτους ἐπίτηδες ὁ Δημοσθένης προύταξε καὶ
προσαγορεύειν ἐκέλευε, Δωρίδα τε γλῶσσαν
ἱέντας καὶ τοῖς προφύλαξι πίστιν παρεχομένους,

μ

Ὁ

25

e \ Ν > / a v \
ἅμα δὲ καὶ ov καθορωμένους τῇ ὄψει νυκτὸς 2

a

102 BOY KYAIAOY

Y / a 7,
ἔτι οὔσης. ὡς οὖν ἐπέπεσε τῷ στρατεύματι
aA Ψ \ \ i na
αὐτῶν, τρέπουσι, καὶ τοὺς μὲν πολλοὺς αὐτοῦ
/ e \ x \ \ wv >
διέφθειραν, οἱ δὲ λοιποὺ κατὰ τὰ ὄρη és
A , \ la
φυγὴν ὥρμησαν. προκατειλημμένων δὲ τῶν
¢ n \ ee “ \ > / > /
ὁδῶν, καὶ ἅμα τῶν μὲν Αμφιλόχων ἐμπείρων
ὄντων τῆς ἑαυτῶν γῆς καὶ τον πρὸς ὁπλίτας,
al ve
τῶν δὲ ἀπείρων καὶ ἀνεπιστημόνων ὅπῃ
/
τράπωνται, ἐσπίπτοντες ἔς τε χαράδρας καὶ
\ le id F
τὰς προλελοχισμένας ἐνέδρας διεφθείροντο.

καὶ ἐς πᾶσαν ἰδέαν χωρήσαντες τῆς φυγῆς:

Ed / , Ν > \ L 7
ἐτρώποντό τινες καὶ ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν οὐ
\ , e 5 >

πολὺ ἀπέχουσαν, Kal ws εἶδον τὰς ᾿Αττικὰς
a Sf , rn lal
ναῦς παραπλεούσαρς ἅμα τοῦ ἔργου TH
᾿, / / n
ξυντυχίᾳ, προσένευσαν, ἡγησάμενοι, ἐν τῷ
2 / an 5S / ny n
αὐτίκα φόβῳ κρεῖσσον εἶναι σφίσιν ὑπὸ τῶν
2 al ,ὔ > f lal an Xx c ἊΝ lal
ἐν ταῖς ναυσίν, εἰ δεῖ, διαφθαρῆναι ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν

8 βαρβάρων καὶ ἐχθίστων ᾿Αμφιλόχων. οἱ μὲν

113

bo

9S a f / /
οὖν ᾿Αμπρακιῶται τοιούτῳ τρόπῳ κακωθέντες
7 > \ an ? , b] \ ,
ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν ἐσώθησαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν"
> a \ ΄ A x
Ἀκαρνᾶνες δὲ σκυλεύσαντες τοὺς νεκροὺς Kal
a , "
τροπαῖα στήσαντες ἀπεχώρησαν ἐς Ἄργος.

\ > n ἊΝ ig iL 9 a bp] ὃν lal
Kat αὐτοῖς τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἦλθε κῆρυξ ἀπὸ τῶν
ΡῚ 5 / / b} fal
asisdiscoverea ἐς Δγραίους καταφυγόντων ἐκ τῆς
2 we wv an »
act eraa Orrrns ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν, ἀναίρεσιν
at Argos.

/ a an ἃ ͵7
αἰτήσων τῶν νεκρῶν οὺς ἀπέκτειναν
nan / & oe \ rn
ὕστερον τῆς πρώτης μάχης, ὅτε μετὰ τῶν
rn / fal
Μαντινέων καὶ τῶν ὑποσπόνδων ξυνεξῆσαν
» IOAN ’ e n \ ee a
ἄσπονδοι. ἰδὼν δ᾽ ὁ κῆρυξ τὰ ὅπλα τῶν
> \ a , > a 3 hi \
ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως Αμπρακιωτῶν ἐθαύμαζε τὸ
nan x v \ Τὰ v
πλῆθος. ov yap ἤδει τὸ πάθος, ἀλλ’ ῴετο

35

on

: IZTOPION Τ' (112—113) 103

fal \ -“ 3 ,ὔ φρο Ἂς Ν
8ὃτῶν μετὰ σφῶν εἶναι. καί τις αὐτὸν ἤρετο 10
€ / fal “
ὅ τι θαυμάζοι καὶ ὁπόσοι αὐτῶν τεθνᾶσιν,
, fal \ / \
οἰόμενος αὖ ὁ ἐρωτῶν εἶναι τὸν κήρυκα ἀπὸ
a > b) A e ’ ” Lf
τῶν ἐν ᾿Ιδομεναῖς. ὁ δ᾽ ἔφη διακοσίους
/ ε \ ) . ᾽ fal 3
μάλιστα. ὑπολαβὼν δ᾽ ὁ ἐρωτῶν εἶπεν
4« “οὔκουν τὰ ὅπλα ταυτὶ φαίνεται, ἀλλὰ τὸ
39 a
πλέον ἢ χιλίων. αὖθις δὲ εἶπεν ἐκεῖνος “οὐκ
a . a ν χὰ ες
ἄρα τῶν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν μαχομένων ἐστίν ;᾿ ὁ δ᾽
’, lal 4 fol \
ἀπεκρίνατο “εἴπερ γε ὑμεῖς ἐν ᾿Ιδομενῇ χθὲς
aed ” Pras) Seine ᾽ξ δ Ὁ ΄ θ
ἐμάχεσθε. ἀλλ ἡμεῖς γε οὐδενὶ ἐμαχοόμεθα
, ᾽ \ t > A > , ” ‘cc \
χθές, ἀλλὰ πρῴην ἐν TH ἀποχωρῆσει. καὶ 20
\ a ΡΝ A ,
μὲν δὴ τούτοις γε ἡμεῖς χθὲς ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως
lol an , 5 .
βοηθήσασι τῆς ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν ἐμαχόμεθα. ὁ
a e Ν A
5 δὲ κῆρυξ ws ἤκουσε καὶ ἔγνω ὅτι ἡ ἀπὸ τῆς
“ /
πόλεως βοήθεια διέφθαρται, ἀνοιμώξας καὶ
a lal / fal
ἐκπλαγεὶς TO μεγέθει τῶν παρόντων κακῶν %
> a ’ \ Ν \ ᾽ / > /
ἀπῆλθεν εὐθὺς ἄπρακτος καὶ οὐκέτι ἀπήτει
\ , a A a
τοὺς νεκρούς. πάθος yap τοῦτο μιᾷ πόλει
e ,ὔ ᾽ ν ἜΠΗ ΄ \ a
Ἑλληνίδι ἐν ἴσαις ἡμέραις μέγιστον δὴ τῶν
Ν / / \
κατὰ TOV πόλεμον τόνδε ἐγένετο. καὶ ἀριθμὸν
lal / /
οὐκ ἔγραψα τῶν ἀποθανόντων, διότι ἄπιστον
ἈΝ fal / > ,ὔ ig \ \
TO πλῆθος λέγεται ἀπολέσθαι ὡς πρὸς τὸ
me ,
μέγεθος τῆς πόλεως. ᾿Αμπρακίαν μέντοι οἶδα
3 rn
ὅτι, εἰ ἐβουλήθησαν ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες καὶ ᾿Αμφίλοχοι
» / -“
Αθηναίοις καὶ Δημοσθένει πειθόμενοι ἐξελεῖν,
> Ν Bal 1 a > Μ \ .
αὐτοβοεὶ ἂν εἷλον: νῦν δ᾽ ἔδεισαν μὴ O13
’ lal ” > \ , /
Αθηναῖοι ἔχοντες αὐτὴν χαλεπώτεροι σφίσι

for)

30

or

9
πάροικοι ὦσιν.

13 15. post ταυτὶ add. διακοσίων (σ΄) Kriiger: cf. Schol. λείπει
TO διακοσίων εἷναι μόνων.

104 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ '

A r rf
114 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα τρίτον μέρος νείμαντες τῶν
Ve “
Demosthenes σκύλων τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις τὰ ἄλλα
returns to \ ,
Athens. κατὰ τὰς πόλεις διείλοντο. καὶ
Alliance οὗ ᾿ A fe ν ᾿ ᾿
Ambracia with τὰ μὲν TOV Αθηναίων πλέοντα
the Acarnanians , , A a ; ; ς
and Argos. ἑάλω, τὰ δὲ νῦν ἀνακείμενα ἐν ὃ
“ ᾽ a e a / fi
τοῖς ᾿Αττικοῖς ἱεροῖς Δημοσθένει ἐξῃρέθησαν
fe
τριακόσιαι πανοπλίαι, Kal ἄγων αὐτὰς κατέ-
Us A
πλευσεν: καὶ ἐγένετο ἅμα αὐτῷ μετὰ τὴν ἐκ
A 2) / \ ? \ , A
τῆς Αἰτωλίας ξυμφορὰν ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς
πράξεως ἀδεεστέρα ἡ κάθοδος. ἀπῆλθον δὲ τὸ
- τὶ “
καὶ οἱ ἐν ταῖς εἴκοσι ναυσὶν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐς
/ lal ’ ,
Ναύπακτον. ‘Axapvaves δὲ καὶ ᾿Αμφίλοχοι
, , , a
ἀπελθόντων Αθηναίων καὶ Δημοσθένους τοῖς
᾿] ’ r
ὡς Σαλύνθιον καὶ ᾿Αγραίους καταφυγοῦσιν
᾿Αμπρακιώταις καὶ Πελοποννησίοις ἀναχώρησιν is
“- ,
ἐσπείσαντο ἐξ Οἰνιαδῶν, οἷπερ καὶ μετανέ-
\ x , \ > \ »
ϑστησαν παρὰ Σαλυνθίου. καὶ ἐς τὸν ἔπειτα
, Ν
χρόνον σπονδὰς καὶ ξυμμαχίαν ἐποιήσαντο
ἡ \ » 3. cal \ » , \
ἑκατὸν ἔτη ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες καὶ ᾿Αμφίλοχοι πρὸς
> / > \ lal 4 / >
Αμπρακιώτας ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, ὥστε μήτε ᾿Αμπρα- 20
> 4
κιώτας μετὰ Ἀκαρνάνων στρατεύειν ἐπὶ Iledo-
»») “ > a
ποννησίους μήτε Axapvavas μετὰ Ἀμπρακιωτῶν
> A " -
ἐπ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίους, βοηθεῖν δὲ τῇ ἀλλήλων, καὶ
r 5 e , 7
ἀποδοῦναι ᾿Αμπρακιώτας ὁπόσα ἢ χωρία ἢ
ε , > , » \ sy? ,
ὁμήρους ᾿Αμφιλόχων ἔχουσι, καὶ ἐπὶ Avaxto- 2
\ A a 5) aA
ριον μὴ βοηθεῖν πολέμιον ὃν ᾿Ακαρνᾶσιν.
Le) , Ui \ ,
4 ταῦτα ξυνθέμενοι διέλυσαν τὸν πόλεμον.

τῷ

οι

114 8:.|ὲκ΄ om. ABFM. 16. olrep G. Hermann: οἵπερ
codd. 17. Σαλυνθίου G. Hermann: Σαλύνθιον codd. 25.
ὁμήρους Poppo: ὁμόρους codd.

ISTOPION Τ' (114—115) 105

peta δὲ ταῦτα Κορίνθιος φυλακὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐς
τὴν ᾿Αμπρακίαν ἀπέστειλαν ἐς τριακοσίους
ὑπλίτας καὶ Ἐενοκλείδιν τὸν Εὐθυκλέους 30
ἄρχοντα" ol κομιζόμενοι χαλεπῶς διὰ τῆς
ἠπείρου ἀφίκοντο. τὰ μὲν κατ᾽ ᾿Αμπρακίαν
οὕτως ἐγένετο.

1165 Οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοῦ αὐτοῦ
χειμῶνος ἔς τε τὴν ἹἽμεραίαν ἀπό- γατινον opera
βασιν ἐποιήσαντο ἐκ τῶν νεῶν Yysctthe |
μετὰ τῶν Σικελῶν τῶν ἄνωθεν δ ν
ἐσβεβληκότων ἐς τὰ ἔσχατα τῆς “Ἱμεραίας,
ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς Αἰόλου νήσους ἔπλευσαν. ἀνα-
χωρήσαντες δὲ ἐς Ῥήγιον Πυθόδωρον τὸν
Ἰσολόχου ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγὸν καταλαμβά.
νουσιν ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς διάδοχον ὧν ὁ Λάχης
8 ἦρχεν. οἱ γὰρ ἐν Σικελίᾳ ξύμμαχοι πλεύ-
σαντες ἔπεισαν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους βοηθεῖν σφίσι
πλείοσι ναυσίν: τῆς μὲν γὰρ γῆς αὐτῶν οἱ
Συρακόσιοι ἐκράτουν, τῆς δὲ θαλάσσης ὀλίγαις
ναυσὶν εἰργόμενοι παρεσκευάζοντο ναυτικὸν
4 ξυναγείροντες ὡς οὐ “περιοψόμενοι. καὶ ἐπλή- 15
ρουν ναῦς τεσσαράκοντα οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡς
ἀποστελοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἅμα μὲν ἡγούμενοι
θᾶσσον τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον καταλυθήσεσθαι,
ἅμα δὲ βουλόμενοι μελέτην τοῦ ναυτικοῦ
5 ποιεῖσθαι. τὸν μὲν οὖν ἕνα τῶν στρατηγῶν :
ἀπέστειλαν Πυθόδωρον ὀλίγαις ναυσί, Σοφοκλέα
δὲ τὸν Σωστρατίδον καὶ Εὐρυμέδοντα τὸν
Θυυκλέους ἐπὶ τῶν πλειόνων νεῶν ἀποπέμψειν

115 4. Σικελῶν τῶν Dobree : Σικελιωτῶν» codd.

ον

»:

0

3

106 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟῪΥ ISTOPION I (115—116)

6 ἔμελλον. ὁ δὲ Πυθόδωρος ἤδη ἔχων τὴν τοῦ
3 a an rn
Λάχητος τῶν νεῶν ἀρχὴν ἔπλευσε τελευτῶντος
τοῦ χειμῶνος ἐπὶ τὸ Λοκρῶν φρούριον ὃ

/ 4 Sf N, \ / e \
πρότερον Λάχης εἷλε, καὶ νικηθεὶς μάχῃ ὑπὸ
a a 2 ΄
τῶν Λοκρῶν ἀπεχώρησεν.
116 Ἦ ΓΑ δὲ N > \ \ ” na ἐν rear?
ρρύη δὲ περὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἔαρ τοῦτο ὁ ῥύαξ
an \ aA ¢i
Mriptionat τοῦ πυρὸς ἐκ τῆς Αἴτνης, ὥσπερ
ρ / nr
Ἰδέ καὶ πρότερον, καὶ γῆν τινὰ ἔφθειρε
lal οἵ a lal
τῶν Καταναίων, ot ὑπὸ τῇ Αἴτνῃ τῷ ὄρει
οἰκοῦσιν, ὅπερ μέγιστόν ἐστιν ὄρος ἐν TH
2 Σικελίᾳ. λέγεται δὲ πεντηκοστῴ ἔτει ῥυῆναι
τοῦτο μετὰ τὸ πρότερον ῥεῦμα, τὸ δὲ ξύμπαν
\ a \ orn Dep Ce , ΘΈΩΝ
τρὶς γεγενῆσθαι τὸ ῥεῦμα ἀφ᾽ οὗ Σικελία ὑπὸ
¢ / > A fa) x \ \
8 “Ελλήνων οἰκεῖται. TAUTa μὲν KATA τὸν
χειμῶνα τοῦτον ἐγένετο, καὶ ἕκτον ἔτος τῷ
an »
πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα TOE ὃν Θουκυδίδης ξυνέ-

γραψεν.

28. ἀνεχώρησεν ABM. ᾿
116 8. post καὶ add. τὸ ABEFM. 4, ὑπὸ] ἐπὶ ABEFM. || τῷ
ὄρει del. Cobet.

25

σι

NOTES

81. 1. povs—Thue. divides the year into θέρος, consisting 1
of about eight mouths (Elaphebolion to Pyanepsion) and χειμών,
consisting of about four (Maimacterion to Anthesterion).

2. ἅμα τῷ σίτῳ axpafovt.—‘ just when the corn was ripen-
ing’; about the middle of May, 428 B.c., before the harvest
(καρποῦ ξυγκομιδή).

$21. 6. ἐγκαθεζόμενοι ---[Π 6 form serves as an aorist as well
as a present.

7. ὥσπερ εἰώθεσαν --- 50. γίγνεσθαι, in the two previous
invasions. The plan had been started by Pericles.

8. ὅπῃ tape(koc—impers., though strictly ὁ θεός is the
subject implied.

τὸν πλεῖστον ὅμιλον οἵ. 11. 31 ὁ ἄλλος ὅμιλος ψιλῶν, ‘the
main body.’ Outside Thue. ὅμιλος is found only in Herod., in
tragedy, and in late authors.—The wasting of the country was
a tedious task that would devolve naturally on the light-armed
troops.

9. εἶργον τὸ μή-- [ὉΓ the constr., which is common with
verbs and phrases signifying prevention (Aesch. PV. 252 ἐξελυ-
σάμην βροτοὺς | τὸ μὴ .. μολεῖν, and often in Aesch.) cf. vr. 1
διείργεται τὸ μὴ ἤπειρος εἶναι (where the Ms. οὖσα is shown by
many imitations of the sentence by later authors to be a
mistake).

τῶν ὅπλων --τοῦ στρατοπέδου, strictly the space in front
of the quarters where the arms were stacked ; here the word
marks the fact that the light-armed could not with safety be
withdrawn from the hoplites.

10. τὰ ἐγγὺς τῆς méAews—i.e. houses, trees, vineyards: we
107

108 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

are not to suppose that the Athenians cropped their lands
annually for the benefit of the Peloponnesian invaders,

11. o6—the gen. as in μισθὸς τριῶν μηνῶν. The enemy re-
mained in Attica about thirty days: the longest invasion, that
of 430 B.c., lasted forty days, the shortest, in 425 B.c., fifteen
days.

2 §11.2. Λέσβος améorn—the gravity of this event lay in
the fact that Lesbos and Chios were the only two islands in
the Aegean that retained the position of independent allies
of Athens. These furnished manned ships, but not infantry
or money. For the narrative see Introd. p. xiii.

Mn0vpvns—Methymna, the second town in Lesbos, was
under a democracy, Mytilene under an oligarchy.
3. βουληθέντες agrees κατὰ σύνεσιν with Λέσβος : this change,
in the case of peoples, is especially common in Thue. ; and ef.
c. 67, 8 ἡλικία... ὧν. So with στρατιά, στράτευμα.

§ 21.7. τῶν... τήν serve for all three pairs of nouns.

8. χῶσιν —the harbours were to be turned into λιμένες
κλῃστοί (11. 94, 4): walls were carried across the mouth on
artificial moles, and the narrow opening left could be closed
with a chain.

9. émréwevov—showing why they had put off the revolt.
The constr. with ἐπιμένειν is here double:-(1) τὴν . . ποίησιν
τελεσθῆναι, aS in VII. 20 περιέμενε τὸν Xapixrdéa . . παραλαβεῖν :
(2) ὅσα. . ἔδει ἀφικέσθαι, an accusative clause. (It is objected
that Thuc. elsewhere uses ἐπιμένειν only as intrans., but he
uses e.g. μένω and ὑπο- in both ways ; and why not ém- ?)

11. roféras—as mercenaries,

12. μεταπεμπόμενοι Foav—cf. 1. 99 ἦσαν. . ἄρχοντες, 11.
80 fioay . . ξυμπροθυμούμενοι. Of course, the periphrasis with
pres. partic. is much less common than with perf, but it is
not different in principle. Passages like 11. 67 οὗ jv στράτευμα
πολιορκοῦν ‘where there was a blockading army’ are quite
different, the partic. not belonging to the verb. In yet another
case, like I. 38 τοῖς πλείοσιν ἀρέσκοντές ἐσμεν, the partic. is a
predicative adj.

§ 3 1. 14. ἰδίᾳ---ἰῃ contrast with what the government was
doing κοινῇ.

kata—often of the motive or reason, e.g. 11. 87 ξυμπαρα-
γενομένων κατὰ φιλίαν.
mpdgevo.—the fact that there were more representatives

NOTES 109

of Athens than one at Mytilene might show that the office was
hereditary in a family, but more probably the title of πρόξενος
καὶ εὐεργέτης had been granted by Athens to members of
ditferent Mytilenean families. Aristotle in Po/. 1304 a says that
Dexander ἦρξε τῆς στάσεως καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους παρώξυνε πρόξενος
ὧν : he had ἃ private quarrel with ἃ member of the aristocratic
party ; from this small matter πολλῶν ἐγένετο ἀρχὴ κακῶν. In
any case it would have been the duty of the Proxenus to in-
form Athens of movements in Mytilene unfavourable to her
interests even before the war; but doubtless the quarrel was
now an exasperating motive to him, and led directly to the
outbreak of stasis, for it was a dispute about property and inter-
marriage between families of the opposed parties.

16. vvoxlLovo.—i.e. attempting to make the island into
a single πόλις under one government, and in this case, an
oligarchy.

18. Evyyevav — Lesbos being of Boeotian (Aeolic) origin.
To intervene on behalf of kinsmen was under all circumstances
deemed justifiable among Greek states,

19. εἰ μή tus—‘ unless they mean to,’ the fut. indic, marking
the urgency ; cf. VIII. 91 εἰ μή τις ἤδη φυλάξεται.

§ 11. 2. vécov—during 430 and 429 8.0. 3

3. ἄρτι Kabiorapévov— ‘just becoming established’ (i.e.
settled, chronic). Cf. 1. 1 ἀρξάμενος (ξυγγράψαι) εὐθὺς καθ-
torauévov. If we render thus, it makes no difference whether
Thuc. means the ten years’ or the twenty-seven years’ war.
In either case, ἀκμάζοντος shows that ‘in its infancy’ is wrong.
But Classen’s ‘in the middle period’ seems impossible : for it
is inconceivable that καθισταμένου τοῦ πολέμοι should mean
either ‘just beginning,’ as he understands 1 1, or ‘in the
middle’ at will. In v. 25 εὐθὺς ἄλλη ταραχὴ καθίστατο the
verb means not merely ‘arose,’ but ‘tended to become perma-
nent,’ applying to a period, not to a moment.

ἀκμάζοντος. - ἄρτι does not extend to this. A period of
ἀκμή is of course meant. Athens was now beginning to feel
the strain on her finances (see c. 19); and her position in
Chalcidice was very precarious. (Vollgraff proposes to add ἤδη
before ἀκμάζοντος, but this is not necessary. )

7. μεῖζον μέρος vépovres—‘attaching greater importance to
their wish that it was not true’ (than to the allegations). For
ἀληθῆ cf. 1. 8 πλωιμώτερα ἐγένετο. νέμειν μέρος or μοῖραν several
times in tragedy: Aesch. PV. 294, Soph. Z'rachin. 1238, Eur.
Supp. 241; ef. τὸ ἴσον νέμειν 1. 71, ἔλασσον νέμειν VI. 88, πλέον
ν. Eur. Hee. 868, ο. 48, 1. Ἢ

110 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ISTOPION T

10. παρασκευήν refers of course to the preparations of c. 2,
2 (ef. c. 2,13):

Seloavres—ingressive.

8.2]. 11. &amwatws—like ἐξαπίνης, found only in Thue. and
Xen. among Attic prose writers (for ἐξαίφνης or αἰφνιδίως).

12. περὶ Πελοπόννησον mAciv—both in 431 and 430 8.0.
when the Pel. invaded Attica (11. 23, 56), a fleet had been sent
out to make descents on the coast of the Peloponnese, as a
counter-move. For the operations of this year see c. 16, 1;
for those of 426 B.c. see cc. 91, 94.

§ 31. 16. Madders was a local name of Apollo in Lesbos ;
its origin is unknown.

17. wavdnpe(—the whole people together, not by families or
clans.

18. ἐλπίδα εἶναι, like εἰκός ἐστι, is commonly followed by
pres. or aor. infin. ἐπειχθέντας is conditional.

19. Hv μὲν EvpBy . . εἰ δὲ μή -- α common idiom, found
already in Homer; cf. e.g. Plato, Prot. 826 Β ἐὰν μὲν ἑκὼν
πείθηται" εἰ δὲ μή.

20. eimetv—this depends on the sense of ‘ order’ implied in the
passage ; cf. Audoc. de Myst. ὃ 20 ὁ γὰρ νόμος οὕτως εἶχεν" εἰ
μὲν τἀληθῆ μηνύσειέ τις, εἶναι τὴν ἄδειαν, εἰ δὲ τὰ ψευδῆ, τεθνάναι.
Of course εἰπεῖν Ξε κελεῦσαι. (This passage is brief and peremp-
tory in tone: its dramatic manner is quite characteristic, and
there is no ground for suspecting the text.)

§ 41. 23. παρὰ odds—put briefly for παρὰ σφᾶς mapa-
γενόμεναι kal παροῦσαι : similarly παρεῖναι is often found with
εἰς or ἐπί with accus.; but there is no precise parallel to the
present case.

25. és φυλακὴν ἐποιήσαντο-- 50 VIII. 1 ἐς ἀσφάλειαν ποιεῖσθαι.
Cf. Andoc. de Myst. 117 θυγατέρες at ἐγίγνοντο εἴς τε ἐμέ καὶ
Λέαγρον.

8 5 1. 27. διαβάς «rd. —the sentence, containing five parti-
ciples, is an example of what Dionysius calls τὸ πυκνόν of
Thucydides; Cicero speaks of him as pressws, Quintilian as
densus. The participles that denote closely connected parts
of the same action are joined by καί.

29, ἔπιτυχών = ὡς ἐπέτυχε.

πλῷ χρησάμενος“ after a good passage.’ πλῴ -- εὐπλοίᾳ,
ΔΒἾΠ1. 137. (Some make πλῷ χρησάμενος merely = πλεύσας, but

NOTES 111

Antiphon v. 24 πλοῦς ἡμῖν ἐγίγνετο καὶ ἀνήγετο πλοῖα ἅπαντα
seems decisive.)

861]. 32. οὔτε. . re—a common idiom (cf. neque . . que
or et), by which emphasis is thrown on the second clause.

τά te ἄλλα. . eptAaccov—-‘and besides (τὰ ἄλλα,
adverbial) having protected with rapidly constructed defences
all round the half-finished (works) of the walls and docks they
guarded them.’ This is the best way of taking this puzzling
sentence. None of the changes in the text that have been
proposed is an improvement. περί is an adverb=7ép:é, as in
Homer (Wilamowitz on Eur. HF. 1035).

$11. 1. of ’A@nvato.—the subject of the subord. verb is put &
at the head of the sentence to contrast the action of Athenians
and Lesbians sharply ; a good parallel occurs at VII. 32 ot δὲ

. πρέσβεις... ἐπειδὴ. . ἔμελλον ἄξειν τὸν στρατόν, ὁ Νικίας

. πέμπει. The imperf., ἑώρων (sc. τὰ γιγνόμενα), is used
because the action overlaps that of ἀπήγγειλαν.

§ 21. 6. ἀπαράσκευοι qualifies πολεμεῖν, and is therefore
co-ordinate with ἐξαίφνης : cf. e.g. 1. 39 προύχοντα καὶ ἐκ τοῦ
ἀσφαλοῦς, and ο. 18, 2 θᾶσσον γεγένηται καὶ ἀπαράσκευος.

7. ἔκπλουν twa—for the use of τις οἵ, 11. 22 ἱππομαχία τις
βράχεια ἐγένετο.

8. vavpaxlav—both dat. and accus. seem to occur with ὡς ἐπί
of intention ; but the Mss. often vary, as here.

9. πρὸ τοῦ λιμένος 1.6. that harbour which was used by the
fleet (cc. 3, 6; 6, 1), in which their ships had lain. (Steup’s
suggestion that τοῦ ἑτέρου \. should be read is unnecessary. )
Presently they were driven back into this same harbour. The
northern harbour is meant. See Introd. p. xiv.

ὀλίγον is accus. of space (cf. 104, 2) ; of time II. 8 ὀλίγον
πρὸ τούτων.
11. τὸ παραυτίκα. . ἀποπέμψασθαι---“ get the ships with-
drawn for the time being,’ i.e. in order to gain time.

§ 41.15. καί, ‘accordingly.’

17. τῶν διαβαλλόντων ---866 c. 2, 3. The partic. becomes a
subst., as in οἱ ἐπαγόμενοι 11. 2, of προδιδόντες 11. δ.

19. τὰς ναῦς is not object of πείσειαν, but only subject of
ἀπελθεῖν, Tas ναῦς ἀπελθεῖν being an exact citation of the
proposal they would make in the Ecclesia, which was to be for
a permanent withdrawal. The constr. is strange, however,
and ποιήσειαν has been proposed.

112 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ISTOPION ©

§ 5 1. 23. ἐν τῇ Μαλέᾳ πρὸς β. τῆς médews—the Malea that
is known is the SE. point of Lesbos, 70 stadia from the city.
A solution of the difficulty has been found, Introd. p. xv.
(Those who suppose that the SE. point of the island is meant,
take πρὸς B. THs πόλεως with ἀποστέλλουσι. But from the
narrative that follows, it is clear the A. were lying to the north
of the city (esp. ὁ. 6, 1); and it is not likely they were so far
distant as 70 stades. Some are driven to suspect that ἐν τῇ
Μαλέᾳ may be corrupt or spurious. )

§ 6 1. 24. τοῖς is neut., and προχωρήσειν is epexegetic.

26. διὰ τοῦ meAdyous—crossing the Aegean directly instead
of sailing down the coast of Asia Minor, between Chios and
Erythrae, before crossing among the islands. The alternative
routes are clearly explained in Odyssey 111. 170 f. and the risks
of that across the μέσον πέλαγος are indicated. (Cf. Tozer,
Islands of the Aegean, p. 170.)

27. αὐτοῖς prob.=the Lesbians, and is dat. commodi with
ἔπρασσον, as in V. 76, where those acting for Sparta at Argos
are called οἱ rots Λακεδαιμονίοις πράσσοντες. (Others take αὐτοῖς
with ἥξει, or refer it to the Lacedaemonians. )

δ § 11.5. eBonPhixerav—‘ were there to aid.’ Thue. is re-
markably partial to the pluperf., as e.g. 1. 128 ἐνεγέγραπτο,
‘the contents of the letter were.’

6. Ἔμβριοι kal Afpvioc—closely associated with the Athen-
ians throughout the war. The islands had been secured for
Athenian ‘cleruchs’ by Miltiades ; and along with Scyros they
were regarded as very peculiarly the possessions of Athens.

§ 21. 7. mwavinpel—equivalent to πανστρατιᾷ in this con-
nexioh, as 11. 31, 1 clearly shows.

9. orparémeSov—north of the city, where the fleet was
lying.

10. οὐκ ἔλασσον ἔχοντες describes a state of things, like .
κρατοῦντες, νικῶντες.

11. ἐπηυλίσαντο- “ἀἸ4 not encamp on the field,’ which was
necessary to maintain a disputed victory (Bloomfield). What
they did and what they fe/t are here balanced by odre . . οὔτε.

§ 31.12. ἐκ Πελοποννήσου καὶ per’ ἄλλης xrA.—this appears
to stand for εἰ mp. τι (mapackevis) ἐκ Π. καὶ ἄλλοθεν, Sto try
their fortune with reinforcements from the Pel. and elsewhere,
if any should come.’ Bloomfield and others have supposed
that καί is intensive here, ‘again with fresh preparations’ ;
but with the order of the text, the sense would necessarily be

NOTES 113

that some reinforcement had already come from Peloponnese.
As for μετ᾽ ἄλλης, they might hope for ships from Megara,
Leucas or Ambracia: Thebes had none.

§ 41.15. αὐτοῖς. . ἀφικνεῖται -- [πὸ dat. with verbs of
motion—which is strictly a dat. of interest rather than of
motion—is common in poetry, but does not occur in Attic
prose outside Thuc. ; cf. e.g. Aesch. PV. 35 δ᾽ ἀλλ’ ἦλθεν
αὐτῷ Ζηνὸς ἄγρυπνον βέλος.

18. μετὰ τὴν μάχην ὕστερον ---ἰ.6. they did not get there
immediately after the arrival of the A. fleet (c. 4, 1), but only
after the battle (§ 2).

§11. 1. of 8@—co-ordinate with of μὲν ἡσύχαζον.
5. οὐδὲν ἰσχυρὸν aard—‘ no sign of energy on the part of.’

6. περιορμισάμενοι τὸ πρὸς vérov—‘ changing their position
and casting anchor south.’ As Malea πρὸς βορέαν remained
still in their hands as a ναύσταθμον, it is evident that a part
only of the ships was sent to this new station. τὸ πρὸς νότον
is adverbial as IV. 23 περιώρμουν πλὴν τὰ πρὸς τὸ πέλαγος.

a

7. ἑκατέρωθεν τῆς méNews—explaining δύο. Logically Thuc.
should have written στρατόπεδον, as there was but one on
either side.

8.21. 10. μὴ xpioGar—epexegetic.

14. vavora8uov—the roadstead where the supply-ships lay.
μᾶλλον means rather than the new orparimedoy south of the
town.

15. ἀγορά is Kriiger’s probable alteration for ἀγορᾶς, on the
analogy of such phrases as ἀγορὰν παρέχειν, VII. 39 τὴν ἀγορὰν
τῶν πωλουμένων. . ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν κομίσαι. The idea of a
site seems always present, and ἀγορά is not a synonym of τὰ
ὦνια or τὰ πωλούμενα.

τά is probably subject, not adverbial accus., so that we
have the pass. of τὸν περὶ M. πόλεμον ἐπολέμουν : οἵ, VIII. 18
Tov πόλεμον κοινῇ πολεμούντων (imper.). The act. of πολεμῶ does
not seem to occur with an adverbial accus.

811. 2. περὶ Πελοπόννησον ---ἰῃ the previous year the Pelo-
ponnesians had attempted an offensive war on a considerable
seale in Acarnania, which, with the exception of Oeniadae, was
in alliance with Athens. The idea was, to suppress the influence
of Athens in the NW. (Naupactus, Zacynthus, Cephallenia,
as well as Acarnania); and so to put an end to the harassing
expeditions of Athenian fleets περὶ Πελοπόννησον. But the
scheme failed completely ; and a squadron under Phormio that

I

114 BOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

had been stationed at Naupactus in 430 B.c. to close the
Corinthian gulf to Peloponnesian trade, gained two brilliant
victories. After the departure of the enemy’s fleet, Phormio
made an expedition into Acarnania, but was prevented by severe
weather from attacking Oeniadae. Early in the spring of this
year (428), Phormio returned to Athens ; and it is evident that
he was now dead or out of health. His statue was placed on
the Acropolis and an inscription in his honour was set up at
Delphi. (For περὶ some Mss, give és: and perhaps és «τὰ» περὶ
II. was the original form ; cf. 11. 7, 8. See, however, c. 3, 2.)

6. σφίσι as direct reflexive, referring to the nearer subject,
is an Ionic use.

§ 21. 8. Λακωνικῆς depends on χωρία.

8 31.12. avarrioas—the verb occurs in a similar connexion
in 11. 68 and 96; in IV. 90 ἀναστήσας ᾿Αθηναίους πανδημεί.

14. κατὰ τὸν *AxeXwov— by way of the A.’; not the techni-
cal use of κατά meaning ‘down’ a streain (cf. Aeschines 11. 124
εἰσπλεῖν κατὰ Tov Λυδίαν ποταμόν) ; Oeniadae was an important
town on a hill in marshy ground near the SW. coast of
Acarnania W. of the mouth of the Achelous. Cobet con-
jectured ἀνά for κατά.

20. ppovp4v—the contrast with αὐτόθεν suggests that these
were not Leucadians.

§ δ]. 22. ἀποπλεύσαντες ---Ἰ.6. the ships withdrew to Acar-
nania, and from there the negotiation was carried on.

8 § 1.1. 6. Awpiets—a Rhodian athlete, who won prodigious
fame and became the typical Olympic victor. He was son of
the Diagoras for whom Pindar wrote the seventh Olympian.
Besides three Olympian victories he won many at the Isthmian
and Nemean games. (References to his career: viIr. 35, Xen.
Heil. 1. 5, Pausan. 11. 7.)

9 §11.1. KaQerrds—ms. evidence and analogy favour the
form in -ός for the neut. ; but etymology (-dos) and the ancient
grammarians are for -as.

3. τοὺς yap—cf. 1. 40 τὸν νόμον μὴ καθιστάναι ὥστε τοὺς
ἑτέρων ἀφισταμένους δέχεσθαι.

5. ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔχουσι---50 ἐν αἰτίᾳ, ἐν ὀργῇ, ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ οἴο., ef.
c. 84, 8 and ἐν ἡδονῇ εἶναι 1. 99.

7. xelpovs—think worse of them for being traitors.

§ 21. 8. οὐκ ἄδικος. . ἐστιν, εἰ TUX ovev—like 1. 120 ἀνδρῶν
σωφρόνων ἐστίν, εἰ μὴ ἀδικοῖντο, ἡσυχάζειν. Here οὐκ ἄ...

NOTES 115

ἐστιν τεδίκαιόν ἐστι χείρους ἡγεῖσθαι, and in such cases (see
Goodwin, M7. § 555) the opt. is not seldom found. The
idiom should certainly not be regarded as abnormal. Cf. e.g.
Plato, Gorg. 482 B ἔγωγε οἶμαι κρεῖττον εἷναι. . διαφωνεῖν χορὸν
ᾧ χορηγοίην. Bayfield on Antig. 666 collects passages from
Soph. Presently διακρίνοιντο is by assimilation to τύχοιεν.

10. γνώμῃ--- feeling,’ ‘sentiment’ ; εὐνοίᾳ, ‘loyalty’ to each
other. These words, so frequent in Thue. and orators, have
various shades of meaning; and of γνώμη it would be rash to
say that we can always be sure of its precise significance—
Classen has discussed γνώμη at length in his Intr.—but here
the parallel παρασκευὴ καὶ δύναμις show that the two are closely
similar in sense (εὔνοια is the intellectual aspect of γνώμη) ; and
6. 10 ἐν τῷ διαλάσσοντι THs γνώμης Kal ai διαφοραὶ τῶν ἔργων,
where the meaning of γνώμη is fixed by mer’ ἀρετῆς δοκούσης
and ὁμοιότροποι, bears this out. (εὔνοια of course implies ‘ be-
tween equals’ here, not loyalty to a superior.) Cf. also ο. 12, 1.

§ 31. 14. μηδέ to—here and again at c. 67, 2 there should
undoubtedly be only a comma before μηδέ, Thuc. never uses
οὐδέ, undé=‘and not,’ unless a neg. clause precedes ; and it is
quite plain from what precedes—ovx ἄδικος αὕτη ἡ ἀξίωσις, viz.
χείρους ἡγεῖσθαι, εἰ τύχοιεν---[ῃαῦ ὃ. . οὐκ ἣν and μηδέ τῳ
χείρους δόξωμεν εἷναι adhere closely together.

15. ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς- [ὉΓ Athens ; often used of the troubles
of war.

§ 11]. 1. περὶ yap τοῦ δικαίου kal dperfjs—to be asking for
a ξυμμαχία when you have just abandoned one is a position
that needs some justification ; so first they will show that they
were not guilty of ἀδικία (cf. ο. 12, 2) since they were in danger
of being ‘enslaved,’ and that they were actuated by the highest
of motives, by ἀρετή, unselfishness, regard for others, in that
they wanted to ‘free Greece.’ Hence their διπλῇ ἀπόστασις
(c. 13, 1) might well commend them to their hearers.—Only
one article is used because τὸ δίκαιον and ἀρετή are the two
motives combined in the διπλῆ ἀπόστασις.

πρῶτον --- this ‘first’ point— the question of political
morality—occupies in point of fact most of the speech.
4, BéBarov—always of two terminations in Thue. Stobaeus
gives βεβαίαν here: βέβαιον ἂν has been suggested.
5. μετ᾽ ἀρετῆς δοκούσης és ἀλλήλους ylyvowwro—the subject,
as Bloomfield saw (and so Steup), is ἰδιῶται καὶ πόλεις : many

edd. from Poppo onwards understand φιλία καὶ κοινωνία, but és
ἀλλήλους is a serious objection to this. It does not seem, how-

10

116 ΘΟΥΚΎΥΛΤΑΟΥ IZTOPION T

ever, that a case has been made out for explaining γίγνεσθαι
μετά ‘to behave with’ (majority of edd.); in the parallels
proposed, such as κατὰ ξυλλόγους γίγνεσθαι, the verb means ‘to
come into a certain condition or situation’: and as γενέσθαι
μετά tTwos=‘to be in the company of’ (e.g. Dem. Liv. 34), so
μετ’ ἀρετῆς γίγνεσθαι should mean ‘range themselves with,’
and so, ‘ to adopt,’ ‘work with’ ἀρετή : ἀρετὴ (as above) δοκοῦσα
és d\\jAovs=‘the supposition o7 assumption of mutual un-
selfishness, that each in his dealings with the other is acting
unselfishly.’ So we may render ‘unless both begin with the
assumption that the other is behaving unselfishly.’

7. τἄλλα ὁμοιότροποι eley—‘ and in all other respects (besides
that just mentioned) be like minded.’ Goller thought φίλοι
was to be supplied out of φιλία as subj. to yiyvow7o. Vollgratf
thinks γίγνοιντο spurious and alters δοκούσης to δοκήσεως with
Herwerden, so that μετ᾽ =‘ besides’ and xai=‘also.’ γίγνοιντο
and εἶεν are both needed, and are distinct in meaning. So
long as the union between Lesbos and Athens was to further
the resistance to Persia, both parties to the compact held to
the belief that the other was actuated by ἀρετή: but when
Athens began to pursue another purpose, Mytilene gave up
this belief, and the inherent difference of intention became
manifest.

ἐν yap τῴ διαλλάσσοντι τῆς yvouns— ‘in animorum
discrepantia’; the neut. partic. as abstract subst. (cf. the
corresponding διαφοραί) is a favourite device of Thuc., though
rare in other prose ; Xen. Cyr. Iv. δ, 89 τὸ ἐλλεῖπον. Cf. e.g.
11. 59 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης, VII. 68 τῆς γνώμης τὸ θυμού-
μενον, for ὀργή and θυμός. Thue. likes to show the quality at
work. The constr., as Kriiger says, is freely imitated by late
authors.

9. καθίστανται---“ become manifest’; cf. onc. 31. 3.

8.2 1. 9. ξυμμαχία éyévero—referring to the transference of
the hegemony of the allies from Sparta to Athens in 476 B.c.
(1. 95). In reality this transference was an ἀπόστασις from the
Spartan alliance (Ath. Pol. c. 23); and the anxiety of Sparta
to be quit of the war against Persia (ἀπαλλαξείοντες τοῦ Μηδικοῦ
πολέμου I. 95) was not shown until after the transference took
place. Samos, Chios and Lesbos were at the head of the move-
ment in favour of Athens (Plut. Arist. c. 23). (This passage
well illustrates the freedom with which Greek orators habitually
manipulate history when they refer to the past.)

10, ἀπολιπόντων éx—this use of ἀπολείπειν seems to result

NOTES 117

from such phrases as ἀπολείπειν τὴν ξυμμαχίαν (c. 9), so that
the full sense is ἀπολιπόντων (ἡμᾶς καὶ ἀπελθόντων).

§ 31.14. ᾿Αθηναίοις and τοῖς “EAAnor depend on ξύμμαχοι
ἐγενόμεθα : τοῖς “Ἕλλησι is the exaggeration of rhetoric ; for in
reality they entered the Delian confederacy.

§ 41. 15. péxpt—‘so long as,’ a very rare use, not noted in
ἘΣ Ree Gs Ba CL Aa ἢν 1; ΟΣ

19. érayopévovs—this word, very common in Thuce., regularly
means ‘ to invite,’ ‘callin.’ But here, in contrast with ἀνιέντας,
it is slightly different, ‘ procure for themselves,’ as in ἐπαγωγὴ
τῶν ἐπιτηδείων (Herbst).

ἀδεεῖς ---΄ free from anxiety.’

8 5 1. 20. διὰ rodubnpiav—with ἀδύνατοι ὄντες. Each con-
stituent state had a vote in the synod of the League, but the
allies were unable to combine against Athens through their
disagreements.

21. SovrkwOnoav—i.e. became subject allies. Cf. 1. 98 πρώτη
αὕτη πόλις ξυμμαχὶς (Naxos) παρὰ τὸ καθεστηκὸς ἐδουλώθη.

861. 25. παραδείγμασι τοῖς προγιγνομένοις x.—‘ drawing
our proofs (that they were no longer πιστοί) from what was
previously happening,’ i.e. ‘taking warning from the line of
action that they had adopted.’ παράδειγμα is an example by
which a conclusion may be supported. τοῖς προγιγνομένοις = ‘ the
line of conduct that they were pursuing previously, and had
not ceased to pursue.’ (The aor. or perf. partic. is conjectured
here as in I. 23 τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἡγοῦμαι μεγάλους γιγνομένους
. . ἀναγκάσαι és τὸ πολεμεῖν, which alludes to the conduct of
Athens during the same period—between the formation of the
Confederacy to the beginning of the war—from a different
point of view. In both places the pres. partic., describing
something still in progress, seems better. )

26. οὐ yap εἰκὸς ἦν. . . μὴ δρᾶσαι rotro—to understand
this sentence, it is necessary to realize that δρᾶσαι refers, not
to the future, but to the past, as in c. 40, 5 ἐνθυμηθέντες ἃ εἰκὸς
ἣν αὐτοὺς ποιῆσαι κρατήσαντας ὑμῶν. The sense is ‘it was not
likely that they . . would not have treated those who were
left in this way, if only they had found any opportunity.’ We
should have been ‘enslaved’ had circumstances been favourable
to Athens: cf. 1. 98 (ἐδουλώθησαν) καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ws ἑκάστῃ
ξυνέβη. (Dobree’s δυνηθεῖεν makes the ref. to the future.)

$11. 2. BeParérepor—the personal constr. often found with 11
ἄξιος, δίκαιος, ἱκανός.

118 GOYRYATAOY ἹΣΤΟΡΙΩ͂Ν £

6. Kal πρὸς τὸ πλέον. . ἀντισουμένου- (1 should prefer to
insert ἂν before ἀντισουμένου, see Introd. p. xlii). The text
means ‘since in contrast, moreover, with the majority who
were already yielding, we alone still tried to keep on an equal
footing with them.’ These words do not add much to what
has been already said in ὑποχειρίους. . ὁμιλοῦντες, but, as
Classen put it, refer to the conduct of the Lesbians as viewed
by Athens. τὸ ἡμέτερον, not ἡμεῖς, is used for the sake of the
verbal contrast with τὸ πλέον. μόνου, if the text is sound, is
(as Steup points out), not a proper antithesis to τὸ πλέον, and
it is an awkward anticipation of the next clause, ἄλλως...
ἐρημότεροι.

8.21. 9. τὸ δὲ ἀντίπαλον δέος --- “10 is reciprocity of apprehen-
sion alone,’ as distinct from one-sided δέος. There is no objection
to δέος, and no inconsistency with the opening words of ὁ. 12,
if the emphasis be put on ἀντίπαλον, as on προύχων in the next
sentence, and if μόνον be taken as qualifying ἀντίπαλον rather
than πιστόν.

10. yé&p—‘ for in that case.’

§ 31. 13. S00v—quatenus, ‘so far as.’ ἐς τὴν ἀρχήν, ‘with
a view to their empire.’ (I see no reason whatever for reject-
ing these words, as Kriiger and Steup do. They give the
true object of the Athenian policy, and the mention of ἀρχή
is appropriate enough in the presence of those who so strongly
disliked it ; cf. 1. 75, with 11. 8.)

14. γνώμης μᾶλλον ἐφόδῳ ἢ loxtvos—‘by means of policy
and not of force.’

15. τὰ πράγματα. . karadynrrad—‘ they might make them-
selves masters of the situation.’

§ 41. 15. ἅμα μέν xrd\.—this is the λόγος εὐπρεπής that they
used as evidence that they were upright. The allies whom we
attacked, they could say, must have been in the wrong ; other-
wise those who have a vote in the confederacy equal to ours
would never have been found at our side. The μή 15 due to the
protest implied in μ. ἐχρῶντο. If ἄκοντας is right, it must be
put briefly for ἄκοντας ἂν ὄντας, ‘but would have been unwilling.
unless’ ete. But this, even if possible, is extremely awkward,
whereas ἑκόντας, read in a good scholium on this passage, gives
the natural constr. and sense.

18. ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ --ἅμα : so IV. 73.
τὰ κράτιστα- ἴοΥ τοὺς κρατίστους.
20. [τὰ] τελευταῖα ---ἰἶὐ is clear that τὰ κράτιστα is object of

NOTES 119

λιπόντες, and τελευταῖα is predicative ; so that as there is no
parallel for the article, it should be omitted.

τοῦ dAAov—neut. collective, and gen. abs.

8 5 1. 23. atrév—in contrast with πρὸς 6 τι χρὴ στῆναι (aid
from others): πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ στῆναι = ἡμᾶς τοὺς δυναμένους
ἡγήσασθαι αὐτῶν (schol.). For the simple ἵστασθαι ‘rally’ with
πρός cf. IV. 56 πρὸς τὴν ἐκείνων γνώμην ἕστασαν.

24. ἐχειρώσαντο-- sc. τοὺς ξυμμάχους.

§ 61. 24. τό τε vautixdy—‘‘a third reason is here given for the
policy of the Athenians, of leaving the M. still independent, —
namely, the apprehension of danger from driving them to unite
their navy with that of the Peloponnesians ” (Bloomfield).

26. καθ᾽ ἕν γενόμενον --- standing alone this phrase would
certainly mean ‘concentrating,’ ‘ becoming united,’ as is proved
by such passages as Xen. Hell. ν. 2, 16 πῶς εἰκὸς ὑμᾶς τῆς
μὲν Βοιωτίας ἐπιμεληθῆναι ὅπως μὴ καθ᾽ ὃν εἴη, πολὺ δὲ μείζονος
ἁθροιζομένης δυνάμεως ἀμελῆσαι; This. would give no point
here, since the whole fleet is of course meant by τὸ ναυτικόν.
The accepted meaning ‘uniting with others’ is only to be got
through the addition, ἢ. . προσθέμενον, which must be re-
garded as an explanation. (Steup suggests that προσθέμενον
should be removed, so that καθ᾽ ὃν y. can be taken with the
datives. I do not think it a likely note—in fact there is a
scholium, és ταὐτὸ ξυνελθόν, here—but I do think there is a
difficulty, and possibly the first 7 should be removed.)

§ 71. 27. τὰ δὲ kai—‘to some degree also’; a fourth and
minor reason why the M. retained their independence. The
schol. divides θεραπεία into flattery of the Athenian people and
gifts to the leaders of the demos ; no doubt these are included.

881. 29. οὐ... ἂν ἐδοκοῦμεν δυνηθῆναι -- οὐκ ἂν ἐδυνήθημεν,
ὡς ἐδόκει. δοκοῦμεν, read by Kriiger (ἔτι δοκοῦμεν Steup) is
simpler, but the imperf., referring to the time of the revolt,
does not exclude the pres., and cf. c. 13 ἐνομίζομεν ἀποστήσεσθαι.

92, tots—‘ what had happened.’

§ 11.1. τίς κτλ. ---ἰ what form of trustworthy friendship or
freedom was this turning out to be ?’ i.e. how could we put an
confidence in a friendship or a freedom like that? (Dion. Hah
Antig. VI. 18 τίς οὖν ἡ τοιαύτη φιλία καὶ πίστις, ἐν ἣ παρὰ
γνώμην ἀλλήλους θεραπεύειν ἀναγκασθησόμεθα ; seems to have
found ἡ, not ἢ, after αὕτη in his Ms., and our Mss. have ἡ.)

3. παρὰ yvounv—‘ without sincerity,’ οὐκ ἀπὸ γνώμης ἀλλ’
ἀπὸ γλώσσης μόνον.

12

120 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

3. tredexopeba—this word can be used of every kind of
reception or welconie afforded to a ξένος, short of rejection: e.g.
in Lycurgus § 188 οὐδεμία πόλις αὐτὸν εἴασε παρ᾽ αὑτῇ μετοικεῖ;
is repeated in the form τοῦτον δὲ τίς ἂν ὑποδέξαιτο πόλις ;

6. ὅτε. . πίστιν βεβαιοῖ, ἡμῖν τοῦτο. . ἐχυρὸν παρεῖχε---
passages sometimes cited as parallel to this (as 11. 40 ὃ τοῖς
ἄλλοις ἀμαθία μὲν θράσος, λογισμὸς δὲ ὄκνον φέρει and IV. 125
ὅπερ φιλεῖ μέγιστα στρατόπεδα ἀσαφῶς ἐκπλήγνυσθαι) bear little
resemblance to it. If πίστιν, which Stahl bracketed, is sound,
we should assume, with Kriiger, a conflation of relative with
epexegetic clause—6 εὔνοια βεβαιοῖ with et. πίστιν βεβαιοῖ. A
schol. already takes this view ; and unless the text is corrupt,
no other explanation can be entertained. (The other scholium
is a mere paraphrase, but its conclusion—é.a τοῦτο ἄπιστος ἢν
ἡ φιλία duporépwr—shows that the writer discerned that in the
whole passage, from τίς οὖν to παραβήσεσθαι ἔμελλον, the under-
lying idea, not clearly expressed, is that of a πίστις ἄπιστος.
Both πιστή above and πίστιν here have been removed by critics
more intent, perhaps, on the lapguage than on the thought.
ξύμμαχοι ὑπὸ δέους πιστοί are ξύμμαχοι ἄπιστοι.)

9, mapdoxor—representing ὁποτέρους ἂν παράσχῃ in past
sequence.

10. doparAera—‘ sense of security.’
kat— as a consequence’ of the θάρσος.

§ 21.12. Sia. . μέλλησιν refers to δοκοῦμεν ἀδικεῖν : this
might be a reason for objecting that they should have waited
till some wrong was inflicted on them. τὰ δεινά --΄ methods of
coercion’; for the whole cf. 1. 25 κατὰ τὴν Φαιάκων προ-
evoiknow τῆς Κερκύρας.

8.81. 1ὅ. εἰ γὰρ δυνατοί «7\.—with the text before us, which
(except for ἀντιμελλῆσαι) follows the Mss., we must render,
‘had we been in a. position both to intrigue like them and to
delay like them (i.e. to put off our attack, but at the same time
to have our plan of attack ready), what need was there for us
to remain, nevertheless, at their mercy?’ The M. might of
course defer the attack, but if they waited for the Athenians to
attack they were lost. This is fairly satisfactory, the only
difficulty being that ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου and ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου (‘just as we
were,’ aeque atque fuimus) have no correspondence. It is in
connexion with the next sentence that doubts arise. (1)
ἐπιχειρεῖν clearly corresponds to ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι, and προαμύνα-
σθαι to ἀντιμελλῆσαι (or ἀντεπιμελλῆσαι) ; (2) the statement ‘we
need not have remained in their power’ is hardly equivalent to

NOTES 121

‘we need not have revolted because we should have retained
our independence’ ; (3) ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι looks suspicious before
ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις ὄντας. A great many changes have been proposed,
and those of Heilmann and Kriiger indicated in the crit. note
and adopted by Classen give a much better correspondence and
an improved sense. Yet I do not feel that the objections to
the ms. reading are decisive. The general sense is: we cannot
be blamed for taking the first move merely because they delayed
to take action against us,

§ 11.1. tovatras—the asyndeton when a demonstrative
pron. sums up what precedes is common. αἰτίας is ‘ grievances’
(Cornford), not synonymous with προφάσεις.

2. σαφεῖς τοῖς ἀκούουσι γνῶναι, as in κάλλιστον ἰδεῖν τοῖς
φίλοις Xen. Oec. VIII. 6 ; but an unusual kind of example. The
words are appropriate to a pleader.

3. elxkétas—‘ reasonably.’
5. Bovdopévovs—what is to be supplied ?

10. ἀποστήσεσθαι ὃ. ἀπόστασιν - {1186 figura etymologica, as
in VI. 56 τοὺς τὴν πομπὴν πέμψοντας, VIII. 68 κοινῇ τὸν πόλεμον
πολεμούντων. It is usually said that Thuc. plays upon the
double meaning of ἀφίστασθαι here, (1) ‘abstain from,’ (2)
‘revolt from.’ With Poppo and Classen I cannot think this is
so. The passage clearly corresponds to c. 10, ὃ ξύμμαχοι ἐγενό-
μεθα οὐκ. . ᾿Αθηναίοις, ἀλλὰ. , τοῖς “Ἕλλησι, and the M. had
‘revolted from’ the Greeks who formed the Delian league just
as much as they had ‘revolted from’ the Athenians. Nor is
the view of the majority borne out by ἡ μέντοι ἀπόστασις KTH.

11. ξὺν κακῶς rovetv—referring to καταδούλωσις τῶν Ἑλλήνων
6.10. Cf. Xen. An. ν. δ, 21 ἂν μέν τις εὖ ποιῇ, ἀντ᾽ εὖ ποιεῖν
(ἀντευποιεῖν MSS.), ἂν δὲ κακῶς, ἀλέξασθαι (Stallbaum on Plato,
Gorg. 520 ¥).

14, προποιῆσαι -- προ-διαφθεῖραι.

8.2]. 16. xpq—se. ὑμᾶς. ἣ καὶ μᾶλλον, i.e. in addition to
the δίκαιον and ἀρετή (c. 10, 1) of doing so.

17. βοήθειαν drorré\Xev-—the M. really suggest two plans,
both of which were adopted (c. 15, 1; 16, 3; cf. 25, 1), viz. (1)
that a fleet shall be sent to Lesbos, and (2) that there shall be
another invasion of Attica, though there had already been one
this year. But the second proposal is put forward only as
according with the interest of Sparta (either the enemy will not
resist you, or—if they do—they must withdraw from the
Peloponnese (cf. § 3) as well as from Lesbos, § 4). The second

13

129 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

proposal only was at first carried out, but it did not have the
desired effect (c. 16, 2). In the following year, accordingly,
both schemes were to be carried out concurrently (c. 26), but
even then the Pel. were slack about no. 1 (c. 27, 1). (I see no
ground for thinking the text deficient here, as Steup supposes.
The two courses are not proposed as alternatives, and, on the
other hand, they are with good reason not announced as two
parts of a scheme for helping Lesbos. )

19. καὶ ἐν τῷ adt@—this point is explained in what follows :
so far it has not been touched upon. To this καιρὸς...
πρότερον refers.

§ 31. 21. ἐφθάραται --- {1:6 old plur. terminations in -ara,
-aro, are rarely found in Attic prose, as Xen. An. Iv. 8, 5:
Thue. varies.

23. at pév—see c. 7.

§ 41. 25. περιουσίαν νεῶν ἔχειν ---ἃ number large enough to
protect the harbours and coast of Attica without recalling those
that were out. This forecast was entirely falsified by the event ;
but it might very well be entertained because (1) in spite of the
fall of Potidaea (in 429 B.c.), no Athenian fleet had been sent
out to the Peloponnese in 429 ; (2) only thirty ships had been
sent out this year in answer to the Spartan invasion of Attica,
whereas in 431 and 430 the number had been 100; (3) late in
429 a Peloponnesian fleet had made an abortive attempt to seize
the Piraeus: reflexion on the result of this mismanaged affair
may have led them, with good reason, to underrate the naval
resources of Athens.

26. émexBadnre—‘ make an additional invasion’: τὸ δεύτερον
emphasizes the ἐπ-.

§ δ]. 30. ᾧ γὰρ δοκεῖ. . wapéEe.—‘ if anyone is thinking
that L. is far away, the advantage will be given to him close at
hand’ ; that will come home to him.

32. ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ éorar—‘ will turn on Attica, but (on the
country) through which . . ,’ ie. ἐν τῇ ξυμμαχικῇ ; the issue
depends on the action of the ξύμμαχοι. The need is to transfer
the resources (cf. ὠφελίαν. , ὠφελεῖται) of the ξύμμαχοι from
the Athenian to the Spartan side. Cf. Tac. Hist. 11. 28 sin
victoriae columen in Italia verteretur.

§ 6 1. 38. of πρὶν δουλεύοντες ---ἶ.6. those who were made
ὑποτελεῖς before us.

§ 7 1. 38. βοηθησάντων ---ἃ remarkable ex. of the gen. abs,
where the subject of the verb is the same ; cf. c. 112, 6.

NOTES 123

44. elyere—‘have up till now’ is the meaning given by
Poppo ; but ‘had’ before the war is more natural, and more in
accordance with the action of Sparta.

45. ἐλευθεροῦντες -ἃ good point: at the outbreak of the war
the Lac. had claimed to be ‘the liberators of Greece.’

§11. 2. és dpas—‘ with regard to you. .’
3. ἴσα xal—adverbial, as ὁμοίως καί.

5. ἴδιον. . παραβαλλομένους —instead of the external
accus. usual with παραβάλλομαι, ie. τὰ σώματα, we have here
the internal accus., κίνδυνον.

8 1.1.5. τὴν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν éoPodnv—‘as regards the
suggested (0. 13, 4) invasion.’ ἐσβολήν is the ‘accusative of
anticipation,’ for which cf. 1. 33, 8 τὸν δὲ πόλεμον... εἴ τις
ὑμῶν μὴ οἴεται ἔσεσθαι. In both these instances the verb that
follows (ποιησόμενοι, ἔσεσθαι) of course supplies a governing
word to the accus. as in V. 36 τὸ Πάνακτον ἐδέοντο Βοιωτοὺς ὅπως
παραδώσουσι, and in general. But sometimes the accus. has no
strict regimen, but the constr. is changed in the dependent
clause, as in the well-known case Aristoph. Av. 1269 δεινόν γε
τὸν κήρυκα... εἰ μηδέποτε νοστήσει πάλιν.

7. παροῦσι. . ἔφραζον, ‘gave them orders while they were
on the spot,’ i.e. did not wait to send round after the delegates
had left. κατὰ τάχος and τοῖς δύο μέρεσιν belong to ἰέναι : cf.
Il. 10 ξυνῇσαν τὰ δύο μέρη... ἐς τὸν Ἰσθμόν. The dat. is sociative,
as constantly with words like στρατός and ναῦς. The subject of
ἔφραζον and ἀφίκοντο is ‘the Lacedaemonians’ only. §ths=ra
τρία μέρη ; but §ths=rav ὀκτὼ τὰ τρία μέρη. ὡς ποιησόμενοι
belongs to ἀφίκοντο as well as to ἔφραζον.

9. καὶ (‘and then’) ὁλκοὺς (cf. ἐφ-ολκίον, a boat towed,
νεωλκεῖν, to beach a vessel with a ὁλκός. The instrument for
pushing heavy weights was called ἕλιξ, but it was not invented
till Archimedes) παρεσκεύαζον --- [Π 6 ships which had been used
against Phormio in the Corinthian gulf (at Lechaeum) were
to be hauled over the Isthmus along the track, called δίολκος,
to the Saronic gulf. The ships must have been put on some
kind of truck. The exact nature of the ὁλκοί is unknown ;
possibly they were rollers fixed in the δίολκοςς. ὑπερφέρειν,
διαφέρειν, διακομίζειν and διέλκειν are used of this.

§ 21. 14. of δὲ ἄλλοι Edppaxor—the ‘exclusive’ use of ἄλλος.

15. ἐν καρποῦ ξυγκομιδῇ, like ἐν παρασκευῇ εἶναι : (ἐν)
ἀρρωστίᾳ like ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ εἶναι.

14.

15

811. 2. διὰ κατάγνωσιν ἀσθενείας σφῶν = διὰ τὸ καταγνῶναι 16

124 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

σφῶν ἀσθένειαν, i.e. σφῶν depends on κατάγνωσιν. On what
the ‘imputation’ was based can be seen from Ο, 13.

6. τὸ ἐπὶ Λέσβῳ vavriksv—the suggestion of the speaker
in c. 18 was dm’ ἀμφοτέρων (Lesbos and Peloponnese) ἀποχωρή-
σονται: but what is mentioned in ὁ, 7, 3 had meantime
occurred,

8. avrof—these, as the restriction shows, consisted of the
ζευγῖται and θῆτες. The two higher classes served on board
only in times of great danger.

10. παρὰ τὸν ᾿Ισθμὸν ἐπίδειξιν ἐποιοῦντο, ‘made a demon-
stration along the coast of.’ With ἀναγαγόντες instead of the
ordinary ἀναγαγόμενοι cf. Herod. VI. 12 ἀνάγων τὰς νέας.

11. ἀποβάσεις-- {Π|6 plan of making descents on the enemy’s
coasts as a counter-move to the invasion of Attica had been
started by Pericles.

§ 2 1. 15. ἄπορα νομίζοντες --- ‘thinking (the situation)
difficult,’ a characteristic use of the neut. plur. without subst.,
as in I. 8 πλωιμώτερα ἐγένετο.

17. καὶ ai περὶ τὴν IT. τριάκοντα νῆες, ‘the thirty ships that
were about (off the W. coast) the Pel. as well.’ If the text is
sound, the thirty ships of c. 7 must surely be meant: it is true
that c. 7, 8 shows that the majority of these ships, at any rate,
were no longer ravaging the coasts ; but the Lac. are misled by
an inaccurate report. Chambry, however, suggests that the
eighteen ships referred to in c. 7, 3 had subsequently rejoined
the other twelve ; if so, it is strange that Thuc. has omitted to
mention this.—The edd. who delete τριάκοντα point out that
from ὁ. 18, 3 it is clear the Lac. knew already about the doings
of this earlier fleet. But (1), the Lesbian speaker does not say
that the fleet was actually ravaging the coasts ; and (2) in any
case, if c. 18, 3 is in point here, so is 6. 13, 4, and there the
expectation is that the fleet will be withdrawn. Why should
not the Lac. have fresh information—inaccurate—that the
expectation had been falsified? The second kafl= ‘also,’ i.e. as
well as the new fleet which was making ἀποβάσεις (δ 2). Those
who omit τριάκοντα understand the fleet of 100 ships mentioned
just before. This is of course possible, but the passage admits
of asimple explanation as it stands ; and it is hardly likely that
the 100 ships could so soon be reported as ravaging the coasts.

18. τὴν περιοικίδα---Ἰαπ belonging to the περίοικοι in
Messenia seems to be meant. :

§ 31.19. torepov—it was not sent at once, c. 25.
20. 8 τι πέμψουσιν ---ὅστις because of the purpose.

NOTES 125

21. ἐπήγγελλον ---ἃ technical word for sending out a formal
notice, which may amount toa command. Cf. περιαγγέλλω.

22. vatapxov—an office held for a year. The admiral in
war was almost as important as the kings, who commanded the
land-forces. His power increased when the Spartan navy
became greater.

§ 4 1. 25. eSov—sc. ἀναχωρήσαντας : cf. eg. 11. 11 δῃοῦν
μᾶλλον ἢ τὴν ἑαυτῶν δρᾶν, sc. δῃουμένην.

I reluctantly agree with Steup that this ch. is spurious.
Apart from peculiarities of language, it seems impossible to
reconcile § 2 with the facts given in Bk. 11. about the Athenian
fleet ἀρχομένου τοῦ πολέμου. (1) he 100 ships here said to be
guarding Attica, Euboea and Salamis are not mentioned in Bk.
11. They cannot be the 100 νῆες ἐξαίρετοι of which we read in
11, 24. Those ships were docked, and were certainly not
ἐνεργοί : (2) αἱ περὶ Ἰ[οτείδαιαν κτλ. makes the total 250 wrong,
for we know that the number of ships at Potidaea alone was
seventy, and, even if we conjecture that some of them had been
withdrawn, there is yet another fleet of thirty sent περὶ τὴν
Λοκρίδα καὶ EvSolas dua φυλακήν (τι. 26) to be counted in ; (3)
it is difficult to see why in § 4 the 1,600 men with whom
Phormio ἀπετείχισε τὸ ἐκ τῆς Παλλήνης (1. 64) should be
reckoned in counting the expenses of the siege of Potidaea, and
the 4,300 whom Hagnon took there after Phormio’s departure
(11. 58) omitted in the computation ; (4) the digression on the
numbers of the first year of the war, when we look for a
reasoned comparison between the numbers of 431 and 428 is
very odd; (5) if 100 ships were guarding Attica, Euboea and
Salamis, why should the fleet of thirty have been sent out to
guard Euboea? As Busolt says, the author of this chapter has
overlooked the fleet of thirty.

§11. 1. κατὰ τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον &y—i.e. καθ᾽ ὅν, according
to a common idiom; cf. Soph. OC. 748 ἐς τοσοῦτον αἰκίας
πεσεῖν ἔδοξ᾽, ὅσον πέπτωκεν ἥδε.

2. ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται 84—for the fem. cf. ο. 82, 1 (στάσις) ἐν
τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο. Pre-eminence is not necessarily implied in
any of the examples of this idiom, and Herbst is perhaps right
in saying that prominence only is meant. The latter must be
the point here, because of παραπλήσιαι δὲ καὶ ἔτι πλείους.

3. δή heightening the superlative is not elsewhere added
to this idiom.

avrots—with ἐγένοντο.
évepyol Τκάλλει makes no sense. ἐνεργός͵ though not

196 GOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

elsewhere applied to ships, is well suited to them, ‘on active
service,’ ‘in commission’; and it may be that the note in
Hesychius ai μὴ ἀργαί alludes to this passage. But κάλλει must
be corrupt, for the rendering ‘effective by their fine condition’
is not possible. Herbst’s conjecture o’ καὶ λ΄, i.e. 230, is plausible ;
but in order to make up so great a total, he assumes a fleet of
sixty ships for guarding the coast of Attica. Were this so, we
should surely have heard of it at c. 16, 2 among the reasons that
caused the Pel. to abandon the invasion ; and even though we
are left to collect the number of ships at sea m 428 B.c., this
large item in the total must have been mentioned somewhere.
Still, the interpolator may have reckoned the total at 230
by the same process, whatever it was, that led him to 250 for
431 B.c. below. The number, however, does not come in
naturally after ἐν rots πλεῖσται. A very good sense would be
got by μιᾷ πόλει (Widmann).

§ 21.5, τήν τε yap Αττικήν x7\.—referring to the first year
of the war; but there is no mention of such a fleet in the
account of that year.

7. περὶ Πελοπόννησον ---ἰΠ18 fleet had been sent out by
Pericles as a counter-stroke to the invasion of Attica.

8. χωρὶς 8€—‘ besides,’ sc. ἦσαν, which is implied in the
context.

§ 31.11. totro—i.e. the sending out of these armaments. In
a somewhat similarly vague way pera ΤΠοτειδαίας is used for
μετὰ THs Ποτειδαίας πολιορκίας, with which should be compared
11. 13 és Ποτείδαιαν ἀπανηλώθη, ‘money was spent on the siege
of P.’ It is strange that the expenses of the army at Potidaea,
as distinct from the expenses of the fleet there, should be
brought in so vaguely.

§ 4]. 12. 8{Spaxpor—half a drachma a day was the ordinary °
pay for a hoplite: here it is one drachma for the hoplite and
one for his servant.

14. &AdpBave—we should expect ἕκαστος ἐλάμβανον or
ἐλάμβανεν. It is the omission of a singular subject to which
the verb is attracted that is remarkable: edd. note that this
omission is frequent in Herod.

15. ὧν οὐκ éAdooovs—when Potidaea revolted in 432 B.c.,
8000 Athenian hoplites had been sent to besiege it. It seems
that the permanent force was maintained at this number
throughout the siege.

16, of mpoarAAGov—these 1600 had been sent to blockade

NOTES 127

Potidaea from the south (1. 64) soon after the revolt. They
wert withdrawn from Chalcidice before the place fell.

17. τὸν αὐτὸν μισθόν ---νἶΖ. one drachma per man, or double
the ordinary wage (VI. 31).

19. τοσαῦται 54—referring still to the παραπλησίαι καὶ ἔτι
πλείους (δ 1); so that the digression extends to the end of the
chapter.

§11.1. Sv—sce c. 17, 1. 18
3. Μήθυμναν ---866 c. 2, 1.

ὡς tpodiopévnv—‘in the belief that it was going to be
betrayed’; cf. Aristoph. Pax 408 mpodidoroy τὴν Ἑλλάδα.
MT. § 32.
5. émlkovpo.—for these mercenaries see 6, 2, 2.

8. καταστησάμενοι. . BeBardrepa—cf. 1. 118 τὴν ἀρχὴν
ἐγκρατεστέραν κατεστήσαντο.

8.21. 18. wAnyévres—in an old poetical meaning, found
several times in Thue.

§ 3 1. 16. ταῦτα... κρατοῦντας. . ἱκανοὺς dvtas—the
partic. phrase in apposition to ταῦτα, as in Soph. Antig. 17
οὐδὲν οἶδ᾽ ὑπέρτερον | οὔτ᾽ εὐτυχοῦσα μᾶλλον οὔτ᾽ ἀτωμένη,
Philoc. 1855 πῶς ταῦτ᾽ ἐξανασχήσεσθε, τοῖσιν ἤΛτρεως | ἐμὲ
ξυνόντα παισίν ;

19. εἴργειν ---“ isolate.’

§ 41. 21. αὐτερέται---Ἰὔ was unusual in Thuce.’s day for fight-
ing men to serve as rowers: in Homeric times it was usual ; cf.
Il, τι. 719 ἐρέται δ᾽ ἐν ἑκάστῃ πεντήκοντα | ἐμβέβασαν, τόξων εὖ
εἰδότες ἴφι μάχεσθαι.

25. ἐγκατῳκοδόμηται---866 crit. note. The verb means to
build znto a wall. Clearly the forts were built at the same
time as the wall at the points strong by nature. If the perf.
is right, we must take it as historic, like the presents, and
render ‘there are forts built in at various points,’ so that the
perf. points to the condition of the wall and forts when com-
pleted. But as no parallel to such a use of the perf. is known,
the plup. should probably be read (I do not think 7 for of
necessary ; but these forms are often confused in Mss. ).

§51. 26. ἀμφοτέρωθεν is explained by καὶ ἐκ γῆς καὶ ἐκ θαλάττης.

8 11. 2. καὶ atrot—bringing their own contribution into 19
connexion with that levied from the allies.

198 ΘΟΥΚΎΛΙΔΑΟΥ ἹΣΤΟΡΙΩ͂Ν T

8. τότε mpStov—probably meaning that the extraordinary
war-tax was actually levied for the first time (cf. τότε πρῶτον in
I. 96) in 428 B.c., though the arrangements for it existed before.
Some think that Thue. means for the first-time in this war.
There is no evidence that the tax had ever been levied before.
(About the details of the elogopa before the age of Demosth.
little is known, but the burden fell mainly on the rich, being
‘a progressive income-tax on property.’ The amount was
fixed by the Ecclesia. Gilbert, Jun. Gesch. 129f. gives good
reasons for supposing that Cleon took the initiative in pro-
moting the vote before the Ecclesia. See also Neil on Aristoph.
fq. 771, 923.)

4. διακόσια τάλαντα---ἰῃ apposition to ἐσφοράν.

5. ἀργυρολόγους vats—to collect an ἐσῴφορά- ποῦ, in this
case, arrears of tribute. The sending out of such ships is
expressly attributed to Cleon in Zq. 1070.

6. (AvowrAéa—this Lysicles does not belong to the family
of Habronichus (1. 91), but is the προβατοπώλης of obscure
origin whose connexion with Aspasia brought him into
prominence ; Aristoph. £q. 132, 765, Plutarch, Per. 24.)

πεμπτὸν avtédv—meaning that Lysicles had the chief
command. The large number of στρατηγοί sent is probably
due to the difficulty and delicacy of the mission.

§ 21.10. Avaurév—cf. c. 32.
11. ἄλλης -- 5 well.’

20 g111. ἔτι γάρ xrh.—about the middle of September in the
previous year the Pel. had turned the siege of Plataea into a
blockade. They had withdrawn the greater part of their’
army, leaving a garrison to guard half their lines, while the
other half was guarded by the Boeotians.

8. τῷ τε σίτῳ émdelrovri—equivalent to τῇ σιτοδείᾳ. ἐπι-
λιπόντι all Mss.: other accounts are not decisive in favour of
the present.

5. τιμωρίας -- βοηθείας, as often in Thue. The Athenians
had promised to help Plataea when the siege began, but their
hands had since been full owing to the plague, the siege of
Potidaea and the revolt of Lesbos. See further, Introd. p. xvi.

10. éonynoapévov—cf. VI. 99 οὐχ ἥκιστα Ἑρμοκράτους ἐσηγη-
σαμένου.

11. ἀνδρὸς pavrews—-together.

NOTES 129

13. éerparhye.—the opinion of a general supported by a
μάντις would carry great weight.

§ 21.14. ἀπώκνησαν.... τὸν κίνδυνον --οὔ, ο. 30, 4.

15. ἐς & . . . μάλιστα---[Π 6 phrase with prep. stands as
subject of the verb, In Andoc. 1. 37 εἰς τριακοσίους is presently
repeated in the form μάλιστα τριακοσίους. For és and μάλιστα
often used together cf. e.g. 6. 90, 3 περί and μάλιστα, Dem.
XXI. 154, περί and tows, Herod. ΠΙ. 159 μάλιστα ἐς.

16. ἐνέμειναν ---ἃ5. in ἐμμένειν τοῖς ὅρκοις etc. τρόπῳ τοιῳδε
is added κατὰ“σύνεσιν.

§ 31. 18. Evveperpqoavro—it is possible to supply τὸ τεῖχος
or τὰς κλίμακας, but § 4 strongly favours the latter.

20. &adrndtppévov—‘ whitewashed.’ The ἐξ- probably denotes
completion: the whitewashing had not been finished at one
part of the wall.

HpOpoivro . . apwpotvres—for the rapid passage from
mid. to act. ef. 11. 9 ναυτικὸν παρείχοντο. . πεζὸν παρεῖχον.

26. ἐς ὃ ἐβούλοντο τοῦ τείχους ---50. καθορᾶν, or perhaps
rather ὁρᾶν : τοῦ τείχους agrees with καθορωμένου, and és ὃ
ἐβούλοντο --Ξ ‘as far as they wanted to see it,’ i.e. a sufficiently
wide piece was visible. The objection to this is that és 6 for
ὅσον or és ὅσον does not occur elsewhere. In Herod. és ὅ means
‘until’ with aorist or hist. pres. or iterative imperf. ; but in
Thue. v. 66 és ὃ ἐμέμνηντο: 80 far as (of time), a use not found
elsewhere ; and it is possible by Gk. usage of a prep. and neuter
adj. or pron., that the phrase should denote time or place: e.g.
ἐξ ὀλίγου of time 11. 11, of place 11. 91, and so with ἐκ πολλοῦ.
Two other views of this passage, not involving change of the
text, must be noticed: (a) taking rod τείχους as agreeing with
καθορωμένου ‘as the wall was completely visible to the desired
point’ i.e. to the foot of the wall, viewed from above ; but we
should expect this meaning to be expressed directly and clearly.
(Ὁ) Taking τοῦ τείχους as depending on és 4, ‘as they easily looked
down upon the part of the wall that they wished to see,’ i.e.
καθορωμένου (τούτου) és ὃ τοῦ τείχους ἐβούλοντο (ὁρᾶν). This is
very awkward and we should expect καθορῶντες. The altera-
tions proposed are (a) ὅσον for és 8, Stahl, or (6) to insert an
infin., as ἀναβῆναι after ἐβούλοντο (Stein).

8 4 1. 26. τὴν Evppérpnow . . aBov—for the periphrasis
with λαβεῖν cf. e.g. Soph. Phil. 1078 φρόνησιν λαβεῖν. Presum-
ably the height arrived at by the majority was accepted as
correct. .

K

21

22

130 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

28. τῆς mX(vOov-——collective ; so in 11. 9, 4 λίθοις Kal κεράμῳ,
ef. c. 74, 1, 11. 76 κάλαμος. The meaning is that, having
counted the layers, they found the height of the wall by
multiplication. Ὁ

8 1 1. 2. οἰκοδομήσει---ΤΉ πο. is partial to nouns in -σις:
ὀλόφυρσις, ξυμμέτρησις, κατάφευξις ete.

8. mpds—‘on the side towards,’ an idiomatic use common
with localities, πρὸς τοῦ λιμένος, τοῦ ποταμοῦ and so on.

§ 21. 6. τὸ οὖν μεταξὺ τοῦτο x«rX.—‘ this intervening space
was occupied with buildings assigned as quarters to the sentries.’
So Stahl, who views τὸ μεταξύ as subject, and οἰκήματα as
internal accus., as in τὸ ἐναντίον ὄνομα μετωνόμασται I. 122.
Steup agrees with this rendering, but he is inclined to retain
οἱ ἑκκαίδεκα πόδες and he regards οἰκήματα as pred. nom.
Another view, which is to be rejected, is that τὸ μεταξὺ τοῦτο
is adverbial accus., ‘in this space,’ and οἰκήματα subject of
φὠκοδόμητο : the constr. is then very strained, and the perf.
partic. διανενεμημένα unnatural, implying that the quarters
were distributed before they were built.

8. ἣν Evvexf—I agree with Steup in rendering ‘it was (all)
continuous,’ without any definite subject, as in I. 8 πλωιμώτερα
ἐγένετο, and cf. 11. 3 ἁμάξας . . ἐς τοὺς ὁδοὺς καθίστασαν, iv’ ἀντὶ
τείχους 7, for it was not only the guards’ quarters, but the two
parallel walls as well that ‘looked like one thick wall.’

§ 31. 9. διὰ δέκα δὲ éradtewy—-‘at an interval of ten,’ 1.6.
with the plur., ‘at intervals of ten,’ as in Isocr. 1v. 46 ai
πανηγύρεις διὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου συλλεγεῖσαι.

11. ἰσοπλατεῖς --οἷ, ἰσομηκής, ἰσοπαχής, ἰσοπληθής.

12. καὶ τὸ ἔξω--ἴοΥ καὶ ἐς τὸ ἔξω, cf. c. 44 περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος
μᾶλλον... ἢ τοῦ παρόντος. The first καί, ‘and,’ is deleted by
Herbst, but the predicative of αὐτοί can come in the second
clause.

13. παρὰ mipyov—Thuc. might have written παρὰ rods
πύργους, but the art. is omitted and the sing. used collectively
as in 11.13 map’ ἔπαλξιν, for which we might have παρὰ τὰς
ἐπάλξεις. (This is better than ‘past a tower,’ because of δι᾽
αὐτῶν.)

811. 1. waperkevacro—impers., as often.

2. τηρήσαντες--ο τηρεῖν ἄνεμον 1. 65, τ. πορθμόν (* passage ’)
VI. 2

5. tapov—between the town and the τεῖχος. See Introd.
‘p. xix,

NOTES. 131

6. mporguegav—‘ reached.’

8. ἀνά occurs only twice in Thuc., here and Iv. 72: with
the temporal use here cf. Herod. vill. 123 ἀνὰ τὸν πόλεμον
τοῦτον. ‘In the local sense especially, Lut also in the temporal,
ἀνά frequently occurs in Homer and Herod. The constr. is
common in Xenophon, but seems to occur in no other Attic
prose writer” (C. F. Smith),

9. ψόφῳ depends on ἀντιπαταγοῦντος only, κατακουσάντων
being absolute, like προϊδόντων. The gen. abs., in spite of the
accus., (φύλακας), is common in Gk.

§ 21. 12. μή belongs to both partic. and verb.
13. αἴσθησιν παρέχοι-- οἵ, 11. 4 αἴσθησις ταχεῖα ἐπεγένετο.

14. τὸν ἀριστερὸν μόνον méSa—instead of both feet, as
would normally have been the case. The plain statement of .
Thue. therefore is that by leaving off the right sandal the men
expected to get a firmer footing in the mud. (The schol. says ©
ὑπεδέδεντο τὸν μὲν ἕνα τῶν ποδῶν δι’ ἀσφάλειαν, τὸν δὲ ἕτερον
γυμνὸν εἶχον διὰ κουφότητα, and many edd. follow this view ;
but this is certainly not what Thuc. says, and it is not a
question of what we might think to be the effect of sandals or
no sandals. Thuc. took it that the right foot was meant to
get the firmer hold.)

§ 31. 16. προσέμισγον πρὸς τὰς érddfes—I should prefer a
comma at προσέμισγον, because πρὸς τὰς ἐπάλξεις does not go
closely with the verb, but is added to make κατὰ μεταπύργιον
clear. (As Steup says, the towers had no battlements, so that
πρὸς Tas ἐπάλξεις does not refer to the wall asa whole. But
there is no need to alter the text with him.)

21. pera δὲ αὐτὸν, , ἀνέβαινον -- [118 still refers to the
ψιλοὶ δώδεκα, and merely repeats the previous ἀνέβαινον with
the addition of the intention of this party: on reaching the top
they were to turn to left and right. The awkward repetition
is due to the breaking of the thread of the previous sentence
by the words καὶ πρῶτος ἀνέβη.

§ 41. 29. ἀντιλαμβανόμενος is absolute.

30. δοῦπον ---ἃ8 the rarer word this may be right, but ψόφον
is an early variant.

§ δ]. 31. Boh—‘an alarm,’

ἐπὶ τὸ retxos—the garrison troops came out and made
for their posts at the wall. See Introd. p. xviii.

28

132 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

32. ὅ τι Av—contrast v. 54 ἤδει δὲ οὐδεὶς ὅποι στρατεύουσιν.
Goodwin, MT. § 674. 3.

33. kal ἅμα... προσέβαλον --- this gives another reason
why they did not know 6 τι ἣν τὸ δεινόν : hence strictly we
should have καὶ ὅτι of κτλ. : cf. 1. 110 τοῦτον δὲ διὰ μέγεθός τε τοῦ
ἕλους οὐκ ἐδύναντο ἑλεῖν, καὶ ἅμα μαχιμώτατοί εἰσι τῶν Αἰγυπτίων

eg

οἱ ἕλειοι.

84, τῶν Πλαταιῶν---μαγυϊ να gen., which Thuc., differing
from other authors, often puts between an art. and partic., as
I. 9 of τὰ σαφέστατα IleXorovyynciwy δεδεγμένοι, ib. 48 ταῖς
ἄριστα τῶν νεῶν πλεούσαις, and below, c. 36, 5.

36. ἐκ τοὔμπαλιν ἤ---οἴ, τοὐναντίον ἤ, which generally shows
a variant reading 7. In Xen. Anab. 11. δ, 18 εἰς τοὔμπαλιν ἢ
πρὸς Βαβυλῶνα is probably incorrect, but the text shows the
idiom.

§ 61. 38. ἐθορυβοῦντο μὲν οὖν «7X. —‘ thus, remaining at their
post (on the wall), they were in astate of excitement, yet not
one dared to move from his own station, but they were at a loss
to make out what was happening.’ ἑαυτῶν goes back to the
subject of ἐθορυβοῦντο. ἑαυτῶν here is to be preferred to αὐτῶν :
but in c. 91, 2 τοὺς Μηλίους οὐκ ἐθέλοντας és τὸ αὐτῶν ξυμμαχικὸν
ἰέναι ἐβούλοντο προσαγαγέσθαι, the pers. pron. may be right,
since zpsorum, not swum may be meant.

§ 71. 43. ἐχώρουν ἔξω τοῦ relyous—i.e. they descended from
the wall on the outer side, supposing that the alarm meant that
some force was approaching from Athens. In the darkness
and excitement these 300 had not communicated with the men
in the towers who had raised the alarm. ;

44, φρνκτοὶ πολέμιοι---λαμπάδες πολεμίους δηλοῦσαι schol.

§ 81.47. ὅπως ἀσαφῆ. . ἢ καὶ μὴ βοηθοῖεν.---[π6 time-
honoured example of interchange of subj. and opt. after a
past tense. Cf. νι. 96 ἐξέκριναν ὅπως εἴησαν φύλακες Kal .
παραγίγνωνται, where no difference of meaning can be de-
tected. See 2,7. 7. § 321. Analogous is the interchange of
moods in 6. 113, 2.

§11. 1. of δ᾽ ὑπερβαίνοντες --- ἃ]1] who were attempting to
escape, whatever they were doing, are regarded as one body ;
but presently they are divided into οἱ μέν, those already on the
wall, and οἱ δέ, those who were still below. The result is a
very ugly sentence. :

4. ἑκατέρου ---866 c. 22, 3.

5. tas τε Sid8ovs—Steup, following Poppo, renders ‘and,’
making the parenthesis extend from ὡς to ἐπιβοηθεῖν, because,

NOTES 133

if re is regarded as correlative to καί, the sense of τάς τε διόδους

. . ἐπιβοηθεῖν is absurdly repeated in κάτωθεν (ie. ἀπὸ τῶν
διόδων) εἶργον. It will be noticed that, if ἐφύλασσον μηδένα δι’
αὐτῶν ἐπιβοηθεῖν were absent, the sentence would be perfectly
regular in outline: of δ᾽ ὑπερβαίνοντες τάς τε διόδους ἐνστάντες
καὶ κλίμακας προσθέντες, οἱ μὲν καὶ κάτωθεν (1.6. ἀπὸ τῶν διόδων)
καὶ ἄνωθεν (i.e. ἀπ’ ἄκρων τῶν πύργων) eipyov κτλ. I think that
this is a sign, not that the interrupting words are spurious—
they are quite in Thuc.’s manner—but that Thuc. wrote them
without working out the sentence to its end, as if after πλείους
he had intended to continue, not with οἱ μέν, but in the form
ἀπὸ τῶν πύργων τοὺς ἐπιβοηθοῦντας ἄνωθεν εἶργον βάλλοντες : ON
reaching πλείους, he shifted his plan and as the general subject
was to be kept up, bifurcated the sentence with οἱ μὲν. . οἱ δέ,
instead of making a separate sentence of the οἱ δέ clause. This
view of the matter is confirmed by the ugly repetition of
κλίμακας προσθέντες and πλείους in different senses.

6. δι’ atrév—coming from the other πύργοι through the
passages to the μεταπύργιον over which the P. were escaping.

9, mAelovs—as in c. 22, 4 init.

oi μέν includes those in the d/od0 and those on the top
of the πύργοι.

10. κάτωθεν καὶ ἄνωθεν ---τν {1} εἶργον.

11. οἱ 8’—those who were at the foot of the wall.

§ 21. 14. ateC—as Kriiger says, this belongs to the partic. and
the verb alike.

15. τῆς tadppov—for this outer trench see c. 24, 2.

17. παρὰ τὸ Tetxos—‘ by the wall,’ on the outside.

κωλυτὴς γίγνοιτο- ἃ favourite periphrasis with Thuc.,

especially with nouns in -τῆς ; examples occur in cc. 2, 40, 58,
59; with διδάσκαλος c. 42; with ἡγεμών c. 105.

§ 31. 18. mavres—meaning οἱ πλείους of 8 1.

19. ot reXevrato.—best taken by itself, between commas,
ie. ‘as they were the last,’ like of δ᾽... οἱ πλείους above.
But Steup makes οἱ τελευταῖοι partitive apposition to of . .
πύργων and joins χαλεπῶς ol τελευταῖοι x. The men on the
towers waited till the rest were safely across.

$41. 25. τὰ yuxpva—the unprotected side.
29. Bratws—like βιαιότερον ἀναγαγόμενοι 11. 33, ‘hard pressed.’
$51. 31. οἷος ἀπηλιώτου---80. ὄντος, as in Soph. OC. 83 ὡς

184 ΘΟΥΚΎΥΛΔΙΔΑΟΥ ISTOPION T

ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας, sc. οὔσης. It is very rarely that the partic.
is omitted in gen. abs. where the noun does not itself suggest a
partic. as in Soph. O7. 966 ὧν ὑφηγητῶν, sc. ὄντων : but the
omission is softened in this case by the analogy of the gen. of
time, as in νυκτός.

ἢ Bopéov—perhaps a marginal note, intended to fill up
the sense of μᾶλλον. (It has been suggested (1) that βορέου
should be changed to εὔρου, or (2) that μᾶλλον should be
transposed before 4.) But possibly two propositions are com-
pressed into one ; and the full sense is ‘as it is when the wind
is east: it is, in fact, more watery then than when the wind is
north.’ (So Chambry, Rév. de phil. ’97.)

82, ὑπονειφομένη.-- οἷ. Herod. 11. 13 ὕεται ἡ χώρη, Xen.
Hell. τι. 4, 18 νειφόμενοι ἀπῆλθον : for ὑ. is properly ‘ being
thinly besnowed.’

34. ἐγένετο. . ἡ διάφενξις --- οἵ, vil. 41 τὴν κατάφευξιν
ἐποιοῦντο ‘were seeking refuge.’ The idea of success is con-
tained in δια-. (I cannot agree with Classen that ἐγένετο
here means ‘proved successful’: that sense is confined in
Attic to old phrases like ἐγένετο τὰ ἱερά, cf. ἐ. τὰ διαβατήρια Vv.
55. In vi. 74 and vill. 57 ylyvecOac=merely ‘take place.’
καὶ ἡ Suddevits=‘ the means of successful escape too (as well
as the difficult crossing)’ was mainly owed to (i.e. more than
to any other cause: meaning that it was a narrow thing).

35. ϑιὰ τοῦ χειμῶνος τὸ p.—the order as in Herod. ; οἵ, e.g.
I. 32 μετὰ τῆς ξυμμαχίας τῆς αἰτήσεως.

24 81]. 4. τὸ τοῦ ᾿Ανδροκράτους ἡρῴον---5ῃτῖπο of a Plataean
‘hero,’ a well-known landmark on the road, evidently in
Plataean territory and not far from the Asopus. Introd.’p. xix.

5. ἥκιστ᾽ <év>—after such words as μάλιστα the accidental
omission of ἄν is so frequent in some mss. where the error
is obvious that it seems unlikely that νομίζω σε ποιῆσαι can=
‘IT think you may do it.’ Cf. Xen. Occ. 11, 14 ἡνίκα for ἡνίκ᾽
ἄν, 18, 1 πότερα for πότερ᾽ ἄν, Mem. tv. 8, 8 μάλιστα for μάλιστ᾽
ἄν, in which instances the verb, being in opt., betrays the error.
In our passage if ἥκιστα is read, we should render ‘thinking
that the enemy had not formed a suspicion.’

opas—subject of τραπέσθαι.

8. πρὸς Κιθαιρῶνα καὶ Apvds κεφαλάς 1.6. making for
the pass of the Oak’s Heads from which they would descend to
Attica. For the roads see Introd. p. xix.

§ 21. 12. τὴν πρὸς τὸ Spos—they turned SE. and crossed

NOTES 135

Cithaeron at a point E. of the road taken by the enemy.
It is not meant that they actually touched—

Ὑσιάς 7’ ᾿Ερυθράς θ᾽ at Κιθαιρῶνος λέπας
νέρθεν κατῳκήκασιν.

(Eur. Bacchae, 751.)
16. πλειόνων---ο. 20, 2.

§ 31.19. κατὰ χώραν éyévovro—‘ went to their station.’ κατὰ
χώραν usually with μένειν (certa sede manet) ; with ἐᾶν Demosth.
XXviI. 60. For γενέσθαι κατά cf. καθ᾽ ἕν y. ‘to concentrate’ ;
τὴν χάλαζαν εὐχόμενοι μὴ καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς y. Demosth. 1x. 33.

24, ἐσπένδοντο-- σπονδὰς ἐζήτουν ποιεῖσθαι schol. With the
internal accus. ἀναίρεσιν cf. ο. 109 ἀναχώρησιν ἐσπείσαντο ἅπασι.

811, 4. πλεύσας ἐς Πύρραν καὶ ἐξ αὐτῆς πεζῇ --ἴνγο stages
in the scheme by which διαλαθὼν ἐσέρχεται : and so πεΐῇ ‘by
land’ is co-ordinated with πλεύσας, and is equivalent to πεζῇ
ἐλθών.

6. ἢ ὑπερβατὸν qv—edd. do not agree whether this means
(1) that the ‘torrent-bed’ interrupted the Athenian wall, or
(2) that the wall, though unbroken, was lower at this point.
ὑπερβατόν hardly admits of (1). A third suggestion (3) is
that ὑποβατόν should be read, meaning that Salaethus crawled
under the wall through an outlet. As for (2), if we compare
c. 18, 4-6, it seems strange that the A. should have been so
simple as to leave the wall low at the χαράδρα : but Thue. has
omitted some detail that would have made things clear—as he
is apt todo. See Introd. p. xv.

8. mpoéSpois—rois ἄρχουσι schol. For the νῆες see c. 16.

10. προαποπεμφθῆναί re—cf. 1. 87 εἶπον ὅτι. . δοκοῖεν. .,
βούλεσθαι δὲ...

11. τούτων ἕνεκα. . ἐπιμελησόμενος. οἵ, 1. 80 ἐμπειρίᾳ...
νομίσαντα.

8.2]. 18. πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους -- [ὍΠπ| passages like v. 44
πρὸς τοὺς "A, μᾶλλον εἶχον τὴν γνώμην it is clear that ὥστε
ξυμβαίνειν does not govern these words, but is an epexegesis.

8 11. 3. δύο καί can hardly be right, as the number is
repeatedly given as 40, e.g. cc. 25 and 29, and the suggestion
that the two Lesbian triremes (cc. 4 and 5) are here included is
not probable. Rather than suppose that a commentator
wrongly added in the two Peloponnesian ships mentioned in
ce. 5, 4 and 25, 1, I prefer to think we have a confusion as the
outcome of mistaking μ' (40) for β΄ (2),

25

26

136 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

4, ἄρχοντα. . προστάξαντες is a phrase in Thuc. for
appointment to a special command, and even the order is
exactly as in VII. 19: so ἄρχοντα for ἔχοντα is a certain
correction. vavapxos means that he held the annual office of
high admiral.

7. d&pcbotépwlev—through the dispatch of the ships and the
invasion.

8. tats ναυσὶν. . KatamAcovoars—the transl. ‘send out a
fleet against the ships sailing to M.’ is impossible, because (1)
the partic. cannot be attributive unless vavoly is placed after
Μυτιλήνην, and (2) ἐπιβοηθεῖν + dat. = ‘ hasten to help.” Hence
either we must alter the text—Steup brackets καταπλεούσαις
—or, better, render ‘when they were sailing.’ So Stahl refers
ταῖς v. καταπλεούσαις to the Athenians and renders ‘sail with
their ships to M. and come to help,’ as if we had καταπλέοντες.

§ 21. 10. Cleomenes and Pleistoanax were sons of the famous
Pausanias. In 445 B.c., when Euboea and Megara revolted
from Athens, Pleistoanax had invaded Attica, but had
retreated when Pericles returned from Euboea: he was exiled
for this, and his young son Pausanias reigned in his stead.

11. vewrépov, ‘too young.’ The δέ after πατρός is not
justified by the constr., since no description of Cleomenes has
preceded ; hence Kriiger suggests that ἐπίτροπος has fallen out
after ἔτι. There may, however, be ἃ slight anacoluthon.

§ 31.13. [kat]—el τι é. is clearly added as an explanation to
Th. . τετμημένα.

16. pera τὴν δευτέραν --ἰ.6. that of 430 B.c., see last n. on
c. 1. The present invasion is the fourth.

§ 41.17. émusévovres—equivalent to προσδοκῶντες, hence fut.
infin. : the aor. inf. in ὁ. 2 expresses result, not expectation ;
-ef. Soph. Z’rach. 1176 μὴ ἐπιμεῖναι τοὐμὸν ὀξῦναι στόμα.

19. ἐπεξῆλθον with τέμνοντες, ‘pressed forward with,’ not
‘over-ran.’

27 = § 21. 7. ὁπλίζει---[ο make hoplites of them, the defensive
armour, shield and breastplate, had to be distributed.

§ 31.10. κατὰ EvAAdyous y.—these meetings were, of course,
informal.

Οϑ 81].1. οἱ ἐν τοῖς m.—oi τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράττοντες.

2. ἀποκωλύειν ---ἰ mss. give fuf., but the infin. after

δύναμαι and its equivalents is prolate.

6. ᾿Αθηναίοις pév—the conditions are stated in the loose

NOTES 137

form frequently found in treaties, etc.: (1) two points in
favour of the A. are connected; (2) some supply ἐξεῖναι to
ἀποστέλλειν, but it is better to make the latter depend directly
on ὥστε ; (8) δῆσαι, ete. also depend on ὥστε.

11. ἐν ὅσῳ -- μέχρι οὗ, cf. c. 52, 8. It isa similar constr. to
that in Tityre, dwm redeo. Classen saw a combination of (1)
ἐν ὅσῳ ἂν ἀπῶσι and (2) ἕως ἂν πάλιν ἔλθωσι.

8.2 1. 17, ὅμως ---ἰη spite of the guarantee; cf. c. 49, 1 n.
(Vollgraff brackets as a dittography from βωμούς.) καθίζειν
ἐπὶ βωμόν, ἀναστήσας (-- ἀναστῆναι πείσας), and κατατίθεσθαι és
are technical in this connexion. With ἀναστήσας ὥστε μὴ
ἀδικῆσαι cf. ἀναστήσαντες ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν 1. 126.

19. μέχρι οὗ without ἄν, as in Herod. (μέχρι οὗ is not used
in verse). J/.7. § 620.

§ 3 1. 21. προσεκτήσατο---[ῃ common object, as usual,
accommodated to the partic., πέμψας.

811. 4. evSérpupav—Steup thinks’ that we should read 29
ἐνδιατρίψαντες or remove, mainly because τοὺς μὲν. . ἑάλωκεν
gives the result of the slowness in both parts of the voyage; more
prob. Thue. would have written ἐκομίσθησαν below, but altered
the form of the sentence at that point to add the result of
κομισθέντες in λανθάνουσι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους--- ἴον the ships could
not have been detected by the Athenians ἐκ τῆς πόλεως so long
as they were on the Peloponnesian coast (there was no Athenian
fleet out there now).

6, τοὺς μὲν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως "A.—those remaining at home in
contrast with those at Lesbos. (The attempt to fix upon any
definite fleet seems to be a mistake. Ships in port may, of
course, be meaut. )

7. πρὶν δὴ τῇ Δήλῳ Eoxov—though no actual neg. precedes,
the whole effect is neg. ; ef. c. 104, and J/.7'..§ 635. With the
dat. constr., which is poetical, for és or κατά, cf. c. 5 αὐτοῖς...
ἀφικνεῖται, (which is nearer to the dat. of interest), and c. 33,
4, After leaving Delos they had no fear of A. ships.

8. Ἱκάρῳ καὶ Muxévm—the goal ultimately reached is
mentioned first, as not uncommonly.

§ 21.11. ἡμέραι δὲ... ἑαλωκνίᾳ.- 110. “Δ. now reckoned seven
days’; cf. τ. 18, 4, Herod. 11. 145 Ηρακλέϊ ὅσα φασὶ εἷναι ἔτεα
és" Αμασιν, Xen. Hell. 11. 1, 27 ἡμέρα ἣν πέμπτη ἐπιπλέουσι Tots
A@nvaios. The insertion of μάλιστα even with small numbers
is a mannerism of Thue.

14, ἐκ τῶν παρόντων ---“ under the circumstances.’

30

138 SOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

§ 11. 4. ὥσπερ Exonev—‘as we are,’ without change of plan,
here implying ‘at once,’ but not always so: the meaning
implied depends on the context.

§ 21. 5. ἀνδρῶν depends on τὸ ἀφύλακτον, equivalent to
τῶν : the gen. with neut. adj. or partic. as noun is a common
constr. with Thue.

7. καὶ wévu—‘most certainly,’ ‘undoubtedly,’ as in 11. 11
καὶ πάνυ ἐλπίζειν : here in contrast with εἰκὸς 6é . .

8. καὶ ἡμῶν ἡ ἀλκὴ τ. μάλιστα otoa—the version ‘ where
our strength chiefly lies’ is open to the objections (1) that the
fleet was not stronger than the Athenian fleet at Lesbos; that
could not fora moment be maintained after Phormio’s exploits ;
and (2) that the strength of the Pel. fleet, being unknown to
A., could be no reason why there should be πολὺ τὸ ἀφύλακτον
on the part of the enemy. Another rendering is ‘where defence
happens to be in the main our role,’ but I cannot find that ἀλκή
is ever used for ‘the defensive’ in opposition to ‘attack’; it
means, on the contrary, ‘defence or resistance’ in opposition
to ‘flight or submission’—something positive, not negative.
In spite of the objections, the first rendering is prob. right ;
the reasoning that Thue. puts into the mouth of speakers is not
always exact: the strength of the Pel. is not intended to be
compared with that of the A., and should have been referred to
in an independent sentence, but the love of antithesis has led
to the connexion of ἐκεῖνοί τε. . καὶ ἡμῶν. τυγχάνει οὖσα
marks the circumstance as unusual, and the vea/ comparison
is between the military and naval strength of Alcidas.

11. @s—‘ conscious that.’

§ 41. 16. Reading τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πολέμου, lit. ‘the strangeness
of war is just this sort of thing’; i.e. the carelessness of the
victor with the corollary of a sudden and wholly unexpected
attack. In φυλάσσοιτο and évopév only the carelessness of the
victor is kept in view, but that the corollary is included in 76
τοιοῦτον is proved (1) by the vague inclusive pron. in place of
τοῦτο. (2) by τὸ καινόν, which could not mean τὸ ἀφύλακτον
merely, but must include τὸ ἀπροσδόκητον. (Steup conjectures
τὸ κοινόν, ‘ where war shows itself notoriously impartial’: this
makes the sentence easier to understand, but I do not think
καινόν impossible. Many edd. see in τὸ καινόν a reference only
to sudden attack—rd προσπεσεῖν ἄφνω : I do not understand
how καὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἐνορῶν can be explained on this view. τὸ
κενόν, ‘the vanity,’ is as tolerable as τὸ καινόν in itself, but is
more likely to be a mistake for τὸ καινόν than vice versa. )

NOTES 139

17. 8—governed by φυλάσσοιτο and ἐνορῶν, or perhaps—in
strictness—adré is supplied from it to ἐνορῶν, for the position
of τε does not make this impossible.

§11. 8. οἱ AéoBror—for these see ce. 4, 4, 5, 4.
8. ἐλπίδα δ᾽ elvar—se. ἀποστῆσαι.

ἀκουσίως---ἰ.6. ‘no one was unwilling to see them
come,’ the adverb applying to οὐδενί, not to the subject of
ἀφῖχθαι : cf. Soph. Antig. 70 ἐμοῦ γ᾽ ἂν ἡδέως (sc. ἐμοὶ) Spans
μέτα.

9, καὶ τὴν πρόσοδον. . ὑφέλωσι---Ῥ418}16] to ἀποστήσωσιν,
‘(that) they might gradually draw away this which was the
main source of A. revenue.’ Not ‘one of the chief sources’ ;
and the position of ταύτην renders a second τήν unnecessary.
The φόρος from the Carian and Ionian cities is meant ; they
had been grouped together and treated as one since 436 B.c.,
and the lists in CJA. vol. i. show that this combined φόρος
was the largest item in the Athenian “πρόσοδοι. (ἢν before
ὑφέλωσι can scarcely be right: the loss of the φόρος would be
the necessary outcome of the revolt of Ionia, and could hardly
be stated as an independent condition of what follows, however
that be understood. )

10. καὶ ἅμα... δαπάνη ylyvntat—‘and at the same time,
in case the Athenians should blockade them (in the Ionian
port), the Athenians might be put to expense.’ (A majority of
MSS. gives ἢν ἐφορμῶσιν αὐτοῖς ---οΟΥ αὐτοὺς --- δαπάνη σφίσι
γίγνηται, i.e. ‘if the Peloponnesians should blockade the
Athenians, they (the Pel.) might have a fund to draw on, viz.
the @édpos.’ The objections to this are, as I think, (a) ἢν
ἐφορμῶσιν αὐτοῖς is too vague: surely the Lesbians and Ionians
cannot be thinking here of a blockade of the Attic coast—e. 15,
1—and an undertaking of such magnitude—see ec. 16, 1—
could not possibly be suggested in this casual way—and the
alternative explanation, that the proposal is that Alcidas shall
‘maintain a squadron of observation in Ionian waters,’ with a
victorious Athenian fleet of equal numbers at Mytilene—ef.
especially c. 33, 1—is out of the question. (b) It is true that
δαπάνη can mean ‘inoney for spending,’ where the context
makes the drift clear, but it is hardly possible that δαπάνη τινὶ
γίγνεται can mean anything but δαπανᾶται ὑπό τινος, according
to the idiom ; and there is force in Kriiger’s remark that the
previous sentence here decidedly suggests the idea of ‘ loss.’)

12. Πισσούθνην --Ἰοπΐα and Caria were included in his
satrapy. As Persia claimed and did not receive tribute from

140 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION Γ

the Greek cities, it was by no means unlikely that the satrap
might be induced to aid the enemies of Athens.

§ 21.13. τὸ πλεῖστον τῆς γνώμης elxe—‘strongly inclined to,
‘regarded it as decidedly best,’ like the Herodotean πλεῖστος
γνώμην εἰμί,

14. Μυτιλήνης ὑστερήκει---“ἰοο late for’ means here ‘too
late to help,’ as in Xen. Ages. 2, 1 ws ὑστερήσειε τῆς πατρίδος.

32 §11. 1. mapémder—down the coast of Ionia.

§ 21.5. ἐς τὴν "Ederov—though part of the Athenian em-
pire, E. could not hinder the fleet from entering the harbour,

6. Yaplwv—the Samian exiled oligarchs living on the coast
opposite Samos ; cf. ο, 19.

7. οὐ καλῶς τὴν “EAAdSa eXevOepodv—that she was the
Liberator of Greece was the claim of Sparta in the war, her
ἀξίωσις THs ἀρετῆς (1. 69). The most striking comment on this
claim comes in Xen. Hel. 111. 5, 13, in the speech of a Theban
at Athens thirty years after this time: ots ὑμῶν ἀπέστησαν
φανεροί εἰσιν é&nmarnkdres* ἀντὶ yap ἐλευθερίας διπλῆν αὐτοῖς
δουλείαν παρεσχήκασιν.

8, εἰ διέφθειρεν ---(1) εἰ in the sense of ὅτι or ἐπεί, (2) for
διέφθειρεν, Where we expect διαφθείρει, see IL. 1΄. ὃ 691.

χεῖρας ἀνταιρομένους---80 Herod. vir. 209, Xen. Cyr. v.
4, 26 ἐάν τις ὅπλα ἀνταίρηταί σοι.

§ 31.15. δρῶντες yap—showing how it came that Alcidas
had so many prisoners. The connexion is a little loose.

18. μὴ. . παραβαλεῖν---{Π6 inf. appears to be fut. ; the μή
is produced by the preceding neg. and might have been omitted ;
the constr. is unusual. παραβάλλω intrans., as with δια-,
éo-, etc.

33 §11. 3. &Oy—pluperf. in sense ; he must have touched at
Clarus while sailing from Embaton to Ephesus.

4, Σαλαμινίας καὶ Ilapadov—for the two state triremes
see a dict. of antiquities.

§ 21. 10. ris’ Hpvdpatas—see c. 29.

13. καὶ 8s—although, by the defenceless condition of Ionia,
it was easy to stay. ἅμα with reference to παραπλέοντες,

15. αὐτάγγελοι S€—it is better, with Classen, to regard
ἀτειχίστου. . πόλεις as a parenthesis, and this sentence as a
direct continuation from καὶ πανταχόθεν.

NOTES 141

8.31. 19. οὐκέτι ἐν καταλήψει éhalvero—sc. ὁ ᾿Αλκίδας, ‘was
clearly no longer to be caught’; οἵ, VI. 60 ὡς οὐκ ἐν παύλῃ
ἐφαίνετο (τὸ πρᾶγμα). (I do not venture to disturb this
traditional explanation ; but I think it possible that Paches is
the subject of ἐφαίνετο, and that ἐν x. ἐ. means ‘was clearly
likely to catch him’; cf. ὁ. 15 ἐν καρποῦ ξυγκομιδῇ ἦσαν.)

21. μετεώροις---80. ταῖς ᾿Αλκίδου ναυσίν.

οὐδαμοῦ ἐγκαταληφθεῖσαι.. παρασχεῖν --- ‘they were
not caught anywhere and (so) compelled to entrench themselves
and to cause the Athenians the trouble of guarding and blockad-
ing them.’ For παρέχειν with words denoting trouble cf. vir. 70
ἔκπληξίν τε καὶ ἀποστέρησιν τῆς ἀκοῆς παρέχειν, and πράγματα 7.

81]. 1. πάλιν---“ὈΔοκ,᾿ see ἐπανεχώρει, ‘turned back,’ above. 834.

2. κατῴκηντο--οἴὗ, 1. 120 ἐν πόρῳ κατῳκημένου. Thue.
uses the mid. forms only in the perf. and pluperf. ; so Herod.
Notium was the port of Colophon. Aristotle tells us that
Colophon and Notium were not well suited to form a single
state: hence στάσις. It was an exaggerated case, he says, of
Athens and the Piraeus ; and the Piraeus is more democratic than
the city. Now Colophon had been under an oligarchy of the
rich ; and at the beginning of the Peloponnesian war, this
oligarchy, it appears, wanted to get the city out of the hands of
Athens, and invited in the ‘ barbarians,’ favouring, apparently,
reunion with Persia. The majority migrated to Notium, but a
fresh στάσις broke out, and one party got help from the satrap
Pissuthnes and was joined by the oligarchs from Colophon.
The expelled democrats now sought aid from Paches. (We do
not know who Itamanes was. )

5. κατὰ στάσιν ἰδίαν ---ἰδίαν cannot mean ‘intestine,’ and
ἰδίᾳ, ‘by one of the parties,’ is very probable; cf. c. 2. It is
possible, however, that ἰδίαν means ‘confined to Colophon,’
not extending to Notium.

6. padtrra—‘ about.’ The date is 430 B.c,
8.2]. 9. of pév . . of 8€—partitive apposition.

10. ἐπικούρους ᾿Αρκάδων --ἴ.6. Arcadian μισθοφόροι. They
served as mercenaries already in the Persian wars, and are
familiar as such in the expedition of the Ten Thousand. The
mercenaries must have been in the service of Pissuthnes.

11. ἐν διατειχίσματι- ἃ place divided by a wall from the
rest of the town. διατειχέζειν is ‘to separate by a wall.’ With
the force from Pissuthnes came also the pro-Persian party from
Colophon, which was now part of the citizen body cf Notium.

142 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

14, ὑπεξελθόντες τούτους --- [Ὁ the accus. Kriiger quotes
Eurip. frag. Alemene ὅμως ἀγῶνα τόνδε δεῖ μ᾽ ὑπεκδραμεῖν.

881]. 16. τῶν : the Ms. τὸν is a form of mistake that is fre-
quent in similar passages in Mss. of Xenophon.

19. 6 μέν after προκαλεσάμενος involves an anacoluthon, like
that of 7. vi. 509 ὁ δ᾽ ἀγλαΐηφι πεποιθὼς | ῥίμφα ἑ γοῦνα φέρει :
but it is not usual in Homer. Here we have a sing. nom.
followed by two contrasted subjects. For the opposite form, a
plur. nom. followed by only one subject, ef. 711. 111. 211 ἄμφω δ᾽
ἑζομένω yepapwrepos fev ᾿Οδυσσεύς.

22. προσδεχομένων ---ἰΠ subst. to be supplied, as in 1. 8
ἐπαγομένων αὐτούς, 11. 52 ἐναποθνῃσκόντων (sc. ἀνθρώπων). Cf,
Οὐ δ; Ἵς

§ 41. 28, οἰκιστάς---[Π6 ‘oecists’ or ‘founders’ settled the
government and started the new colony, as was usual. Cf. νι.
δ οἰκιστὴς γενόμενος κατῴκισε Καμάριναν.

85 81]. 2. As regards Pyrrha and Eresus see ce. 18. For
« Salaethus see c. 25. For the Mytilenaeans in Tenedos, c. 28.

§ 21. 9. τοῖς δὲ Aourots—the dat. of accompaniment, frequent
with words like στρατός and ναῦς.

36 81]. 3. mapexspevov—‘ propose,’ ‘ put forward.’

§21. 7. γνώμας érovotvro— offered various opinions’ or
‘made proposals,’ in the Assembly, of course.

10. émuxadotyres—anacoluthon, as though a personal constr.
had preceded. Cf. 11. 53 θεῶν φόβος οὐδεὶς ἀπεῖργε, τὸ μὲν
κρίνοντες, VI. 34 ἔρως ἐνέπεσε. . εὐελπίδες ὄντες, Eur. Hee.
971 αἰδώς μ᾽’ ἔχει. . τυγχάνουσα.

ll. τήν τε ἄλλην. . καὶ προσξυνελάβοντο---(1) they
reproached them with revolting under specially grave circum-
stances, οὐκ ἀρχόμενοι ; (2) their rage was largely due to the
appearance of a Pel. fleet on the Ionian coast. As the sentence
stands it is illogical, since τήν τε ἄλλην should be followed by
something like καὶ ὅτι τὰς ναῦς ἐπηγάγοντο. (As to Classen’s
insertion of καί after daécrac.v—on which there has been some
subtle argument—we may regard it as possible, but scarcely
necessary.) For the change from partic. to finite verb cf. v. 61
βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε. . Kal ὅμηροι ἦσαν. It is frequent in Herod.

13. mpootuveAdBovro—for this reading cf. Iv. 47 ξυνελάβοντο
τοῦ τοιούτου οὐχ ἥκιστα οἱ στρατηγοὶ κατάδηλοι ὄντες. The
emphasis is, of course, on the partic. (τολμήσασαι), as often.
οὐκ ἐλάχιστον is adverbial. The other reading, προσξυνεβάλετο,

NOTES 143

‘contributed,’ τὸ é. (sc. μέρος) τῆς ὁρμῆς being object,—cf. Ath.
Pol. 19 συνεβάλλετο οὐκ ἐλάττω μοῖραν τῆς dpu7js—is defended by
IV. 25 αἴτιον δὲ ἣν of Λακεδαιμόνιοι προειπόντες and VIII. 9 αἴτιον
δὲ ἐγένετο. . of πολλοὶ οὐκ εἰδότες, but the present instance
goes further.

15. οὐ yap ἀπὸ βραχείας Siavolas—‘it was no small design,
they thought, that had led them to revolt,’ viz. the design of.
bringing about a revolt of Ionia with the aid of the Pel. fleet.

§ 31.18. &yyedov—pred. to τριήρη. :

§ 41. 20. μετάνοιά tis—ris is often added thus to words
expressing feelings that rise half involuntarily, as with ῥώμη,
ὄκνος, κατήφεια (‘dejection’), φειδώ (‘reluctance ’).

21. dpov . . atrfovs—in the tragic style, and unusually
rhythmical for Thue. (πέφευγε τὸ εἶδος, says Hermogenes) : the
sentence breaks into two corresponding halves after πόλιν, μέγα
being elided and ἢ οὐ, of course, counting as one long.

22. μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ---ἤ implies a negative, and any sentence
implying a neg. is apt to be strengthened by an expressed neg.
(M.T. § 815): cf. 11. 62 οὐδ᾽ εἰκὸς χαλεπῶς φέρειν μᾶλλον ἢ
οὐ... ὀλιγωρῆσαι.

8 51. 24. πρέσβεις-- ο. 28.
25. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων .---[Π8 order as in 6. 22, ὅ.

παρεσκεύασαν --- “σοῦ them to.’ οἱ ἐν τέλει are the
‘government,’ i.e., presumably, the Strategi, who, in time of
war, could have a special meeting of the Ecclesia summoned.

26. αὖθις γνώμας mpobetvar —‘allow a fresh debate’: to
re-open a matter that had been settled in a recent meeting of
the Ecclesia seems to have rendered the person responsible to
impeachment; but the Ecclesia, as the sovereign power, could by
a majority of course do anything, provided that the Prytanies
and the president of the meeting consented to submit a
proposal for discussion. (The evidence on the point is
doubtful; but the account here given reconciles the various
passages that bear on it.)

28. ἔνδηλον Av—the personal constr., esp. common with
δῆλος.

29. τινας ---΄ persons’: after τοὺς ἐν τέλει we should expect
αὐτούς ; but the speakers, rather than the officials, are referred
to. Aspecial Assembly (σύγκλητος ἐκκλησία) was summoned for
the purpose. (G. Gilbert, B. zur innern Geschichte Athens, 142,
assigns the debates on Mytilene to the end of the official year

144 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΑΟΥ IZTOPION T

428-7. Itis probable that Cleon was in that year Strategus,
having replaced Lysicles the προβατοπώλης, who had been
killed in Caria in the winter. Busolt, however, places the
debates in the first prytany of the following year, 427-6, when
Cleon and those like him were replaced in the strategia by
Nicias and Laches, men strongly opposed to Cleon. In either
case, it is obvious that party-feeling must have run very high
just at this time.

§ 6 1. 32. τὴν mpotépav—sce. γνώμην, ‘ proposal,’ from γνῶμαι
above: νικᾶν is ‘to carry,’ asin νικᾷ ἕτερον ψήφισμα Φιλοκράτης,
Aeschin, rr. 63. (1 do not think that the sense of γνώμη
shifts here from ‘views’ to ‘decree,’ and that consequently
τῇ προτέρᾳ ‘on the previous day’ should be read. )

33. Bravdtaros—this is the first time that Thuc. mentions
Cleon, though he had been rising for some time. The views of
him expressed by ancient authors, whether as politician or as
orator, are almost uniformly unfavourable. As regards Thue.’s
opinion of him, and the following speech, see Introd. p. xxxvii.

ΘΙ g11.2. Sypoxparlav—object of ἔγνων, but in sense subj. of
ἄρχειν. ἀδύνατον, ‘incapable of,’ the neut. as in Homer’s οὐκ
ἀγαθὸν πολυκοιρανίη.

8. év—of the cause.

§21. 6. ἀδεὲς kal ἀνεπιβούλευτον give the same thing from
two sides: you neither fear your neighbour nor cause him to
fear you.

ὅ τι ἂν. . ἁμάρτητε ἢ... evdare—we know too little of
the working of the Athenian empire to specify acts of clemency
on the part of Athens. From what we do know we should
say that Athens was severe enough; but we must remember
that the standard of the times was very different from ours:
any right that Athens did not take from her allies she regarded
as a privilege granted to them. οἴκτῳ is parallel to λόγῳ
πεισθέντες ; supply αὐτοῖς to ἐνδῶτε.

9. ἐπικινδύνως. . és ὑμᾶς {Π16 emphasis is on this: hence
the dislocation of the order. Tr. ‘you think that such
weakness does not . . bring danger to you.’

10. οὐκ és τὴν. . χάριν--- without gaining the gratitude’ ;
they take a concession as a sign of weakness.

11. τυραννίδα ἔχετε τὴν &pxqv—repeating words attributed
to Pericles at 11. 63.

12. καὶ πρὸς. . &pxopévovs—parallel to τυραννίδα, the
constr. with πρός (after ἀρχή) like φιλία or πόλεμος πρός.

NOTES 145

13. ot—very weakly supported by Ms. evidence. There is
a similar case at Iv. 10, where the mss. give τὸ δυσέμβατον
ἡμέτερον νομίζω" μενόντων μὲν ἡμῶν ξύμμαχον γίγνεται, but
Dionysius quotes the passage with ὃ μενόντων etc. Without
the rel., we must assume an epexegesis of ἄκοντας ἀρχομένους
with asyndeton.

14. ἐξ ὧν... mwepryévyoOe—for ἐξ ἐκείνων &, internal accus,
to π., ‘as a consequence of the superiority you have established
over them by strength (hinting at the successive reductions to
the status of tributary subjects) and not by their willing
obedience.’ εὔνοια, as Arist. Hth. rx. 5, 3 says, δι’ ἀρετὴν καὶ
ἐπιείκειάν τινα γίνεται, ὅταν τῳ φανῇ καλός τις ἢ ἀνδρεῖος.

8. 31.18. ὧν ἂν δόξῃ πέρι---ἴο" περὶ ἐκείνων ἃ ἂν δόξῃ, ‘as re-
gards measures that we have passed.’ Thus the neut. nom. ἅ is
here attracted asin VII. 67 βλάπτεσθαι ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται,
In (ἃ) ἂν δόξῃ the allusion is to ψηφίσματα passed in the
Ecclesia,

χείροσι νόμοις. . ἀκύροις---ἰῦ has been thought that
there is an allusion here to definite νόμοι that forbade a
psephism to be reconsidered, perhaps within some fixed period
(cf. n. on ὁ. 36,5); but the reference seems more general. (The
objection that Cleon would, if there were such an allusion,
definitely threaten a γραφὴ παρανόμων has not much force, for
(1) Thue. does not deal in the technicalities of Attic legal
procedure, which were not of sufficiently ‘universal’ interest
for him, with his view of history ; and (2) in vi. 14 sqq., where
Nicias alludes to some rules about the re-discussion of a
psephism, Alcibiades, in his rejoinder, makes no capital out
of the rules at all—does not even allude to the point.) Arnold
thought that the psephism under revision is itself meant under
νόμοι, and that the confusion is meant to be intentional on Cleon’s
part. It is best, I think, to consider the passage intentionally
vague and rhetorical: revision of psephisms leads easily to
revision of laws in a democracy. This general application is
borne out by ἀμαθία τε κτλ., which would be an odd addition
to a clause containing a precise reference.

19. κρείσσων éoriv—the personal constr. : ‘it is better for
a state to have.’ (This explanation is strongly supported by
ὠφελιμώτερον (sc. πόλει) and ἄμεινον οἰκοῦσι Tas πόλεις. Classen
says ‘is stronger’; but the point is what is good for a state,
not what a state can do.)

20. ἀμαθία μετὰ σωφροσύνης---“ ignorance when combined
with self-restraint,’ no doubt a hit at the πεπαιδευμένοι, and
the sentiment so outrageous to an educated Athenian, that we

L

146 BOYKYAIAOY ITZTOPION L

must assume that it was really uttered by Cleon in substance,
For the evil results of ἀμαθία note the following passage
(Euripides, frag.) :

γνώμαις yap ἀνδρὸς εὖ μὲν οἰκοῦνται πόλεις

εὖ δ᾽ οἶκος, εἴς 7 αὖ πόλεμον ἰσχύει μέγα"

σοφὸν γὰρ ἕν βούλευμα τὰς πολλὰς χέρας

νικᾷ, σὺν ὄχλῳ δ᾽ ἀμαθία πλεῖστον κακόν.
σωφροσύνη and ἀκολασία are often contrasted in the language of
popular philosophy: εὑρήσετε τὴν μὲν ἀκολασίαν. . τῶν κακῶν
αἰτίαν γιγνομένην, τὴν δὲ σωφροσύνην τῶν ἀγαθῶν, Isocr. de pace
8 119. In οἵ re φαυλότεροι κτλ. we meet a sentiment that is
frequent in Euripides.

23. mpés—‘as compared with.’

§ 4]. 25. τῶν τε νόμων codwrepor—hence they despise the
laws: a reference back to μηδὲ γνωσόμεθα ete.

26. τῶν τε αἰεὶ... meprylyverOat—the re . . re puts the
contempt for laws and the opposition to all counsel on the saine
footing as joint parts of their conduct. περιγίγνεσθαι, ‘to get
the better’ of it, by opposing it.

27. ὡς ἐν ἄλλοις μείζοσιν. . yvounv—‘as though they could
not find any greater subject on which to display their talent’ ;
the subject in debate is just the one, they think, on which they
are qualified to give an opinion. (Cf. VII. 64 οὐκ ἂν ἐν ἄλλῳ
μᾶλλον καιρῷ ἀποδειξάμενος.)

31. ἀδυνατώτεροι δὲ. . Adyov—in form exactly parallel to
the preceding clause ; but τοῦ καλῶς εἰπόντος is certainly pos-
sessive gen. to λόγον, together with which it refers to τῶν αἰεὶ
λεγομένων és τὸ κοινόν above. To ἀδυνατώτεροι supply ἢ οἱ
ξυνετώτεροι.

33. ἀπὸ τοῦ Yrov— fair,’ free from personal bias, cf. ο, 42 ;
more often ‘on equal terms.’ For ἀγωνιστής as a ‘rhetorical
prize-fighter,’ Bloomfield cites several exx.

34. ép00tvra.—‘ have a prosperous course’ ; cf. particularly
II. 60 πόλιν ὀρθουμένην )( σφαλλομένην. Here ὀρθοῦνται τὰ
πλείω corresponds to πολλὰ σφάλλουσι τὰς πόλεις above. There
is an exactly similar passage in Soph. Antig. 673-6. (The
rendering ‘ judge rightly ’ is certainly wrong.)

8 δ]. 84, &s—for οὕτως, usually only with καί, οὐδέ, μηδέ, in
prose.

96, παρὰ Sdéfav—‘contrary to our opinion,’ not, as in the
other cases in Thuc., ‘unexpectedly.’ (The conjecture παρὰ τὸ

NOTES 147

δόξαν, ‘contrary to what has been decided,’ is plausible ; but I
agree with Bloomfield that this is not really in point here: it
is not borne out by τῶν αἰεὶ λεγομένων... περιγίγνεσθαι and
τοῦ καλῶς εἰπόντος μέμψασθαι Noyov.)

81]. 1. ἐγὼ μὲν ὁ αὐτός εἰμι τῇ yvopy—similar words are
attributed to Pericles, 11. 61.

6. apBAurépa — ‘with anger more dulled,’ when there is
delay.

ἀμύνεσθαι -- for (τὸ) ἀμύνεσθαι as in Aesch. 4. 191
παρ᾽ ἄκοντας ἦλθε σωφρονεῖν, and elsewhere in Thue. The
addition of κείμενον (and perhaps ὄν) makes the omission ugly
and unusual. Cf. the schol. εἰ τὸ ἀμύνεσθαι τῷ παθεῖν ἔγγὺς
τεθείη.

8, ἀντίπαλον ὃν. . dvadkapPdver—‘is most adequate when
it recovers satisfaction’: the main emphasis on the partic., as
often. If ὄν is omitted, ἀντίπαλον agrees with τιμωρίαν---οἴ,
ἀμβλυτέρᾳ τῇ ὀργῇ above—and both form and sense are im-
proved. (Hude reads τοῦ παθεῖν, takes κείμενον as accus. abs.,
‘when it is proposed to take vengeance,’ and makes ὁ παθών
subj. of ἀναλαμβάνει, omitting ὄν with Haase. But what is
the point of saying κείμενον ἀμύνεσθαι where the sense calls
for ἀμυνόμενος 1) Some think ἀναλαμβάνει should be λαμβάνει
or ἂν λαμβάνοι, as in δίκην, τιμωρίαν, λαμβάνειν.

9. θαυμάζω δέ xrh.—there might be reason in opposing the
vote, if it were shown that either (1) the revolt is advantageous
to Athens ; or (2) though troublesome to us, it is indirectly a
gain because it does harm to the allies and renders them less an
object of fear to us.

§ 21.14. τὸ πάνυ Soxodv—‘ the universal opinion of men’: he
must try to prove a paradox. (According to another view, the
allusion is to the psephism. But (1) τὸ πάνυ δοκοῦν, ‘what is
generally agreed upon,’ would hardly be a true description of
the vote ; and (2) τὸ δόξαν would certainly be natural.)

15. κέρδει ---ἃ suggestion of bribery: the charge was a
common one against public men, and was often true. The
contrast in } . . ἤ 15 between an opponent who wants to show
his skill in oratory and one who is bribed to mislead. ἐκπονή-
σας is co-ordinate with πιστεύσας, and ἐπαιρόμενος gives the
motive that prompts him ἐκπονεῖν.

16. τὸ εὐπρεπὲς τοῦ Adyou—‘ what is plausible in the words,’
The whole of this section is a hit at the bad side of the new
rhetoric: it is piquant, because Cleon himself indulges in

38

148 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION T

rhetoric freely: this elaborate comparison to an ἀγών of rival
rhetoricians is itself full of it.

§ 41. 21. θεαταὶ μὲν. . ἔργων --- ‘spectators of words and
hearers of deeds’ is an artificial way of saying: you are content
to take the facts from what the orators say, and look on at the
debates, thus inverting the natural order of things at an ἀγών,
in which one would watch the athletes’ deeds and listen to the
literary men’s words: so badly do you, who are at once the
directors and the people attending, manage the ἀγῶνες. (The
explanations usually given of this passage do not seem to me
to give an intelligible meaning to the whole: (a) κακῶς
ἀγωνοθετεῖν does not mean ‘to be wrong in instituting a con-
test,’ but ‘to do so in the wrong way’; cf. the second and third
failings—dmardcOu ἄριστοι and ἕητοῦντες ἄλλο τε κτλ. : all
indicative of a topsy-turvy mind and (Ὁ) only with the latter
meaning—which is a natural one—does οἵτινες κτλ. give an
intelligible reason. )

23. ὡς δυνατὰ ylyverOa1—‘as practicable’: sc. ὄντα, cf. VI.
40 τοὺς λόγους ws ἔργα δυναμένους κρινεῖ.

24, τὰ δὲ π. ἤδη---80. σκοποῦντες.

οὐ τὸ. . ἀκουσθέν, ‘not taking what has been done as
more trustworthy through having seen it, than what you have
heard (about 10). (It has been objected to ὄψει that we need
ἀκροάσει or ἀκοῇ to contrast with it; but the whole clause
corresponds to ws δυνατὰ γίγνεσθαι, and=as τὸ ἀκουσθὲν
πιστότερον ὃν ἢ τὸ ὀφθέν : τὸ ἀκουσθέν itself contains the con-
trast to ὄψει : instead of saying τὸ ὀφθέν, Thuc. says τὸ δρασθέν
in order to introduce again the contrast between ἔργα and λόγοι
---δρασθέν and ἀκουσθέν.)

26, ἐπιτιμησάντων .--[Π6 readiness of speakers to criticize
adversely the action of public men, if opponents, is often
insisted on; but it is odd that Cleon, who was ever ready to
censure, should talk so.

§ 51. 27. pera kawwdrnros—equivalent to a dat. of cause, as
I. 32 μὴ μετὰ κακίας, δόξης δὲ μᾶλλον ἁμαρτίᾳ : cf. c. 42, 1.

ἀπατᾶσθαι ἄριστοι ---5.. ὄντες, co-ordinate with κακῶς
ἀγωνοθετοῦντες, the second way in which you are αἴτιοι : εὐπαρά-
Ὕωγος εἶ, θωπευόμενός Te χαίρεις κἀξαπατώμενος, Aristoph. Lg.
1115; -

28, μετὰ δϑδεδοκιμασμένου---80. λόγου, ‘when an approved
argument is stated’; ξυνέπεσθαι means ‘go with the speaker.’
(Another way is to take ξυνέπεσθαι μετά closely together, ‘to
follow the lead of’: I prefer the former.)

NOTES 149

29, δοῦλοι ὄντες x7TA.—-the whole down to ἀποβησόμενα is
epexegetic of ἄριστοι (ὄντες).

§ 61]. 80, καὶ μάλιστα pév— co-ordinate with δοῦλοι ὄντες.
βουλόμενοι would have made the sentence more symmetrical,
but cf. already J7iad 1x. 656 of δὲ ἕκαστος ἑλὼν... ἴσαν.

32, ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι τοῖς τοιαῦτα A€yovot—i.e. τοῖς τοιούτοις
ῥήτορσι, who applaud that one of their number who happens
to be speaking; ‘vying with speakers who use such argu-
ments,’ viz. ἄτοπα. (It is objected to τοιαῦτα that it cannot
be referred to τὰ ἄτοπα only, after what has preceded. But
it is to be noted that ὑπερόπται δὲ τῶν εἰωθότων is merely
parenthetical: had there been a μέν after δοῦλοι, the objection
would have been serious. )

33. τῇ yvouy—not to lag behind the rest ‘in insight.’ To
understand ‘ plan’ or ‘ purpose’ of the speaker (γνώμῃ governed
by ἀκολουθῆσαι) is not so good, because it is the external form,
not the meaning, that rivets their attention.

84, ὀξέως with λέγοντος, because λέγοντός τι cannot here
mean ‘says something important 07) sensible.’ On the other
hand, ὀξέως, when taken with λέγοντος, is rendered ‘shrewdly,’
‘cleverly’; but (1) ὀξύ, adj., would be natural, and (2) it seems
that λέγειν ὀξέως means not ‘speak shrewdly’ but ‘speak
rapidly’; it is only with words denoting mind that βραδύς,
ὀξύς mean ‘slow,’ ‘quick’ of wit. I should prefer to render
‘when any one is speaking rapidly.’

προεπαινέσαι --- 50. δοκεῖν, generally understood ‘to
approve’ it before it is uttered, but perhaps ‘to be first with
their approval.’

35, πρόθυμοι elva.—this may depend on ἀνταγωνιζόμενοι or,
more probably, on δοκεῖν, but, in either case, (εἶναι) βραδεῖς
does not give very good sense, and can hardly be excused on
the ground that the main emphasis falls on πρόθυμοι εἶναι ;
for—to mention only one ΟὈ]θούϊοη --- προαισθέσθαι and mpo-
νοῆσαι are plainly meant to be equal in importance. We
require εἰωθότες to make sound sense. The best solution
proposed is to consider καί before προαισθέσθαι and εἶναι as
spurious: the whole would then be closely connected with
προεπαινέσαι.

8 71. 37. ζητοῦντές τε κτλ. --ασαΐη going back to αἴτιοι δ᾽
ὑμεῖς, ‘seeking something different—one might almost say—
from the world in which we live ;’ dreamers.

39. ἁπλῶς te—a resumption of the substance of the whole
sentence.

150 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION [

40. σοφιστῶν θεαταῖς Kabnpévors—-‘men sitting as spec-
tators at a display of sophists,’ as shown in the Protagoras,
for example.

39 §11. 1. dv—neut. (θεαταῖς is pred. ; but as the comparison
is between θεαταί and βουλευόμενοι, καθημένοις is possibly, as
Lincke says, interpolated. )

3. μίαν wéduw—cf. ο. 113, 6.

§ 21. 4. ofrives—the dat. antecedent omitted. Distinguish
between οἵτινες μή and οἵτινες οὐ below.

7. νῆσον... μετὰ texav—thus secure against enemies.
The contrast to the previous sentence is stated in inverse
order: subjection—compulsion ; security—freedom. This is a
common arrangement of clauses in Thue.

9. ἐν w—of their condition. καὶ avro(—independently of
our help.

13. ἐπανέστησαν μᾶλλον ἢ ἀπέστησαν ---8ὴ armed rising
contrasted with a secession; but the application of the con-
trast to the circumstances of Lesbos is not exact, since
ἐπανάστασις implies a dominant power, which Athens ex
hypothesi was not.

14. μέν ye—‘ secession anyhow,’ whatever be the truth
about ἐπανάστασις. For the suppression of the 6é-clause after
this combination cf. Aristoph. dch. 154 τοῦτο μέν γ᾽ ἤδη
σαφές. (Append. i., Neil, Aristoph. Hquttes).

15. βίαιόν τι πασχόντων --- {Π||8. is far-fetched; and the
implied contrast about ἐπανάστασις would too obviously not
hold: hence the statement of it is suppressed.

17. Kalro.—‘ surely.’

καθ᾽ abtrots—‘by themselves,’ not μετὰ τῶν πολεμιω-
τάτων στάντες.

18, κτώμενοι---ὈΓΟΌΔΌΪΥ conative.

8.31. 19. παράδειγμα δὲ αὐτοῖς ---ἃβ παράδειγμα means ex-
ample, both as a warning and as an encouragement, it might
have been applied to both clauses with οὔτε ; but the second
has taken an independent form, cf. c. 96, 3.

τῶν πέλας. of others.’
22. τὰ Sevad—often of the dangers of war.
23. τὸ péANov— ‘the future’ )( παροῦσα.
24. μακρότερα. . Bovdfoews—‘having come to hope for

NOTES 151

what was beyond their strength, but less than their ambition.’
Clearly what they hoped for was the destruction of Athenian
power—€fyrncay ἡμᾶς διαφθεῖραι. But how was this ‘less
than they wanted’? what more could they want? Probably
we have here a sample of Cleon’s exaggeration and abuse, and
no definite meaning is to be looked for. It is enough for his
purpose that the Lesbians had wanted to revolt sooner than
they did (c. 2). (Herbst’s explanation, Zu Thuk. p. 82, that
μακρότερα means the power of Mytilene, and ἐλάσσω that of
Athens, seems far-fetched, and his rendering of τῆς βουλήσεως
is scarcely intelligible. )

26. ἐν @—‘ the moment that.’

yap—justifying the charge that they put might before
right. They had suffered no wrong, and they chose a time
when Athens was in difficulties.

$41. 28. αἷς av . . &@y—the clause forms the object to
τρέπειν. μάλιστα καὶ δι’ ἐλαχίστου, ‘most fully and most
suddenly,’ refers to the moment just alluded to in ἐν ᾧ @76n-
σαν ; it was καιρὸς ὡς οὔπω πρότερον, c. 13, 8. The revolt was
not really the unpremeditated thing that Cleon represents it to
have been. The ἀπροσδόκητος εὐπραξία refers to the difficulties
in which Athens was. (The objection to δι᾿ ἐλαχίστου that
the change of fortune on the part of the Mytilenaeans was not
sudden, but was gradually brought about by the events of the
war, rests on a confusion of facts and the rhetorical present-
ment of them.)

30. τὰ δὲ πολλὰ. . εὐτυχοῦντα aodadéctepa—‘in most
things ἀρ δον according to calculation is safer than pros-
perity that is a surprise.’ It is an extraordinary explanation
that makes τὰ πολλά, after the schol., adverbial accus., and
κατὰ Ἃ. εὐτυχοῦντα equivalent to τὰ. . εὐτυχοῦντα. The
constr. intended is clearly ἀσφαλέστερά (ἐστι) τὰ πολλὰ
εὐτυχοῦντατεεἰ εὐτυχεῖ: οἵ, 11. 18 (ἔφη) τὰ πολλὰ κρατεῖσθαι.
And there is no doubt about the reading being right: εὐτυχία,
a stable condition, is in contrast with εὐπραξία, a single event
(cf. 1. 33); a calm life unmarred by misfortune constituted
εὐτυχία (cf. 11. 44). Of course παρὰ δόξαν (εὐτυχοῦντα) gives
a different and paradoxical meaning to εὐτυχία. This doctrine
of Cleon seems to be based upon the philosophy of life professed
by his opponent Nicias. Cf. v. 16, of Nicias, διασώσασθαι
τὴν εὐτυχίαν.

33. ὡς εἰπεῖν ῥᾷον ---’ almost more easily.’

8 δ]. 84, χρῆν Sé—they would never have gone so far in

152 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ISTOPION Γ

their indulgence in ὕβρις had we long ago kept a tighter hand
on them.

35. μηδὲν διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων ---πΠ6 adverb (EM) is
better than διαφέροντας, and has, at any rate, as much Ms.
support as χρῆν just before, and it has, in addition, the
support of the text of the schol. and of Dio Cassius.

87. καὶ ἄλλως --- ‘in other cases as well,’ making the
application general.

§ 61. 40. τοῖς μὲν ὀλίγοις. . τὸν δὲ S4pov—the oligarchical
government had caused the revolt.

43. οἷς y éeqv—as this sentence refers especially to the
δῆμος, it would be better, perhaps, to put πάντες. . ἐπέθεντο
in 9 parenthesis—unless, with Stahl, we understand πάντες
(of τοῦ δήμου) and ὁμοίως (τοῖς ὀλίγοιΞ).

44, πάλιν ἐν τῇ πόλει εἶναι---΄ reinstated in their rights.’
For the sense of πόλις cf. IV. 106 πόλεώς τε. . στερισκόμενοι.

46. βεβαιότερον---80. τοῦ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν κινδύνου.

§71. 46. τῶν τε ξυμμάχων σκέψασθε... τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα
ov—(1) the old explanation of this passage (given by Goller,
for instance) was that τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα οὐ was equivalent to
ἕκαστον. c. 46, 2, where τίνα οἴεσθε ἥντινα οὐ is independent,
is strongly against this. Classen said that οἴεσθε merely
repeats σκέψασθε owing to the length of the sentence; and
this is accepted by subsequent edd. Classen’s view involves
also an anacoluthon, since σκέψασθε would be followed by
ris ὅστις οὐ with ind., not by τίνα ὅντινα ov. Against this
view is to be urged (a) the complication of the constr. intro-
duced by σκέψασθε, (b) the gen, τῶν τε ξυμμάχων, which, as
Classen says, depends not only on τοῖς. . ἀποστᾶσι, but also
on τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα ov, so that Thuc. had a clear view of
the constr. from the start. It is not unlikely that σκέψασθε
is meant to be parenthetical. (2) ris ὅστις οὐ is treated as a
single word.

δῶ. παθεῖν---ἃ second subject to 7.

§ 8 1. 53. ἀποκεκινδυνεύσεται --- ‘we shall find exposed to
utmost peril.’

δῦ. τῆς ἔπειτα προσόδου, δι᾿ ἣν ἰσχύομεν --- {1|60 relative
clause applies to τῆς προσόδου only, the revenue generally, not
to τῆς ἔπειτα π΄, the future revenue ; hence ἐκεῖθεν or ἐπετείου
has been conjectured for ἔπειτα, which the schol. already had
in the text. Neither conjecture wholly removes the difficulty ;

NOTES 153

and so δι’ ἣν ἰσχύομεν is thought by some to have been brought
in here from the very similar passage in c. 46, 3. It would
be better to read ἰσχύσομεν, ‘through which we may support
our power.’ τὸ λοιπόν is pleonastic after ἔπειτα, and perhaps
belongs to δι’ ἣν ἰσχύσομεν.

56. στερήσεσθε-- ‘ will have to go without.’

§ 11. 2. mpobetvar—of the orators. 40

v—S hope relying on (the speaker’s) eloquence,’
is contented with ‘hope gained by bribery (of the speaker),’
cf. c. 38, 2; one speaker’s eloquence, another’s venality, may
te him to take up the cause of Lesbos.

ξυγγνώμην τὴ ἐλερ ἀνθρωπίνως λήψονται---“{Πδὺ they
will ‘be excused for aving erred humanly,’ 1.6. through human
frailty not deliberately: πῶς ἂν τό γ᾽ ἄκον πρᾶγμ᾽ ἃν εἰκότως
ψέγοις ; Soph. OC. 977.

4, dkovres—the οὐ applies to this also, but is attracted to
the verb.

5. ξύγγνωμον -- ξυγγνώμης ἄξιον, as also, perhaps, in Iv. 98,
but not elsewhere.

§ 21. 7. rére—supply διεμαχεσάμην (the same idiom in 1. 86
and VI. 60). But μὴ λύειν τὰ π., which came into question only
in the second meeting, causes some difficulty. We must assume
either (1) that the sentence is developed as it proceeds, μὴ λύειν
τὰ π. not being supplied with τότε, or else, (2) that πρῶτον
(διεμαχεσάμην) means that Cleon had already in the previous
meeting seen that there would be an agitation for revision. (I
prefer the second solution. Brevity would excuse προδεδογμένα
as applied to a vote to be passed. The voting at the first
meeting must have been close ; and c. 36, 3 suggests anxiety
about getting it carried out. Kriiger had noticed that rére
πρῶτον is unsatisfactory according ‘to the usual explanation :
I think there must be a point in πρῶτον, as in Aristoph. Lg.
339 πρῶτα διαμαχοῦμαι.)

10. ἐπιεικείᾳ ---“ generosity,’ ‘consideration for others.’

§ 31. 11. τοὺς dpolous—v ariously rendered as ‘like minded,’
or ‘situated as we are,’ i.e. equals, not subjects. For the latter,
it is claimed that ἐξ ἌΡ: points to unwilling subjects ; and
sentiment so arrogant might well be attributed to Cleon.

15. ἕξουσι .. &yGva—sarcastic, implying ‘if they must
have their ἀγών᾽ ; cf. c. 38, 4

kal p%—there is implied prohibition, hence μή. The

1δ4 OOYKYAIAOY ἸΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ T

choice of the constr. is no doubt influenced by the previous
καὶ μή.

17. τὸ παθεῖν εὖ---[Π 6 excellent return they will get is a
bribe from the Mytilenaeans. It appears that a few years later
Cleon himself was said to have made something out of the
troubles of Mytilene.

19. καὶ τὸ Aowrdv—‘ in the future as in the past.’

20. ὁμοίως. . ὑπολειπομένους---[Π6 conjecture ὁμοίως seems
to be clearly right. Even when ὁμοίους is rendered ‘consistent’
and taken as pred. with ὑπολειπομένους, it remains very
awkward that ἐπιτηδείους and πολεμίους imply ἡμῖν, whereas
ὁμοίους must imply ἑαυτούς. The previous ὁμοίους used in a
quite different sense in this series of closely connected sentences
is against the adj. ὁμοίως re καὶ οὐδὲν ἧσσον is a Thucydidean
way of saying ‘just as must as before.’

§ 41. 22. πειθόμενοι pév—the steps of the argument, which is
difficult to follow to ἀνδραγαθίζεσθαι and has given rise to much
discussion, are as follows: (1) if you punish M., you will act
as Justice and Interest alike demand ; (2) it may be said that
Justice is on their side and against you (εἰ γάρ) ; (8) even if it
is, you must follow the dictates of Interest (εἰ δὲ δή).

24. od xaptetoOe—because they will still hate you.

25. δικαιώσεσθε---“γοιι will punish yourselves’ (instead of
them) by proclaiming to all that you have no right to exert
authority.

26. εἰ yap—ydp does not introduce the reason for the
preceding statement, but= ‘it is true that,’ as in ὁ. 43, 5 (Stahl
in Rhein. Mus. 1901). οὐ χρεών is ace. abs. On the form of
condition (cf. I. 38, vr. 92) Goodwin points out that it is “a
perfectly natural combination, each part having its proper
force.” If they were justified, you must have no right to your
empire: εἰ δὲ δὴ . . κολάζεσθαι (mid.) proceeds on this as-
sumption. If you persist in ruling (τοῦτο δρᾶν), even though
you have no right to do so, then your interests require that
you punish them, as you have others. The only alternative
(#= ‘ otherwise’) is, yon must give up empire: you must run no
risks (ἐκ τοῦ ἀκινδύνου = ἀκινδύνως) and play an honourable part.

80. παύεσθαι. . dv8payab(feoba.—Cleon echoes words
attributed to Pericles at If 63. ἀνδραγαθίζομαι was, it would
seem, in use among the aristocrats who favoured a peace policy ;
ef. for the noun with ‘a political or social reference’ c. 57, 1,
64, 4 (Neil, Append. to Aristoph. £.).

NOTES 155

8. 6]. 31. τῇ τε αὐτῇ Cypiqa—viz. as that by which τά τε δίκαια
. . καὶ τὰ ξύμφορα ποιήσετε---[ἢθ one I recommend. (a) This is
usually explained, after the schol., ‘the same that they would
have inflicted on you had they succeeded.’ But (1) it is un-
likely that ζημία would be used without explanation, of the
destruction M ytilene had sought to bring on Athens: and (2)
τῇ αὐτῇ can only be so explained by the assumption that the
sentence, simple in form, is strangely confused in thought.
We need such an addition as in Il. 67 Tots αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι
οἷσπερ καὶ... ὑπῆρξαν. (Ὁ) Steup explains ‘the same as you
agreed to yesterday,’ but this seems a strange way of saying
“uphold your decision.’ Also the reference in τῇ αὐτῇ should
be found in the context immediately preceding ; c. 62 τῇ μέντοι
αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ, vil. 39, 1. The reference in the version given above
is, it is true, a little remote, but εἰ δὲ δὴ. . ἀνδραγαθίζεσθαι
is practically parenthetical.

32. ot Stadetyovres—cf. of διαβάλλοντες c. 4, of ἐπαγόμενοι
II. 2, of προδιδόντες 11. 5. The temporal force is lost, and the
partic. becomes a substantive. But the plot is referred to in
aorist, as having preceded the escape.

861. 36. μὴ Ew mpohdce=dvev προφάσεως ἱκανῆς Antiphon
Υ. 22.

37. ἐπεξέρχονται καὶ διολλύναι---“(ΟἸ]ονν up (the wrong they
inflict) even to the length of destroying their enemy utterly.’
The mss. have διόλλυνται, which can only yield a very artificial
sense. Their own utter destruction is not what they seek.
The inf. is of purpose.

38. ὑφορώμενοι, ‘eyeing with misgiving.’ All edd. refer to
the famous ‘odisse quem laeseris’ of Tac. for the sentiment.

39. ὁ γὰρ. . παθών- [18 applies to Athens, which has
been attacked ἄνευ προφάσεως. ‘He who has been injured
needlessly is more dangerous when he has escaped (the plot to
destroy him), than an enemy on equal terms,’ i.e. where equal
offence has been given on both sides. Mytilene knew Athens
would be implacable if she escaped.

§ 7 1. 42. γενόμενοι... τῇ yvepy— ‘place yourselves in thought
as near (the moment of) the injury as possible, and (think)
how.’ 1. TH γνώμῃ-εδιανοηθέντες (I. 143). (Possibly τότ᾽ is
lost after παντός.)

44, ἀνταπόδοτε, ‘repay.’ Cf. ‘‘ Vengeance is mine, saith
the Lord: I will repay.”

45. πρὸς TO παρὸν αὐτίκα with μαλακισθέντες, ‘at their
present plight,’ for τὸ αὐτίκα παρόν : the position of the adv. is

156 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

not very rare in tragedy, e.g. Aesch. PV. 1013 τῷ φρονοῦντι
μὴ καλῶς (Jebb on Soph. ΟἿ. 1294). Here αὐτίκα gains
emphasis in contrast with ποτέ by its position. For the
pleonasm edd. compare I. 95 ἐν τῷ τότε παρόντι, I. 123 τῶν
ἔπειτα μελλόντων. (παραυτίκα has been conjectured for παρὸν
αὐτίκα, and τότε for ποτέ.)

48. παράδειγμα σαφὲς καταστήσατε. . ζημιωσόμενον---ἴοι
the partic., as with δηλοῦν, δῆλον or φανερὸν ποιεῖν, ef. Soph.
El. 24 σαφῆ σημεῖα paivers ἐσθλὸς εἰς ἡμᾶς γεγώς.

50. τόδε---ὅδε referring to what precedes, as often in speeches.
41 811, 2. AvdSoros—not elsewhere heard οὗ,

42 81]. 8. pepcopévovs — equivalent to μεμφομένους καὶ ἀξιοῦν-
τας, the brachylogy being made easier by the preceding
τοὺς προθέντας τὴν 6., the persons censured.

5. δύο. . dépyqv—somne make τάχος τε καὶ ὀργήν subj. of
εἶναι, removing the comma, comparing cc. 40, 2, 57, 3, 75, 1.
The parallels do not seem to prove the point.

6. τὸ pév=rdxos. This passage is directly aimed at Cleon,
who had deprecated χρόνου διατριβήν, thus showing his own
folly, and had displayed the vehemence to which the ignorant
and shallow-minded are prone. γίγνεσθαι, ‘to be found.’

§ 21.9. μὴ διδασκάλους τῶν πραγμάτων y.—‘are not to
explain affairs,’ 1.6. how they are to be conducted. λόγοι
personified, like πειθώ. διαμάχομαι as inc. 40.

10. ἰδίᾳ τι αὐτῷ διαφέρει---“ he has some private interest.’
13. ppdcar.—‘ give guidance.’

14. τι αἰσχρὸν meioar—‘to carry a disgraceful proposal.’
Cf. c. 59, 2.

15. οὐκ... ἡγεῖται---οὐ can appear after εἰ. . μέν, provided
the indic. is used, as in I. 121 εἰ of μὲν. . οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν, Xen.
Anab. vil. 1, 29 εἰ βάρβαρον μὲν πόλιν οὐδεμίαν ἠθελήσαμεν
κατασχεῖν.

16. εὖ δὲ διαβαλών--ΟἸδθοῃ got a name for skill in διαβολή,
as several passages in Aristoph. Zquites show.

§ 31.17. χαλεπώτατοι δὲ... ἐπίδειξίν tLva—‘ most difficult to
meet are those in particular (καί) who by anticipation impute
(to an opponent) a sort of rhetorical display to get money.’
xarerwraro does not mean to exclude the εὖ διαβαλών, who
also—as the καί shows—is χαλεπώτατος as imputing to his
opponent a desire to display his rhetorical skill; cf. c. 38, 2.
But those who say that bribery is the motive are singled out.

NOTES 157

The emphasis is on ἐπὶ χρήμασι, which accordingly is in an
unusual order: it belongs to érideév. The point of τινα is
that an ἐπίδειξις proper was not delivered in the Ecclesia.

20. ἀξυνετώτερος. . ἀδικώτερος --᾿ judged more of a fool
than a knave.’ The double compar. as regularly where two
qualities in the same object are contrasted: ἰὼ στρατηγοὶ
πλέονες ἢ βελτίονες.

28. μετὰ ἀξυνεσίας ---“ besides his (seeming) folly,’ ἃ character-
istic substitute for μετὰ τοῦ ἀξύνετος γίγνεσθαι.

§ 41. 27. ἂν revo Getev—viz. the state. The change to plur.
is made easy by the intervention of τῶν πολιτῶν.

§ δ]. 29. ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου, ‘on equal terms,’ is parallel to ἐκ-
φοβοῦντα.

31. σώφρονα--ἃ very moderate criticism of the dangerous
tendency now manifesting itself in Athenian public life, since
the death of Pericles, to give too much weight to the πιθανώ-
Taro. (c. 36, 6). σώφρων was esp. associated with those opposed
to extreme democracy; cf. c. 62, 4. For τῷ πλεῖστα εὖ
βουλεύοντι, ‘he whose counsel is generally good,’ we should
expect, at first sight, something like τῷ πιστὰ ξυμβουλεύοντι
(conjectured by Weil), ‘he whose counsel is followed,’ in contrast
with τὸν μὴ τυχόντα γνώμης, in the sense, ‘he whose advice is
rejected’ ; cf. πείσας and μὴ τυχών in ὃ 3, κατορθῶν and ἐπιτυχών
below. Bat in stating the principle that ought to be followed,
the moderate Diodotus criticizes what the people professed to
wish, viz. to reward good (not merely persuasive) counsellors.
But in rewards the persuasive was mistaken for the good.
And τὸν μὴ τυχόντα γνώμης is no doubt intentionally ambiguous,
for, in contrast with πείσας, it does mean ‘he who fails to carry
his opinion’; but, in contrast with τῷ εὖ βουλεύοντι, ‘not
fortunate in his advice’ means ‘ wrong.’ ‘Who fails in counsel’
will keep up the two meanings. Cf. Aesch. PV. 204 τὰ λῷστα
βουλεύων midetv . . οὐκ ἠδυνήθην. (The intentional ambiguity
of this passage has escaped notice. )

32, ἀλλὰ μηδ᾽ Eaccoty——‘but not to curtail . . either,’
as might happen in the case of his being charged with
corruption.

οὐχ ὅπως. . ἀλλὰ pydE—non modo (non). . sedne..
quidem. For the sentiment cf. Demosth. 111. 18 οὐ λέγει τις
τὰ βέλτιστα; ἀναστὰς ἄλλος εἰπάτω, μὴ τοῦτον αἰτιάσθω.

8.61. 30, πρὸς χάριν- -“ἴο please’ the people.

158 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΙΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ T

37. dpéyorro—se. ἥκιστα ἄν. τῷ αὐτῷ is explained by χαριζό-
μενος κτλ.

43 §11. 2. καὶ ὑποπτεύηται «7\.—‘if a mere suspicion that ἃ
man is speaking for gain, and is offering the best advice in spite
of it.’ We cannot render ‘though he offers the best advice, he
does so for gain,’ as is commonly done, for the név-clause must
be our though (cf. Jebb on Soph. OC. 1536). But there is no
need to supply δοκῇ from ὑποπτεύηται to suit the dé-clause if
we notice that μὲν. . δέ is inserted merely for the sake of a
verbal antithesis, and that the sense is simply κέρδους ἕνεκα τὰ
βέλτιστα λέγειν.

4. φθονήσαντες. . κερδῶν ---' feeling jealous of the un-
certain impression of his gains,’ i.e. jealous of his supposed
gains. That his advice is helpful is ca hypothesi certain.

6. THs πόλεως AhatpovpeOa—the same constr. c. 58, 1.

8.21]. 6. καθέστηκε 8€—‘it has come to this, that.’ ἀπὸ τοῦ
εὐθέος is opposed to ἀπάτῃ below.

9, τὰ δεινότατα. . πεῖσαι--ἰο get the most atrocious
proposals adopted.’

§ 31.12. μόνην τε πόλιν κτλ. -- 80 we are the only state
which it is impossible to benefit openly, without recourse to
deception.’ It is disputed whether μόνην πόλιν means (1) “ἃ
state alone,’ as distinct from the individual citizens, or (2)
‘(ours) is the only state which,’ as pred. to ἡμᾶς supplied.
The latter is surely right, for (1) Athens is contrasted with
ἡ σώφρων πόλις in ο. 42, 5, and this contrast is kept up through
c. 43, 1, and (2) there is no suggestion in the context that the
state is more suspicious than the individual.

διὰ τὰς meprvolas—‘ excessive shrewdness,’ by which it
thinks it detects self-interest in the honest speaker. The word
only here.

14. dv0-vromreverar—‘ is in return suspected.’

§ 41. 15. χρὴ δὲ. . cxorovvrwyv—‘ but in dealing with the
most important interests and in such a case as this it ought
to be assumed that we speakers take a somewhat wider forecast
than you whose view is circumscribed,’ i.e. whose judgment is
formed in a short debate. tt with περαιτέρω, as in μᾶλλόν τι.
ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε : its possible meanings are ‘at such a time,’ and
‘in such a case.’ ;

18. ὑπεύθυνον ---ἃ speaker was liable to the γραφὴ παρανόμων.

19. πρὸς ἀνεύθυνον. . ἀκρόασιν --- “48 opposed to your
attention to it, which is irresponsible.’

NOTES 159

ὃ 5 1. 21. σωφρονέστερον dv éexplvere—‘ you would be more
circuinspect (cf. c. 42, 5) in your decisions’ (11. 40, 2).

22. πρὸς ὀργὴν ἥντιν᾽ ἂν roxnre—‘in the anger of the
moment.’ Grammatically ζημιοῦντες is supplied to τύχητε, and
πρός, according to a common idiom, is repeated to ἥντινα ; but
no doubt the speaker would not be conscious of such ellipse.
ἥντινα without ἄν is according to epic idiom; but it is very
probable that ἥντιν᾽ ἂν is the true reading. (No other emenda-
tion is to be thought of: ἤν τι ἀτυχῆτε is impossible, if only
because ἀτυχεῖν in this context means ‘to fail in a request.’
Nor must σφαλέντες be supplied to τύχητε : for this would
mean that punishment is inflicted in the same mood as that
in which the error was committed. But that is not the point.)

25, εἰ -- ὅτι.

§ 21.5. ἤν τε kal. . ἐᾶν--[ὉΓ εἶεν most edd. accept ἐᾶν τε
“(1 shall not bid you) spare them.’ ἔχοντας, sc. ἀποφήνω, is a
conjecture for ἔχοντες, and unsatisfactory. The correction is
uncertain, and it is doubtful if οὐ κελεύσω can be supplied
legitimately. It is likely that something is lost before εἶεν :
e.g. Bergk suggested οὐ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἄξιοι ἂν ξυγγνώμης.
(εἶεν as exclamatory which Classen, with some doubt, kept, is
impossible. Its use is in assent to what precedes and in
passing on to a new point: it is not appropriate here. )

$31.11. τοῦτο ὅ is rendered ‘as for this that.’ (1) There is no
authority for this phrase used adverbially in this way : hence
the conjecture τούτου, governed by τἀναντία. Otherwise we
must assume an anacoluthon. (2) But CG read τοῦτο ᾧ, and
quite possibly this is right. τοῦτο ἀντισχυριζόμενος ᾧ Κλέων
ἰσχυρίζεται -- “ while maintaining this in opposition to what C.
maintains’ (οἵ, τοῖς ἐγκλήμασι ἀντεροῦντες 1. 13). περὶ τοῦ...
ἔχοντος is then epexegetic of τοῦτο, just as ἐς τὸ λοιπὸν.
ἔσεσθαι is of ᾧ (Ξε ἐκείνῳ 8). Both insist on the future, but
one on τὸ ξυμφέρον, the other on τὸ καλόν.

14, mpo8eio.—depending on ξυμφέρον (ὑμῖν), conditional.
§ 41. 19. mpéds—‘ in view of.’

21. τῶν δικαίων - -' arguments of justice,’ as in Demosth.
de Cor. 6,9. To δεῖν and χρησίμως ἕξουσιν supply ἡμῖν.

4.4.

$11.1. θανάτου... πρόκεινται--- θανάτου gen. of definition. 45

ζημία πρόκειται (see crit. note) is more likely in view of πασῶν
τῶν ζημιῶν below. To πολλῶν. . ἁμαρτημάτων supply ‘as the
penalty.’

6. τῷ émPovdredpari—instrumental.

160 ΘΟΥΚΥΛΊΑΟΥ IZTOPION T

8.2 1.7. πόλις re Ahiorapévn—‘so in the case of a state.’

8. τῇ Soxqoe—‘in its own opinion.’ An effective reply
to Cleon’s argument from the fact that M. had taken Athens
at a disadvantage.

9. roirw—revolt.

§ 31.12. ἐπεὶ. . ye—not a common combination ; [liad rx. 425
ἐπεὶ οὔ σφισιν ἥδε γ᾽ ἑτοίμη, Pind. Οἱ. 1x. 40 ἐπεὶ τό γε λοιδορῆσαι
θεοὺς ἐχθρὰ σοφία. The ye merely emphasizes διεξεληλύθασι.

13. προστιθέντες ---΄ continually adding tothem.’ For εἴ πως
with a perf. preceding see J/.7'. § 489, esp. Aristoph. Av. 120.

16. παραβαινομένων ---[Π 616 are two tenable explanations of
this: (1) impersonal gen. abs. as in 1. 116 ἐσαγγελθέντων 77. 1'.
§ 848, ‘transgressions being committed’; (2) sc. τῶν μεγίστων
ἀδικημάτων, which would be internal accus. to παραβαίνω in
the act. form, as in ἀδικῶ ἀδίκημα. The matter is rendered
impossible of certain solution by the perplexing καὶ τοῦτο παρα-
Baiverat. We expect, of course, the sense ‘ mild penalties being
disregarded,’ and presently, ‘the death penalty is disregarded,’
but how this can be got out of the Gk. as it stands is not
apparent, unless we take an etymological sense of παραβαίνω,
‘pass by,’ which is found occasionally in the orators, and
interpret τοῦτο below as put loosely for ἡ ζημία τοῦ θανάτου.
Against this is not so much the fact that Thuc. does not else-
where use παραβαίνω thus, but much more that παραβαίνω
ζημίαν is stranger than any instance in the orators and that the
proximity of ἀδικημάτων makes it unnatural.

18. Kal τοῦτο ὅμως tmapaBalverar—the conjectures are (1)
κἀν τούτῳ (Kriiger) ‘and under these circumstances,’ with παρα-
βαίνεται impers. But it should be ἐν τούτοις (cf. Jebb on Soph.
Ant. 39); ἐν ro'rw=‘ meanwhile,’ or ‘in this point.’ (2) καὶ
ταῦτα, sc. τὰ ἀδικήματα (Hude; cf. 2 above). I should prefer
καὶ ταὐτά ‘and the same offences are committed.’

§ 4 1.19. δεινότερον. . S€os—‘a terror more terrible’ ; οἵ,
VII. 68 ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι.

20. ἢ τόδε ye—‘else this,’ with emphasis on the second
alternative (Neil on Aristoph. £g. 413). Notice τόδε after
τούτου, not very rare; e.g. Soph. Ant. 296.

ἡ μὲν πενία κτλ. ---ἴο πενία is opposed the power—étovola
—that results from wealth. A poor man is emboldened by
necessity, as a rich man is made covetous by insolence and
pride.

28, at δ᾽ ἄλλαι ξυντυχίαι . . κινδύγους---“ the other condi-

NOTES 161

tions of life,’ as they arise—temporary rather than permanent :
these fill men with a sudden passion (ὀργῇ), ‘as each (ξυντυχία)
is overpowered by some irrepressible power ’—such e.g. as an
overwhelming desire for independence. ὀργῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων
corresponds to τὴν τόλμαν παρέχουσα and τὴν πλεονεξίαν π. of
the other clauses, while ἀνήκεστόν τι corresponds to ἀνάγκη and
ὕβρις καὶ φρόνημα. Of the many alterations proposed, only τὸν
ἄνθρωπον for τῶν ἀνθρώπων needs notice. It is not an improve-
ment ; for there is a point in τῶν ἀ., ‘passion in those men’
whom they befall, a/ways there, like πλεονεξία and τόλμα, and
ready to be called out by a favourable ξυντυχία. (Not ‘man-
kind,’ which would here be ἀνθρώπων, as ὀργῇ is without article.
It has been proposed to refer ἑκάστη τις to ὀργῇ, but this would
leave ξυντυχίαι too vague, and there would be little point in
ἑκάστη τις.)

8 5 1. 26, ἐπὶ wavri—‘ in every case’ of those just alluded to;
οἵ, ἐπ᾽ οὐδενὶ τῶν τοιούτων Demosth. xxI. 65.

ὁ pév—first comes Desire, next Hope—and then the
attempt. Note the personification here.

27. τὴν... ἐπιβουλὴν éxppovr(tov—‘ thinking out the plot.’
The schol. has ἐγχείρησιν on this word, so that the writer of it
must have found ἐπιβολήν, ‘ attempt,’ which most Mss. give, the
only objection to which is that the subst. is not found elsewhere
in this sense before Polybius.

28. τὴν εὐπορίαν τῆς tTixns—‘ suggesting the ready help of
Chance.’ Hope deludes them into a fancy that at the critical
moment Chance will favour them. Though a subjective gen.
does not occur with εὐπορία elsewhere, τῆς τύχης is plainly
subjective here; cf. vil. 61 τὸ τῆς τύχης κἂν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν
ἐλπίσαντες στῆναι, V. 118. (τύχη cannot= ‘success’ here, ef.
§ 7, nor ‘their fortunes.’)

30. ὄντα &avi—i.e. ἔρως and ἐλπίς, ‘because (not though)
unseen.’ Were they φανεραί, men would see that they could
not be counted upon. As it is, πλεῖστα βλάπτουσι by ποτ
them on. Cf. v. 103 ἐπὶ τὰς ἀφανεῖς (ἐλπίδας) καθίστανται, an
the next sentence.

§ 61. 31. én atrots—besides ἔρως and ἐλπίς.
33, Kal ἐκ τῶν ὑποδεεστέρων --- even with insufficient means.’
34. οὐχ ἧσσον ---ἴ.6. even more than men.

35. περὶ τῶν μεγίστων re—sc. κινδυνεύουσι. For the re,
which, though. found only in C, is probably right, ef. rv. 80
ἑτοίμων ὄντων τρέφειν τε καὶ ἐπὶ ἀποστάσει σφᾶς ἐπικαλουμένων.

Μ

162 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

36. μετὰ πάντων... ἐδόξασεν ---΄ each individual acting with
the whole community . . rates himself considerably above the
reality,’ i.e. exaggerates his own strength. The reading of the
best Mss. is αὐτῶν for αὑτόν. For δοξάζω with personal obj. cf.
Xen. Cyr. ν. δ, 46 ἀλκιμώτατος δοξάζεται εἶναι. ἔπὶ πλέον τι
together.

§ 71. 38. ἁπλῶς---ο. 38, 7.

39. πολλῆς εὐηθείας, Soris—‘(it is a mark) of much simplicity,
if anyone supposes.’ Cf. Xen. Hell. τι. 8, 51 νομίζω προστάτου
ἔργον εἷναι οἵου δεῖ, ds ἂν. . μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ. It would be more
usual to have πολλὴ εὐήθειά (ἐστιν) ὅστις, or εὐηθέστατον ὅστις.

46 §11. 2. ἐχεγγύῳ---ῇοτναϊηρ a good ἐγγύη, security that other
states will not follow the example of Mytilene.

βουλεύσασθαι---“ come to a decision.’
4, odk—redundant.
5. ὅτι ἐν Bpaxvtdrw—notice the regular order with ὅτι and
ὡς + superl.

§21.7. kal dmrorraca—‘when revolt has actually taken
place.’

9. τὴν δαπάνην ἀποδοῦναι Kal τὸ λοιπὸν ὑποτελεῖν---Π 616,
naturally, the least is made of the terms dealt out by Athens
to revolted allies who submitted. Independent allies, when
reduced after revolting, had also to pull down their walls
and to hand over their ships to Athens. In 1. 98 Thue. gives
a summary of the treatment dealt out to them much less
favourable to Athens. By ὑποτελεῖν is meant φόρου ὑποτελεῖς
εἶναι.

10. τίνα οἴεσθε ἥντινα---866 on c. 39, 7.

12. παρατενεῖσθαι---- be strained to the utmost extremity.’

13. τὸ αὐτὸ δύναται---οὗ 1. 141 τὴν αὐτὴν δούλωσιν δύναται.

§ 31.16. τῆς προσόδου. . ἀπ᾽ airis—the art. not repeated
with a verbal substantive (mpscod0s—mpocrévac). The words
necessary to complete the sense of the subst. generally follow it,

as in I. 18 τὴν κατάλυσιν ἐκ τῆς ‘ENAddos, but occasionally
precede, as in 11, 18 κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην πορείαν ἡ σχολαιότης.

18. τῷδε---νἱΖ. τῇ προσόδῳ.
8 41.20. d&kpiBets—‘ exacting’; 50 ἴῃ 1. 99 Thue. says ἀκριβῶς
ἔπρασσον of Athens in relation to her allies.

22. és χρημάτων Adyov—és Δ. is ‘on the score of.’ The
phrase occurs also in Lysias (xIx. 61), and els χρήματα is found.

NOTES 163

24, ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων τῆς ἐπιμελείας ---’ by practical precautions.’
Some render ‘ by taking care of our actions’; but the former
seems more natural, and cf. vi. 40 ἔργῳ φυλασσομένη.

8 δ]. 26. ἐλεύθερον, by right ; βίᾳ ἀρχόμενον, in fact. Big=
‘in its despite’ ; cf. 1. 43 μὴ ξυμμάχους δέχεσθε Bia ἡμῶν, 68.
Diodotus alludes to the true position of Lesbos ; οἵ, c. 10.

27. mpés—‘ to the side of.’

§ 6 1. 32. rovrov—i.e. τοῦ ἀφίστασθαι.

ὅτι ἐπ᾿ ἐλάχιστον ---νἱΖ. of the inhabitants.

81]. 1. rotro—internal accus., ‘in this.’ 47

§21. 6. ἀποστήσασι---80. τὴν πόλιν.

7. τῆς ἀντικαθισταμένης --- which is ranging itself against

us.

8. és πόλεμον érépyxerOe—either ἔρχεσθε ἐς πόλεμον or
ἐπέρχεσθε alone would be usual. Here we must supply αὐτῇ,
and take és of the end in view. ;

§31. 9. εἰ with fut. indic., ‘if you are going to.’

12. ἀδικήσετε. . Ktelvovres—‘you will be guilty of the
crime of’; a legal use.

13. καταστήσετε---᾿ bring about,’ unusual without a pre-
dicative adj. ; cf. (Classen) IV. 92 πολλὴν ἄδειαν κατεστήσαμεν.

16. mpoSeEavrwv—‘ as you will have published abroad.’

§ 41. 18. καὶ εἰ ἠδίκησαν, μὴ προσποιεῖσθαι---“ even if they
did wrong, to pass it over.’ μὴ προσποιεῖσθαι, dissimulare,
which occurs in several authors, is on the principle of οὔ φημι.

19. 8—‘the element.’ Thuc. is partial to the neut. sing.
collective for a masc. plur.

8 51. 20. καὶ rotro—rofro anticipates ἑκόντας ἡμᾶς ἀδικη-
θῆναι: cf. VI. 85 καὶ ἡμῖν τοῦτο ὠφελεῖ, οὐκ Ww... ἀλλ᾽ ἤν.

22. Stkalws—i.e. as strict justice allows. δεῖ refers to
interest, as in § 4.

23. τὸ Κλέωνος xrX.—made in c. 40, 4: ‘Cleon’s claim,
namely the identity of justice and expediency in the punish-
ment, is found to be impossible of being realized at once in
such a punishment,’ viz. ἐν τῷ διαφθεῖρα. The sentence is
illogical, for either τὸ αὐτό or ἅμα should have been omitted.

§11. 1. r48e—viz. the proposals about to be made. 48
2. πλέον veluavres—see c. 3, 1 n.

164 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ IZTOPION T

3. οὐδὲ éyd—see c. 40, 2.

mpordyerOa.—middle, as regularly in this sense; the
indef. subject must be supplied.

5. ἀπέπεμψεν ---866 c. 37, 1.
6. καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ---᾿ calmly.’

§ 21. 8. τοῖς modeulots—thinking of the Peloponnesians.
That Athens should show wisdom (1) calmly judging the
guilty, (2) acquitting the democratic party, would be more
effective against her enemies than a hasty exercise of brute
strength, of vis consili expers. πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους is to be
taken with κρείσσων ἐστί.

10. ἐπιών---“ if he goes to work.’

49 §11.3. ἀντιπάλων --- equally matched’ (here, in argument),
a common meaning of ἀντίπαλος in Thue.

4. ἦλθον piv és ἀγῶνα ὅμως τῆς δόξης --- ‘engaged in a
conflict of opinion after all,’ i.e. in spite of the revulsion of
feeling (c. 36). ὅμως, as Poppo pointed out (Proleg. i. p. 290)
implies a clause which is omitted; and, in spite of the
remoteness of reference, the interpretation seems warranted by
such passages as c. 28, and vir. 1. Some render τῆς δόξης
‘about the decree,’ but the gen. should express the feeling, as
in viv ἀγὼν εὐψυχίας Eur. Med. 403, and βούλευμα or ψήφισμα
would be expected for ‘decree’ here.

§ 21. 9. mporépas—the best mss. have δευτέρας, as the result,
no doubt, of an unfortunate conjecture, based on εἰ φθάσειαν
below.

§ 31. 14. οἴνῳ. . mepvpapéva—‘ barley-meal kneaded with
wine . .,’ into cakes, μᾶζαι, of the kind called olvotrra:. φυρᾶν,
not φύρειν, is the form of the word in this sense.

§ 41. 21. ὅσον. . dveyvaxévac—‘as for him to have read,’
like ὅσον ἀποζῆν in 1. 2. ὅσον practically = ὥστε.

23. ὑστέρα αὐτῆς---β this is predicative, the ém- in the
verb is pleonastic, if, as elsewhere, the verb=‘is brought into
port after.’ It is possible that ἐπι- implies haste, as in
ἐπιβοηθεῖν : we expect such an allusion here, and Steup suggests
αὐτίκ᾽ for αὐτῆς.

24. παρὰ τοσοῦτον... ἦλθε---[Π18 and similar phrases—rapa
μικρὸν ἐλθεῖν, παρ᾽ οὐδὲν é.—are followed either by gen. or, more
often, infin. ; e.g. Herod. 1x. 33 παρ᾽ ἕν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν.
παρὰ Tocotrov=‘ within, up to, so short a distance.’ κίνδυνος

NOTES 165

means the danger of destruction, and the gen. is the same as
with ἐγγύς.
811, 2. ἀπέπεμψεν ---ἰο Athens ; see cc. 28, 35, 48. 50

5. χιλίων ---[ἢ6 number is astonishing, and nothing
approaching it is suggested by anything in the preceding
narrative. Hence it is thought that A= χιλίων is a corruption
of A’ Ξετριάκοντα.

§ 21. 8. κλήρους . . ποιήσαντες ---ἶ.6. the late owners became
hereditary tenants and paid an annual sum to the Athenian
‘cleruchs.’ Thuc. (and Ephorus, as copied by Diodorus x11.
55) assume that a// the land was thus divided, except that of
Methymna: this would bring each κλῆρος to about 96 acres (as
Clinton says); but, of course, not the whole of the κλῆρος
would be under cultivation. Apparently all the land was
owned by oligarchs. The new κλῆροι would, of course, cut
across the boundaries of former estates.

11. κληρούχους ---2700 poor citizens chosen by lot. They
doubtless served to form a garrison; but in 412 B.c. there
cannot have been anything like this number of Athenians in
Lesbos (Υ1Π|. 22); it is assumed that many of the cleruchs
subsequently returned to Athens.

13. ἑκάστου with κλήρου. The mid. denotes a reciprocal
arrangement. dpyvplov is prob. object of φέρειν, and δύο μνᾶς
with the gen. is in appos. to it.

§ 31. 15. τὰ ἐν τῇ Hrelpw—several places called ᾿Ακταῖαι
mé\ecs—Antandros being one. These became tributary allies.

§11. 2. Nuxfov—first mention of him in Thuc. 51

4, ἣ κεῖται. . ἐχρῶντο δὲ atrq—it is not usual to have
the rel. repeated in the second clause (VI. 4 τὸ χωρίον οὗ viv ἡ
πόλις ἐστὶ καὶ ὃ πρῶτον ἐτειχίσθη), unless the one is pos., the
other neg., as in 11, 43 οὐκ ἐν ᾧ κεῖνται μᾶλλον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ᾧ ἡ δόξα
καταλείπεται. In the second clause the rel. is often replaced
by the required case of αὐτός, A similar omission or substitu-
tion is frequent in Lat., esp. in Livy, as xx1II. 8 cum quo
steterat nec eum patria maiestas sententia depulerat. So, too,
in Engl., as Hooker ‘ Whom though to know be life, and joy
to make mention of His name,’ Macauly ‘ 70 whom she
seemed to listen, but did not hear them.’

§ 21.7. τὴν φυλακὴν. . elvar—Athens had at least one
φρούριον at Salamis, and a few ships there maintained a not
very efficient blockade of the port of Megara.

9. τούς te IleXomovvynctovs—parallel to τοῖς re Μεγαρεῦσιν

166 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION ΝΣ

. . ἐσπλεῖν, and probably, like that clause, depending on τοῖς
᾿Αθηναίοις φυλακὴν εἷναιΞε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους φυλάσσεσθαι. This
κατὰ σύνεσιν constr. cannot be paralleled in prose, but it would
be ordinary in tragedy: see Jebb on Soph. Antig. 216. Thus
τοὺς II. is the anticipatory accus., for ὅπως of Πελοποννήσιοι κτλ. :
the differing constr., first ὅπως, then infin., after a single verb,
is not unusual. (Several emendations have been proposed, of
which πρός re IleX., depending on φυλακὴν εἶναι and τούς τε
Πελ. σκοπῶν are worth notice. )

10. μὴ ποιῶνται. . αὐτόθεν---νἱΖ. from Nisaea, the harbour
of Megara. The allusion in αὐτόθεν is not quite the same as in
the previous case.

11. τὸ πρὶν yevdpevov—‘ the previous incident’ occurred in
the autumn of 429 B.c. The Pel. intended to surprise the
Piraeus, but contented themselves with a descent on Salamis,
which caused great alarm at Athens, and led at once to measures
for the protection of the Athenian harbours (11. 93).

§ 31.13. ἑλὼν οὖν. . mpodxovre—when, as in the case of
Megara (I. 103), a city had long walls running down to its
harbour, it was usual to prolong the walls across the mouth,
and to leave only a small passage between two towers, forming
what was called a κλῃστὸς λιμήν. ἀπὸ τῆς Nicalas προύχοντε
are to be taken together. The order is unusual, but (1) ἀπὸ
τῆς N. gains prominence by its position (cf. Jebb on Soph.
Antig, 325), (2) it is certainly not stranger than 11. 7 πρὸς rats
αὐτοῦ ὑπαρχούσαις ἐξ ᾿Ιταλίας καὶ Σικελίας τοῖς τἀκείνων ἑλο-
μένοις, where ἐξ. . Σικελίας goes with ἑλομένοις. (If taken with
ἑλών, ἀπὸ τῆς N. is rendered either (a) ‘on the side toward N.,’
or (δ) ‘on the side away from N.’ But (1) in either case δύο
πύργω then raises a difficulty, because they are then both on
the island, and above, it was one tower: (2) neither’ meaning
has really been proved possible: in the passages quoted for (0)
ἀπό-- “αὖ a distance from’ with a verb of vest. If not taken
with προύχοντε, ἀπὸ τῆς N. would naturally =‘ starting from
N.,’ with N. for a base ; (3) with (a) it is impossible to explain
καὶ τὸ ἐκ τῆς ἠπείρου, which must denote a different place from
ἀπὸ Τῆς N.)

15. ἐς τὸ μεταξὺ τῆς vyrov—supply καὶ τῆς ἠπείρου, as in
Dem. de Cor. 26 τὸν μεταξὺ χρόνον τῶν ὅρκων, ‘the interval
between (that time, and) the oaths,’ Aristoph. Av. 187 ἐν
μέσῳ δήπουθεν ἀήρ ἐστι γῆς, and often. Sometimes the other
limit is expressed. (It might mean ‘to the part of the island
lying between,’ as Isocr. Iv. 70 ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ τῆς χώρας, but on
the whole this seems less likely.)

NOTES 167

16. ἀπετείχιζε καὶ τὸ ἐκ τῆς 4.—‘he proceeded to build
a wall on the side facing the mainland as well,’ apparently
at the island end of the bridge. The καί refers to πρῶτον.

§ 41. 20. kal ἐν τῇ νήσῳ Tetxos—the καί refers to ἀπετείχιζε τὸ
ἐκ τῆς ἠπείρου. (We cannot be confident about the interpreta-
tion of these operations at Minoa, because (1) the account—
as is often the case with Thuc. when he writes of topographical
details—is not clear, and (2) the coastline has changed, and
there is no longer an island at all.)

811. 3. πολιορκεῖσθαι--“ endure the siege,’ a use of the inf. 52
frequent with ἀδικεῖσθαι, and found occasionally both in Greek
and Latin.

8.2]. 8. εἰρημένον yap Av—se. βίᾳ μὴ ἑλεῖν. But this is
just what the Pel. had tried to do in 429 B.c.: their views
had changed.

11. ὅσα πολέμῳ χωρία Exovow—the original intention of
Sparta had been to destroy the Athenian empire: since the
failure at Lesbos they expect much less. That failure had
evidently strengthened the peace party at Sparta.

14. λέγοντα ---ἃβ in VII. 3; contrast 11. 85 πέμπουσι ξυμ-
βούλους κελεύοντες.

εἰ βούλονται. . οὐδένα---ἰῃ this perplexing sentence,
it is best (1) to make παραδοῦναι and χρήσασθαι depend on
βούλονται : (2) to make τούς τε. . οὐδένα the apodosis to this
protasis. Then (1) re. . δέ correspond (1. 11, 1, 25, 3, VI.
83, 1, VII. 81, 3, and in other authors not very seldom) ; (2)
κολάζειν = ‘they are ready to punish,’ unless we accept the
conjecture κολάσειν. For the outline of the syntax cf. vil. 3
προπέμπει. . λέγοντα, ef βούλονται ἐξιέναι. . ἑτοῖμος εἷναι
σπένδεσθαι. (It is impossible to render εἰ ‘ whether,’ as though
λέγοντα were ἐρωτῶντα.)

$31. 21. ἐν ὅσῳ--οἴ, ο. 28, 1.

8 41. 27. ἀγαθόν τι--[ἢ second τι is not impossible, but,
in view of 53, 2, 68, 1, it is improbable.

§5 1. 28. προτάξαντες σφῶν αὐτῶν is generally rendered
‘having appointed as their advocates,’ but, in view of VI.
100 τριακοσίους σφῶν αὐτῶν... προύταξαν (cf. c. 112 below),
Hude is probably right in taking the gen. as partitive.

30. Αἰειμνήστου ---α celebrated man, who had commanded
the Plataeans at Marathon and Plataea,

$11. 2. πιστεύσαντες... οἰόμενοι. . kal. . δεξάμενοι... 58
Hyobpevor—this series of participles is perplexing, and their

168 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION Τ'

relation depends on whether (1) the sentence is meant to be
antithetic, so that πιστεύσαντες καὶ δεξάμενοι form a pair, and
᾿ οἰόμενοι and ἡγούμενοι stand in causal relation to these respec-
tively ; or (2) οἰόμενοι καὶ ἡγούμενοι give the two grounds of
πιστεύσαντες, aud ἐν (with the Mss.) ἄλλοις δεξάμενοι is subord.
—either conditional or causal—to ἡγούμενοι : or (3) the sen-
tence is developed as it proceeds, so that (a) οἰόμενοι καὶ
Oetduevo.—with either ἐν or ἂν ἄλλοις -- ον the cause of
ἐποιησάμεθα, and ἡγούμενοι gives the cause of δεξάμενοι : or
(4) with δεξάμενοι subord. to ἡγούμενοι, πιστεύσαντες is simi-
larly subord. of condition to οἰόμενοι. I decidedly prefer (3),
because it gives a form of sentence to which Thue. is certainly
partial (Hache, de Partic. Thucyd. ii.); the main verb is
followed by a partic.—here οἰόμενοι καὶ defduevor—that gives
the cause; then this partic. itself develops another causal to
itself; cf., for instance, c. 110 ἀγγέλλεται τοὺς ᾿Αμπρακιώτας
ἐπιβοηθεῖν, βουλομένους. . ξυμμεῖξαι, εἰδότας οὐδέν. The order
of πιστεύσαντες tells against (1) and (4), and (2) is very artificial.
The incoherence of § 1 is doubtless intentional, as in the case
of the opening of Soph. Antig.

5. ἐν δικασταῖς οὐκ ἂν ἄλλοις SeEdpevor—the mss. have
ἐν ἄλλοις, and for the repetition of the prep. in apposition vi.
68 ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὴν μητρόπολιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς is quoted. But (1) in
that passage and others like it, such as Lysias vi. 14 ἐν ’Apeiw
πάγῳ, ἐν τῷ σεμνοτάτῳ δικαστηρίῳ, we have a second noun
added to explain the first (cf. Jebb on Soph. Trach. 695): this
is not so with ἐν ἄλλοις here (so Kriiger). (2) Taking constr.
(3) as explained in the last note, ἂν δεξάμενοι, ‘would have
consented to appear before no other judges,’ gives a better
sense than δεξάμενοι.

6. ὥσπερ kal éopév—‘as we are actually doing.’

§ 21. 8. ἀμφοτέρων ---τὸ νόμιμον and τὸ ἔσον.

9, ἡμαρτήκαμεν---[Π 6. subj. perf., of what may turn out
afterwards to have been the case, might have been used.

13. Adyov—i.e. μακρότερα εἰπεῖν, c. 52, 5.

14. τό τε ἐπερώτημα βραχὺ dv—accus. abs. co-ordinated
with the preceding gen. abs., both expressing cause.

τὰ μὲν ἀληθῆ is obj. of ἀποκρίνασθαι ; the infin. clause
is subj. to γίγνεται. Hence ἐναντία, sc. ἡμῖν, is for_évavriov,
which is awkward after τὰ a\709: some think ἐναντίον should
be read. (The other view, that ἀποκρίνασθαι is epexegetic,
ἀληθὴς ἀποκρίνασθαι, is most improbable, and ᾧ is then
grammatically impossible. )

NOTES 169

15. τὰ δὲ Wev8H—sc. ἀποκρίνασθαι.
16. ἔλεγχον Exe.—‘ can be confuted.’

§ 31.18. εἰπόντας τι κινδυνεύειν --- “ἴο say something and
take our chance’=here ‘to say something if we must risk
our lives’; the emphasis, as often in Gk. and Lat., on the
partic., as in I. 20 βουλόμενοι δράσαντές τι καὶ (‘then’) κιν-
δυνεῦσαι, Soph. OC. 1088 χωρῶν ἀπείλει ‘threaten, but go,’
Trach. 592 εἰδέναι χρὴ δρῶσαν ‘you must act, if you would
know.’

ὁ μὴ ῥηθεὶς λόγος --τὸ τὸν λόγον μὴ ῥηθῆναι, a frequent
constr. in Greek and Silver Latin; cf. c. 66, 8, Demosth.
Olynth. 111. 34 οἴκοι μένων βελτίων Ξετὸ μένειν αὐτὸν βέλτιόν
ἐστι. See also c. 66, 3. The neg. in the phrase is regularly
μή, whether the partic. is in attributive, or—as much oftener
—in predicative position.

19. airlav—‘ grievance,’ meaning probably ‘self-reproach,’
as in I. 140.

§ 4 1. 22. ἀγνῶτες. . ἐπεσενεγκάμενοι --- Π6 subject con-
tracts, being first both parties, but then the Plataeans only:
this freedom is characteristic of Thuc.

24. πρὸς εἰδότας πάντα AcdéEerar—‘ you know all that can
be said.’

26. ἡμῶν with προκαταγνόντες as well as ἀρετάς, ‘having
formed the prejudice against us, that our merits’; cf. ο. 45, 1.

27. atré—viz. τὸ ἥσσους εἷναι κτλ.

ἄλλοις χάριν φέροντες --- ‘gratifying others,’ viz. the
Thebans. The subject of φέροντες would more naturally be
the Lacedaemonians: if the text is sound—epévTwv has been
conjectured—we recall the principle gui facit per alium facit
per 86.

S11. 1. Slkava—cf. c. 44, 4.
πρὸς . . és—no difference of meaning.
2. Θηβαίων -- πρὸς τοὺς Θηβαίους.
8.2]. 10. φίλους νομίζοντας -Ξ- εἰ φίλους νομίζετε (ἡ μᾶ).
ὃ 81. 11. τὰ δ᾽ ἐν τῇ elpqvy—adverbial. The art. covers
πρός.

§ 41.15. καὶ yap—(1) this could be taken together, =etenim,
or (2) a correlative for καί could be sought in what follows, or
(3) καί could be supposed to emphasize the concessive force of

170 ΘΟΥΚΥΛΙΆΑΘΥ ISZTOPION T

ἠπειρῶται ὄντες : most probably (1) is right, though some deny
this use for Thuc.

16. paxy—temporal, without ἐν; this dat. is used several
times by Thuc. The Plataeans were always proud of the fact
that the battle had been fought on their soil.

§ 51. 21. kal ὑμῖν. . i8{qa—as distinct from their services
to the common cause.

22. ὅτεπερ S4—‘at the very time when,’ in 464 B.c.

23. τῶν. . ἀποστάντων depends on φόβος. For the posi-
tion of the attrib. partic., not rare in Thuc. when other

qualifying words are added, cf. 11. 18 ἡ ἐν ᾿Ισθμῷ ἐπιμόνη
γενομένη, Cc. 67, 3.

55 81]. 4. δεομένων γὰρ Evppaxlas—in 519 or 509 B.c. (see
on ὁ. 68, 5) Plataea, πιεζεύμενοι ὑπὸ Θηβαίων (Herod. vi. 108),
applied to king Cleomenes to be admitted to alliance with
Sparta.—Note (1) absence of noun with δεομένων, see c. 34,
3 n.: (2) gen. abs. though ἀπεώσασθε follows, a common
sacrifice of form to sense in Herod. and Thue. ; for this variety
ef. 11. 5 ἀναχωρησάντων δὲ πάλιν (80. αὐτῶν) ἐκ τῆς γῆς
ἀποδώσειν αὐτοῖς.

7. &touotvtwv—for the case here cf. 11, 8 ἐς τοὺς Λακε-
Oatmovious, ἄλλως TE Kal προειπόντων.

§ 21.7. & .. τῷ πολέμῳ ---νἶΖ. ‘this war,’ as often in Thuc.
§ 31. 10. οὐκ ἠθελήσαμεν --- εἰ Ξε ὅτι, hence ov.

ὑμῶν κελευσάντων --- [8 occurred in 429 B.c., when
the Peloponnesians marched against Plataea. The demand
was that Plataea should either join the Lacedaemonian alliance
or remain neutral.

14. εὖ παθών --- what services Plataea had received from
Athens before she ‘won the alliance’ of 519 (or 509) B.c.
is not known. τις, of course, means the Plataeans.

15. πολιτείας peréAaBev—this passage and ὁ. 63 clearly
imply that Athenian citizenship in some form was granted to _
Plataeans settling at Athens since the original alliance ; and
Isocr. Plat. 51, Pan. 49, Lysias xx11. 2, and [Dem.] 6. Neaer.
do not make this assumption impossible. But in 11. Thue.
speaks only of a ξυμμαχία between Plataea and Athens,
and possibly Thue. here anticipates. It is certain that citizen-
ship was conferred on the Plataean refugees after the destruc-
tion of Plataea. For the ὧν omitted see c. 51, 1 n.

§ 41.17. ἃ... ἐξηγεῖσθε---ἅ is internal accus., and ἐξηγεῖσθε,

NOTES 671

which is used of the orders issued by the head of a confederacy
is imperf.

§1].1. πολλὰ μὲν. . ἠδίκησαν, τὸ δὲ τελευταῖον...
Eiviore—the form of the sentence shows that Θηβαῖοι is
purposely placed in a prominent place ; cf. what the Plataeans
say at 11. 71 μετὰ Θηβαίων τῶν ἡμῖν ἐχθίστων ἐπὶ δουλείᾳ TH
ἡμετέρᾳ ἥκετε.

8.21. 4. karadapBavovras—conative.

5. ἱερομηνίᾳ ---ἴΠΘ attack occurred τελευτῶντος τοῦ μηνός
(11. 2), but whether the holiday was connected with the new
moon is unknown. The attempt was made at about ten o'clock
(περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον) on the night, probably, of April 4, 431.

§ 31. 9. εἰ γάρ κτλ. --- 1 you are going to base your estimate
of Justice on your present interest (which is, to favour Thebes)
and their hostility.’ The repetition of the art. before ἐκείνων
would be more usual; but it is not necessary. The position
of re is defended by the contrast between ὑμῶν and ἐκείνων.
λαμβάνειν is here ‘to feel about’ a thing. (Stahl and Classen
agree in this explanation, which is no doubt correct.) For
λαμβάνειν, ‘to feel about’ in a certain manner, cf. δι᾿ οἴκτου 2.
(Eur. Suppl. 194), and c. 59, 1.

§ 41. 15. npets—sc. ἦμεν, as the sense shows.
16. pe{ov.—viz. than you now are, from the Athenians.

§ 5 1. 28. ἐν καιροῖς ois—i.e. ἐν οἷς, according to a common

idiom, e.g. Dem. ΧΙΧ. 342 ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς (ἐφ᾽) ἧσπερ viv ἐξουσίας

. μενεῖ, To ἐν καιροῖς, as to μείζω, the partic. must be
supplied ; cf. ce. 30, 1: contrast c. 47, 5.

25. μᾶλλον ---ἰ.6. than now when their services are forgotten.

τὰ ξύμφορα. . abrots—(‘ arrange terms) which were to

their own advantage in view of the invasion.’ πρὸς τὴν ἔ.

belongs to ξύμφορα rather than to πράσσοντες : cf. 11. 3 ἢ
ἕκαστον ἐφαίνετο πρὸς τὰ παρόντα ξύμφορον ἔσεσθαι.

26. ἀσφαλείᾳ---“ securely,’ as in ο. 82 ἀσφαλείᾳ δὲ τὸ ἐπιβου-
λεύεσθαι, ‘to make plans in security,’ Soph. ΟἿ. 51 ἀλλ᾽
ἀσφαλείᾳ τήνδ᾽ ἀνόρθωσον πόλιν.

§ 61. 28. ὧν--- αν. ν.

29. ἐπὶ τοῖς atrots—i.e. because we have again chosen τὸ
ἀγαθόν (cf. δικαίως presently) rather than τὸ ἀσφαλές (ef.
κερδαλέως).

§ 71. 84. τῶν ξυμμάχων τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς κτλ. - -Ἰ10. ‘when, while
feeling (ἔχουσι with ὑμῖν) lasting gratitude towards brave allies,

56

172 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΑΟΥ IZTOPION T

what is perhaps (που) your interest at the moment is also
secured.’ The chief emphasis is, of course, on the participial
phrase, which states the permanent condition or test of the
righteousness of pursuing one’s own interest. (The conjecture
ἔχουσι for Mss. ἔχωσι, which cannot be satisfactorily explained,
seems certain. For the dat. τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς depending on a dat.
ἔχουσι cf. [Xen.] de Rep. Ath. 1 6 τοῖς ὁμοίοις σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ἣν
ἀγαθά ‘for those like themselves.’ It is impossible to find a
subject for ἔχωσι, and Mr. Spratt’s rendering of τὴν χάριν
ἔχωσι ‘command a recognition’ is incorrect. That this
passage, however, is completely restored by reading ἔχουσι, it
would be rash to assume.)

57 § 11. 1. προσκέψασθε. 5 προ-σκοπεῖν always implies a look
into the future, there is much to be said for the conjecture
προσ-σκέψασθε ‘consider besides’ here, for advice to consider
the future has already been given in the preceding chapter.
But as the Spartan reputation for ἀνδραγαθία was based on the
venerated institutions of Lycurgus, they might be supposed to
be specially sensitive about the future of that.

2. ἀνδραγαθίας ---ἃ merit for which Dorians especially
valued themselves: here and at c. 64, 1 ‘‘the point is the
special Dorian claim to an aristocratic strain of feeling and
conduct” (Neil: see above on c. 40, 4). Perhaps ‘good
breeding.’

4, ph τὰ elxéra—a neg. is not seldom placed before the
article or preposition (οὐκ ἐν ὀλίγῳ).

6. ἐπαινούμενοι--- ν]Ζ. as models of ἀνδραγαθία.
ov8’—‘ no more than you.’

9. émyvavar.—after γνώσεσθε above, the ém- can scarcely
have its usual force, ‘to decide further’: the sense is probably
merely ‘to arrive at a decision.’

8.2]. 12. τοὺς μὲν πατέρας... ὑμᾶς S—‘if you, whose fathers
.., the first clause being subord. to the second. Generally
δεινόν is followed by εἰ in such cases.

13. τὸν rplrofa—i.e. on the bronze pedestal of three
intertwined serpents that supported the gold tripod set up at
Delphi from the tithe of the Persian spoils dedicated to the
Pythian god. It stood close to the altar before the temple.
The pedestal was taken by Constantine to Byzantium, and
still exists, with the names of the states inscribed on the lower
part of the spiral. The tripod was appropriated by the
Phocians. (Herod. 1x. 81, with Stein’s notes.)

NOTES 173

15. twavoueoiqa—after πόλιν and Πλάταιαν this means (as
Steup points out) ‘with all its houses,’ not ‘household and all’
as in 11. 16.

§ 3 1. 16. totro—referring to what precedes.

18. ἀπωλλύμεθα --- Plataea was burnt by Xerxes. The
rendering ‘we were all but destroyed’ is borne out by other
passages ; e.g. Andoc. de Myst. § 41.

év—as in κρίνεσθαι ἐν.
19. &yavas—‘ hazards.’

20. rére—referring to the siege of Plataea, τότε being
frequently used of a well-known occasion.

§ 41.22. περιεώσμεθα, ‘we are outcasts.’ πάντων is probably
masce, ; cf. ἐκ παντὸς τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ above.

24. ἀτιμώρητοι---“ unsuccoured.’
27. BéBaro—‘ faithful.’

§11. 2. Evxppaxtxdv—i.e. the gods by whom the oath to
be true to the alliance was taken.

5. τήν τε Swpedv . . mpére.—‘and (we call on you) to ask
in your turn the favour of them—that you do not kill men
whom it disgraces you to kill.’ ἀντ-απαιτῆσαι means, in
answer to the favour they have asked of you—viz. κτείνειν ἡμᾶς.
To this explanation rather than ‘in return for our services,’
el τι ἐπείσθητε and ἀντὶ αἰσχρᾶς (χάριτος) point, and this is the
natural force of ἀντι-, as in δρῶν ἀντιπάσχω χρηστά, and so on;
cf. ἀντιλαβεῖν presently. The subj. of ἀνταπαιτῆσαι is ὑμᾶς,
and αὐτούς means the Thebans. The μή after οὕς is because
the rel. clause is subord. to an infin. In this series of four
co-ordinate infin. clauses, the second and third have re, the
fourth has καί.

7. c&ppova —from us, in contrast with αἰσχρᾶς, from
them.

8. kaklav—‘ill-fame,’ character of κακοί, as e.g. in Soph.
Ant. 924 quoted on c. 82, 8.

§ 21. 12. κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην ---ἃ8 explained in c. 55, 1.

§ 31.13. ὥστε kal . . ποιοῦντες. . Kal mpovootvres—this
is not clearly expressed, for the first participial clause states
what follows from the previous sentence ; but καὶ προνοοῦντες
κτλ. contains a new point (ἑκόντας. . προισχομένους), and
should scarcely have been co-ordinated with ἄδειαν ποιοῦντες,

58

174 OOYKYATAOY IZTOPION T

14. rovotvres—supply ἡμῖν : it is not clear whether ἡμῶν is
similarly to be supplied to προνοοῦντες.

16. νόμος, the unwritten law ; cf. cc. 66, 67. Prisoners who
had not surrendered voluntarily were often killed. Appeals to
the νόμος ἄγραφος, πάτριος νόμος, νόμιμα πάσης Ἑ) λλάδος are
very frequent; and of course the Antigone is full of the
ἄγραπτα κἀσφαλῆ θεῶν νόμιμα. In Xen. Mem. tv. 4, 19 Hippias
defines the ἄγραφοι νόμοι as οἱ ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ κατὰ ταὐτὰ
νομιζόμενοι. :

§ 41. 22. ἐσθήμασι---Ὑο0685 burned as offerings, probably, and
not worn by the officials, The plur., joined with vouluous and
ἀπαρχάς in this connexion, is surely mentioned as part of the
évayiouara. Plutarch in Aristides 21, giving an account of
the ceremony as performed in his day, makes no mention of
robes among the offerings ; but the details may well have been
modified by his time. On the contrary, he does say that the
Provost wore a purple coat and carried a sword; but the
present passage does not read like a ref. to that. That clothes
were burnt as offerings to the dead is well known, e.g. Eur.
Hee. 573.

24, émupépovres—specially used of offerings to the dead ;
II. 34.

25. ξύμμαχον... yevouévois—the object of the speaker is
to emphasize the lasting effect of the old alliance and to say
nothing of the alliance with Athens. ὁμαίχμοις is an old-
fashioned word, perhaps intended to recall the old times.

§ 5 1. 32. ab0éyrars—as having sided with the Persians. An-
other old-fashioned word.

36. ἱερά τε. . ἀφαιρήσεσθε --- there are three difficulties
here :—(1) ἐρημοῦτε, present, among a series of futures. This
can hardly be defended by passages in which a single pres.
and fut. are combined, such as II. 44 οὐκ ὀλοφύρομαι μᾶλλον ἢ
παραμυθήσομαι. Stahl reads ἐρημοῦντες after Goller ; Steup pro-
poses to leave the word ont. If sound we must render ‘ you are
making desolate.’ (2) What isthe constr. of τῶν... κτισάντων ?
The natural answer is that it depends on ἀφαιρήσεσθε (‘you will
take from’), not on θυσίας. The objection, that the Plataeans
will ex hypothesi be dead, is hardly serious, for τῶν. . κτισάν-
των includes the whole Plataean people of whom no small part
was safe at Athens. Neither is there any need to render
ἀφαιρήσεσθε ‘you will deprive,’ a sense that ἀφαιροῦμαι no where
has when the object is inanimate. (8) Is ἱερά or θυσίας the
object of τῶν... κτισάντων; My reason for preferring θυσίας
is that θυσίας τὰς πατρίους must refer to commemorative

NOTES 175

sacrifices to the gods founded after the victory of Plataea:
otherwise the Lac. could have no interest in them, and the
speaker could not seek to influence them by such an argument.
These sacrifices are to the gods, and they were offered on behalf
of Greece—irép τῆς Ἑλλάδος (Plut. Arist. 20, 21): hence the
last sentence duly accords with ἠλευθερώθησαν οἱ “EXXnves and
ἐκράτησαν (oi "EXXAnves). (The νόμιμα τῶν Ἑλλήνων are not in
question here.)

37. éroapévwv—this archaic form in place of ἑσαμένων has
by far the best ms. authority, and perhaps is meant to accord
with duaixuos and αὐθένταις.

$11. 2. réSe—the conduct deprecated in the last c., which 59
conduct is now summarized in οὔτε... οὔτε.

7. οἴκτῳ σώφρονι λαβόντας --- ‘regarding (the case) with
prudent compassion.’ The point of σώφρονι is given in ἀλλ’
. . ξυμπέσοι. The obj. of λαμβάνειν in this sense is omitted
also in VI. 61.

9. ὡς... Evpméror—the subj. of ξυμπέσοι---τὸ τῆς §&.—is
anticipated.

§ 21. 11. mpérov—se. ἐστί.

13. ὁμοβωμίους ; not found elsewhere; ‘having the same
altars’ may mean either ‘worshipped at the same altar,’ of
several gods worshipped together, or ‘having like altars’
throughout Greece ; hardly ‘whose altars are common to all
worshippers.’ The second suits the context best.

14. 6’—this is a necessary addition, as the passage cannot
make a fresh start at προφερόμενοι.

15. μὴ Gpvnpovetv—Cobet pronounced these words spurious:
the only constr. they can fairly bear is with προφερόμενοι
ὅρκους, but, as ἡμεῖς is the subj. of the other infins., this is
awkward. (ὥμοσαν would require fut. or aor. infin. : order and
the addition of τῶν π. τάφων are against ἱκέται γιγνόμεθα.)
τῶν π. τάφων is rendered ‘by . . tombs,’ but the gen. can
hardly be so understood with ἱκέται, on which it directly
depends.

16, tpav—emphatic.
19. τοῖς ἐχθίστοις ---80. to your dead (not to ws). ‘‘ The dead

are implored to prevent the Pl., their best friends, being
surrendered to the Theb., their worst enemies” (Widmann).

20. ἣ .-. ἐν τῇδε---ἐν should not be made to apply to 9, as
this kind of idiom (Aesch. Sept. 1032 μητρὸς ταλαίνης κἀπὸ

176 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ISTOPION Τ'

δυστήνου πατρός) is confined to poetry (Wilamowitz on Eur.
HF. 237).

21. πράξαντες. . κινδυνεύομεν --- ἃ compressed form of
ἐπράξαμεν, νῦν δέ κτλ. For νῦν we might have expected the
εἶτα of inconsistency.

§ 3]. 22. ὅπερ Sé—the rel. clause qualifies παυόμενοι, for
which we might have had ποιοῦντες.

24. λόγου redevTav--epexegetic of ὅπερ. The gen. with
τελευτᾶν again inc. 104 If you ‘begin’ with a gen., you may
naturally ‘end’ with one.

25. μετ᾽ avrot—viz. τοῦ τελευτᾶν.

29. ἐς τὰ αὐτὰ καταστήσαντας ---ἰ.θ6. as we were before
we capitulated.

30. τὸν Euvtuxdvra—‘any that comes’; cf. ὁ τυχών.

§ 41. 35. ἱκέται dvres—‘ as suppliants.’ The likeness of this
peroration to the poignant appeals in Euripides should be

noticed.
61 §11.2. xalavro(—‘ they on their part’; 1. 51, Xen. Hell.
ὙΠ; 7,
τὸ épwrnév—cf. Xen. Mem. Iv. 2, 28 τὸ ἐρωτώμενον
ἀποκρίνεσθαι. ᾿

6. οὐδὲ yrvapévov —best taken as agreeing with αὑτῶν,
‘and moreover when they have not even been accused.’ The
alternative, neut. depending on ἀπολογίαν, ‘of conduct that
was far from being made a charge against them,’ produces
tautology with ὧν οὐδεὶς ἐμέμψατο. Kal ἅμα adds something of
special importance, often in Thuc. ; Xen. Cyr. 1. 4, 25 καὶ διὰ
τὸ φιλεῖν αὐτὸν καὶ ἅμα ἐλπίδας ἔχων.

8. πρὸς μὲν τά-- οἵ, ο. 82 ἐπὶ δὲ re. This is the ordinary
order when a prep. occurs with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, e.g. Isocr. 11. 18
ἵνα Tas μὲν φεύγωσι, πρὸς δὲ τὰς προθυμότερον ἔχωσιν.

10. κακία referring to the κατηγορία, δόξα to the ἀπολογία
καὶ ἔπαινος of the Plat.: not zronical, as the schol., but the
use noticed above, c. 58, 1. τούτων is masc. ; cf. ἡμετέρα and
οὗτοι below.

§ 21.13. ἡμῶν---[Π6 Boeotian migration from Thessaly.
16. Evppelkrovs—Pelasgians, Thracians, Hyantians (Strabo).

18. Hyepovever Oar —i.e. to acknowledge the ἡγεμονία of
Thebes in Boeotia.

NOTES 177

20. προσηναγκάζοντο--8δὴ attempt to make them observe
Ta πάτρια. See c. 65, 2.

§ 21. 5. οὐ belongs to μηδίσαι.
6. “A@nvatovs—attraction to case of αὐτούς.
ἰδέᾳ —‘ method.’

§31. 8. καίτοι... Se-—‘ you must surely consider the con-
ditions under which.’

10. ἐτύγχανεν... moAdtrevouca—‘ was in point of fact’:
τυγχάνω, as often, not of a mere accident, but of the true state
of things, as distinct from what might appear to be.

11. iodvopov—where all the nobles are equal, and their
rights are fixed by laws. But in a δυναστεία the few rulers
are a Jaw to themselves.

13. τῷ σωφρονεστάτῳ- “{Π6 best order,’ i.e. an aristocracy
or moderate democracy. No doubt this is said with reference
to the constitution of Thebes, as existing in 427 B.c., with its
two Boeotarchs and four assemblies confined to τοῖς κεκτημένοις
πλῆθός τι χρημάτων, as Theopompus or Cratippus says, (Several
conjj. have been made on this unusual expression, e.g. τῷ
σώφρονι πάντων Herw. : τῷ σωφρονεστέρῳ Hude. )

14. tupdvvov—for τυραννίδος : so δῆμος for δημοκρατία.

§ 41. 15. οὗτοι. . oxhoev—‘ these in the hope of winning
power for themselves in yet greater degree.’

18. kal. . érpagev—‘so the city as a whole could not
control her actions when she acted so, and it is not fair to
blame her, for any errors she fell into when she had no
constitution.’

8 5 1. 21. yotv—‘thus for example’; illustrative of the
previous statement.

23. ἔπιόντων τήν τε ἄλλην ᾿Εἰλλάδα καὶ. . πειρωμένων ---ἃ8
τε cannot mean ‘and’ here, but must be correlative to καί, it
is clear that ἐπιόντων governs τὴν. . Ἑλλάδα, and that the
introduction of πειρωμένων changes the constr. ef. C6:.67;-6,
94, 3 (so Steup).

26. éxévrwv—after the battle of Oenophyta, 458 B.c. The
battle of Coronea in 446 forced the A. to abandon Boeotia.

81]. 4. wéons—‘any,’ inclusive, a common use of πᾶς and 63

its derivative adverbs,
$21. 6. hperépqa—objective ; 11. 42 τὴν τῶν ἐναντίων τιμωρίαν.
8, τὰ πρὸς Hpas—adverbial, ἵνα ἡμᾶς τιμωροῖσθε.
Ν

178 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

10. trapxov—sc. μὴ ξυνεπιέναι. ‘ye gives a causal sense to
a partic.

14. mpoBddreobe—as a defence ; cf. 1. 37 τὸ εὐπρεπὲς ἄσπον-
δον προβέβληνται.

ye—not a common use of γε, where it serves to connect,

and at the same time throws feeling into the sentence: ‘ Ah,
yes.’

15. παρέχειν---80. ὑμῖν.

8.831. 19. δέ ye or dé. . γε is used to capa previous statement
or, while accepting it, to bring in a consideration on the other
side ; it is common in retort (Neil).

20. Kara-mpodotvar.—‘ utterly to betray’; so prob. in κατα-
δουλουμένους.

8 41. 26. τοῖς δέ-Ξ ἐκείνοις δέ,

27. καίτοι... ἀποδιδομένας ---“ΒΈΓΘΙΥ failure to return favours
with like favours (cf. ἴσην above) is dishonourable ; and not
failure to return debts of gratitude that were justly incurred
(cf. ὑμεῖς. , ἀδικούμενοι), but of which the payment leads to
injustice’ (cf. τοῖς δὲ ἀδικοῦσιν). You should have waited till
they were ἀδικούμενοι to return the service they had rendered
to you.

64 §11.3. ὅτι. . τἀναντία ---“ because the A. did not either,
and we did, from your wish’ etc. ἡμεῖς is much better than
ὑμεῖς, giving antithesis to ᾿Αθηναῖοι, asin τοῖς μὲν. , τοῖς δέ:
cf. c. 63, 8. βουλόμενοι applies to the Plat.

§ 21. 6. ἀπὸ rovrwv—emphatic resumption of the attracted
rel.

8. Evvaywv(terbe—‘ continue their allies,’ in mockery.
§ 31. 11, Atywaras—Aegina was reduced in 457 B.c. to the
status of a tributary ally.

12. ἄλλους twas—thought to be the Euboeans, who had
fought at Plataea, and against whom Pericles may have em-
ployed the Plat. in 445 B.c,

13. SvexwAvere—se. ἄλλους καταδουλοῦσθαι.
16. περιτειχίζεσθαι---“ before the siege was begun.’

17. ἡμῶν ---“ οὐ our side.’ This demand had been made by
K. Archidamus, but the Theb. adopt it.

§ 41.18. rots “EAAnow—the dat. of agent with other parts
than perf. of pass. is not uncommon in Thue.

NOTES 179

20. ἀνδραγαθίαν ---ἰῃ remaining true to Athens.

21. οὐ... émedelEare—‘ you have now shown not to belong
to your nature.” Thuc. does not use ἐπιδεικνύναι in this sense
elsewhere, but other authors, e.g. the orators, do. It is prob.
unnecessary to read ἀπεδείξατε or ὑπεδείξατε. Steup renders
‘ you showed afterwards.’

23. ἐξηλέγχθη és τὸ ἀληθές ---΄ has been conclusively demon-
strated.’

§ 21. 9. &Stkotpev—‘ are guilty,’ as often. 65

11. κοινά---“ common to,’ Plataea had remained outside the
Boeotian league as reconstituted in 446 B.c., and of course had
no representatives in the General Assembly of the league which
met at Thebes.

12. καταστῆσα:ι--- bring you into line with.’

§ 31.16. πλείω rapaBaddAdpevor—they were οὐ τῶν ἀδυνατω-
τάτων (11. 8); cf. § 2. For the verb cf. c. 14, 1.

18. φιλίως, od πολεμίως κομίσαντες ---οἵ, the αὐτοί and
πολέμιοι οὗ § 2, and c. 66 οὐ πολεμίως ἐπράσσομεν Which show
that the adverbs cannot apply merely to the Plat. and mean
‘with friendly, and not hostile intent to their fellow-citizens’ ;
but must refer to the Theb. For this reason, and because
κομίσαντες lacks an obj., Steup reads φιλίους and πολεμίους.
But ‘in a friendly manner’ implies here ‘us as friends of
Plataea,’ and κομίζειν is used like δέχεσθαι. It is not necessary
to have an obj. expressed ; cf. ἐπεκαλέσαντο above. The rest
of the sentence shows that there is an intentional vagueness
in the terms chosen: it was ‘a friendly transaction.’

19. tpav—partitive, in unusual position ; cf. c. 22, 5.

20. μηκέτι μᾶλλον γενέσθαι--- χείρους and duelvovs have ἃ
political meaning here, and are scarcely felt as comparatives :
hence μᾶλλον is natural ; ‘should henceforth not get more so.’

21. σωφρονισταὶ . . olkeotvres—adopting Weil’s view
that γνώμης and σωμάτων must be under the same governance,
and that there must be a real antithesis between ἀλλοτριοῦντες
and οἰκειοῦντες, tr. ‘seeking to regulate opinion and persons,
not alienating their city (handing it over to strangers), but
bringing it home to the union of their kinsmen’ (the Boeotian
confederacy). It is usual to take τῶν σωμάτων with τὴν πόλιν,
‘not depriving the city of your persons’: this is very strange
for τὰ σώματα τῆς πόλεως ἀλλοτριοῦντες. σωφρονισταί of the
party opposed to extreme democracy ; cf. c. 82, 8. (For the
antithesis of σῶμα and γνώμη, Andoc. de Red. 24.)

180 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΑΘΟΥ ἸΣΤΘΡΙΩΝ: T

28. ἐχθροὺς. . ἐνσπόνδους --- (50. ὑμᾶς ; not breaking your
peaceful relations with any state, e.g. Athens, but putting
you in them on a footing with every other state, i.e. Thebes.
Plataea was still, as they sophistically say, to enjoy the
σπονδαί, but not on conditions peculiar to herself. ἅπασι de-
pends on ὁμοίως ” (Prof. Lamberton).

66 81]. 2. προείπομέν τε x7h.—the account corresponds very
closely with the narrative of the attempt on Plataea in 11. 2 f.

§ 21. 9. wAqPovs—often used of the majority.

10. pare. . eehOetv—explaining τὰ ὁμοῖα.

12. ods μὲν. . GAyodpev—the sentence takes an unexpected
turn: instead of τοὺς μὲν ἀπεκτείνατε we get a comment on that
action. The re/. in each case is causal, =éri τοὺς μέν : οἵ,
1. 68 τί δεῖ μακρηγορεῖν, ὧν (=émrel ἡμῶν) τοὺς μὲν. . , IV. 26
ἀθυμίαν δὲ πλείστην ὁ χρόνος παρεῖχε, ods (-Ξ ὅτι αὐτοὺς) ᾧοντο
ἐκπολιορκήσειν.

16. mapavopws—see c. 58, 3.

8 31.17. κἀνταῦθα --- {Ππ|58. emendation of καὶ ταῦτα seems
necessary, since ταῦτα τρεῖς ἀδικίας for ‘these as three wrongs’
is unexampled.

19. λυθεῖσαν ---ἴον the constr. see on c. 53, 3.

21. «relveev—the pres. depends on the subst. : but the verb
(ὑπισχνοῦμαι) always has the fut.

25. αὐτῶν.---αοαὐτά referring to what has been mentioned, as
often.

67 811. 4. ἡμεῖς 8€—to supply εἰδῶμεν is grammatically
necessary ; ‘that we may know after your condemnation that
we have yet more rightly taken vengeance on them.’ To ἔτι
ὁσιώτερον we must surely supply ὑμῶν : you will act justly: we
shall have acted yet more equitably. We are the parties chiefly
aggrieved. But it is said (already by Bloomfield) that for
εἰδῶμεν we need ‘feel’ or ‘appear,’ since the Theb. do not
discover anything from their own speech: hence 1. φανῆτε for
εἰδῆτε Rauchenstein ; or 2. take εἰδῆτε as a zeugma; or 3. read
ἡμᾶς... τετιμωρημένους Kr. But notice (1) the speech would
lead to condemnation by the judges; (2) the condemnation
would show the Theb. that their action had been justified.
The only alternative, I think, is to supply ὦμεν, and to assume
an assimilation of finite verb to the previous partic. clause, as
Hude, who compares Xen. Mem. 11. 8, 17.

§ 21. 6. ἀκούοντες --- Ὀγ the account of.’ ἀκούων, like κλύων,
is often used where we expect an aor, partic.

NOTES 181

9. διπλασίας {yplas—the influence of the rel. does not
extend to this clause.

οὐκ ἐκ προσηκόντων --ἶ.6, contrary to what was to be
expected of them.

§ 31. 15. dv—see one. 2, 11. 8.

17. οἱ δὲ... AeAeppévor—‘ others left behind in old age
and their homes desolate.’ The emendation κατ᾽ οἰκίας or καὶ
αἱ οἰκίαι, is necessary. The latter is better, because οἰκίαι
ἐρῆμοι should certainly be co-ordinate with οἱ δέ, so as to
correspond with τὴν σφετέραν ἐρημίαν.

§ 41. 21. τὰ évavr(a—adverbial.

22. émlxaprow—sc. ἄξιοί εἰσι.

§ 51. 25. δίκῃ κρίναντες together correspond to μίσει.

26. οὐκ ἀνταποδόντες ---1.6. they will not have done so,
because the penalty will be ἔννομα : whereas our suffering was
ἄνομα (§ 6; cf. παρενόμησαν) ; the aor. partic. alluding to fut.
perf. time as if the main verb were fut., cf. ἐκστρατευσάμενοι
c. 102. (Various changes have been proposed: (1) to alter
ἀνταποδόντες to fut., pres., or ἂν ἀνταποδόντες, or to read
ἀνταποδόντες ἐς viv: (2) or, keeping ἀνταποδόντες, to start a
new sentence at καὶ οὐκ, placing ἔννομα γάρ in parenthesis.
It does not seem possible to separate the latter from πείσονται.

It is best to suppose a slight break after κρίναντες, as though
the rest were an afterthought.)

§ 6 1. 32. καὶ qpiv—instead of a second obj. corresponding to
kal τῷ νόμῳ, a new verb follows: cf. c. 71, 1.

33. ὧν πρόθυμοι y.—see § 3.

84, τοῖς Adyous—dat. of cause.

37. ὧν... ὄντων depends on ἀπαγγελία.

39. &mreot—‘ fine phrases,’ = ῥήμασι.

§ 71. 41. kehadradoavres—for the point see c. 52, 4.

πρὸς τοὺς Evpmravras—‘ with reference to all,’ i.e. (as
Classen) ‘as a warning to all.’ A summary question followed
by a decision will serve to check rhetorical defences. (Weil
conjectures πρὸς τὸ ξύμπαν.)

42. ποιήσησθε---αὐϊτδούίοη to ὑμεῖς, as in 1. 82 ὅσοι ὥσπερ καὶ
ἡμεῖς ἐπιβουλευόμεθα.

811. 4. εἰ... πεπόνθασι is the ἐπερώτημα.
ὅ. τὸν ἄλλον xpévov—‘ all along.’

68

182 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION Τ'

6. δῆθεν---ΔΙνα 5. ironical, signifying that this is not the
true reason.

7. μετὰ τὸν MASov—usually μετὰ τὰ Μηδικά.

8. καὶ (ἠξίουν) Ste . . οὐκ ἐδέξαντο-- 10 is impossible to
make grammar of the sentence with ὅτε. . ἃ .. wsin. Each
word has been altered: the removal of & seems most likely ;
‘and particularly, when afterwards the offer that they made of
remaining neutral according to that convention was refused.’

10. Fyotpevor.—this gives the reason for νομίζοντες. . ἐδέ-

ἕαντο.

m7. ere Wy their own just intention,’ ice.
they had tried their best to conform to the σπονδαί: it was
the fault of the Plat. that the Lac. have fair grounds for re-
garding the σπονδαί at an end.

12, τὸ adré—obj. of ἐρωτῶντες, so that παραγαγόντες καί
breaks the constr. ; cf. Soph Antig. 1279 τὰ δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις | ἔοικας
ἥκειν καὶ τάχ᾽ ὄψεσθαι κακά, where τὰ δ᾽ ἐν 6. is governed by
ὄψεσθαι.

§ 21. 20. ἠνδραπόδισαν---“ sold as slaves.’ From 11. 78 we
know that 110 women were among the besieged Plat. (all the
others had found refuge at Athens) and that these were all
slaves already.

§ 3 1. 21. OnBato.—removed by Classen, who maintained that
the true subj. of ἔδοσαν is the Lac. ; but cf. c. 58, 5 εἰ. . χώραν
τὴν Πλαταιίδα Θηβαΐδα ποιήσετε. τὰ σφέτερα certainly seems to
refer to the Thebans (cf. 11. 2). (Herbst and Busolt defend
the Ms. reading.)

κατὰ ordo.w—the circumstances are unknown.

24. ἐκ τῶν Oeped(wv—take with ὠκοδόμησαν.

25. πρὸς τῷ “Hpatw—the site of the Heraeum and remains
of the νεὼς λίθινος have in all probability been discovered (Am.
J. of Archacol. 1891). It is likely that the temple previously
existing was pulled down and replaced by the new one
mentioned here.

καταγώγιον ---[οἹ those who came to worship at the
temple: otherwise they would have had no shelter after the
destruction of the city.

26. πανταχῇ is put with διακοσίων ποδῶν (200 ft. square) by
some edd., but more prob. belongs to κύκλῳ ΞΞ 811] round,’ as
in VII. 79.

27. οἰκήματα ---ἴο! sleeping: they were in two stories.

NOTES 183

29. rots &AXows—instrumental, with κατασκευάσαντες.

30. relxer—i.e. inside the city. The sacred precinct lay
‘before the city’ (Herod. 1x. 61).

§ 41]. 34. xaf—intensive.

37. ἄρτι τότε καθιστάμενον refers to the fall of Plat., not
to the beginning of the siege. Cf. ο. 3, 1.

ὃ 5 1. 39. τρίτῳ καὶ ἐνενηκοστῷ---ὅ19--427 B.c. But Grote
showed that 509 B.c. was the probable year of the alliance ;
hence it has been suggested that ἐνενηκοστῷ is due to an early
error in an uncial Ms., and that Thuc. wrote the uncial signs
for ὀγδοηκοστῷ.

40. ἐπειδή---οὗ, 1. 6 οὐ πολλὰ ἔτη ἐπειδὴ πέπαυται.
81]. 8. rére—see c. 33, 1.

4. ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ---[ῃ6 other places in Thuc. in which
ἐκ ‘on the part of,’ practically =i7é are I. 20, 11. 49, ν. 104,
vi. 36. The use is Ionic ; not found in ordinary Attic prose.

6. otopéSes—correl. with the preceding partic., as in c. 82,
1 οὐκ ἂν ἐχόντων πρόφασιν οὐδ᾽ ἑτοίμων παρακαλεῖν, but Classen
points out that dm’ αὐτῆς σποράδες goes more closely with
κατηνέχθησαν, and regards καί before ἀπ᾽ as spurious.

8. KvAAqvy—the port of the Eleans.

10. €dpBovrdov—because the ναύαρχος had shown his in-
competence.

§ 21. 14. περὶ Natraxrov—see c. 7, 3.

15. πρὶν. . προφθάσωσι --- [Π6 constr. is ὅπως δὲ mpo-
φθάσωσι (a second reason of the plan adopted), πρίν. . , but
for the sake of the antithesis between δώδεκα... παρόντων and
πλέον τι ἐπι. the order is changed.

§ 11. 2. ἦλθον adrots—see on ὁ. δ.

ἐκ τῶν... vavpaxiev—there were two battles fought
near the islands called Sybota. 250 of the principal Corcyreans
were taken prisoners in the second battle, and were conveyed
to Corinth, where they remained about five years.

5. éxraxoolwv—the ransom for not more than 250 men is
very high, but the prisoners were very important. The price
paid for a man varied very much, of course, as it does still.
The lowest heard of is two minas (Herod. v. 77), the highest—
in the case of an ambassador of Philip—nine talents. The
sum here mentioned need not be thought so great as to rouse
suspicion.

184 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

5. τοῖς mpotévors —i.e. the Corinthian representatives of
Coreyra had gone bail for them.

§ 21.10. ἀφικομένης. . Gyourdv—edd. say ἀγουσῶν must
be plur. because both ships had πρέσβεις on board. Yet we
find pred. in sing. applying to several subjects ; 1. 42, 1, Iv.
31, 2, vI. 31, 1, vu. 44, 6, 58, 4. For the attraction cf. c.
72, 2.

11. καταστάντων ---80. τῶν πρέσβεων.

18. ξυγκείμενα.- ἰδ was a defensive alliance only. πρότερον
means before the convention with Athens, when Corcyra had
been on good terms with the Pel., though not in alliance with
any one.

881. 14. qv γὰρ. . dmdyovo.w—the reason stated in ad-
vance in parenthesis ; cf. ο. 107, 3.

15. @eXompd—evos—only mentioned here; it prob. means
that P. had not been appointed by Athens; and hence he
could be prosecuted for his Athenian sympathies.

16. mpoeorjket—unofiicial leader.

§ 4 1. 20. χάρακας — ‘ vine-poles,’ Corcyra having many
vineyards. The sites of the τεμένη are unknown. Alcinous
is the Homeric king.

22. στατήρ--οἵ silver, worth 24 Attic drachmas, the only
form of stater coined in Corcyra.

8 51. 25. ταξάμενοι aroSeo01w—‘ pay by a mutual arrange-
ment,’ prob. on the instalment system.

§ 61. 27. τῷ τε νόμῳ éEelpyovro—nothing is to be supplied ;
‘the law forced them, allowed them no escape.’ Cf. Herod. 1x.
111 ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ἐξεργόμενος.

29. τοὺς αὐτοὺς. . νομίζειν.---ἰ.6. to substitute a ξυμμαχία,
offensive and defensive alliance, for the existing ἐπιμαχία.

34, τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης --80. ὄντες.

71 811]. 2. ταῦτα. . SovdwPetev—for the position of the first
καί 8688 6. 67, 6. It is usual to supply from ταῦτα (i.e. what
they had done) a οὕτως to ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν δ. : better, I think, with-
out ; ‘that it was not likely that they would be made slaves by
the A.’

5. δέχεσθαι --- the meaning of εἶπον passes into- that of
κελεύω.

ἀλλ᾽ ἤ---στι. 50, 3.

μιᾷ νηί---οἴ, τι. 7.

NOTES 185

5. ἡσυχάζοντας applies to the Corcyreans,

8.21. 10. @s—‘as.’ They were to put matters in a good
light.

11. ἀνεπιτήδειον---ἰο Corcyra.

12. émerpopy—lest ‘notice’ should be taken by Athens,
resulting in some action against Corcyra. The πρέσβεις must
have completely won over part of the refugee friends of
Peithias to their side, since it was thought necessary to intern
them in Aegina (B. Schinidt).

§11. 1. ἐλθόντων---80. τῶν πρέσβεων. 72

3. ὅσους ἔπεισαν ---80. τῶν ἐκεῖ καταπεφευγότων.

§ 31.9. The accompanying map will explain the situation
of the contending parties.

§ 11. 2. ddtya—adverbial acc. like βραχέα and μεγάλα in ο. 73
40, ἴσα inc. 14. The constr. is widely diffused in Thue.

The appeal to the slaves is a most unusual feature, and
shows the extreme bitterness of the strife.

5. πλῆθος --οὗἉ the ‘ majority,’ as often.

811]. 2. ἡμέρας [16 day referred to in c. 73. 74

3. χωρίων --- this word is specially used of strategic
positions.

6. Kepdw—collective, as e.g. in 11. 4 So κάλαμος 11. 76;
in Livy xx11l. 16 vallum ferre=vallos f.

§ 21. 8. Selcavres—ingressive, ‘becoming afraid.’
9. avroBoei—said to be an archaic word.
vewpfov—in the Harbour of Alcinous.

12. Evvoixlas—situated between the Agora and the Acropolis.
The gen. adjj. that follow refer to both οἰκίας and ξυνοικίας.
No doubt some of the ὀλίγοι had invested money in the
tenements, and let them out, like the plutocrat pork-butcher
in the Knights of Aristophanes.

15. ἐκινδύνευσε. . διαφθαρῆναι--οἴ, c. 40, 5.
§ 31.17. ὡς éxdrepor.—‘ on either side,’ an idiomatic phrase,

to be taken with ἡσυχάσαντες, which is ingressive (A. G.
Laird in Am. J. of Phil. 1906, p. 43).

§11. 1. Nexéorparos—he had command of the Athenian 75
squadron at Naupactus, from which he could reach Coreyra in
a day. The Messenians had been settled in Naupactus after
the Messenian Wars.

186 ΘΟΥΚΥΆΤΑΟΥ IZTOPION T

5. erpacoe—conative.
6. 8€ka—oligarchs.

§ 21.11. οἱ τοῦ δήμου προστάται---ἃ bronze plate found on
the site of the Corcyrean Agora and now in the Brit. Mus.
contains a decree of the Coreyrean Assembly (ἁλία) appointing
an Athenian ‘proxenus’ of Corcyra. Among the Corcyrean
authorities mentioned in the decree, which is assigned to the
4th cent. B.c., occurs προστάτας Τνάθιος. The προστάται there-
fore appear to have been a board of magistrates in Corcyra
(Ane. Gr. Inser. in the Brit. Mus. Pl. ii. p. 50).

16. ξυμπέμψειν .---80. ἔφασαν, by an idiom to which Thue.
is partial.

$31. 19. τὸ Διοσκόρων iepdv—the site is unknown.

8.41. 23. τῇ τοῦ μὴ ξυμπλεῖν ἀπιστίᾳ.---“ by their distrust in
sailing (i.e. in the proposal that they should sail) with them.’
The μή is added because the whole result is neg., as often ; cf.
11. 49 ἡ ἀπορία τοῦ μὴ ἡσυχάζειν, Plato, Apol. 38 D ἀπορία τοῦ
μὴ ἐθέλειν.

8 5 1. 26. οἱ &AXot—oligarchs, not confined to those who had
refused to go on board the five ships.

27. τὸ “Hpavov—see the map, with notes. The removal
from the shrine of Castor and Pollux to the Heraeum is to be
accounted for by (1) supposing that the latter was the
principal shrine of the city, and (2) the necessity of getting
400 men into the τέμενος. (Bloomfield’s view that the Heraeum
was superior in sanctity is fanciful.)

28. ylyvovrat—of the sum-total, as often.

76 811]. 2. τὴν. . StaxopiS4v—example of the liking Thue.
shows for a subst. derived from a verb.

4, Κυλλήνης--ο. 69. For ἐφ᾽ ὅρμῳ οὖσαι we say ‘which
had lain at anchor’ (at Cyllene), οὖσαι being tmperf. partic.
(MT. 8 140). The mss. have ἔφορμοι for ἐφ᾽ ὅρμῳ, but there
seems to be no authority for ἔφορμος as adj.

8. ἐπέπλει--ἐπιπλεῖν is used of the commanders: ἐμπλεῖν
below of the crew.

77° $11. 1. πολλῷ θορύβῳ .- [πΠ6 democratic authorities in
Corecyra had received no warning of the approach of Alcidas.
No organization for getting information of the movement of
fleets existed.

§ 21.12. τῶν ποιουμένων ---ποῦ very common, for τῶν γιγνο-
μένων.

NOTES 187

8. 81]. 16. Σαλαμινία καὶ Πάραλος --866 ὁ. 33, 2. They had
been with Paches at Mytilene; but must have joined Nico-
stratus at Naupactus.

§11. 3. τὸ καθ᾽ atrots—ré is inserted in order to get a 78
contrast between Corcyreans and Athenians. καθ᾽ αὑτούς alone
= ‘by, or among, themselves.’

5. a@péais—with ταῖς... 7.: the Athenians shrink from
attacking the enemy thirty-three strong in the centre.

$21.11. μὴ ὅπερ ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ yévorro—in 429 B.c. when the
Athenian aainiral Phormio with twenty ships gained a great
success over forty-seven Peloponnesian ships by similar tactics.
Then, too, the enemy had adopted a similar circular formation.

§ 31.16. ὅτι μάλιστα with προκαταφυγεῖν, ‘as much as
possible.’ It might be taken equally well with ἐβούλοντο, but
the general sense of the passage favours the former.
éavtdav—cf. c. 13, 7.
§ 41. 19. τοιαύτη-- οἵ, c. 97, 3. (Heitland’s idea that there
is some irony in τοιαύτη is quite groundless: ἦν δὲ οὐδεὶς κόσμος
in ὁ. 77 refers to only one incident in the battle. )
§ 11. 4. τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου---566 c. 75, 5. 79
§ 21. 8. kparotvres—-concessive.
$31. 13. dvras—see on ce. 2, 2; 80, 1.
15. Aevxippnv—at SE. of the island, still called Leokimo,
§11. 4. rots &Aots—the other ὀλίγοι besides the ἱκέται. 80
6. 8pws—in spite of the confusion.

§ 21. 8. μέχρι μέσου hyuépas—Thuc. generally uses μέσος as
an adj., but Xen. often has μέσον as a noun.

9. ἀπέπλευσαν--ἴο Sybota.

10. προσπλέουσαι ἀπὸ AevkdSos—no doubt the fleet was
not yet past Leucas when the signal was given. It appears
resently (c. 81, 1) that Alcidas feared to sail round the island
est he should be seen by the Athenians. (It is not necessary
to construe ἀπὸ Λευκάδος with ἐφρυκτωρήθησαν, as many do.
Alcidas could not know how far on its way from Leucas the
Athenian fleet had got ; and his fear was not wholly ground-
less.) This is the first mention of Eurymedon, who afterwards
served in Sicily and was killed during the siege of Syracuse.
12. twvv@avépevor—‘on hearing of the strife and of the
intention.” Notice that the verb has a double constr. here.
Commentators point out (1) that the Athenian fleet doubtless

81

188 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

consisted to a large extent of ships returned from Lesbos: (2)
that the news of the στάσις was carried to Athens by the ship
mentioned in c. 70.

§11. 1. τῆς vuerds—‘ that night.’
4, τὸν Λευκαδίων ἰσθμόν ---ῃ. isthmus connected Leucas
with the mainland: there is now an artificial channel.

§ 2]. 8. AaBdvres—if genuine, best considered pleonastic
(with Stahl), as we say ‘took and brought.’ Some think it a
gloss on εἴ τινα λάβοιεν below. To supply τὴν πόλιν (with
L. Herbst) is forced, and involves an artificial, and highly
improbable, explanation of the meaning. See crit. note.

τοὺς Meoonvlovs—see c. 75, 1.

10. mepitAcboat—from the harbour of Alcinous. The
oligarchs who had been induced to embark would now be
separated from their comrades in the Heraeum and the agora.

11. ἔπλήρωσων---ο, 80, 1.
14, a&trexpOvro—very rare in this sense; cf. διαχρῆσθαι in

"Ὁ, 306:

§ 8]. 10. τὰ γιγνόμενα---ἰ.6. from the Heraeum on high
ground they saw their comrades being led off to execution.

21. ὡς ἕκαστοι vvavro—the sing. might be expected, as
in πάντες ἔφυγον ὅπῃ ἐδύνατο ἕκαστος (Xen.), but the distinction
is not always kept up.

§ 41. 23. παρέμεινε---ἰῦ seems from this that Nicostratus had
left by now. Thuc. has neglected to give his movements after
his Messenians had been taken into the city.

σφῶν aitav—partitive.

24. épévevov—rare word outside Herod., tragedy, and late
writers.

25. τὴν μὲν αἰτίαν. . karadvovoww—‘ bringing the charge
on the subverters of the democracy,’ i.e. openly it was the
oligarchs who were the object of their attack. (τήν does not
need explanation in the context after δίκην ὑποσχεῖν above.
Only oligarchs—and they not in all cases—were put on their
trial.)

26. ἀπέθανον S€—transition from partic. to finite constr., as
often; 11. 47 λεγόμενον μὲν... ἐμνημονεύετο δέ, VII. 13 τῶν
ναυτῶν μὲν ἀπολλυμένων, οἱ δὲ θεράποντες. . αὐτομολοῦσι, sc.
τὰ χρήματα. Frequent throughout Gk.

28. ὑπὸ τῶν AaBdvrwv—‘ by their debtors,’ with ἀπέθανον.

NOTES 189

The Gk. justifies another way (Boéhme), viz. with ὀφειλομένων,
‘by those who caught them,’ but the point is not so good.

8 δ]. 28. πᾶσά τε ἰδέα κατέστη Savarov—Virgil’s et plurima
mortis imago (Aen. ττ. 369); cf. Tac. H. 111. 28 varia pereun-
tium forma et omni imagine mortium.

30. καὶ ἔτι mepartépw—se. οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ, i.e. παντός, but
the gen. is habitually omitted. Demosth. ΧΙ. 73 has δεινόν, ὦ
γῆ καὶ θεοί, καὶ πέρα δεινοῦ.

§11. 1. ἡ στάσις (Kriiger) is very probable, as the ref. is
to a στάσις just described, but it is not absolutely necessary.

2. padAov—se. ὠμὴ προχωρῆσαι.
ἐν τοῖς πρώτην ---566 on ὁ. 17, 1.

8. ὡς elwety—qualifying a sweeping statement (never
apologizing for a metaphor): ‘I might almost say,’ ‘almost.’

4, τὸ “EXAnvixdv—c. 57, 2.

6. ἐπάγεσθαι.- “5686 constr., διαφορῶν οὐσῶν implying
‘attempting.’

7. καὶ ἐν μὲν εἰρήνῃ . . éropifovro—the transition from
μέν +partic. to δέ- finite verb here is considered perhaps the
most extraordinary anacoluthon in Thue. It is quite different
from cases like c. 81, 4, since there is here no finite verb for
the wév-clause. To put acomma only at Λακεδαιμονίους instead
of the usual fill stop helps to some degree. ἐτόλμων for
ἑτοίμων (Vollgraff and Classen) is a conjecture worth notice.

οὐκ ἂν ἐχόντων ---80. αὐτῶν, the leaders of both parties
in any given state.

8. ἑτοίμων-- 56. ὄντων, an unusual ellipse except when the
adj. + omitted partic. is supplementary to a verb, as in τετύχηκε
τὸ ἐπιτήδευμα ἄλογον, sc. ὄν, I. 28.

9. avrots—Athenians or Lac., as the case might be.

Toepoupévov—masc. from πολεμόω, of the Ath. and
Lac. (to refer this to the two political parties is very strained).

καὶ ξυμμοχίας dpa . . ai éraywyal—i.e. καὶ al ἐπαγωγαὶ
ἅμα ξυμμαχίας. The point of καὶ ἅμα is that parties no longer
carried on their rivalry amongst themselves at home, but
readily called in the help of allies too. ἐπαγωγαί 15. ‘ oppor-
tunities for calling in.’ ἑκατέροις is ambiguous: it may be (1)
by the Ath. and Lac., agent to ἐπορίζοντο, or (2) to either
party in a state: then τοῖς. . βουλομένοις will be in limiting
apposition to it. In either case τοῖς. . βουλομένοις is probably
not dat. of agent.

82

190 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

10. TH . . Mpooroijoe—the two ideas are parts of one
whole, so that one art. suffices. The dat. is that of motive,
esp. common in Thuc., mostly with single words such as φιλίᾳ,
ἔχθει, εὐνοίᾳ. Thompson, At. Syn. p. 150. σφίσιν αὐτοῖς is
governed by προσποιήσει, ib. p. 155. The whole sentence has
the appearance of a series of notes that have not been put into
their final form.

§ 21.14. γιγνόμενα refers to time «bsolutely present, not
contemporary with the main verb. J/7'. ὃ 141.

16. μᾶλλον... SinAAaypéva—i.e. varying in intensity and
in form: μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ novxairepa form the first idea, adv. and
adj. being combined, as either is possible separately with
γίγνεται. μᾶλλον καὶ ἡσυχαίτερα γίγνεται might also mean ‘it
rises and falls in intensity’ on any given occasion, but the
emphatic position of γιγνόμενα shows that it corresponds in
sense to the emphatic ἔστι, not to the mere copula ἐστί.

17. ὡς &v—‘ according as.’

18. épiordvrar.—‘impose themselves,’ like a doom: κῆρες
ἐφεστᾶσιν 11. x11. 326, Soph. O7'. 776, Eur. Hipp. 819.

22. rod καθ᾽ huépav—some think that βίου has fallen out
before βιαίου, and certainly τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν is odd; but ef. τὸ
παρόν and τὰ παρόντα.

24. ὀργάς ---’ dispositions.’

§ 31. 24. ἐστασίαζέ τε «rX.—this passage down to the end of
c. 83 is severely criticized by Dionysius Hal. de Thuc. cud.
cc. 29 f. for its artificial and far-fetched expressions.

25. τὰ ἐφυστερίζοντά trov—‘ the later cases,’ the cities that
followed the example of discord set by others; a strange
expression, as Dionysius says, but occasioned by τὰ τῶν πόλεων.
Notice that ποὺ -Ξ ἔν τινι πόλει.

26. πολὺ ἐπέφερε.“ brought on much,’ i.e. carried much
further.
27. Stavolas—‘ plans.’

τῶν. . aromia—lit. ‘through extreme ingenuity in
their enterprises and strangeness in their revenges.’

§ 41. 29. ἀξίωσιν belongs to és τὰ ἔργα, ‘in relation to
facts,’ as well as to ὀνομάτων. It is not necessary to repeat the
art. before és because ἀξίωσις has another qualifying word.

30. τῇ Stxardoe.—by the arbitrary construction they put on
them.

NOTES 191

35. τὸ δ᾽ ἐμπλήκτως 6&)—‘impulsive rashness’: cf. Plutarch,
Eum. 3 ἔμπληκτον καὶ φορᾶς μεστὸν ὀξείας.

ἀνδρὸς μοίρᾳ προσετέθη ---- was ascribed, or set down, to
the part of a man.’

36. ἀσφαλείᾳ δὲ. . etAoyos—this appears to have been
obscure already to Dionysius, who, while commenting on
what precedes and what follows, discreetly leaves this alone.
The usual explanation is as follows: (1) ἀσφαλείᾳ is dat. of
manner, in contrast with ἐμπλήκτως ; (2) τὸ ἐπιβουλεύσασθαι-Ξ:
‘reconsideration,’ or ‘further reflexion’; (8) the verb to be
supplied is ἐνομίσθη. Each of these suppositions is surprising.
ἀποτροπή =‘evasion, It has been proposed to supply προσετέθη
Cwith Herbst and Fr. Miiller) and to take ἀποτροπῆς π. εὔλογος
as apposition to τὸ ἐπιβουλεύσασθαι. We should then transl.
‘to form a hostile design was regarded as a measure of self- | ,
defence, (being) the specious pretence of fending off eumity.’

§ 5 1. 37. ὁ μὲν xaXrerralywv—viz. about the political situation.

39. ἐπιβουλεύσας. . tvxdv—‘if one had succeeded in a
plot.’

40. Se.vdérepos—of ability.
41. αὐτῶν ---νἱΖ. τοῦ ἐπιβουλεύειν καὶ ὑπονοεῖν.

44, ἐπικελεύσας ---80. κακόν τι δρᾶν. ἐπικελεύω ‘to encourage,’
of an authority, has dat. ; here κελεύω sets the constr. and ἐπι-
is intensive.

§ 61. 44. καὶ μήν introduces a new and important point (it
never means ‘and yet’).

45. τοῦ éraipikod—‘the tie of party.’ To this ἑτοιμότερον
refers,

48. apeXla—‘to render help’; cf. the principle συγγνώμη
ἀδελφῷ βοηθεῖν. This seems more likely than the usual ex-
planation ‘for the public advantage.’

_§dvodSo.—of political meetings, a word of sinister mean-
ing in the political life of Gk. states, suggesting intrigue and
treason. The verb is ἐγένοντο and had Thue. written ὠφελίας
ἕνεκα and πλεονεξίας above, all would have been clear.

49. ἐς σφᾶς αὐτούς -- ἐς ἀλλήλους, a common use.

50. τῷ θείῳ vopw—i.e. it was not the oaths witnessed by the
5048 --- θεῶν Spxo.—that bound them when they exchanged
pledges. Οὗ, for example, Eur. Med. 21 Boi μὲν ὅρκους,
ἀνακαλεῖ δὲ δεξιάς, | πίστιν μεγίστην, καὶ θεοὺς μαρτύρεται, and
the celebrated passage in the same play, 439 βέβακε δ᾽ ὅρκων

192 OOYKYAIAOY ITZTOPION T

χάρις, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ αἰδὼς "Ἑλλάδι τᾷ μεγάλᾳ μένει, with Verrall’s
notes.

§ 71. 51. τά τε ἀπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων κτλ. --- the sense (says
Prof. Lamberton) is, ‘hen fair proposals were made by the
adversary, the other party, when they had the advantage of
superiority, would receive them not, in a spirit of generosity,
but only with practical precautions.’ Thus οἱ ἐνδεχόμενοι, not
oi ἐναντίοι, is the subject of προύχοιξν. ‘This is surely correct,
though the passage is usually taken as if οἱ ἐναντίοι denoted
the stronger party, and the subject of évedéyovro were ‘the
weaker.’ The right version is given by Herbst, who says ‘‘ How
can it be supposed that from the party that had the upper
hand at the moment proposals should emanate that were
generous to the weaker side, and how can any one conceive that
generosity (γενναιότης) should lead the weaker side to accept
them?” For ἔργων φυλακῇ cf. c. 46, 4.

56. ὅρκοι... EvvadAayfis—‘ oaths to confirm a reconcilia-
tion’; cf. Andocides, de Myst. 103 διηλλάγητε καὶ ὅρκους
ὠμόσατε.

57. πρὸς τὸ ἄπορον ἑ. διδόμενοι --- as they were administered
to either side only to meet an emergency.’ It is surely un-
necessary to regard ἑκατέρῳ as dat. of agent, as is usually done.
οὐκ ἐχόντων applies to those who took the oaths tendered—i.e.
it applies by sense to éxarépw—and explains πρὸς τὸ ἄπορον.
ὅρκον δίδωμι generally means ‘I administer an oath,’ but in
Eur. Hipp. 735 ‘I take an oath.’ The ordinary meaning gives
an equally good sense here.

58. ἐν δὲ τῷ Taparux dvTt—‘ when a chance occurred.’

59. ὁ φθάσας θαρσῆσαι---566 277. 903. 8, where grave
doubts are raised as to the possibility of the infin. with φθάνω
in place of the ordinary partic. As φθάσας θαρσήσας is in-
tolerable, it is best to give the text as it stands, leaving the
point undecided. The paraphrase of Dionysius is worth notice:
εἰ δέ που παρατύχοι τινὶ καιρὸς καὶ μάθοι τὸν ἐχθρὸν ἀφύλακτον,
ἥδιον ἐτιμωρεῖτο ὅτι πιστεύσαντι μᾶλλον ἐπέθετο ἢ φυλαττομένῳ.
διὰ τὴν πίστιν applies to the enemy, as having confidence in the
oath. ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς -Ξ ‘than when he attacked openly,’
giving the other side a fair chance.

63. ῥᾷον δ᾽ of πολλοὶ. . a&yalof—‘most men are more
“readily called clever if they are knaves than good if they are
ignorant.’ Another way of taking this is: ‘most men prefer
to be called clever knaves rather than honest fools.’ The Gk.
favours the first, the connexion with the previous sentence the
second, To make the latter way easier Steup brackets ὄντες.

NOTES 193

§8 1. 66. πάντων δ᾽ αὐτῶν alriov—‘the cause of all that
was office (i.e. the desire of office), resting on covetousness and
ambition.’

67. ἐκ δ᾽ αὐτῶν---νἱΖ. πλεονεξίας καὶ φιλοτιμίας.

68. καθισταμένων -- τηᾶϑο., ‘when men were settling down
to.’ The καί belongs, not merely to és τὸ φιλονικεῖν, but to
the whole phrase to π΄ όθυμον.

70. πλήθους. . oddpovos—these ave the fine names that
were used for δημοκρατία and ὀλιγαρχία. ἰσονομία was a catch-
word with democrats, σωφροσύνη with aristocrats.

73. @8\a—this suggests several of the words that follow—
ἀγωνιζόμενοι, περιγενέσθαι, ἐπεξῇσαν (the last unusual with
object)—the general idea being that of a desperate struggle
between enemies. (Very like is Xen. Cyr. 11. 2, 18-19.)

76. ἔτι pelLovs—as compared with the τολμήματα.

77. mpoorWévres—from Dionysius, in place of προτιθέντες of
the Mss., for ‘to threaten’ hardly suits with what precedes.

79. ψήφου a8(xkov—best taken as subjective gen. depending
on καταγνώσεως.

xetp(—the contrast is between force and the forms
of law.

82. évéplov—with dat., as χρῆσθαι.

εὐπρεπείᾳ δὲ Adyou—since εὐσέβεια and λόγου εὐπρέπεια
are not a proper contrast, many suppose that the contrast to
the former is to be found in ἐπιφθόνως τι, and consequently
attach εὐπρεπείᾳ δὲ λόγου to the rel. sentence, ‘those who
managed to hide some malicious act under fair words.’ But
the μὲν... δέ contrast is not between single words, but
between the two sentences asa whole: εὐσέβεια is ‘a name for
prety, as e.g. in Soph. Ant. 924 τὴν δυσσέβειαν (‘reputation of
being δυσσεβής ᾿) εὐσεβοῦσ᾽ ἐκτησάμην, ‘on this pretence, cover-
ing an odious act, earned a better reputation.’ uc. not seldom
puts two similar words (εὐσέβεια--- εὐπρέπεια) in contrast that do
not really form an antithesis,

84, τὰ δὲ μέσα τῶν πολιτῶν --ὉΥ the moderate element and
the preference given to it by so many thinking men cf. Eur.
Suppl. 244 τριῶν δὲ μοιρῶν ἡ ᾽ν μέσῳ σῴζει πόλεις.

811]. 2. τὸ εὔηθες.---ἰπ the earliest, good sense of the word,
according to its etymology (Plato, Rep. 400 Ε).
3. πλεῖστον peréxet—‘in which nobility of character is
O

194 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ἹΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ'

the chief element.’ Or, less probably, ‘which is a very im-
portant element of a noble mind.’ Cf. 1. 84, 3.

6. ἐπὶ πολὺ διήνεγκεν — ‘ gained the upper hand.’ ἐπὶ
πολύ of space, ‘ far and near.

§ 21.7. ὃ διαλύσων xcrr.—‘ there was nothing to. . neither.’
The fut. partic, as in Aesch. PV. 27 ὁ λωφήσων yap ob πέφυκέ
πω. (Steup is mistaken in supposing that ἣν must be the
copula in our sentenee, if ὁ διαλύσων is taken as above.)

Γ 8. Kpelowous . . BeBatov—the best way of taking this is
jas follows: (1) all men when they had the upper hand, by
|reflecting on the hopelessness of security took precaution
Pathe against attack than were capable of trust in others.’
“Thus λογισμῷ. βεβαίου is to be taken together and refers to
_, προεσκόπουν. But two other versions must be noticed: (2)
| ‘finding more strength in calculation against the unexpected
|' than in pledges.’ Then τοῦ BeBalov=7 τῷ βεβαίῳ. (3) ‘ Being
more inclined in their calculations to despair of security’ (or
‘than to security’). The last seems an impossible version of
κρείσσους ὄντες. The passage prob. repeats the thought of
c. 82, 7
§ 31. 11. ywounv—‘ understanding.’

14. ἐκ τοῦ modvtpdérrov—‘ in consequence of their’—resem-
blance to Odysseus.

15. φθάνωσι προεπιβουλευόμενοι --- Gildersleeve is surely
right in reading φθάνωσι here, in accordance with the law that
φθάνω ποιῶν and ἔφθασα ποιήσας are the correct forms.

§ 41. 17. karadpovotvres—causal. For the constr. ef. Xen.
Hell. tv. δ, 12 κατεφρονοῦν μηδένα ἂν ἐπιχειρῆσαι.

84. [The external grounds for regarding this chap. as spurious
are these. (1) In cod. F it is obelized; (2) a scholium says
that none of the commentators thought it genuine: all found
it obscure in style and strange in thought; (3) Dionysius

’ (time of Augustus), who says a great deal about cc. 81-82, and
transcribes to the end of c. 83, does not mention this c.: the
inference may be that he did not find it in his Ms. ; (4) there
are very few scholia on the chapter. On the other hand it is
certain that Dio Cassius, who wrote late in the 2nd cent. A.D.,
knew it. The citations from Josephus (fil. 70 A.D.) are not
sufficient to prove that he knew the passage. If, then, this is
an ithitation, it must have been written before the end of the
2nd cent., and perhaps not before the reign of Augustus. The
internal evidence is hardly decisive. Jf this is the work of an
imitator, it is a remarkably skilful production; but I think

NOTES 195

that any attentive reader of Dionysius, Josephus and Dio
Cassius—not to mention Procopius—would hesitate to say
that a scholar of the 1st or ond cent. A.D. could not have
produced it. The most suspicious part is, I think, from οὐ yap
ἄν (§ 2) onwards. In the earlier part ὑπὸ τῶν τὴν τιμωρίαν
παρασχόντων, διὰ πάθους. . ἔχειν, and καὶ παρὰ τοὺς νόμους
ἀδικεῖν are strange. The first sentence as regards constr. is,
perhaps, merely a little corrupt. The “weight of opinion
among modern critics is against the c. ; but the question cannot
be decided. ]

§11. 1. avrév—vaguely referring to the ill deeds previously
described.

2. προυτολμήθη---προ- denotes before the rest of Greece.

καὶ ὁπόσα xr\.—the καί is probably answered by οἵ τε
μή «rd. below. The first clause requires ἄν, which has perhaps
fallen out either after ὁπόσα or δράσειαν.

4. ὑπὸ TOV . . παρασχόντων with ἀρχόμενοι. Hitherto
eae have been ruled oppressively by those who now give
opportunity for revenge. Instead of παρασχόντων something
like ἤδη παρεχόντων seems required. The oligarchs are meant.

7. ϑιὰ πάθους . . exetv—there has been much discussion of
these words, τινες and μάλιστα δ᾽ seem to show that διὰ πάθους
must be intended as a contrast to πενίας... ἀπαλλαξείοντες,
passion versus sheer poverty. But πάθος -- ‘emotion’ or ‘passion’
occurs nowhere else before Aristotle: in Thuc. it=‘a %
(To take ra τῶν πέλας as equivalent to τοὺς yore and Bud
πάθους ἔχειν like δι’ ὀργῆς ἔχειν does not get over the difficulty,
and does not yield a proper contrast. )

8. ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ --ἰ.6. prompted by oppression, poverty or
downright passion.

9. ἀπὸ trov—‘on equal terms’ with their adversaries
already. Only here in Thue. in place of ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου.

11. ἐπέλθοιεν.--86. ἄν from the previous sentences. The
omission is rather awkward and unusual in so long a sentence.
ὠμῶς and ἀπαραιτήτως only here in Thuc.

§ 21. 12. ἐς τὸν καιρὸν rodrov—‘ at this crisis,’ like és μίαν
ἡμέραν in VI. 16, Aristoph. Paz: 366 εἰς τίν᾽ ἡμέραν ;

14. kal παρὰ τοὺς νόμους ἀδικεῖν- οἵ, c. 82, 6 παρὰ τοὺς
καθεστῶτας (νόμου). As Stahl says, we expect κρατήσασα after
τοὺς νόμους, ‘even when the laws are generally respected.’
Steup suggests the loss of πρίν after καί but Dio Cass. knew
the passage as it stands,

196 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΙἹΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ'

15. ἐδήλωσεν. . οὖσα--Οὐ]. of δηλῶ replaced by the partic.,
as often ; cf. I. 21 ὁ πόλεμος δηλώσει μείζων γεγενημένος.

16. τοῦ mpovxovros—neut.

19. ἐν 6—lit. ‘in a case in which,’ amounting to εἰ Cf. τι.
35 χαλεπὸν τὸ μετρίως εἰπεῖν ἐν ᾧ μόλις καὶ ἡ δόκησις τῆς
ἀληθείας βεβαιοῦται.

.8. 3 1. 20. ἀξιοῦσί τε xrd\.—the sense is clearly given by
| Arnold thus: Men in their violence set the example of doing
away with those common laws of humanity which all parties

| alike might have appealed to in their adversity, and by their

/ own previous conduct put themselves out of the pale of those

| laws, when they themselves might have occasion to solicit

| their protection. By the κοινοὶ νόμοι the κοινὸς νόμος ὁ κατὰ
φύσιν, as Aristotle (Rhet. τ. 13) calls it, is of course meant.
See n. on c. 58, 3. Plato in the Laws (p. 793) says these
observances are the δεσμοὶ πάσης πολιτείας.

24, ὑπολείπεσθαι -- middle.

85 81]. 2. ταῖς πρώταις foreshadows the further disturbances,
described in book i1v., which occurred when Eurymedon
returned.

§21.6. SrerdOnoav—aor. as plup., a common idiom in
parenthesis.

7. relxn—built by Corcyra to protect its territory on the
mainland against the neighbouring tribes, Chaones and
Thesprotians.

10. ἐλήζοντο---νἱΖ. the fertile central part of the island,
ἐξειργασμένη παγκάλως καὶ πεφυτευμένη χώρα, as Xenophon calls
it (Hell. ΜῈ 2, 6).

8.81. 14. ὕστερον ypdvw—always of a considerable interval.
It is most probable that the crossing occurred in the spring of
426 B.C.

§ 41. 19. τὴν *Iordvnv—in Iv. 46 we have ἐν τῷ ὄρει τῆς
᾿Ιστώνης. It has been made highly probable (by B. Schmidt)
that Istone is the whole mountain-range in the NE. of
Corcyra. It is possible that the name belonged also to a
particular height in the range.

86 §11. 2. ἐς Xuxedlayv—this is the first intervention of
Athens in Sicily. Under Pericles (who had died in the
autumn of 429 B.c.), Athens had concluded alliances with
Leontini and Rhegium in 433 B.c., perhaps also—though we
have no direct evidence—with Naxos and Catana. But the

NOTES 197

idea of conquest in Sicily (§ 4) was entirely outside the policy of
Pericles. See Introd. p. xxiii.

3. Adxnra—the first mention of this well-known man.
See c. 115. He was a supporter of Nicias in arranging the
peace of 421. Plato’s Zaches is named after him. He is the
dog Labes in Aristoph. Wasps. He was attacked by Cleon.
He was killed at the battle of Mantinea, 418 B.c.

821. 6. xabéoracav—when the war had broken out is not
known.

7. πλὴν Kapapwatov—Camarina, founded circa 600 B.c.
from Syracuse, was dependent on the mother-city, revolted in
553 B.c. and was destroyed. In 492 B.c. it was restored by
Hippocrates, tyrant of Gela, but shortly afterwards was again
involved in war with Syracuse, and was again destroyed. Its
third building occurred ezrca 460 B.C.

9, τὸ πρῶτον emphasizes ἀρχομένου.

12. Χαλκιδικαί--- Ναχοε, Catana, Himera. They are so
called because their origin was Chalcis in Euboea.

13. ᾿Ιταλίας in the confined sense that it bears in Greek
authors, the modern Calabria, the peninsula reaching to the
Laus on W. and to Metapontum on E.: ἀπὸ ἄκρας ᾿Ιαπυγίας
μέχμ πορθμοῦ Σικελικοῦ is the definition of Dionysius.

14. κατὰ τὸ Evyyevés—Rhegium, too, was Chalcidian.

§ 31. 15. wésavres—this is the famous embassy that was
headed by Gorgias of Leontini. The reticence of Thuc. on the
matter is characteristic.

16. παλαιὰν Evppaxlav—the only alliance we know of is
that of 433 B.c., Dat six years seems too short a time to be
denoted by παλαιός. Hence it is assumed that an earlier
alliance existed. But some have thought that Thuc. wished to
obscure the fact that Pericles was responsible for the alliance
with Leontini, in order to make it appear that Pericles was in
no sense responsible for the intervention in Sicily.

§ 41. 21. βουλόμενοι δὲ pate. . πρόπειράν τε ποιούμενοι--
to make the sentence quite symmetrical, ποιεῖσθαι should have
been written in place of ποιούμενοι.

23. δυνατὰ ely—personal constr.
8 δ]. 24. καταστάντες --1.6. they chose Rhegium as their base.
§11. 2, ἐκλιποῦσα piv . . ἐγένετο Sé—c. 81, 4. 87

3. τὸ παντάπασιν ---{Π15. curious phrase, occurring only
here, is to be compared with τὸ παράπαν.

198 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ISTOPION Τ'

§ 21.7. μᾶλλον ἐκάκωσε---πο doubt this passage was written
before the disastrous Sicilian Expedition of 415 8.0.

§ 31.9. ἐκ τῶν τάξεων---ἰ.6. ἐκ καταλόγου, from those liable
to serve as hoplites, those of the three higher (Solonian) classes
who were on the lists. Men were liable to ordinary service
between the ages of 20 and 50. The fourth class—0j7res—
served only in the fleet; these with μέτοικοι and δοῦλοι are
included in ὁ ἄλλος ὄχλος. The number of the hoplites on the
lists at the beginning of the war was about 15,500. The
cavalry numbered 1000.

§ 41. 11. ot—as being well-known.
14. Bowwriw—the other was in Arcadia.

88 81]. 3. στρατεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὰς Αἰόλου νήσους. 85 this affair
is one of the λόγου μάλιστα ἄξια (c. 90, 1) we can see how in-
significant were the incidents left unrecorded.

4, kadovupévas—second attribute, hence the order; ο. 54, 5.

§ 21. 6. vésovrat.—the word is used of enjoyment of profits
derived, which may or may not be combined with occupation.

§31. 11. ἐν τῇ ‘Iepg—still called Vudcano. The coins of
Lipara show Hephaestus seated, with a hammer. The group
of islands, seven in all, is still called Liparian or Aeolian. The
full name seems to have been ‘Iepa ‘Hdaicrov—Vulcani nomine
sacra it is called in the Aetna. Στρογγύλη, now Stromboli,
is there described as cui nomen facies dedit ipsa Rotunda.

a@s—very unusual constr. with νομίζω.

89 $31.15. ᾿Αταλάντην -- Zalantonisi: it had been fortified by
the Athenians in order that they might prevent the injury
caused to Euboea by piratical craft sailing out of Opus and the
neighbourhood.

17. tod τε ppovplov—at the beginning of the war Athens
had 2,500 men in such permanent garrisons in and out of
Attica (Aristot. Ath. Pol. c. 24).

8 5 1. 23. αὔτιον in apposition to the sentence, ‘as for the
cause of such an occurrence.’ Cf. 1. 28 τὴν ἀληθεστάτην
πρόφασιν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἡγοῦμαι. . ἀναγκάσαι (αὐτοὺς) és τὸν
πόλεμον. The great earthquake at Messina has afforded a
striking illustration of this chapter.

25. amooréAXew—the subject of this and of ποιεῖν is τὸν
σεισμόν. The Mss. give ἐπισπωμένην, but either ἐπισπωμένων
(mid.) or ἐπισπωμένης (pass., sc. τῆς θαλάσσης) seems necessary.
βιαιότερον is best regarded as fem., as in δυσεσβολώτατος 7

NOTES 199

Λωκρίς c. 103, unless, indeed, in a confused passage, βιαιοτέραν
should be read.

27. ἄν with ξυμβῆναι.

§ il. 1. καὶ ἄλλοι-- Ι is impossible to explain these words
with certainty. ‘The reference appears to be to the Sicels, but
it is a strange way of designating them. καὶ ἄλλα is read by
some, but (1) it is doubtful if ἄλλα ἐπολέμουν is a possible
constr., and (2) even so, the change of subject in the antithetic
clause—é@ δὲ μάλιστα ἄξια κτλ. --ἰ8 surprising. It is clear that
Thue. felt little interest in the affairs of Sicily in this year.
The capture of Messena was the only important event.

§ 31.17. ἐρύματι -- φρουρίῳ.

$41. 20. οἱ Meooyvior—strangely placed in the middle of
the gen. abs., but the order is not without parallel. Messena
commands the strait between Sicily and Italy, and was there-
fore a valuable acquisition.

22. πιστὰ παρασχόμενοι---΄ giving trustworthy assurances.’
πιστά is to be taken as pred., not as substantive.

§ 11. 2. περὶ Πελοπόννησον ---866 on ὁ. 3, 3.

3. Anpoo%évns—the first mention of this celebrated general,
conspicuous for boldness and enterprise. There is no doubt
that Thuc. obtained from him much information about the
expeditions in which he was a leading figure.

6. Nuxlas—c. 51.

§ 2 1. 7. MmAtovs—Melos, like Thera, had, as a Lacedae-
monian colony, held aloof from the Athenian alliance. But
they had taken no part in the war. It is known that Thera
now submitted.

8. atrav—it is hardly necessary to read αὑτῶν here. Cf.
Xen. Cyr. 1. 1, 5 ἐδυνάσθη ἐπιθυμίαν ἐμβαλεῖν τοῦ αὐτῷ xapl-
ἕεσθαι.

8.81. 12. ἐς ᾿Ωρωπὸν τῆς Γραϊκῆς--οἡ the borders of Attica
and Boeotia. It belonged to Athens. For τῆς Τραϊκῆς ef. 11.
23 τὴν γῆν τὴν Γραϊκὴν καλουμένην. The name belonged to the
coast opposite Eretria. In 11. 23 it is corrupted into Πειραϊκήν.

13. οἱ ὁπλῖται ἀπὸ τῶν veov—prob. to be taken together in
spite of the absence of art. before ἀπό. In 11. 80 we have τὸ
ναυτικὸν ἐκ... and in II, 18 κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην πορείαν ἡ
σχολαιότης.

§ 41. 15, πανδημεί---ἰ, 6. with the whole available army.

90

91

200 OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION Τ'

16. Ἱππονίκου τοῦ Καλλίου — son of that Callias who
negotiated peace with Persia in 470 B.c. The family was
reputed the richest in Greece. The younger Callias, son of
Hipponicus, was a very well-known man. MHipponicus was
proxenus of Sparta. He fell at the battle of Delium, 424 B.c.

§ 51.19. ἐν τῇ Τανάγρᾳ —i.e. in the neighbourhood of
Tanagra.

20. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ paxy—to be taken separately, τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ
having ἡμέρᾳ supplied. Herbst, who investigated the use of
the phrase, came finally to the conclusion that alone it means
‘on the next day,’ but that sometimes a subst. is supplied from
what precedes, in 1. 44 ἐκκλησίᾳ, in VII. 11 μάχῃ.

92 §11. 2. Ηράκλειαν--{Π6 importance of this undertaking
(see § 4 and c. 93, 1) seems to lie in the fact that it marks an
extension of the area of the war by Sparta, a counter-move
prompted no doubt by the operations of Nicias on the Locrian
coast. Sparta could not match Athens at sea and little more
was to be gained by invasions of Attica (cc. 1, 26) even if they
were not prevented by exceptional events (c. 89).

§ 21. 8. προσθεῖναι ---{Π6 verb is used of bringing into
vermanent relationship, whether as friend or foe or dependent :
80 πρόσκειμαι.

8 81. 12. pyrpdrodkts—from this region the Dorians were
sprung. <A fragment of Tyrtaeus says of them: προλιπόντες
Ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα .] εὐρεῖαν ἸΙέλοπος νῆσον ἀφικόμεθα.

8 41. 19. καθίστασθαι --πούϊοο, the pres. and contrast I. 86
καλῶς κεῖται (of Corcyra) τοῦ παράπλου (the voyage to Sicily).
quod fit non est, sed ertt, says Stahl. The gen. τοῦ πολέμου de-
pends on the phrase, on the analogy of χρησίμως, καλῶς ἔχει,
ws ἔχει etc. ἡ πόλις is, of course, the colony to be.

21. τῆς ἐπὶ Θράκης tapdSov—it was from Heraclea that
Brasidas started on his dash through Thessaly, to the great
injury of Athens in Chalcidice (ra ἐπὶ Opdxns).

22. τό τε Edprrav—summing up.

§ 5 1. 24. τὸν θεὸν érhpovro—the usual custom before sending
out a colony.

26. mepro(kwv—the descendants of the old Achaean stock,
without political rights, living mainly by trade. They were
largely drawn upon for military service outside Peloponnese.

28. >Axardv—some Achaeaus afterwards settled there not-
withstanding.

NOTES 201

30. ᾿Αλκίδας---ο. 16, etc. ;
§ 61. 81. ἐκ katvis—adverbial, like ἀπὸ τῆς ἴσης 1. 15, ἀπὸ
(τῆς) πρώτης ete. ; δι᾿ ὀρθῆς, ‘aright,’ Soph. Ant. 994.

35. εἶρξαν τὸ κατὰ O—‘ barred the (approach) on the side
towards Th.,’ i.e. built a barrier across the pass (στενόν), to
protect harbour and arsenal from the Thessalians.

§11. 3. EvvorxifLopévns—the ἕυν, points to the concentra-
tion in the colony.

7. &méBy—impersonal.

§ 21. 8. αἴτιον δὲ ἣν of τε k7A.—the other passages in Thuce..

which are introduced by αἴτιον, show the following constrs. :—
(1) αἴτιον δ᾽ ἣν ὅτι 11. 65.
(2) αἴτιον ἣν οἱ with nom. partic. Iv. 26.
Here we have a third variety. Compare τεκμήριον δέ, usually
followed by γάρ. (It does not seem necessary to alter the text
here. If anything is wrong, it is most prob. that ἣν should be
bracketed, and a comma placed at δέ, as in the constr. τὸ δ᾽
αἴτιον, ἐν τοῖς πένησιν ἣν τὸ λῃτουργεῖν, Demosth. de Cor.
108.)

οἵ τε Θέσσαλοι. . καὶ av—i.e. both the Th. and
(those others, besides the Th.) whose land was threatened by
the new colony, viz. the Dolopes, Oetaeans, and other tribes.
This is decidedly simpler than making ὧν apply still to the
Thessalians and taking re as co-ordinate with οὐ μέντοι below.

14. πάνυ πολλούς. το do not know the number: Diodorus’
figures, amounting to 10,000, are untrustworthy.

16. οὐ pévrow—the combination οὐ δέ being avoided.
17. οἱ &drxvodpevor—perhaps annually.
20. &—internal accus., ἐξηγούμενοι being here absolute.

§ 1 1. 5. ᾿Ελλομενῷ — ‘‘ probably on the bay of Vlicho
(Klimino), on the E. coast of the island ” (Oberhummer).
τῆς ΔΛευκαδίας ---5.. γῆς. Corcyra, Cephallenia and
Zacynthus were already allies of Athens. For a previous
attempt on Leucas see ὁ. 7, 5. Sparta had, besides Leucas,
Oeniadae, and Ambracia.

§ 21.12. &a—se. τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ, the land they had in Acarnania.
For the isthmus see ec. 81, 1. .

14, τὸ tepdv—at the southernmost corner of the island.
15. ot δὲ ’Axapvaves—Leucas and Anactorium (c. 114, 3)

93

94

202 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION T

Corinthian colonies, controlled the entrance to the Ambracian
gulf. Σ

17. ἀποτειχίζειν ---΄ to cut them off from the mainland.’ In
c. 95, 2 this projected wall is referred to as περιτείχισις, 1.6.
wall from sea to sea.

§ 3 1. 20. ὑπὸ Meoonviwv —the Messenians of Naupactus
(see 6. 75) probably had Aetolians for immediate neighbours
(Woodhouse, Aetolia p. 336).

ὡς kadév—se. ἐστί.
22. Ναυπάκτῳ τε. . καὶ ἤν. .—the second cause is ex-
pressed in an independent form—infin. with verb of saying

supplied. A good parallel is Iv. 3 λιμένος τε προσόντος, καὶ
τοὺς Μεσσηνίους . . πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν βλάπτειν.

§ 41. 27. διὰ πολλοῦ---“ far apart.’
§ δ]. 30. "Amo8wrots—this tribe is to the NE. of Naupactus.
31. ᾿Οφιονεῦσι--Ν. of the Apodoti.

32. Eipuraow—N. and E. of the Ophioneis. All tliree
tribes belong to New Aetolia, Αἰτωλία ἐπίκτητος, as distinct
from Old Aetolia, ἡ ἀρχαία, of the Ziad. (All that can be
known about the tribes will be found in Woodhouse, Aetolia.)

35. Kal τἄλλα προσχωρήσειν ‘refers back to the ex-
pression τὸ ἄλλο ἠπειρωτικὸν τὸ Ta’ry—by which we must
understand the Messenians (or Thucydides) to mean that the
Athenian ‘sphere of influence’ in Western Hellas would be
enormously extended if the three Aetolian tribes were sub-
jugated. It would be difficult, however, to state precisely
what tribes were in the historian’s mind ” (Woodhouse).

95 811]. 1. Meconviwv—objective.
4, μετὰ τών AirwXov—i.e. when he had forced them to join.

5. κατὰ γῆν ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ Βοιωτούς — this exceedingly bold
plan was due to Demosthenes only. No doubt Thue. heard
all about it from D. himself. The territory of the Ozolian
Locrians, on the Corinthian gulf, S. of the Apodoti, lay
between Naupactus and Phocis. The Locrians were allies of
Athens (1. 9).

6. Kvuriveov—an important strategical position, chosen by
Philip of Macedon in 339 B.c. It was one of the towns of the
ancient Dorian tetrapolis.

8. Pwxéas—nominally allies of Sparta, but there was a
powerful democratic party in sympathy with Athens.

NOTES 203

11. otv—resuming after the parenthesis, like igitur.

13. Σόλλιον --- probably this Corinthian colony lay some
distance from the sea, but possessed a piece of the coast with
a harbour. .

§ 21.18. tpraxoolo.s—ten toa trireme, as usual at this period.

20. éorparevoev—most probably he sailed up the gulf to
Naupactus and thence to Oeneon in Locri where he landed (cf.
c. 89, 3). (The site of the latter is fully discussed by Wood-
house, 1.6.)

§ 3 1. 22. otro.—as distinct from the Opuntian and Epi-
enemidian Locrians who were allies of Sparta.

23. @e—‘were to.’ The Locrians showed no alacrity, and
seem to have done nothing to help Demosthenes in the ex-
pedition. They were not keen allies of Athens (Woodhouse,
Aetolia, p. 351).

§11.1. & . . t@tepo—this must have’been W. of Oeneon,
within a short march of the frontier,

4. xpyo0év—accus. abs.

ἐν Νεμέα — of course ambiguous. We learn from
Plutarch and Pausanias that Hesiod and his servant were
murdered by two young men because they believed that the
poet had insulted their sister. Their bodies were cast into the
sea. Hesiod’s was carried “ by dolphins” to Molycria. Thence
it was taken to Orchomenus in Boeotia and buried there.

§ 21. 7. IloriS8avlav—‘‘ situated exactly opposite to the only
ford of the river Mérnos” (Woodhouse). The ancient name of
the river was probably Daphnos. The town is at the extreme
SW. of Apodotia, just over the border.

ΚΚροκύλειον. . Telxtov—Demosthenes marched to the
NE. from Potidania into Apodotia, attacking the towns in
succession. Both places have been identified (by Bazin and
Woodhouse). Teichium is close to the border of Ophioneia.

9, Εὐπάλιον ---πΠονν Sulés, near Potidania.

10. τὰ ἄλλα katacrpepdpevos —i.e. the rest of Apodotia,
before advancing into Ophionea. The Locrian light-armed
troops had not yet turned up, and Demosthenes had gone
only a very short way when he found it desirable to modify
his plan considerably.

12. és Navraxrov—as the best base for operating against
Ophionea.

96

204 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ IZTOPION Τ'

’

§ 31.14. οὐκ ἐλάνθανεν. . οὔτε bre. . ἐπειδή Te—‘‘ ove,’
says Prof. Lamberton, ‘‘is before ὅτε, because the contrast
connects itself most closely and naturally with the different
points of time.” The sequence is irregular, but the sentence is
quite clear.

17. ot ἔσχατοι. . Kadduijs—these tribes, then, must be
the easternmost of the Ophioneis. καθήκοντες is not to be
understood to mean that they extended right down to the
Malian Gulf, but rather marks the direction. (It is possible
that oi . . καθήκοντες is an addition to the text, a note made
after Heraclea became part of Aetolia, which happened in
280 B.C.)

97 81]. 3. dvadiSdoKovres—because at Teichium Demosthenes
showed signs of appreciating the formidable nature of his
undertaking.

6. τὴν δ᾽ ἐν mooly—sc. κώμην. Cf. Soph. Antig. 1327 τὰν
ποσὶν κακά, ‘what lies in one’s way.’

§ 21. 8. τῇ τύχῃ eAmloas—causal dat., ‘rendered sanguine
by his fortune.’ His confidence is amazing.

11. ἐχώρει ἐπὶ Atyurfov—recent authorities have made it
highly probable that Aegitium is Velichovos, which, Wood-
house says, is the strongest fortress in Aetolia. It is in
Ophionea. If this is so, notice (1) that Demosthenes has
completely accepted the original plan of the Messenians, (2)
that he has crossed the river Daphnos since advancing from
Teichium. It is likely that Thuc. did not know of this river.

16. ὀγδοήκοντα — the distance is really a little over a
hundred stades—thirteen miles. The difference can scarcely
be regarded as a serious argument against the identification of
the site. (Possibly H, i.e. ἑκατόν, in an early uncial Ms. re-
appeared as II’ by a copyist’s error. )

§31. 17. βεβοηθηκότες γὰρ. . Hoav—viz. the relief force ;
see c. 96, 3. The delay at Teichium had given them the oppor-
tunity.

20. omére—this, and not ὅτε, is prob. correct, as elsewhere
Thue. uses ὅτε only with indic.—The country through which

the Athenians retreated on Oeneon was exceedingly wild and
difficult.

98 81]. 1. péxpi—e. 10, 3.
2, avrots—ethic, but in unusual position.

3. ot S8€—the τοξόται : an epic and Ionic usage, since the

NOTES 205

subject is not a new one. The use occurs occasionally in Attic
prose. Thompson? 4¢. Syn. ὃ 47, note.

6. αὐτοί --- the main body, in contrast with οὗτοι, the
archers.

7. καί before ἐπὶ πολύ is “ quite.’

11. ὁ tyepev—“the wonderful precision with which the
[guide] possessing local knowledge selects the proper path is
only equalled by the ease with which he loses it when working
in an unfamiliar region. Chromon was, perhaps, a shepherd
picked up at Eupalion ” (Woodhouse).

§ 21.14. κατὰ wéSas—‘ promptly,’ ‘rapidly.’

§ 41. 26. ἡλικία ἡ adrA—‘and men of the same efficiency.’
The phrase is so compressed that it has become obscure.
Thue. means οὗτοι (of) τοσοῦτοι (ἦσαν) τὸ πλῆθος καὶ ἡλικία ἡ
αὐτὴ (ἦσαν); and ἡλικία is collective. It is impossible to
render ‘in the prime of life too,’ because it is obvious that all
who were serving must be part of the ἡλικία, or those of
military age.

§ 5 1. 35. hoBotpevos—doubtless he feared impeachment
(εἰσαγγελία), possibly on a γραφὴ προδοσίας. As soon as Demo-
sthenes should return, he would be a private citizen, since
he had not been elected Strategus for the official year 426
(summer)—425 (summer).

§ 11. 3. Aoxp(8a—the Italian, of course. The Halex 99
formed the boundary between Locri and Rhegium, and no
doubt this expedition was undertaken at the request of the
latter.

$11. 1. προπέμψαντες mpdrepov—pleonastic. The time of 100
this embassy was doubtless when the Aetolians got wind of
the expedition of Demosthenes (c. 96, 3). The sentence is
not clear, but what was done seems to be this: the three
ambassadors went first to Corinth; then, having got no
promise of help there, they went on to Sparta, and there they
succeeded ; but by the time that the force was ready to start,
Demosthenes was back at Naupactus. The delay is doubtless
partly due to the fact that the 3000 hoplites sent (8 2) were
all mercenaries (see c. 109, 2 note) from different quarters ;
and it took time to collect these. .

7. éraywyhv—by the Messenians, c. 92, 1.

§ 2 1. 9. πεντακόσιοι --- these 500 adventurous Heracleots
are not mentioned again. The reason why they are mentioned
at all is their surprisingly large number.

206 GOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

12. EvvnkoAovWovv—according to the Spartan custom, in
case anything happened to Eurylochus. \

101 §11. 1. ἐς AeAhots—a natural place to choose for an army
that was to march to Naupactus.

§ 21. 7. ’Apoiorefs—-extreme Εἰ. of Locri, near to Phocis.
As for the Phocians see ἢ. on c. 95, 1. Locri and Phocis were
on opposite sides. -

10. odv—‘to be sure,’ or ‘indeed,’ as in γὰρ οὖν. It has
nothing to do with μέν here.

11. Mvovéas—i.e. Myonia lay on the natural route through
Locri. The names of the places that follow need not be
considered.

δυσεσβολώτατος ---[ὉΓ the fem. form cf. c. 89, 5.
102 11]. 8. Κυτίνιον τὸ Awpuxdv—c. 95, 1.

5. Οἰνεῶνα αἱρεῖ. . καὶ Evarddvov—the Athenian influence
in the W. of Locri was stronger. For the towns see c. 95.
(It used to be thought that there is a reversion of the
geographical order in the mention of the places ; but this has
been shown by Woodhouse to be an error. )

§ 21. 7. yevopevor.—viz. the force under Eurylochus.

8 31.13. τὰ ἐκ τῆς Αἰτωλίας --- ἐκ of the source of the
ξυμφορά.

8 41.18. ἐπὶ τῶν vedv—for ‘on board their (Acarnanian)
ships’ we should expect ἐπὶ τῶν σφετέρων νεῶν. If the text is
right, it is probable (as Widmann says) that some of the thirty
Athenian ships had not returned home and that c. 98, 5 is
therefore inaccurate.

§ 51. 25. és τὴν... Καλυδῶνα. . Πλευρῶνα---- to the Aeolis
that is now (so) called, Calydon and Pleuron,’ i.e. to New
Aeolis. We know that the name Aeolis was once confined to
the territory of Calydon ; but Pleuron had been added to it.
Calydon and Pleuron are two of the five cities of Old Aetolia
mentioned in the J/iad.

(The usual rendering ‘to Aeolis which is now called
Calydon and Pleuron’ really makes no sense, for Thue. could
μοῦ refer so to two cities far more famous in the heroic days
than in his own.)

26. és τὰ ταύτῃ xwpia—other parts of Old Aetolia.

Αἰτωλῶν δ᾽ ἡγεῖτο Θόας...
ot Πλευρῶν᾽ ἐνέμοντο καὶ ᾿Ὥλενον ἠδὲ Πυλήνην
Χαλκίδα 7’ ἀγχίαλον Καλυδῶνά τε πετρήεσσαν (7. 11. 688),

Proschium is Pylene.

NOTES 207

§ 6 1. 28. "Apmpaxvarac—Amphilochian Argos now belonged
to Amphilochians and Acarnanians. But the Ambraciots,
who had once possessed it, and had been turned out by the help
of Athens, in 437 B.c., wanted to recover it. They had made
a vain attempt to do soin 430 n.c. The Ambraciots were in
alliance with Sparta.

32. πᾶν τὸ ἠπειρωτικόν-- οὔ c. 94, 3. In 429 B.c. the
Ambraciots had held oct hopes to Sparta of acquiring (1)
Acarnania (2) Zacynthus and Cephallenia, (3) Naupactus. It
is noteworthy that nothing is said this time about the islands,
doubtless because the crushing naval defeats the Peloponnesians
had sustained from Phormio in 429 and their rough experiences
again during the troubles in Corcyra made any project for the
acquisition of these islands hopeless. Since the latter events,
it is hardly surprising that Athens did not trouble to acquire
Leucas (see c. 94, 2).

§ 7 1. 86. ἐκστρατευσαμένοις --- ‘when they (should) have
taken the field.’

37. περὶ τὸ ”"Apyos—with βοηθεῖν.

§ 11. 8. τῶν “Ἑλλήνων ---ἴ.6. the Siceliots, whereas the
Sicels are βάρβαροι.

5. Edppaxow—‘‘the name allies shows that they remained
distinct though subject communities” (Freeman).

6. avrots—with ξυνεπολέμουν,

7. "Ivnooav—identical with Aetna, not far from Catana.
It had been an important Sicel stronghold. ἡ

§ 3 1. 16. Katktvov— unknown. Take κατὰ τὸν K. with
ἐκράτησαν. ‘

§11. 1. &d&@npav—doubtless in gratitude for the cessation
of the plague. Phe oracle perhaps gave directions how the
plague might be kept away. It has been pointed out that
Nicias had much to do with this ceremony of purification.
His great interest in the event and his benefactions to Delos
are known from Plutarch.

2, 84—explanatory. The “ purification” by Pisistratus
is noticed by Herodotus (1. 64).

§ 2 1. 6. Ofkar—‘coffins.’ Notice the not very common
attraction of the antecedent into the case of the rel., though
the antecedent is not placed in the rel. clause. Thompson?
§ 50p. In Latin this constr., familiar from urbem quam
statuo vestra est, is an old colloquialism.

103

104

208 OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

11. Πολυκράτης --6 ruled 532-521 B.c. According to
Herod. 111. 164 Samos was πολίων πασέων πρώτη in his time.

13. Niowv—the Cyclades. ἄρξας is ‘making himself master
of,’ ingressive. ;

14. τῷ ᾿Απόλλωνι---ΑῬ 0110 was worshipped much earlier
than the time of Polycrates in the rocky island of Rhenea;
Hymn to Apollo 44—see on § 4—written not later than 600
B.c. Cf. Theocritus xvit. 70 ἴσον καὶ Ῥήναιαν ἄναξ ἐφίλησεν
᾿Απόλλων.

16. τὴν wevrernpiSa—the first celebration probably took
place in March (Anthesterion) 425 B.c.

17. τὰ Δήλια --- ‘(namely) the Delia.” The words are
bracketed by some edd., but Diodorus, whose account is
derived from Thue. (through Ephorus), says ἐποίησαν πανήγυριν
τὴν τῶν Δηλίων. ᾿

§ 31. 19. ξύνοδος---ἴῃ celebration of the god’s birth.

21. @bedpovv—‘ attended the festival.’

és τὰ ᾿Εἰφέσια---ἰῃ honour of Artemis (ἡ ᾿Εφεσία θεός).

28. χορούς τε avijyov—from the meaning ‘lift up’ a cry,
etc., ἀνάγω comes to mean ‘set going,’ ‘start’; Eur. 7ro. 325
ἄναγ᾽ ἄναγε χορόν. Notice the metrical χορούς τ᾽ ἀνῆγον ai
πόλεις.

8.41. 24. “Opnpos—the blind bard ‘‘ of Chios,” who wrote
this prize poem, was, according to a scholiast on Pindar,
Cynaethus of Chios.

25. ἐκ προοιμίου --- {πΠ6 quotations are from the famous
‘Homeric hymn” to Apollo; it was actually sung at the
festival, where it received a prize.

27. ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε κτλ. = Hyrin to Apollo 146-150, with im-
portant variations from t'.e version of the hymn as found
in the extant mss. ‘Bu. when your heart rejoices most in
Delos.’

28. dkex(rwves—alluding to the long robes of the Ionians
in early times, almost obsolete in the days of Thue.

29. σὴν és ayuidv—meaning uncertain; the square before
the temple of Apollo, where the ἀγών was held, is the sugges-
tion of Sikes ad Joc. The 1. in the mss. of the hymn stands
αὐτοῖς σὺν παίδεσσι καὶ aldoins ἀλόχοισιν.

31. καθέσωσιν dydava—‘ have made the assembly sit down,’
to start the contests. ἀγών is ‘an assembly at games’: see

NOTES 209

Leaf on J/iad xv. 428. The mss. of the hymn have στήσωνται
ἀγῶνα.

8 δ]. 84. τὸν γὰρ Δηλιακὸν χορὸν τῶν γυναικῶν --- the
eulogy of the κοῦραι Δηλιάδες, Delian women who sang the
chorus, immediately precedes the passage about to be quoted.

35. τοῦ éralvou—viz. of the Delian women. For the gen.
ef. c. 59, 4.

37. GAN ἄγεθ᾽ κτλ. -- "7. to Apollo 165-172.

43. pic eel a&pfjpos—‘ answer with one accord,’ i.e.
ὁμοφήμως. The scholiast gives ἀθρόως. The reading ἀφήμως is
supported by that of the mss. of the hymn, ἀφ᾽ ἡμέων (or
similar). Inferior Mss. of Thuc. give εὐφήμως.

44. τυφλὸς avip—‘‘this line,” says Sikes, ‘‘was at least
partly the origin of the tradition that Homer was blind, and
lived in Chios,”

861. 49. καὶ τὰ wAetora—‘and most parts’ of the ξύνοδος.

50. ὑπὸ Evpdhopav—when Persia set her heel on the necks

of the Ionians.
πρὶν S4—see on ὁ. 29, 1. .

§ 11. 2. ὥσπερ ὑποσχόμενοι. . Katréoxov—‘in accordance
with the promise to Eurylochus by which they had detained
his force.’

-

7. ἤΟλπας---οὐ the Ambracian gulf.

8. ὃ... τειχισάμενοι. . ἐχρῶντο --- the more ordinary
constr. by which, when partic. and verb that govern different
cases have a common object, the case of the obj. is accom-
modated to the partic.

more—this occupation of Olpae by the Acarnanians
probably took place at the time when the Ambraciots had first
become powerful in Argos. The meaning is clearly that the
Acarnanians had now ceased to hold it, and that it belonged
to the Amphilochians. The Acarnanians had used Olpae as
a common place of justice.

10. émBaracoias—if Argos lies where it is usually placed,
it is some distance from the sea, but the inaccuracy need not
be pressed. Still there is some reason to think that Argos and
Crenae should change places on the maps, Argos being placed
on the coast, S. of Olpae, and Crenae inland. The site
marked Argos would be a suitable position from which to
watch for an enemy advancing from Acarnania to join his ally
at Olpae, of course avoiding Argos,

P

105

210 OBOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

§ 3 1. 17. πέμπουσι--ἰο Naupactus. Demosthenes was not,
strietly speaking, Strategus now, but he still had charge of the
defence of Naupactus, and therefore continued to hold an
official position until he should be relieved by the arrival at
Naupactus of the twenty ships here referred to.

§ 41. 24. wéAuv—Ambracia.

27. 4 μάχη γένηται --- [πὸ expected battle. The phrase is
passive of τὴν μάχην ποιεῖσθαι.

[06 11. 5. ᾿Αχελῴον--Ποπίϊοι between Aetolia and Acarnania.
τ route :—
1. Through the territory of Stratus, the greatest city in
Acarnania, westwards to
2, the territor y of Phytia (Phoitia) ; thence northwards
3. through Eastern Medionia, which brought Eurylochus to
the Ambracian gulf ; thence eastwards
4, across the district of Limnaea, avoiding the town (of
doubtful name) at the SE. corner of the gulf ; and so
5. across the low hills called Thyamus, and through the
friendly territory of the Agract ; hence down into
6. the territory of Argos, between that city and Crenae,
to Olpae.

§ 21. 11. αὖθις --- ‘then,’ or ‘afterwards.’ It is usual to
make Mededvos depend on παρ᾽ ἔσχατα; but Herbst seems
right in taking Mededvos with διά, and making map ἔσχατα
modify the name of both districts; i.e. they went along the
border of Phytia and also of Medionia.

14. ᾿Αγραϊκόν for ἀγροῖκον of the Mss., which is not used
of districts, is a certain emendation.

107 §11. 2. KaSigovew—sc. τὸν στρατόν, but practically intrans.

9. ᾿Αθηναίων --- doubtless a small force stationed at
Naupactus. Demosthenes used the ships referred to in c. 102,
4, Oberhummer thinks that from Limnaea he went by land,
following the line of Eurylochus, that he joined the Acarnanian
division at Crenae, and accompanied it to Argos. This seems
most probable. i

§ 2 1. 10. τὸν λόφον, if genuine, is in apposition to τὰς
"Odras, but the description does not seem likely or necessary
after c. 105, 1.

12. "Apoirsxov—i.e. those of Amphilochia generally ; for
the reason why.the inajority were restrained from taking part
in the fighting see c. 114, 3.

16. pera—Demosthenes was to be Commander-in-chief.

NOTES 211

$31. 18. χαράδρα... peyddn—this has been recognized in a
brook, the banks of which are overshadowed with plane-trees ;
cf. the ὁδὸς κοίλη καὶ λοχμώδης.

26. κατὰ τὸ ὑπερέχον --- where the enemy’s line (the left
wing, c. 108, 1) outflanked them.

§ 4 1. 31. ὀλίγων--ἃ strange way of referring to the sixty
Athenian archers: we should expect simply pera τῶν ᾿Αθ.
Possibly ὀλίγων is an addition to the text.

32. ἐπεῖχον governs τὸ δὲ ἄλλοις. The Acarnanians were in
separate contingents, each under its own commander.

34. avapi——on the right wing the Ambraciots evidently
were the principal troops ; ef. c. 108, 2.

§ 11. 6. ἐς ἀλκὴν tropetvar—‘ stand their ground to the
point of resistance.’ For ἀλκή see on ὁ. 30, 2.

8. τὸ kat’ Eiptdoxov—‘ that part where Eu. was.’

11. τὸ πολὺ τοῦ ἔργου éreéAVov — both ἐξ- and ἐπεξ- can
have the accus.: the latter is the normal constr., and it is

not certain that there is any parallel for the former in Thue.

-In τ. 70 the mss. vary in the same way as here.

§ 21. 15. μαχιμώτατοι --ἰ}}}8 refers to οἱ ᾿Αμπρακιῶται only,
not to oi . . κέρας, who are the few Peloponnesians on the
right wing. This restricted reference is so awkward that it is
not unlikely that καί after ᾿Αμπρακιῶται ought to be removed,
so as to render ‘the A. on the right wing.’

§ 3 1. 16. ὡς... vevixnpévov—this is what they found on
returning from the pursuit of the enemy’s left. The inference
is clearly that τὸ πλέον also retreated to Olpae ; cf. ἐς φυγὴν . .
καταστῆσαι above. With acolon instead of the usual comma
after Ὄλπας, the difficulty that has been found in making
αὐτῶν presently refer—as it must do—to the whole army,
disappears.

20. αὐτῶν---“ οἵ the army.’ It cannot mean ‘of the right
wing’ only, since the Mantineans were posted almost on the
left wing.

21. mpoom(mrovres—‘while rushing to the fortress of Olpae.’

81. 2. adrés—‘single-handed.’

5, πολιορκήσεται--΄ to stand a siege.’

§ 21. 18, ἀποθανόντας = νεκρούς.

16. ᾿Ακαρνάνων depends on ξυστρατήγων, possessive gen.

σπένδονται---ἴοὐ the plur. verb, rare with a sing. subj.

10

10

212 BOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

followed by μετά, see Thompson” § 7. βουλόμενος following
makes the conjecture σπένδεται probable.

20. τὸν μισθοφόρον dxAov—i.e. the Peloponnesian forces,
exclusive of the Mantineans, the ἄρχοντες and ἀξιολογώτατοι.
The Peloponnesian troops were mercenaries, it would seem. τὸν
Eevxéy is prob. a mere gloss on μισθοφόρον.

22. διαβαλεῖν és— to damage them with.’

23. "EAAnvas—Steup places the comma at χρήζων so as to
make Ἕλληνας object of καταπροδόντες, i.e. the Ambraciots and
the ὄχλος μισθοφόρος. This is better than és τοὺς ἐκείνῃ . .
Ἕλληνας together, i.e. the Ambraciots only, because (1) the
Amphilochians too would be naturally included under the
τούς, and they were not Ἕλληνες, (2) the mercenaries should
certainly be included in the object of καταπροδόντες.

§ 31. 26. ὥσπερ trfipxe—‘ as well as circumstances allowed.’
27. οἷς eéS0ro—sc. ἐκεῖνοι.

140 §11.3. πόλεως--ο. 105, 4. The force from Ambracia had
to mareh to Idomene (c. 112), then through the hills into the
plain of Argos.

§ 21. 8. mpodoxwtvras—referring to the collective μέρος.
τὰ Kaptepd—strong positions in the hills.
[11 81]. 2. οἷς ἔσπειστο---866 c. 109, 2.

8. πρόφασιν ---[Π6 so-called accus. in apposition to ἃ
sentence, best regarded as a free use of the internal or adverbial
accus. The actions described are the πρόφασις (Bayfield on
Soph. i. 130, Hardie, Latin Prose, p. 7).

§ 2 1. 9. ot ἄλλοι.--ἰ.6. the Peloponnesians who were not
included in the secret agreement.

ὅσοι. . EvveEeAPdvTes—‘as many, that is, who had
chanced to go out (from Olpae) in a body fortuitously with the
others.’ This is the best interpretation of a passage that has
been very much discussed. Notice (1) μέν, with no corre-
sponding 6é, implies a contrast: part remained behind in
Olpae ; (2) οὕτως -- ὡς εἶχον, ‘just by chance’; (3) the aorist
partic. with ἐτύγχανον is unusual, the rule being ἐτύγχανον +
pres. or perf. partic., érvxov+aor. partic. ; (4) ξυνελθόντες, the
other reading, would mean, ‘to have met together in Olpae.’
A great number of emendations have been proposed, but the
reading of the Mss. gives a satisfactory sense. If (3) is a fatal
objection, then (a) a comina must be placed at οὕτως, and the
latter must be considered to point forward to ξυνεξελθόντες---

NOTES 213

then ἐτύγχανον οὕτως without a partic. is strange; or (6) μέν

must be altered to μεμονωμένοι or μένοντες ; or (c) a comma

must be placed at ἁθρόοι, so that ἐτύγχανον οὕτως ἁθρόοι se.

ὄντες = ‘ happened by chance to be together.’ Such an omission

ee Ms partic. with τυγχάνω is not impossible where an adj. is
ed.

§ 31, 12. οἱ δὲ "Akapvaves—only their leaders knew of the
secret compact.

16. tus—often explained as collective for τινες : this is
doubtful, because of the sing. νομίσας following.

§ 41. 22. és τὴν "AypaiSa—the Agraei were independent and
friendly to the Peloponnesians. Woodhouse thinks that they
were not Aetolians.

§ 11. 2. "[S8opnevqv—twin heights in the hills, the exact site
uncertain.

§ 21.11. ἐπὶ τῆς ἐσβολῆς-- το the pass that led to Ambracia.

12. διὰ τῶν ᾿Αμφιλοχικῶν épdv—i.e. inland, among the
hills, in order to stop up the roads.

13. ἅμα 8p0pw—the time between first cock-crow and the
dawn: ὄρθρος ἐστὶν ἡ ὥρα τῆς νυκτὸς καθ᾽ ἣν ἀλεκτρυόνες
ἄδουσιν. ἄρχεται δὲ ἐνάτης ὥρας (circa 2 A.M.) καὶ τελευτᾷ εἰς
διαγελῶσαν ἡμέραν (Phrynichus).

8 4]. 18. Δωρίδα τε γλῶσσαν —it was only thirty years
since the Naupactian Messenians had left the Peloponnese.
The Ambraciots spoke Doric.

20. τῇ Spe—‘with the eyes,’ pointing the contrast with
what they heard. Here as in other passages (e.g. VII. 75, 2)
it is disputed whether the phrase means this or ‘by their
appearance.’

§ 61. 27. τῶν δὲ... ἀνεπιστημόνων — for the gen. abs.
though it refers to the subj. of the verb see c. 18, 7; 55, 1.

§ 7 1. 33. mapamdeovoas . . Evvruxig—‘sailing along the
coa from Olpae) just at. the time when the action (the fight-
ing) occurred.’

§ 81. 40. oxvrAetoavres—the Athenians themselves were not
above this on occasions.

‘$11.1. καὶ αὐτοῖς «r\.—the incident as related inevitably
reminds us of a Greek tragedy—e.g. the Persae.

4. τῶν νεκρῶν ods amékrevav—cf. 11. 52 νεκροὶ ἐπ᾿ ἀλλή-
λοις ἀποθνήσκοντες.

11

1

214 ΟΟΥΚΥΔΙΑΟΥ ἸΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ T

6. EvveEQoav—‘ tried to depart with them.’
§ 21. 9. τὸ w&80s—‘ the catastrophe’ of Idomene.

10. τῶν μετὰ odpav—i.e. that they had belonged to those
who had fought with his own comrades—i.e. with the body
that escaped over the border.

ὃ 3 1.11. θαυμάζοι... reOvacoiv—the change of mood from
opt. to indic. has nothing to do with the sense: it is purely
stylistic. Cf. c. 22, 8.

12. ad—‘ for his part.’

13. τῶν ἐν *[Sopevais—edd. compare 11. 34 τοὺς ἐν Μαραθῶνι
where, however, ἐν should prob. be omitted (see Neil on
Aristoph. Eg. 785). In most cases a partic. is expressed ; but
‘those of Idomenae’ is, of course, sufficient.

15. τὰ ὅπλα ταυτί ---[ΠπΠ6 omission of the number — δια-
kootwy —here appears to be impossible: ‘these are not the
arms, then,’ would be natural, were it not for the contrast
following. The schol. already did not find διακοσίων in the
text.

8.4]. 17. paxopévov—imperf. ; ef. c. 62, 5.

18. εἴπερ ye-—‘yes if,’ taking up τῶν. . ἐστίν, exactly as
in dramatic dialogue the retort is apt to catch up the question.
(I have put a note of interrogation at ἐστίν in place of the
usual full stop, because the remark seems to be a query as
well as a denial: ‘then they are not . . ἢ)

19. ἀλλ ἡμεῖς ye—‘nay, but we.’

20. καὶ μὲν δὴ... ye—‘why I assure you it was with these’ ;
for the particles cf. Plato, Symp. 197 A καὶ μὲν δὴ τήν γε τῶν
ζῴων ποίησιν.

861]. 27. πάθος κτλ. --- this disaster was the worst that ..’
The number of days is three. The qualifications are very
precise, and suggest that Thue. is conscious that other events
might be suggested.

29. κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον tévSe—many think that only the
Ten Years’ (Archidamian) war is meant. It is impossible to
attain certainty on the question. If Thuc. wrote this soon
after the event, the expression is quite natural. :

30. &mvorrov—pred. not to γενέσθαι, but to λέγεται γενέσθαι
together, i.e. ‘the total that it is said to have amounted to is
incredible.’

NOTES 215

§11. 4. πλέοντα é4\w—when or how is not explained. 11

6. ἐξῃρέθησαν ---(Π 6 number is prob. influenced by the
apposition πανοπλίαι:

7. κατέπλευσε--ἰὁ Athens. He was once more elected
Strategus at the following elections (in spring of 425 B.c.) for
the year 425-424. A statue of Niké was set up on the acropolis
as a memorial of this victory: an inscription relating to its
repair is still extant. The Messenians and Naupactians set up
a Niké at Delphi: a fragment of the inscription upon it is
extant.

§ 21.15. ἀναχώρησιν... ἐξ Οἰνιαδῶν --- 1.6. by sea, the
ships obtained from Oeniadae, which was friendly. These
Ambraciots had prob. got to Oeniadae from Agraeis by crossing
the Achelous and marching right across Aetolia. They could
hardly have got safely home to Ambracia by sea without leave
from the Acarnanians. (οἶπερ for οἵπερ and Σαλυνθίου for
Σαλύνθιον are certain corrections. )

§ 3 1. 20. ἐπὶ τοῖσδε--- πὸ attempt is made to modify the
ξυμμαχίαι of Acarnania with Athens, or of Ambracia with
- Sparta.

23. βοηθεῖν of defensive, στρατεύειν of offensive, operations.

25. ἐπὶ ᾿Ανακτόριον --- the Corinthians had added fresh
colonists to this important place in 433 B.c. A year after
this agreement (autumn 425 B.c.) the Acarnanians, supported
by the Athenians at Naupactus, took Anactorium.

8 41. 27. διέλυσαν τὸν wédAeuov—Ambracia never recovered
from its effects.

811. 4. &ve@ev—from the interior, where the Sicels dwelt: {1
τὰ μέσα καὶ τὰ πρὸς βορρᾶν τῆς νήσου ἔχουσι (VI. 2). Σικελῶν
τῶν for Σικελιωτῶν is fairly certain: the Siceliots were being
hard pressed by Syracuse.

5. τὰ €oxatra—Freeman says that the extreme eastern part
of the Himeraean land must be meant.

§ 21. 9. ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς διάδοχον ---ἰῦ is hardly necessary to
supply a partic.: διάδοχον in itself implies ταχθέντα. It appears
that Laches, on returning to Athens, was prosecuted for em-
bezzlement of public money.

§ 31. 10. Edppaxot—the Siceliots.

11. érerav—plnp. in sense.

15. ὡς οὐ weprospevor—with παρεσκευάζοντο.

216 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ἸΣΤΟΡΙΩ͂Ν Ὁ

§ 41. 18. καταλυθήσεσθαι ---- by establishing themselves in
Sicily.

19. μελέτην... ποιεῖσθαι ---᾿ὖ has been pointed out that
this is prob. intentional irony on the part of Thuc., who
repeats the statements of the war-party of the day. There
was an unlimited field for Athenian naval activity round the
coasts of Peloponnese without sending fleets to Sicily.

§ 5 1. 21. Πυθόδωρον «rd. —the three commanders are mocked
at by Aristoph. Acharn. 598.

§ 6 1. 26. hpotprov—see c. 99.

16 811. 4. τῶν Καταναίων — Catania, now the second city
in Sicily, has survived many terrible disasters, due partly to
its wars, and partly to its proximity to the mountain.

§ 21. 6. πεντηκοστῷ ere. —if the number is exact, the
previous eruption would be in 475 or 474 B.c. There is a
magnificent description of an eruption of Etna in Pindar’s
first Pythian (474 B.c.), and in Aeschylus, Prometheus Vinctus
(circa 468 B.c.). An eruption is recorded as occurring at the
time of the battle of Plataea, 479 B.c. λέγεται shows that
Thue. was not quite sure as to the exact date.

8. τρὶς γεγενῆσθαι -- [16 ‘first’ eruption is legendary. A
fourth is recorded in 396 8,0.

GREEK INDEX

αἷς The reference is to the chapter and section on which the note appears.

A

ἀγορά 6, 2

ἄγυια 104, 4

ἀγών, rhetorical, 38, 4 ; 104, 4

ἀγωνιστής, of a rhetorician, 37,
4

ἀγωνοθετεῖν κακῶς 38, 4

αἰτία 13, 1; 53, ὃ

αἴτιον ἣν οἱ 93, 2

ἀκμάζειν 1,1; 3,1

ἀκουσίως ἐλθεῖν 81,1

ἀκούων, in aor. sense, 67, 2

ἀκριβής 46, 4

"Axrata πόλεις 50, 3

ἀλκή, meaning of, 80, 2 ; 108,
1

ἄλλος, exclusive use, 19, 1;
τὰ ἄλλα 3, 6

dua ὄρθρῳ 112, 2

ἀμαθία 37, 3

ἀμείνων, political meaning, 65,
3

dv, inserted, 24, 1

ἀνά, rarity of, 22, 1

ἀνάγειν χορούς 104, 2

ἀνδραγαθία, Spartan, 57,
64, 4

ἀνθρωπίνως 40, 1

ἄνθρωποι and οἱ ἄνθρωποι 45, 4

ἀνταπαιτεῖν 58, 1

1;

μἀντίπαλος 11, 2; 49, 1

ἀπό 40, 7 ; 52,3 ἀπὸ ἴσου 84,
1; ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐθέος 43, 2

ἀπόβασις 16, 1

ἀποκρίνομαι with accus. 61, 1

ἀπολείπειν 10, 2

ἀποτειχίζειν and περιτειχίζειν
94, 2: cf. Introd. p. xviii.

ἀποτροπὴή 82, 4

ἀπωλλύμεθα, ‘ were likely to be
destroyed,’ 57, 3

ἀργυρολόγοι νῆες 19, 1

ἀσφάλεια 56, 1

αὐθέντης δ8, 4

αὐτερέτης 18, 4

αὐτοβοεί 14, 2

αὐτός with ordinal 19, 1

ἀφανής of ἔρως and ἐλπίς 45, 5

ἀφήμως 104, 5 ἢ

Β
βέβαιος 10, 1
βίᾳ 46, 5
βούλησις 68, 1
βραχύς 36, 2

ip

γάρ, meaning of, 40, 4 ; Kat γάρ

54, 4

217

2

=

18

γε with partic. 63, 2; connect-
ing 63, 2; δέ ye 63, 2; uév
ye 89,2; émwel . . ye 45, 3;
ἢ .. ye 45, 45 εἴπερ ye 113,
4; καὶ μὲν δὴ . . ye 113, 4

γίγνεσθαι 23, 2, 5

yiyverOar Kad’ & 11, 6; ¥.
κατὰ χώραν 24, 3

γίγνεσθαι μετά τινος 10, 1

γίγνεσθαι and εἷναι 10, 2

γνώμας ποιεῖσθαι 36, 2; γνώμας
προθεῖναι 36,5 _

γνώμη, Meaning of, 9, 2; 36,
6. 38:01: 740567 6b νον, τὸ
πλεῖστον τῆς γ. ἔχειν 31, 2;
τὸ διαλλάσσον τῆς γ. 10,1 «

γοῦν 62, ὃ

A

δαπάνη, meaning of, 31, 1

δεινά, τά, 12, 2

δεινόν with accus. and infin.
57, 2

δεινὸν δέος 45, 4

δῆθεν 68, 1

δηλοῦν with partic. 84, 2

διά with gen. 21, 3

διαλλάσσον, τό, 10, 1

διατειχίζειν 34, 2

διαφερόντως, διαφέροντας 39, 5

διάφευξις 23, 5

δίκαια, τά, ‘argument about
justice,’ 44, 4

δοκεῖν : τὸ πάνυ δοκοῦν 38, 2

δόκησις 45, 2

δόξα 49, 1

δοξάζειν with accus. 45, 6

δοῦπος 22, 4

δρασθέν, τό, 38, 4

δύναται τὸ αὐτό 46, 2

Ε
ἐᾶν 44, 2
ἐγκαθέζεσθαι 1, 2

GOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION T

ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν 18, 4

ἐθελοπρόξενος 70, 3

ef and fut. indic. 2, 3; 47, 1;
εἰ Ae οὐ 42. 2.1. εἰ, δὲ ἢ. 3,
ὑπ: Εἰ OTe 1S ose 15. Ὁ

εἰκός ἐστι With aor. infin. 10, 6

εἶναι ἐν 18, 5

εἴργειν 92, 6

ἐκ practically --- ὑπό 69, 1; ἐκ
καινῆς 92, 6

ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου 12, ὃ

ἐλευθερία 18, 7

ἐλευθεροῦν 32, 2

ἐλπίς personified 45, 5

ἐλπίς ἐστι with infin. 3, 3

ἐμπλήκτως 82, 4

ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔχειν 9, 1; ἐν κατα-
λήψει φαίνεσθαι 838, 33; ἐν
καρποῦ ξυγκομιδῇ εἶναι 15, 2 ;
ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ εἶναι 18, 5; ἐν
ποσίν 97, 1 : ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται
ἽΠ 1

ἐν ὅσῳ 28, 1

᾿ ἐν τούτῳ, Meanings of, 45, 3

ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε, Meanings of, 43, 4

ἐναντία, ἐναντίον 53, 2

évepyos 17, 1

ἐξαλείφειν 20, 3

ἐξαπιναίως 3, 2

ἐξείργεσθαι νόμῳ 70, 1

ἐξηγεῖσθαι 55, 4

é£oucla’ personified 45, 4

ἐπαγγέλλειν 16, ὃ

ἐπάγεσθαι 10, 4

ἐπαγωγή 82, 1

ἔπαινος 94, ὃ

ἐπεξελθεῖν 108, 1

ἐπέρχεσθαι ἐς πόλεμον 47, 2

ἐπί with dat. and accus. 4, 2:
ἐπὶ παντί 45, 4; ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις
εἶναι 12, 3

ἐπί in comp. 49, 4

ἐπιβοήθεια 26, 1

ἐπιβολή, ἐπιβουλή 45, 5

ἐπιγνῶναι 57, 1

ἐπιδεικνύναι 64, 4

GREEK

ἐπικελεύειν 82, 5

ἐπίκουροι 34, 2

ἐπιμέλεια ἔργων 46, 4

ἐπιμένειν 2, 2; 26, 2

ἐπιστροφή 71, 2

ἐπιφέρειν 58, 4

ἔρως personified 45, 5

és 46, 4

ἐς φυλακὴν ποιεῖσθαι 3, 4

ἐσθήματα as offerings 58, 4

ἑσσάμενος 58, 5

ἐσφορά 19, 1

ἑταιρικόν, Td, 82, 6

εἠύῤθεια 45, 7

εὐήθης 83, 1

εὔνοια 9, 2

εὐπορία 45, ὃ

εὐσέβεια 82, 8

εὐτυχία and εὐπραξία distin-
guished 39, 4

ἐφίστασθαι 82, 2

ἐφ᾽ ὅρμῳ, ἔφορμοι 76, 1

ἐχέγγυος 46, 1

ἔχουσι, ἔχωσι δθ, 7

4

ζημίαι πρόκεινται 45, 1

H

ἡλικία 98, 4
᾿ἡμεῖς, ὑμεῖς 64, 1
ἡμέτερον, τό, 11, 1

8

θεατής 38, 4, 7
θεῖος νόμος 82, 6
θέρος 1, 1

θήκη 104, 2

INDEX 219

ἰδέα 81, 5

ἰδίᾳ 2, 3

ἴδιος, meaning of, 34, 1
iepounvia 56, 2

ἴσα καί 14, 1

ἰσονομία 82, 8

ἰσόνομος 62, 3

ἵστασθαι πρός, ‘rally to,’ 11, 5
Ἰστώνη 85, 3

ἰσχύσομεν, ἰσχύομεν 39, 8

K

καθήκειν 96, 3

καθιστάναι 9,13; 48, 2; 47, 3;
καθίστασθαι 8, 1

καί δ, 83; marking a particular
case, 42, 3; 71, 1; καὶ γάρ
54, 4; καὶ μήν 82, 6

καινῆς, ἐκ, 92, 6

καινόν, κενόν, κοινόν 30, 3

κακία 58, 1; 61, 1

κἀνταῦθα, καὶ ταῦτα 66, ὁ

κατά 2,33; 7,3; καθ᾽ ἕν 11, 6;
κατὰ χώραν 24, 3; τὸ καθ᾽
αὑτούς 78, 1; τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν
82, 2

κατά in comp. 63, 3

κατ᾽ οἰκίας, καὶ οἰκίαι 67, 3

κατάγνωσις 16, 1

κατάληψις 33, 3

κατῳκῆσθαι 34, 1

κέραμος, collective, 74, 1

κέρδος 38, 2

κλῆροι 60, 1

κληροῦχοι 50, 2

κοινός 84, 3; 105, 1

κολάζειν, κολάσειν 52, 2

κωλυτής 23, 2

A

λαμβάνειν 20, 4; 56, 1: 59, 1:
λαβών 81, 2 : ὁ λαβών 81, 4

220 OBOYKYAIAOY
M
mw’ and B’ 26, 1
μᾶζα 49, 3
μάλιστα with numbers 20, 2;
29, 2

μᾶλλον 6, 2

μᾶλλον ἢ ov 36, 4

Μαλόεις 8, 3

pév-clause 43, 1

μέν γε 39, 2

μέν solitariwm 111, 2; πρὸς
μὲν τά 6, 1

μέρος νέμειν 3, 1

μέσα, τά, τῶν πολιτῶν 82, 8

μετά with gen. 38, 5; γίγνε-
σθαι μετά 10, 1

μεταξύ 21, 2; 52,3

μετέχειν πλεῖστον 83, 1

μέχρι, as long as, 10, 4

μέχρι οὗ 28, 2

μή in implied prohibition 40, 3

μή redundant 75, 4

μὴ προσποιεῖσθαι 47, 4

Μῆδον, μετὰ τόν, 68, 1

μητρόπολις, Dorian, 92, 3

μισθός 1, 2

μισθοφόροι 109, 2

μόνος, meaning of, 43, 3

N

ναύαρχος 26, 2

νέμειν 8, 1; 48, 1

νέμεσθαι 88, 2

vikav 36, 6; 37, 3

νομίζειν with dat. 82, 8; with
ws 88, 3

νόμος ἄγραφος 58, 33 νόμος
κατὰ φύσιν 84, 3; νόμος θεῖος
82, 6

=
Ξ,

ξυγγενής 2, 3
ξύγγνωμος 40, 1

ΣΤΟΡΙΩΝ Τ'

ξυμμετρεῖσθαι 20, ὃ
ξυμμέτρησιν λαμβάνειν 20, 4
ξὺν κακῶς ποιεῖν 18,1
ξυνέπεσθαι 37, 5

Evvodos 82, 6

ξυνοικίαι at Corcyra 74, 2
ξυνοικίζειν 2, 33 93, 1
ξυντυχία 45, 4

ξυντυχών, ὁ, 59, 3

O

ὁ particularizing 4, 2; τὸ μὴ
after verb of hindering 1, 2;
τὸ Kad’ ἡμέραν 82, 2; ᾧ or ὅ
44, ὃ

ὁ δέ not of new subject 98, 1

ὅδε and otros 45, 4

οἰκιστής 34, 4

οἰκοδόμησις 21, 1

ὁλκός 15, 1

ὅμαιχμος 58, 4

ὅμιλος 1, 2

ὁμοβώμιος 59, 2

ὁμοῖος 40, 3;
40, 3

ὅμως 28, 2; 49, 1

ὀξέως, Meaning of, 38, 6

ὅπλα-εστρατόπεδον 1, 2

ὁπότε, ὅτε 97, 3

ὀργή 45, 1

ὀρθοῦσθαι, ‘ prosper,’ 37, 4

ὄρθρος 112, 1

ὅρκοι ξυναλλαγῆς 82, 7

ὅρκον διδόναι 82, 7

ὅσον, as far as, 11, 3 ;°*=WoTe
49, 4

ὅστις 45, 7

ὅσῳ, ἐν, 28, 1

ὅτι with super]. 46, 1

οὐ 36, 4; 42, 2 :

οὖν after parenthesis 95, 1

οὔτε, order of, 96, 3

OUTE A TEeISs ὁ

66, 2; ὁμοίως

| ὀφθέν, τό, 38, 4

ὄψις 112, 4

GREEK

πάθος 84, 1;

πανδημεί δ, 2

πανοικεσίᾳ 57, 2

παντάπασιν, τό, 87, 1

παρὰ δόξαν 37, 5

παρὰ σφᾶς παραγίγνεσθαι 3, 4

παρὰ τοσοῦτον ἐλθεῖν 49, 4

παραβαίνεσθαι 45, 3

παραβάλλειν intrans. 32, 3

παραβάλλεσθαι 14, 1

παράδειγμα 10, 6; 39, 3

παρείκει 1, 2

παρέχειν 33, 3

πείθειν, ποιεῖν 9, 2

πέλαγος 4, 6

πενία personified 45, 4

περαιτέρω 81, 5

περὶ ἸΤελοπόννησον 3, 2; 7, 1

περίνοια 43, 3

περίοικοι, Laconian, 92, 5.

περιορμίζεσθαι 6, 1

περιτείχισις 94, 2

πιστὰ παρέχεσθαι 90, 4

πίστις 12, 1

πλεῖστον ΜΕΤΕΧΕΙΆ 83, 1

πληγῆναι 18,

πλίνθος, ἜΝ 20, 4

πλῷ χρῆσθαι 3, 5

ποιεῖσθαι, passive, 77, 1

πολεμίως, πολεμίους 65, 3

πολεμοῦν 82, 1

πολιορκεῖσθαι, ‘endure a siege,’
52, 1; 109, 1

πόλις, ‘rights asa citizen,’ 39, 6

πολύτροπος 83, 3

πολυψηφία 10, 5

πρὶν δή 29, 1

προβάλλεσθαι 63, 2

προεπαινεῖν 38, 6

πρόξενος 2, 3

πρός with gen. 21, 1

πρὸς χάριν 42, 6;
43, 5

προσάγεσθαι 48, 1

113, 2

πρὸς ὀργήν

INDEX 221

προσκοπεῖν, προσσκοπεῖν 57, 1

προσξυνελάβοντο, προσξυνεβά-
Aero 36, 2

προστάται at Corcyra 75, 2

προστάττειν 26, 1

προστιθέναι 45, 1; 92, 2

προστιθέναι, προτιθέναι 82, 8

πυνθάνεσθαι, double constr.
with, 80, 2

Σ

σκέψασθε 39, 7

στατήρ, Corcyrean, 70, 4

σφᾶς as direct reflex. 7, 1

σῶμα and γνώμη 65, 3

σωφρονιστής 65, 3

σώφρων in politics 42, 2; 43,
δ; 62,3; 82, 8

Π

τάξεις, αἱ, 87, 3

τε 45, 6

Te... 6€ 52, 1

TE a TESS 1 4

τεκμήριον 66, 1

τελευτᾶν with gen. 59, 3

τιμωρία 20, 1

τίνα οἴεσθε ὅντινα οὐ 39, 7

τις 36, 4; τι with compar.
adv. 43, 4

τότε 57, 3

τρίπους 57, 2

τυγχάνειν with pas 36,513
6230) 111,-2

τυραννίς, of Ἢ πες power,
$7; 2

τύχη 45, 5

ὑπεξελθεῖν 34, 2
ὑπεύθυνος 43, 4

222 BOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

ὑποδέχεσθαι 12, 1 x
ὑστεραίᾳ, TH, 91, 5
ὑστερεῖν 31, 2 χάρακες in Corcyra 70, ὃ

χάριν φέρειν 53, 4
xelpous, political sense, 65, 3
χωρίον 74, 1

χῶσις 2, 2
φθάνειν 82, 7 Q
φθάνωσι, φθάσωσι 83, 3
φιλίως, φιλίους 65, 3 ὥς 51: ὃ
φονεύειν 81, 4 ὡς εἰπεῖν 39, 4; 82, 1
φόρος 31, 1 ws ἑκάτεροι 74, 3

φυρᾶν and φύρειν 49, 3 ὥσπερ ἔχομεν 30, 1

ENGLISH INDEX

A

Acarnanians 114, 2

accusative ‘in appos. to sen-
tence’ 89, 5; 111, 1; ad-
verbial 54, 3; absolute 53,
2; anticipatory 14, 1; in-
ternal accus. attracted 37,

2; accus. depending on a)

phrase equivalent to a trans.
verb 52, 2
Achelous 106, 1
adjective and adverb co-ordin-
ated 82, 2
adverb, position of, 40, 7
Aegina tributary 64, 3
Aegitinm 97, 2
Aeolis, new and old, 102, 5
Aeolus, islands of, 88, 1
Aetolia, new and old, 94, 5
Agraea 106, 2
Alcinous, harbour of, at Cor-
cyra 70, 4
ambiguity, intentional, 42, δ΄
Ambraciots 102, 6; 114, 2
Amphilochia 102, 6 ; 107, 1
anacoluthon 23, 1; 26, 2; 34,
313136, :2\> 62,25 : 66,2
Anactorium 94, 2; 114, 3
Androcrates, shrine of, 24, 1
antithesis 43, 1; 69, 2 ;'82, 8

| aorist

partic. anticipating
future ; as pluperf. 33, 1;
85, 2; ingressive 3, 1

Apodotia 96, 2

Apollo 104, 2, 4

Arcadian mercenaries 34, 2

Argos, Amphilochian, 105, 1

article not repeated 46, 3; 82,
1; article and partic. 53, 3

asyndeton 13, 1

Atalanta, island, 89, 3

Athens and her allies 37, 2;
46, 2; fleet of 13, 4

Attica, invasion of, 1,2; 26, 2

attraction 67, 7 ; 104, 2

B

Boeotia, roads leading to, 24,
1; designs of Demosthenes
on, 95, 1

Boeotian League 65, 1

Brasidas 92, 4

C
Calydon 102, 5

Camarina 86, 2
Catana 116, 1

223

224

Cephallenia 94, 1

chiastic order 39, 2

Cithaeron 24, 1

Oleon? 36;°6 =. 37, 7. 8381 1.2%
39, 4; 40, 3, 4; 42, 2;
vague language in speech of
37, 3; 39, 3; complicated
argument in speech of 40, 4

Colophon 34, 1

comparative 42, 3

condition, form of, 40, 4

conflation of two expressions
12, 1; 23,5

construction broken 68,
two combined 52, 2;
sensum 2, 1; 82, 1

Coreyran70; 125075500385.

Crenae, site of, 105, 1

Cytinium 95, 1

1;
ad

D

dative, temporal, 54, 4; of
agent 64, 4; doubtful use

ἢ» 85: ΤΊ with; ‘verb: of,
motion 5, 4
Delos 104, 1; the Delian

festival 104, 2

Delphi 57, 2

Demosthenes 91, 1; 95, 1; 97,
27 ὅ8:. δὴ» 1065-35) 10 Ts
114, 1

Dionysius of Halicarnassus 82,
3, 4

Dorieus, the Olympic victor,
8, 1

E

Ecclesia, debates in the, 36, 5

emphasis secured by order of
words 37, 2; 56, 1

epexegesis 25, 2

Ktna, eruptions of, 116, 2

OOYKYAIAOY ISTOPION Tf

Euripides 37, 3
Eurymedon, general, 80, 2

F

jigura etymologica 18, 1
future and present forms con-
fused 28, 1

G

genitive of definition 45, 1;
partitive 22, 5; 52, 5; 65,
3; with ἀγών 49, 1; gen.
absolute 18, 7; 22, 1; 45,
3; 53, 2

Gorgias 86, 3

H

Heraclea 92, 1

Heraeum at Plataea 68, 3;
at Corcyra 75, 5

Hesiod, death of, 96, 2

Hiera 88, 3

Hipponicus 91, 4

hoplites, pay of, 17, 4; number
of, 87,9

Hyllaic harbour at Corcyra
72, 3

I

Idomene 112, 1

illogical sentence 47, 5

Inbros 5, 1

imperfect 24, 9

incoherence, intentional, 53, 1

indicative in oratio obliqua
115:.Ὁ

infinitive without article 38, 1

irony 115, 4

Italy 86, 2

ὌΝ ee eee

ENGLISH INDEX

Laches 86, 1
Leontini 86, 3
Lesbos 2, 1
Leucas 94, 1
Lysicles 19, 1

M

Malea 4, 5

Melos 91, 2

Messena 90, 1, 4

Messenians at Naupactus 94,
3; 112, 4

Methymna 2, 7

middle reciprocal, 50, 1

Minoa 51, 4

Mytilene 2, 3; 13, 2

N

Naupactus 75, 1

neuter plural 21, 2; neut. sing.
collective, 47, 4

Nicias 51, 1

Niké, commemorative statues
of, 114, 1

Notium 34, 1

Oo

Object, constr. of the, 28, 3;
105, 4

obscurity of narrative 100, 1

Oeneon 95, 3

Oenophyta, battle of, 62, 5

Olpae 105, 1

Ophionea 96, 2

optative in maxims 9, 2; by
assimilation 9, 2; in pur-
pose 22, 8; in oratio obliqua
113, 3

225

orators, historical references
in the, 10, 2

order of words 52, 3; 91, 3

Oropus 91, 3

Ρ

parallelism of clauses 57, 4
participle, attributive, position
of, 54, 5; emphatic 36, 2;
88, 1; 53,3; 56,7; present
2, 2; present of time abso-
lute 82, 2; imperfect 76,
1; future with art. 83, 2;
and finite verb 36, 2; 81, 4;
82, 1; 105, 1; in apposition
to neut. pronoun 18, 3;
article and partic. as sub-
stantive 40, 5
participles co-ordinate 58, 3;
accumulation of, 3,5; 53, 1
Pericles, Introd. pp. xxiii, xxxii
Phocians 95, 1
Phormis 78, 2
Plataea 20, 1; 22,1; 55,1, 3;
58, 5; 65, 1
leonasm 100, 1
leuron 102, 5
plural verb after sing. subject
and μετά 109, 2
Potidaea 17, 3; 20, 1
Potidania 96, 2
preposition omitted 21, 3; 56,
5; 59, 2
present of intention 18, 1:
combined with future 58, 5;
92, 4
pronoun,
of, 4, 6
Proschium 102, 5

uncertain reference

R

ransom 70, 1

226

relative not repeated 51, 1;
55, 3 Ξ
Rheneia 104, 2

5
Sacrifices, commemorative, 58,

Sicily, Athenian intervention
in, 86, 1

singular, change to plural from,
42, 4

Sophists 38, 7

Sparta, intentions of, 52, 1;
behaviour of, 32, 2

Strongyle 88, 3

OOYKYAIAOY IZTOPION T

subject modified 53, 4; in
emphatic position 56, 1;
divided 23, 1; order of, 4, 1

substantives, verbal, 76, 1

Sybota 70, 1

Syracuse 86, 3

T
Thebes, constitution of, 62, 3
tragic style 36, 4

Z
Zacynthus 94, 1

THE END

Printed by R. & R. Ciark, Limitep, Edinburgh.

MACMILLAN’S CLASSICAL SERIES FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS.

Feap. 8vo.

AESCHINES.—IN CTESIPHONTA. By Rev. T. Gwarxin, M.A., and E. 5.
ΒΗ ΌΚΒΌΒΟΗ, M.A. 6s.
AESCHYLUS.—PERSAE. By A. O. Prickarp, M.A. With Map. 8s. .

SEVEN AGAINST THEBES. School Edition. By A. W. Verratt, Litt.D.,
and M. A. BayFreLtp, M.A. 88.

PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. By E. E. Sixes, M.A., and Sr. J. B. Wynne
WiLison, M.A. 85.

ARISTOPHANES.—THE WASPS. By W. J. M. Srarxre, M.A. 7s.

THE FROGS. By T. G. Tucker, Litt.D. 4s,

ATTIC ORATORS.—SELECTIONS FROM. By Sir R. C. Jess, Litt.D. 6s.

CAESAR.—THE GALLIC WAR. By Rev. JoHn Bonn, M.A., and Rev. A. S.
Wapo.e, M.A. With Maps. 5s.

CATULLUS.—SELECT POEMS. By F. P. Simpson, B.A. 4s. The Text of this
Edition is carefully expurgated for School use.

CICERO.—THE CATILINE ORATIONS. By A. 8. Witx1ns, Litt.D. 88.

PRO LEGE MANILIA. By A.S. Wivkins, Litt.D. 3s.

THE SECOND PHILIPPIC ORATION. ByJ.E. B. Mayor, M.A. 4s,

PRO ROSCIO AMERINO. By E. H. Donkin, M.A. 88.

PRO P. SESTIO. By Rev. H. A. a ee Litt.D. 4s,

PRO MILONE. By F. H. Corson, M.A. 85.

PRO MURENA. By J. H. FREESE, M.A. 3s.

SELECT LETTERS. By R. Y. ΤΎΒΒΕΙ, M.A. _ 5s.

THE FOURTH VERRINE ORATION. By F. W. Haut, M.A. 4s,

PRO PLANCIO. By H. W. AuprEn, M.A. 4s.

PRO CLUENTIO. By W. Pererson, Litt.D.. 4s.

DEMOSTHENES.—DE CORONA. By B. Drake, M.A. Seventh Edition revised
by Εἰ. 8. ShucksurGH, M.A. 4s.

ADVERSUS LEPTINEM. By Rev. J. R. Kine, M.A. 8s.

THE FIRST PHILIPPIC. By Rev. T. Gwarxin, M.A. 88.

PHILIPPIC I. AND OLYNTHIACS LI.-III. By Sir J. E. Sanpys, Litt.D. 65.

THE PEACE, PHILIPPIC II., THE GHERSONESUS, AND PHILIPPIC Ill.
By Sir J. ΓᾺ Sanpys, Litt.D. 6s.

EURIPIDES.—ALCESTIS. By M. L. Hartz, Ph.D. 4s.

BACCHAH. By R. Y. Tyrrett, M.A. 4s.

HIPPOLYTUS. By Prof. J. P. Manarry, D.D., and J. B. Bury, M.A. 3s.

ION. By M. A. BayFietp, M.A. 88.

IPHIGENIA IN TAURIS. By Εἰ. B. Enatanp, Litt.D. 48.

MEDEA. By A. W. VerrRat.t, Litt.D. 3s.

TROADES. By R. Y. ΤΎΒΒΕΙΙ, LL.D. 88.

ANDROMACHE. By A. R. F. Hystop, M.A. 88.

GREEK MELIC POETS.—_SELECTIONS FROM. By Prof. H. W. Smyrx. 88. 6d
HERODOTUS.—BOOK III. By G. C. Macautay, M.A. 88.

BOOK VI. By Prof. J. Srracuan, M.A. 4s.

BOOK VII. By Mrs. Montacu BurTuer. 4s.

HOMER.—ILIAD. Edited by W. Lear, Litt.D., and Rev. M. A, BAYFIELD, M.A.
Books I.-XII. 7s. Books XIII.-XXIV. 7s.

ILIAD. Books ΤΟΥΣ, XI., XVI. -XXIV. THE STORY OF ACHILLES. By
the late J. H. Prarr, M. aS and WALTER Lear, Litt.D., Fellows of Trinity
College, Cambridge. 6s. Book IX. separately. 2s. 6d.

ODYSSEY. BOOKS XXI.-XXIV. THE TRIUMPH OF ODYSSEUS. By
8. G. Hamitton, M.A., Fellow of Hertford College, Oxford. 88.

HORACE.—THE ODES AND EPODES. By T. E. Paar, M.A. 6s. (BOOKSLI.,
II., ΠΙ., 1V., and EPODES separately, 2s. 6d. each.)
THE SATIRES. By Prof. ARTHUR PALMER, M.A. 65.
THE EPISTLES AND ARS PORTICA. By Prof. A. 5, Wiik1ns, Litt.D. 6s.
JUVENAL.—THIRTEEN SATIRES. By Εἰ. G. Harpy, M.A. 6s. The Text is
carefully expurgated for School use.
SELECT SATIRES. By Prof. Joun E. B. Mayor. XII.-XVI. 5s,
LIVY.—BOOKS II. and III. By Rev. H. M. SrepHenson, M.A. 4s.
BOOKS XXI. and XXII. By Rev. W. W. Cares, M.A. With Maps. 6s.
BOOKS XXIII. and XXIV. By G. C0. Macaunay, M.A. With Maps. 48. _

MACMILLAN AND CO., Lrp., LONDON.

MACMILLAN’S CLASSICAL SERIES FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS.

Feap. 8vo.

LIVY.—THE LAST TWO KINGS OF MACEDON. EXTRACTS FROM THE
FOURTH AND FIFTH DECADES OF LIVY. By F. H. Rawttns, M.A.,
Assistant Master at Eton. With Maps. 3s.
LUCRETIUS.—BOOKS L.-III. By J. H. Warsurton LEE, M.A. 48.
LYSIAS.—SELECT ORATIONS. By E. 5. Saucksureu, M.A. 6s.
MARTIAL.—SELECT EPIGRAMS. By Rev. H. M. StepHenson, M.A. 6s.
OVID.—FASTI. By G. H. Hatiam, M.A. 4s,
HEROIDUM EPISTULAE XIII. By Εἰ. 5. SHucksures, M.A. 4s.
METAMORPHOSES. BOOK VIII. By Professor C. H. Κεενε, M.A. 2s, 6d.
METAMORPHOSES. BOOKS XIII. and XIV. By C. Simmons, M.A. 4s.
METAMORPHOSES. BOOKS I.-III. By the same Editor. [In the Press.
PLATO.—LACHES. By M. T. Taruam, M.A. 85.
THE REPUBLIC. BOOKSI.-V. By T. H. Warren, M.A. 6s.
CRITO AND PHAEDO (Chaps. 57 to fay By C. H. Krenz, M.A. 3s.
MENO. By ΕἸ. 8. THompeson, Litt.D. 6s.
SELECTIONS. By Dr. L. L. Forman. 88. 6d.
PHAEDO. By H. Wivuiamson, M.A. 4s.
APOLOGY OF SOCRATES. By thesame. 8s.

PLAUTUS.—MILES GLORIOSUS. By ΕΒ. Y. TyRRELL, M.A. 2nd Ed., revised. 4s.
AMPHITRUO. By Professor ARTHUR PALMER, M.A. 4s.
CAPTIVI. By A. R. S. Hauiipig, M.A. 4s.

PLINY.—LETTERS. BOOKSI. and II. By J. Cowan, M.A. 8s. 6d.
LETTERS. BOOK III. By Professor Jonn E. B. Mayor. 4s.
SELECTED LETTERS. By Prof. E. T. MERRILL. 7s.

PLUTARCH.—LIFE OF THEMISTOKLES. By Rev. H. A. Houpen, Litt.D. 4s.
LIVES OF GALBA AND OTHO. By Ἕ. α. Harpy, M.A. 6s.

LIFE OF PERICLES. By Rev. H. A. Hotpen, Litt.D. 5s.
POLYBIUS.—THE HISTORY OF THE ACHAEAN LEAGUE AS CONTAINED
IN THE REMAINS OF POLYBIUS. By Rev. W. W. Capes, M.A. 68.
PROPERTIUS.—SELECT POEMS. By Prof. J. P. Posruate, Litt.D. 2nd Ed. 6s.
SALLUST.—CATILINA anp JUGURTHA. By C. Merivate, D.D., Dean of

Ely. 4s. Orseparately. 2s. 6d. each.

BELLUM CATULINAK. By A. M. Coox, M.A. 85.
SENECA.—SELECT LETTERS. By Prof. W. C. Summers, M.A. 6s.
SOPHOCLES.—THE ELECTRA. By Rev. M. A. BAYFIELD, M.A. 85.

THE ANTIGONE. By the same. 8s.

TACITUS —THE Ae aE BOOK VI. By A. J. Cnurcu, M.A., and W. J.
Bropriss, M.A. Qs. 6

THE HISTORIES. BOOKS I.and II. By A. Ὁ. Gopuey, M.A. 4s.

— BOOKSIII.-V. By thesame. 4s.

AGRICOLA anp GERMANIA. By A. J. Courca, M.A., and W. J. BRopRIBB,

M.A. 4s. Orseparately. 2s. 6d. each

TERENCE.—ADELPHOE. By Prof. 8. G. ASHMORE. 4s.

HAVTON TIMORVMENOS. By E. 8. SHucksureH, M.A. 8s. With Transla-

tion. 4s.

PHORMIO. By Rev. JoHn Bonn, M.A., and Rey. A. 8. WALPOLE, M.A. 38s.

THUCYDIDES. BOOK L., BOOK Ic: BOOK III. By E. C. Marcuant, M.A.
4s. each,

BOOK IV., BOOK V. By 0. E. Graves, M.A. 4s. each.

BOOKS Vi. and VII. By Rev. Percrvau Frost, M.A. With Map. 4s.

BOOK VI., BOOK VII. By E. C. Marcuant, M.A. 4s. each.

BOOK VIII. By Prof. T. G. Tucker, Litt.D. 4s.

TIBULLUS.—SELECT POEMS. By Prof. J. P. PostaaTe. 6s.

VIRGIL.—AENEID, BOOKS II. and III. By E. W. Howson, M.A. 2s. 6d.

AENEID. BOOKSI.-VI. By T. E. Pacr, M.A. 6s.

— BOOKS VII.-XII. By the same Editor. 6s. Β

BUCOLICS AND GEORGICS. By Τ. E. Pace, M.A. ὅ8.

XENOPHON.—THE ANABASIS. BOOKS I.-IV. By Profs. W. W. Goopwin
and J. W. Waite. With Map. 4s.

HELLENICA.- BOOKS I. and II. By H. Hatrsrong, B.A. With Map. 3s.
CYROPAEDIA. BOOKS VII. and VIII. By A. Goopwin, M.A. 8s.
MEMORABILIA SOCRATIS. By A. R. CLurr, B.A. 68.

HIERO. By Rev. H. A. Houpen, Litt.D., LL.D. 3s.

OECONOMICUS. By Rev. H. A. Hotpen. With Lexicon. 6s.

MACMILLAN AND CO., Lrp., LONDON.

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

Los Angeles

This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.

΄-

ἢ Nov 3 1986

OL ppp 06198/

“A 3

REC'D του

JAN 11 1988

——

UNIVERSITY UF CALIFORNIA

LIBRARY,
LOS ANGELES, CALIF.

ΣΡ ea sbi tetey

ΜΕ ΠΕ ΤΣ
ΤΗΣ
τῇ ἀπῇ ΠΊΠΤΩΝ

τ
+
᾿

Β ἮΝ

Ἢ

τ
Ἢ

ἷ
Haine

4 + δ τὶ trist oye ee!
ati ‘ * ttt ; bee ee
: ἯΙ a bettr pheethe
ὃ ἐμ i

iin